Miriam book

MIRIAM’S Correcting the failures of her brother, Moses The Israeli

EXODUS From Egypt. © 2006

Oswald (Ossie) Brunner DipTh. AEd. BA.

This work is copyright to Oswald Walter Brunner Dipth. AEd, BA. 2006.

Any copying of any part thereof without formal acknowledgement is illegal and will be pursued accordingly.

Although it may be described as fiction, in that many statements and situations are not backed by any hard evidence, events depicted could have been very real. Some of it certainly comes from imagining situations in an attempt to reveal what most likely did happen at that time. There is no evidence that the record in Genesis is accurate as the book was written by Jews to convince the Jews that they are God’s Chosen People. It may thus be expected to be a stylized version.

National Library of Australia Cataloguing-in-publication data.

Oswald W. Brunner ISBN 0-646-46416-7

MIRIAM’S EXODUS INDEX Page 1

Chapter I

Surprise Attack

Page 19

Chapter II

New Regime

Page 21

Chapter III

Cracks in Ahmose’s Authority

Page 48

Chapter IV

Moses and Miriam

Page 71

Chapter V

Miriam and Heotept

Page 89

Chapter VI

Miriam’s Ambition Takes Root

Page 92

Chapter VII

Moses to the Palace

Page 111

Chapter VI

Moses’ First Step to Power

Page 142

Chapter IX

Nefertari is Disappointed

Page 169

Chapter X

Nefertari’s Decision

Page 175

Chapter XI

Moses Rules as Thutmose I

Page 194

Chapter XII

Downfall of Thutmose I

Page 216

Chapter XIII

Hurried Flight

Page 232

Chapter XIV

The Succession

Page 235

Chapter XV

Moses in Exile

Page 252

Chapter XVI

The Return to Egypt

Page 269

Chapter XVII

The Exodus In Motion

Page 202

Chapter XVIII

Moses Finds His Feet

Page 326

Chapter XIX

The King Refuses to Act.

Page 343

Chapter XX

Mass Movement

Page 354

Chapter XXI

On the Home Stretch

MIRIAM’S EXODUS INTRODUCTION

A royal Prince or king in ancient times who ran because he had inadvertently slain an overseer of slaves could rightly be dubbed as a wimp.

This is exactly what the ‘hero’ Moses is reputed to have done.

He manifested his violent and unreasoning temper by flogging unmercifully an overseer of Israeli slaves in the service of the king of Lower Egypt at that time. He was at the very least a Prince of the ruling house. In fact research indicates that he was actually the king himself at that time. For even a prince to run away from any possible implications of this action was the reaction of an abject coward. As king it was unbelievable so the tale could well be an ‘urban myth’ written to cover up something for more sinister that he had actually done.

This tale indicates what that heinous could really have been, to cause a wimpy king to run away and hide.

Moses’ older brother Aaron was not subjected to the law that risked the life of the baby Moses.

Moses life was saved by the timely action of his older sister.

Her name is revealed in the records as Miriam. To organize and carry out the rescue operation she had to be about twelve years of age.

The dating of this event is open to speculation and depends on the criteria used to establish it. The genealogy of Egyptian kings in the 16th century BCE points to a king, second form the conquest of the Hicksos by Kamose as ‘not of royal lineage’ and his successor as ‘illegitimate.’ There is no such succession in the time of Ramses the Great nor is there any indication of the foreigners being driven out at that time in Egyptian history.

There is evidence that the terms Hicksos and Heqa-Kasut refer to the same people and indications are that the Hebrews were a part of this migration and occupation of Egypt in the 16th and 17th centuries BCE, one of the many tribes of Semites who occupied the country for almost three centuries.

Jewish history is notoriously slanted to show them as much more powerful and significant than they actually were. Thus the details are open to considerable conjecture as to the realities of any given events or series of events.

In this work I have endeavoured to strip the accepted story of the romance of the Jewish record and show it as it really could have happened given the culture of the times.

Ossie Brunner DipTh. AEd. BA.

PROLOGUE It had been a very busy, hectic, but a wholly joyful day in the life of Miriam, daughter of Amram bar Kohath of the tribe of Levi, one of the sons of Jacob, the favoured of the Lord. The day was a day of remembrance being the same day of the month that had seen Miriam’s emergence as a new born babe. The first born child of Amram and his wife Jochabed. That was ten years before as the Egyptians reckoned time.

The whole extended family had been at the celebrations for the festival was not only to acknowledge a birthday but to usher this young person onto the threshold of life. Although not yet a woman, she was, at ten household performing the tasks allotted to her ever y day and in not too many years a wife and mother.

On this auspicious occasion he uncle Uzziel, her father’s youngest brother gave her, as his present, a diary scroll. The rollers were of highly polished cedar wood with gold pins inlaid at the ends. The scroll itself was of the finest papyrus. With it she was given brushes and ink for writing down her reflections of each day. In the Egypt of those times it was not unusual for a well bred woman to be able to read and write. Her father was a prominent citizen of hi people. He owned a number of brick yards and employed quite a large number of labourers.

Ever since their ancestor Jospeh had been appointed Grand Vizier of Egypt by a grateful king his descendents had ruled Lower Egypt. As their power and influence increased in the royal circles of that time the rightful kingly dynasty had moved its capital to Thebes, a thousand miles up the river. The ensuing political vacuum was taken up by the descendents of Joseph who established their dynasty in Memphis, the vacated capital city, on the left bank of Mother Nile, within sight and shadow of the Pyramid tombs of the ancient kings.

Miriam’s birthday was celebrated in the 247th year of this usurpation of Lower Egypt by the people known to some historians as the Hyksos and to the Egyptians as the Heqa Kasut. The usurpation was gradual and insidious.

Over several generations a number of Semetic tribes, the Israelis among them, infiltrated the region from their native lands to the North and East.

They brought with them their customs and culture. They taught the Egyptians to ride horses and to use the bow and arrow. They, in their turn,

learned, in two centuries, to live as had the Egyptians for millennia and learned to enjoy the benefits of civilized living.

When the legitimate rulers could no longer abide the encroachment of the these newcomers into their power base they did not drive them off but retired to the city of Thebes which was closer to their growing empire in the Upper Nile. Here with Middle African hinterland they greatly prospered and continued to develop their great civilization.

Meanwhile, back in Memphis the Heqa Kasut, as we shall call them from now on, continued with the civilization taught them by the Egyptians and followed their example by ruling wisely and well for two centuries.

However, they did not reject their ancestral culture in that the basic economy of Lower Egypt became predominately pastoral under the Semites. When they infiltrated the country they brought their vast flocks of sheep and goats and herds of cattle and camels with them. The Valley of the Nile being long since fully occupied with agricultural activities the Semitic presence, confined mostly to the Delta, did not interfere with the time honoured Egyptian agriculture and thus these immigrants were able to become a part of the Egyptian scene without a noticeable change to the lifestyle of the established inhabitants.

This transition was an evolvement that took place over a generation or two under its own momentum. Friction between the two Egypts did develop over the centuries as the Heqa Kasut rulers consolidated their power over the region. For many generations the Egyptians, having no native hardwood, had imported cedar from Lebanon, quality hides from Mesopotamia and silverware from India among many other items of value to an affluent civilization. When the kingdom moved its base to Thebes the desire for the good things of life went with them. However, these goods must be transshipped through Lower Egypt. Human nature being what it is the occupiers of this region did as would be expected and imposed transit tolls on all traders using the Nile as a trading route. This did not go down well with the residents of Upper Egypt but they tolerated the situation for many years. Also, according to the record. the concept of loans on interest and/or tax on production was the brainchild of Jospeh (See Genesis 47:2426) who set the rate at 20%, a figure today considered to be usurious.

By the time that Miriam was growing up in Memphis the tolls had become irksome to the People of Upper Egypt. Governments being what they are and ever have been, the taxation figure was not reduced, neither were the tolls which were, more than likely, escalated whenever the government of Lower Egypt needed to increase it revenue base. Further to that these kings

had become very arrogant toward the people of the South. The story is that Apopos, king in Memphis sent a message to Kamose, king in Thebes telling him to keep his hippopotami quiet when they were cavorting in their pool as the noise that they were making was disturbing his sleep.

This was the last straw to Kamose. He determined, from then on, that he would put a stop to this arrogance and restore the Glory that had been Egypt. He had recently completed several successful campaigns in Nubia.

Taken much booty and many slaves, also had tamed these people to be a client nation and assured himself of no hostilities in his rear when he eventually moved against the North.

While preparing for his drive against the Heqa Kasut he continued to allow trade with them. Naturally, the revenue would go toward the cost of his planned military actions, In her diary Miriam records journey toward Thebes on a trading trip by her uncle Hebron. As a Birthday gift in acknowledgement of her growing maturity he invited her to accompany him and his team on this journey, right to Thebes, if time and business allowed. Her mother was reluctant to give her blessing to the trip but realizing that her daughter would soon be a woman relented and Miriam joined Hebron and his assistant, on this expected routine trading venture.

Day one of our Great Journey:“Today, as we left our home jetty, the weather was the usual perfect weather of Egypt. Warm sunshine, a gentle breeze blowing from the North to help us up the river and the muttering of the various small animals and birds doing whatever it is that they do among the papyrus reads that line the banks. My young sister Rachel is with us for our mother insisted that I not go alone, and who better to be with than Rachel? “We are in a flotilla of three boats, my uncle, my sister and I in the lead boat and the trading staff and most of the goods in the other two. Rachel and I really enjoyed watching the river, the people on the banks and the boats going up and down. Boats going up t he river had their sails hoisted, as ours were, to help the rowers as they worked against the current. In those going downstream the rowers had t heir oars inboard and the helmsman was working hard to keep the bow heading in the right direction.

Some boats, going downstream, had the rowers working as well as using the current take the boat along. They were going at a great speed.

Mother probably does not know that I watched her watching us till we could se her no longer. She does care so much for us and is very concerned that we return safely.

Day Two:“This evening we pulled into a jetty on the west bank. As we approached the piles holding it up they appeared to me to be very rickety. I wondered if they would hold the boat from being snatched away by the current and taking the piles with it. Our boat came in first. As we neared the jetty the rowers pulled in their oars so that only the sails we holding us against the current. When the bow of the boat was level with the upstream end of the jetty the sail was quickly lowered and a crewman at the bow threw a rope to a man on the jetty. He grabbed it and tied it to a shaky looking post, but it held fast. The current pushed the boat against the side of the jetty and a rope was thrown from the stern. This was tied to another unsteady looking post but it, too, held and thus the boat was safe for the night. The other two boats pulled in behind us where we will all be safe, I hope, for tomorrow for our trading in this village. By the time that we had finished mooring the boats a crowd of villagers had gathered to watch the operation. Behind them we could see the cluster of adobe buildings that made up this settlement.

Uncle Hebron stepped over the gunwale on to t he decking of the jetty and headed for an important looking person at the front of the crowd. He greeted this person as an old friend and said to him. “Motef, my good friend, A year ago my partner and I came among you with wonderful ;works of art from the great city of Memphis, where the streets are not paved with gold, as you may have been led to believe. There my people work day and night to produce those beautiful adornments that so many of you found delightful last year. I have with me today many choice items of silk, spices and ointments from far away exotic places, far across the Great Oceans and mighty mountains, brought to you at great expense and labour.

All this without costing you an arm and a leg. My friend, we have traveled these two days from Memphis just for you. I trust that my agent has called to get your permission to open a market tomorrow in your village square for a few days?”

“He certainly has, Oh Hebron. He left here three days ago. Apart form the sales pitch we do appreciate your coming but I am afraid that we must charge you a little more for the rental of the space than we did last time.

You know how it is. Costs are rising all the time.” This with a shrug of the shoulders, indicating his helplessness in the face of time and circumstances.

We are not a wealthy community so I cannot guarantee any great success to your venture among us.”

“My heart bleeds for you, indeed, my old friend.” Replied Uncle Hebron.

Per haps we should take ourselves elsewhere at this time. I do not want to be the cause of worry to you. If you can not afford to buy then we can not afford to rent space from you. Simple isn’t it?”

‘Now that you have stopped, do not rush hastily away. Stay. Perhaps my people will be able to reach into their hidden stores, as they all have, you know why, and make it worth your while to remain for three days among us.” :Perhaps. Since times seem a little on the down side it may be better to be two days.”

“No. Make it three. If your third day is a dud then we will not charge you rent for that day. Is it a deal?”

Each man put his right hand on the left shoulder of the other to seal the bargain. “Could I have four strong men to assist in the unloading early tomorrow morning?” Asked Uncle Hebron.

“That will be arranged.”

The people then dispersed and we settled down to rest for the night I expect that we have a busy three days ahead of us.

Day Three:Early this morning the four helpers from the village came soon after sun up and helped us to carry our parcels to the market place allotted to us for the next few days. It was not the goods themselves that were heavy but the material for setting up the stalls in the market place.

When we arrived some of the villagers had taken places to see what was going on. Two stalls were set up. Uncle Hebron was on one and his assistant on the other. Rachel and I spent our time with one or the other as the day went past. Everyone who came to buy wanted to bargain.

Whatever price was asked for any item the buyer offered less and kept offering less until Uncle Hebron and put a stop to the haggling and the buyer either bought at that price or walked away. Very few walked away.

The loads that we returned to the boats with were considerably lighter than when we set out this morning.

Day Six. So each day at this village was full of activity. We were quite tired when the third day, yesterday, came to an end and we cast off and sailed further up the river. I asked Uncle Hebron why we sail close to the bank as we go up the river. He said. “See the boats going down stream. How fast are they moving?”

“Much faster than we are.”

“Yes, that is so. That is why we sail close to the bank where the current is less swift as the water is held back by the friction with the banks. It is easier to row and sail against it that way. When we return we will come down with the swifter current in the middle of the river. You see some of those boats veering off toward the shore?”

“Yes.” “Well. When we wish to go to a village or town on the other side we will turn toward the centre of the river and keeping the bows of t he boats slightly up river the current against the hull will enable us to get across without too much effort. Then further along we do that again to cross t he river again. Coming home we will be going straight down the centre to make a quick trip home. With the money and goods we will have accumulated we will want to get back home as safely as possible.”

“Thank you, Uncle Hebron.”

So I was informed of the way to navigate a river.

The time at this village was not spent entirely on selling. Hebron also bought local products for sale in the big cities of the delta. He was a canny trader and had amassed a considerable fortune over his lifetime, so far. He was not to know that in a few short years it would be taken from him, at least what could be found by the invaders of his land.

From this point the little flotilla of boats traveled upstream of Mother Nile, servicing villages, both small and large and towns along the way. Some villages had no jetty at which to tie up to, but here the banks were low enough to run the bows onto the shelving sandy beaches and access the land across wide planks laid from the bulwarks to the shore.

Two weeks of this and they came to Heraklion, on the northern side of t he border between Lower, the domain of the Heqa Kasut and Upper Egypt, the

realm of Kamose. This was a fortified city garrisoned to prevent an invasion from the South. Many centuries later, when all of Egypt came under the heel of Alexander of Macedonia Heraklion was renamed Heliopolos. The administration centre for the city was actually in Lower Egypt, but as its population grew, many of its citizens living beyond the walls were actually in Upper Egypt.

Here, Hebron and his partner Prophis had their best trading up to this point although ht hey felt that the reception that they received was rather cooler than in past times. During the next two days journey further into Upper Egypt they felt unwelcome. The Village chiefs greeted them politely but with great reserve. Hebron felt so unwelcome that he thought of turning immediately and returning home. He was responsible for his two young nieces and his promise to keep them safe from harm.

However he also had an obligation to his partner to make the most of this trading expedition, so, with a feeling of impending doom Hebron continued toward Taklon, the last great city before Thebes.

As he approached the outlying parts along the river bank they were hailed by a vessel rapidly sailing north on their western edge of the main stream, weaving about among the boats going upstream. It was a small run-bout one man yacht that hot shot boatmen often pestered other river craft with.

Hebron was about to call out to the skipper of this craft to take notice of other vessels in the river when he recognized his own factor who had been sent ahead to arrange his trading stops.

The two boats were maneuvered to meet. Before the two were properly roped together the factor hopped across from one gunwale to the other.

“Master, Hebron,” He called out. “Thank God I have reached you in time.

I kept to this side of the stream hoping to intercept you before you enter Taklon at your peril. I have just escaped wit h my life and not much more.

“Tell me.” Replied Hebron while his factor paused for breath. “It must have been very bad for you to have run off.”

“Believe me. It was. The whole country is against us. I was not able to even hire a boat for I would not have been able to leave the place by land. I had to steal this one to get away. You will not only be unable to do any business there but are likely to be arrested as spies and you know what happens to t hem. That is, if you do manage to get to tie up at the city wharves.”

“That bad, hey. Hmm. We g ad better turn back then, call this the end of our journey south. Since you now have a boat at your disposal you will be

able to sail ahead of us to make appointments on the east bank at places we have not yet visited. I don’t like to miss any chances.”

“Not on this side of the border. No chance. Warnings have gone out to every town and city between here and our own land to give no welcome to anyone from the North. This is being patrolled.”

“Surely, within the sight of Heraklion it must be possible to do a little business.”

“If you value your life your will head straight for home.”

Turning to his partner beside him Hebron asked. “What have you to say about this?” :Getting home in one piece means a whole lot more to me than a few extra talents of silver or gold. I would not stop anywhere between here and Memphis.” Replied Prophis.

Food for thought to Hebron. It was run now or not be able to run at all.

Time was running out for every minute that they hesitated.

“So, that’s settled, then. “What happened to your horse? You would have intercepted me sooner by galloping along the bank.”

“Some low life bastard stole him, so I stole a boat as, I thought, a fair exchange.”

“Will you get away with it?”

“I have plans.” Asserted the factor. I hope to be across the border before they realise that it is gone.” With that he leapt across onto his own deck, had the line released and thrust the boat out into the stream, hoisted his sail and raced away down stream.

By this time both boats had drifted a considerable distance northward so Hebron had his crew turn his boat about and follow the leader towards home.

Breasting Heraklion, but not yet across the border, Hebron caught up with his factor and made to run with him. Joseph shortened his sail to slow his yacht slightly and called out across the water. “Don’t stop or come close tome. I can see a group of soldiers patrolling just south of the city. They may be watching out for me. Don’t look as though you have any connection with me. Do not stop till day’s journey on our side of the border.”

With this advice he let his sail fill again with wind and took off in a rush.

Fresh in Hebron’s mind was the les than welcome reception he had received on the southward journey had his rowers pull their hardest to pass this city before he could be stopped.

ON the way northward they made a few calls at villages that t hey had missed on the outward journey. It was no use hurrying for there was no doubt that couriers on fast horses would already be on the way to Memphis to alert the king of troubles on the border. As it may be many months. Or even years before had had the chance to do another trading excursion Hebron mad ea few calls at places missed on the way south.

As they approached home Hebron said to his partner. Looks like this will be t he last trip for some time.”

“For all time.” Replied Prophis.

“Why be so gloomy about the future? They’ll get over it when things settle down. They always do, and they will beg for us to return.”

“I wouldn’t bet on it. Kamose is restless. He has conquered Nubia and all pints south, as far as the mountains of the Moon. He can now go only North. Mark my words. He will. He is not a young man and wants to fulfill his destiny before he dies.”

“Do you really t ink so?”

“Sure so. Let’s get home and be safe, at least for now. While we have an army between him and us.”

Soon after Miriam arrived back home in Memphis her mother gave birth to another son, fourth child. They named him Aaron. Miriam foresaw a great future for this son. Her parents took little notice of this pronouncement as the imaginings of a child. How wrong they were!

By the time he had passed his second birthday the Heqa Kasut, (Hicksos), (Israelis), had been driven from power by Kamose and greatly reduced in status to indentured labourers, described by the Hebrew scribes many generations later as ‘slavery’.

POLITICAL BACKGROUND The peaceful nature of the early Egyptians made the filtration of the area by hordes of Semites possible. The natives attempted to assimilate these newcomers but in time were overwhelmed by them and voluntarily removed themselves from the scene. By the time of Kamose the impositions and arrogance of these people led him to recover the Sovereignty of the Ancients.

When Kamose eventually conquered Lower Egypt and set his own son and daughter to rule under his suzerainty, the ceremony of enthronement and coronation of a king of Egypt that had come down from remote antiquity, was reinstated and centred in the ancient Holy City of On. This is where and how Ahmose and his sister Nefertari were crowned as joint rulers of Lower Egypt after their father had led a successful expedition against the usurpers of two centuries before.

The Ceremony was not known to the Heqa Kasut. It was never divulged to them at any time during their sovereignty over Lower Egypt.

The secrets of the ceremony were held by the High Priest of On and his two deputies. Even then only one third of the formula was known to any person.

To perform the ceremony all three had to be in attendance and each in his turn perform only that part which was entrusted to him. These priests did not stay under the yoke of the Heqa Kasut. They fled with their king when he shifted his throne to Thebes.

CHAPTER I SURPRISE ATTACK (Blitzkrieg) All was peaceful in the ancient city of Tanis constructed by the Heqa Kasut (Hicksos) kings of lower Egypt as their principal port for the region. This particular morning was heralded by that faint glow on the Eastern horizon that alerted the population to the awakening of Sol for another day. Large Phoenician trading galleys were approaching the awakening port. The longshoremen at the wharves had sent off three riverboats away upstream toward Memphis and were ready to unload the Phoenician galleys now approaching the entrance to the harbour in another day of peaceful trading. One large galley was still tied up to a wharf as it was yet to complete its unloading of the previous day. The citizens of the city were washing the sleep from their eyes as they prepared for another prosperous day of trading.

All activity stopped as a loud blare of trumpets shrilled from the eastern ramparts. The sound of danger?

Must be some mistake! This city was at the wrong end of the country to be attacked.

Only two years ago the great conqueror, Kamose, the King of Upper Egypt, with his capital in Thebes, had been driven from Heraklion, the border garrison town that protected the Heqa Kasut Kingdom in Lower Egypt. He had been very successful in extending Egyptian hegemony to the great regions of Nubia toward the source of the Mother Nile but was no match for the skilled and intrepid Israeli warriors at its border.

There were no rebel tribes in or near Hicksos territory in the Delta.

However, there were wandering bands of brigands ready to ransack at any time if they thought that they could get away with it. A few moments and the morning activities began again, must have been a practice blow. The sentries at the harbour entrance, more a token effort than any real one for the Phoenician traders were not interested in conquest as peaceful trading for it was far less

Page 1

expensive for them to buy allegiance than to enforce it by strength of arms.

That the galleys seen approaching the harbour seemed to increase their speed as the alarm trumpet sounded was not significant to the sentries watching them.

An alert sentry on the lookout above the Eastern gate had noticed the golden gleam of the almost risen sun on polished metal. In a flash the gleam had disappeared. He approached the sentry on his right. “Did you see that?” He asked.

“No. What?” the reply.

“A flash of sunlight from a raised sword or a helmet.”

“No soldiers round this neck of the woods.” Was the reply. “You must be dreaming. Working too late is your problem. After eight hours on the early morning shift the eyes get spots before them.” At the same time peering toward the east in casse there might be something there.

“There it is again.” Cried the first sentry as they both saw it at the same time and agreed that it must be a raiding party careless about revealing themselves.

An urgent message was sent to the guardhouse below. The sergeant’s head soon appeared at the manhole as he came up to see for himself. But all was still and quiet.

The sergeant began berating the two sentries for disturbing him with a false alarm when he too, just in case, shielded his eyes from the sun just peeping over the eastern horizon, also saw that tell tale flash of light. Raiders do not wear helmets and no one would be waving a sword around that far from their objective. “Something strange going on out there.” Said the sergeant as he turned and called for men to man the defences. He sent messages to other guard posts on the walls to warn them to be alert for a possible raid.

At the same time he called for a warning blast from the alarm trumpets to awaken the citizens to possible danger. Those citizens of Tanis who had experienced raids on their abodes, in another time and place, returned to their homes and boarded up doors and windows. Others wandered about trying to see what it was all about. The fringe dwellers, who lived outside the walls, as was common where attacks were not expected, were the first to actually see the attackers. They had already boarded up their doors and

Page 2

windows and peered furtively through the inevitable cracks in such hastily arranged protection.

Thousands of fully armed soldiers were approaching slowly from the east, more thousands from the south, but neither force attacked the fortified walls. They were prepared to stop just beyond the range of the bow and arrow weapons of the defenders.

This puzzled both the defenders and the dwellers who had barricaded their houses under the towering walls and were still peering through h the cracks to satisfy their curiosity. .

At the same time the sentries at the harbour entrance were puzzled by the action of the leading Phoenician galleys, clearly visible, approaching the harbour. The three leading ships did not slowly approach the wharves to tie up there for discharge of their cargo.

These ships made for the shore at full speed in line. The first into the harbour ran past the wharves and when about to be beached the oarsmen suddenly reversed action so that the prows of the ships gently touched the river bank beside the wharves. Its crew slid long planks out over the bows on to the ground and instead of longshoremen, soldiers fully armed, swarmed ashore and attacked the sentry posts at that end of the harbour complex. The second ship in line ran against the wharves, swiftly shipped its oars as it breasted the wharf. The crew did not wait for the longshoremen to tie up their ship. They jumped on to the wharf decking before the ship had actually touched and did their own mooring. While they were tying the ropes to the bollards planks were quickly thrust out and armed men swarmed ashore. The third ship faltered before breasting the wharves and ran its prow onto the shore on the seaward end. Its crew attacked the guard at that end of the harbour complex.

This action took the defenders completely by surprise so that before they fully realised that they were being attacked they were showered with deadly arrows which prevented the guards from attacking the soldiers actually on the wharves. The ‘artillery’ attack was quickly followed by soldiers armed with swords to subdue the guards and the workmen, who, being unarmed, had no option but to surrender to the attackers..

The commander of the attackers then ordered a small contingent of soldiers to man the sentry station and sent the rest to march through the city toward the gates that closed the city off from the landward side.

Page 3

The sentries at the defensive towers had heard the noises of battle coming from within the city but were not able to fully assess what was happening as the city buildings hid most of it from their sight.

This worried the commander but his men at that point were busy readying to repulse the landward attack. Their attention thus being outward they were largely surprised when, whilst still assessing the situation with the attackers outside the walls, they were showered with arrows coming from within the city. While they were engaged in defending themselves from this attack by a detachment of the invading force from within a detachment of these same invaders marched boldly toward the gates where the resistance met with there by largely unarmed men attempting to re-close the already partly opened gates was quickly disposed of and the gates opened fully.

No one, from the humble foot soldier to the battalion commanders, expected to be attacked from within the city. They wee prepared to repel attacks by bandits, of which the whole region was infested, but professional soldiers were quite outside of their experience and training..

The thousands of soldiers surrounding the city were signalled by the victors and came boldly forward and entered the city, ignoring the showers of arrows directed on to them from the defenders in the gate towers, as a last gesture of defiance. In spite of the advantage of their position on the walls above the invaders the defenders were very soon subdued and the city fell into the hands of the Great Kamose who personally led this force.

His first move as conqueror was to send a detachment of soldiers to guard the river access to the port so that no ships could sail off upstream. He wished to surprise the authorities in Memphis as he progressed up the river. In this he was too late for three boats had already gotten away before his army attacked.

Next he sent a detachment of soldiers to arrest the governor and his staff and conduct them to an audience with him. He announced to them that he had taken the first step in restoring the kingdom to its rightful sovereign. The Hequa Kasut had had their day. For more than two centuries they had been in ‘illegal’ occupancy of the land and this would now stop. He appointed administrators form his own staff to occupy the offices of the city. As was his usual custom he invited those conquered officials to be part of the new administration under the strict control of his own appointees. Those

Page 4

who preferred not to fill any such subordinate positions were free to decline but, as a result, would be reduced in status to that of common labourers who would be paid the accepted corn, wine and oil supplies but no specie.

The commander of the defending forces was present and he inquired of Kamose how he had managed so effective a surprise attack. “I can see no way that you could have some through our country.

Your army was driven off from Heraklion almost two years ago. I do not expect that it was greatly harmed but you did withdraw and our defences have been greatly strengthened since then” Kamose did not take offence at this challenge. He replied to this. “I did withdraw, as you put it. I was not actually defeated. I conceived of a better way to drive you people from OUR Land, not yours. You have occupied it for over two centuries but that does not make it yours as far as I am concerned. Neither did you conquer this land, as you, no doubt, well know. Your ancestor was employed as a trusted servant of the then king. He betrayed this trust by accruing power into his own hands and became so powerful that the king’s successors retired to Thebes rather than disturb the nation by a civil war to retrieve their rightful position.

“As for how I arrived here with this army, I have no reason not to tell you for I am now here and can not be stopped. I had two hundred seagoing vessels built with funds and many slaves accrued from the conquests of the lands to the south of us. Blacks make good conquered slaves as they are strong and work well. My army was put aboard these ships in the ports of the Red Sea still available to us and they sailed up the eastern coast of the sea so that your look-outs could not hope to see them. These troops were offloaded at Suieze at the northern tip of that gulf and a contingent marched overland to the Great Sea shore where they boarded the several Phoenician galleys that were hired to transport them. The rest marched overland during the night ready to make the landward force that you saw this morning.

“You never suspected that the galleys approaching your city were filled with my soldiers. There are others already marching toward Memphis which city I believe to be unprepared for an attack from this direction. I have sealed off the river access so that no news of this conquest can reach Memphis before I get there. If any does get through, by some mischance, there is not time to withdraw the huge

Page 5

army protecting Heraklion to properly defend your capital. It is too late now for you to do anything about my plans now. There you have it”.

The reply from the conquered was. “Your reputation as the greatest strategist to come up for a generation is well deserved. I congratulate you. What is in store for us?”

“Exactly what I have just decreed. If you cooperate your lives will be spared to work for me as your new ruler. If not, you will be reduced to the lowest labouring status. Not a great deal better than conquered slaves, of course, but better for both of us than massacring you all. Dead men are of no use to anyone”.

“You do not leave us much of an alternative”.

“No reason why I should. I am only taking back what is rightfully mine”.

To this there could be no further argument and the reorganisation of the society of Tanis to the service of Kamose continued as he directed it.

Three boats had escaped the invasion, not by any smart move on the part of their captains, but by being out of sight of the invading galleys as they rounded the spit of land just upriver from the docks of the city while these invaders were concentrating on beaching their ships to carry out their surprise attack. These were still near enough to the city to hear the sounds of a great disturbance and the crew put their oars into the water to increase their speed against the sluggish current beyond what the fresh morning breeze in their lanteen sails could produce to get them away from the unknown. Soon after, however, the skipper of the leading boat thought that it would be prudent and of value to the people up the river for him to know what had occurred.

A high tree growing close to the bank drew his attention and he ordered a sweep in to the bank. He then selected one of his crew who had volunteered to do so, to climb the tree to see what he could of events in the city.

The crews of the three boats watched anxiously as their companion climbed the tree. They saw him go up carefully and gaze back toward the city that they had not long left behind. He was there for only a few minutes when he scrambled quickly down, rushed toward

Page 6

his boat and very quickly leapt aboard as though demons form Hell were close behind him.

“What’s the hurry, Janoc”. Chided his captain. “What scared the shit out of you”.

“A huge invading army. Sir. That’s wot. Millions of men surround the city. It is doomed. We must get out of here, quickly.”

“I know you. Janoc. You exaggerate everything. Probably a few hundred bandits making a great hullabaloo as they get slaughtered by the garrison.”

“No. Sir. Not so. I saw the sun glittering from the helmets of real soldiers. They are all over the place. Thousands of them all rushing to the gates that have been opened somehow and they are streaming in to the city.”

“What a load of crap. Janoc go and have another look and come back with the real story, this time.”

“No way. Sir. Go and look for yourself if you don’t believe me or send someone else. Listen. Here that noise. That is soldiers shouting out in battle, not brigands being driven off.”

“It will not take long to send another man to verify your report.

They will be too busy yet to come after us for the next hour or so.

Cabel, you go and see what you can see.”

“Yes, Sir.” So he went off, to soon return with verification of Janoc’s report.

The captain then gave the only order possible under those circumstances. “Out into the river and row for all your worth. Your lives depend on it.” The other boats followed his lead after he called out to them what his man had discovered. They had not desire to be caught there either.

Kamose had lost his tactic of total surprise.

The crew worked as they had not for many a day. As well as being favoured by a strong north wind as the day wore on, they progressed rather more rapidly than usual and the three boats made their first port of call, Phakussa, the administration centre for Nome 20, while the sun was still warm in the Western sky instead of the increasing darkness of impending night. Fifty kilometres of river working upstream was almost a record achievement in less than a working day.. With the dread of what they had seen, driving them this was not surprising.

Page 7

As the boat approached the landing stage the urgency was such that the captain ordered Janoc and his companion to jump across to the platform and race off to the city officials before they closed up their offices for the day.

These two men had problems convincing these officials that they carried a genuine warning of trouble. They questioned their bona fides and refused to take immediate action unless there was some verification of their warning. However, the urgency of their demeanour convinced these officials to consult with the captains. It was too much to ask them to accompany the men to the boats but they were persuaded to delay their home going till the captains could be brought to them.

Jacon and Cabel then hurried back to their boat to get the corroboration needed to convince the sceptical officials of the veracity of their warning. The three captains went with the men to interview those officials. It was not till they pointed out that they would normally have arrived after sundown after a fifty kilometre journey upstream that they received attention from these officials.

As Janoc’s captain put it. “Why on earth would we be here so early if we had not had the shit scared out of by what we saw happening at Tanis?�

Not getting any affirmative action the captains, having urgent work to do, returned to their boats to finish the unloading of the cargo due to this city. It was of little concern to them who actually ruled for trade went on regardless.

Meanwhile the Council went into conference, rather than return home for a well earned rest from their exertions of the day, to discuss this development. As to be expected there were almost as many councillors for action as there were for doing nothing about this crisis, but to wait and see what developed.. After all, it appeared to have occurred in their neighbouring Nome, not their responsibility, but, almost in their own backyard. If the alarm was genuine they were in greater trouble than if it were not. A false alarm would meet with a severe reprimand from the central government, a real one could lose them their jobs and status.

This view-point finally decided the issue. The decision being taken to forward the alarm, it was then to decide how far to send it Should it go to Bubastis, the capital of Nome 18 and let them deal

Page 8

with it or should the Royal Courier system be used to get the alarm directly to Memphis. Who would believe it anyway?

To save time, which was wasting away if the alarm was genuine, the City Governor had a message drafted to send to Memphis. It read; ‘A report has come in of a serious incursion in the Delta region, Nome 19, that the city of Tanis has been overrun by what appears to be a contingent of soldiers from Upper Egypt, possibly, led by one of Kamose’s generals. We suggest that precautions be taken against an advance by this force up the river’. It was eventually decided to send this message directly to Memphis allowing the governors in Bubastis and Amlin to see it on the way through. Both of these cities were staging posts in the Royal Courier system.

The next question was how to verify this alarm to the recipients.

Again, more discussion till at last one, perhaps more preceptive than the others, put in his suggestion. “Why don’t we send the sailor who first saw this action with his own eyes? His dread of what he had seen was the clincher that convinced us that it could be true.

Send him with the courier. Let his dread of the situation show to the Officials in Memphis”.

This suggestion was quickly accepted, with relief, by the Councillors, who added another person to the team, that of Cabel who corroborated Jacon’s version of events.

Here was indeed another problem. The courier would be riding a fast horse that would be changed at every staging post situated fifty kilometres apart in a hundred and fifty kilometre journey. A boatman could not be expected to be a competent rider to mount another horse and both gallop together on this mission.

“A boatman would never make it even if he is a rider. He would not have enough experience”. Was an opinion expressed by a Councillor.

“He would never stand the pace in any case”. Put in another.

Still another suggestion was to use a chariot so that he, and even his companion with him, could ride with the courier. There was a general titter at this suggestion till the Governor said. “That is not so way out as it sounds. For two to go two horses would be needed and it takes two to haul a fast, light chariot. We would not need a war chariot on this occasion. The same staging periods will apply, even with three men in the vehicle. There would be little time lost and possibly the least time lost in responding to the alarm”.

Page 9

Looking around the room the governor saw the nods of approval from his advisers and immediately sent out an order for his second chariot to be readied for the journey. Also another order to find the two boatmen at the docks and summon them to the Council.

Thus shortly after the sun had set, while the last vestiges of sunlight were still in the western sky that day a courier was despatched to Memphis to warn the central government of a possible attack by the famous Kamose, the great conqueror of all of the nations to the south of his realm.

At Bubastis the courier received the same sceptical reception as the boatmen had in Phakussa. To be on the safe side, and to protect their own positions in the ruling hierarchy the government of this city took note of the alarm and sent the messengers on their way with fresh horses and supplies. This experience was repeated in Amlin as in Bubastis, with much the same mixture of scepticism and credulity.

At last they reached Memphis early in the morning of the second day after leaving Phakussa. The Royal warrant that they carried gave them access to the King’s Council within a very short time after their arrival. Here also there was a great deal of doubt about the reality of what they had to say.

The general opinion among the strategists of the Capital of Lower Egypt was that Kamose could have sent no more than a raiding party, a thousand or two men, more was probably an exaggeration by the messengers. The defences of Lower Egypt had been so boosted since his repulse from Heraklion three years previously that he could be again driven off if he dared to approach Memphis.

An army general called to this conference doubted if Kamose was actually leading this force. He said. “This report indicates that the number of soldiers is very small compared to the number that we know that Kamose has at his disposal. It is only an assumption that Kamose himself, or even a general, may be with them. I believe that this is a diversionary action to take our forces away from Heraklion.

His main army, we know, is stationed not far to the South of that Garrison city. If we withdraw men from there they will attack and take it”.

“What would you advise then”?

“By all means send for a detachment to reinforce us here against this raiding party. That will leave Heraklion protected and enable us to

Page 10

repulse these raiders when they arrive. The numbers attacking are probably much less than the reports indicate. You know how these provincials exaggerate every little event. A hundred raiders gets reported as an army of thousands� “Hmm. Very true on that point�.

Further discussion resulted in a Royal Courier being despatched, as a precautionary measure, to Heraklion to send three thousand foot soldiers and 300 hundred chariots to reinforce the garrisons in Memphis.

Alas, it was all too little, too late.

Kamose wasted no time after securing his conquest of Tanis. His first action was to despatch a courier to his troops still encamped on the shore of the Gulf of Suizze to order them to march immediately on Memphis. They were the same distance from that city as he was in Tanis. They would meet up there and attack it from both sides of the river.

The rest of the Delta could remain untouched at this stage. The less that they knew about what was happening the better for his final success. Once Memphis was in his hands the rest of the country would have no choice but to submit to his rule.

He commandeered every available boat in Tanis, especially the Phoenician galley unfortunate enough to be still in the harbour.

These, with his own invasion fleet, took most of the three thousand of the soldiers who had conquered Tanis, on board and sailed up the river, propelled by the North wind and the fifty oars on each ship.

Although the warning of his approach left Tanis four days before Kamose did his victims had much less than two days to the enjoy the smug confidence that they felt about their ability to drive him off and buy themselves more time for further resistance.

On the morning of the second day after the call for reinforcements had been despatched to Heraklion and the Memphis garrisons readied for action the citizens of Memphis saw three thousand soldiers surrounding the city walls on its western side. Looking across the broad sluggishly flowing waters of Mother Nile there were more thousands of soldiers lining the right bank of the stream.

Behind them could be seen, by the lookouts on the guard towers, hundreds of war chariots backing up the foot soldiers. No walled city on that bank. The active port of the city was on the left bank for easy access from the Royal Palace, the government and the general business of the city. The right bank was traditionally the abode of

Page 11

the movers and shakers of the community, the rich and famous who liked to get away from the crowds in the city itself. Their villas and mansions were now under the control of that contingent of Kamose’s invaders.

The ships that had disgorged their cargoes of soldiers during the night on the left bank of the river, down stream from the city, sailed nonchalantly to the right bank and loaded the soldiers waiting there for them. Those not needed to keep that area under control were ferried across to attack the un-walled city nestling on the left bank, between the city walls and the river, as part of the pincer movement that finally doomed the city of Memphis.

The Heqa Kasut garrison troops stationed on the right bank had already been subdued. Those defending the left bank valiantly showered the boats and their crews with arrows and stones, the only missiles available to them. The few of the invaders injured by this action did no deter the rest from pressing on with the orders given previously to them by Kamose.

The defending Heqa Kasut on the landward walls valiantly showered the invaders with arrows and the few men stationed outside the walls gave a very good account of themselves and did inflict some damage on the enemy. Their reinforcements were three days march away in Heraklion, if, indeed they even yet knew that they were needed. Not of much use to the defenders of Memphis.

The virtually undefended left bank within the city walls was very soon over-run by the water borne troops from across the river. After consolidating their bridgehead within the city limits they raged throughout it and took control of the citizenry. Sheltering from the attacks by the guards on the walls they opened the land gates of the city and allowed Kamose and his victorious army to complete his conquest of the hated Heqa Kasut who had ruled this lower part of the once united Egypt for over two centuries.

By the time that the sun was ready to go to his daily rest in the western desert Kamose was in total control the city of Memphis.

From his interrogation of the city councillors and the king whom he had captured, Kamose realised that his surprise had not been complete and that he could expect some action from the south. For this he prepared by deploying a battalion of troops on either side of the river. They had orders to march southward to meet the expected

Page 12

army before it got anywhere near Memphis. Besides these troops, a flotilla of ships containing armed soldiers matched the progress of the foot soldiers up the river.

The commander at Heraklion could not believe that Kamose had any more soldiers with him than he would need for an invading party to create a diversion while his main army attacked Heraklion while it was not fully defended. He well knew that a large army was encamped to the south of the city. Or was it? It would not be the first time that a garrison had been made to look like a large army in siege mode. A small scouting party was despatched to inspect the encampment in Egypt Proper that was known to him and his officers. Not surprisingly the report indicated that it was indeed a sham. Sentries were parading back and forth on t he Heraklion side but on rounding the encampment there were none on the southern side and careful examination of the scene indicated that the encampment was almost empty.

Consequently he decided to double the request from Memphis and despatched two battalions of troops, one on either side of the river to march toward Memphis and a small flotilla of river boats to carry reserve troops. He determined to keep the main body of his army at Heraklion to repulse Kamose when he attacked that city. If only he had had the Upper Egyptian camp more carefully examined previously, but he hadn’t. If he had sent his main army toward Memphis and kept two battalions as a reserve in Heraklion it was possible that they may have driven Kamose back into the sea. But, he did not. Another case of strategy winning against superior force.

Approaching Meidum, the administration centre of the region between the Fayum Depression and the Nile proper, the forces from Heraklion saw an undisturbed town. This led them to believe that Kamose’s force was still far away, possibly still busy subduing Memphis. This was not so. Kamose had by-passed the towns to give an appearance of being further away than he was, The commander of this defending force had made his command post on the leading vessel of the river boats. As they approached the region of Meidum he observed another flotilla approaching from the North. It could be none other than the invading force coming to meet him. He had no option but, to attack. He directed his boats to sail against the invaders, at the same time sending a signal to the land force to watch for and attack any invaders on the shore.

Page 13

Arrows flew from his archers at the bows of his vessels and some damage was inflicted on the enemy. A ship was sunk by one of his ramming it and men were seen to fall into the water to suffer the expected fate of anyone in waters infested by alligators. A swirl of water, the momentary showing of a prehensile tail and they were no more.

The river battle was a short one as the boats from the two opposing forces met and the soldiers in them attacked each other. Numbers from both sides made meals for alligators. In less than two hours the force of Kamose had overcome the waterborne and foot soldiers from the south and the commander had no choice but to surrender.

The troops on either side of the river were not evenly matched for those of Kamose were doubly outnumbered by the defenders.

Determination and battle skill won the day. The clash of swords and the cries of the soldiers disturbed the wild life of the river and alarmed the farmers working in the surrounding fields. They all stopped work to watch the outcome of the battle. These were all native Egyptians who had been under the yoke of the hated Heqa Kasut for generations and were privately hoping that this action would restore them to their former status as free men. They recognised the army from the north as the men of Kamose and when it became obvious which side was winning they loudly cheered the conquerors.

The defeated defenders of Lower Egypt were rounded up on both shores and under guards were marched back toward Memphis.

There was no point in Kamose continuing to Heraklion for Memphis was now in his hands and he would subdue that city another way.

This he did by sending messengers to the skeleton army encamped on his own territory to advance on Heraklion. He had already provided for a river attack by having boats on their way from Thebes while he was attacking Tanis. Thus the next day after the despatching of troops to assist Memphis a formidable navy bore done on Heraklion to the surprise of the defenders of that city.

Unprepared for an attack from the river itself they were soon subdued and the whole of Lower Egypt was under the control of Kamose.

Kamose had no love for the Heqa Kasut, as these interlopers were named by the traditional Egyptians. They had infiltrated the nation

Page 14

two centuries ago. One of them had been appointed Grand Vizier to administer a rescue operation that had saved the nation from a devastating Natural Disaster. This operation was very successful and for this the people of that time were grateful but that was more than two centuries in the past. Since then these migrants had usurped the role of kings in Memphis and used their position of control of the trade routes between Upper Egypt the rest of the world to exact harsh levies, tolls and taxes from the traders. This action reflected on the economy of Upper Egypt.

This was on top of a general impost of twenty percent of all production throughout the land as a basic tax to fill the coffers of the kings. At first the kings went along with this but as their power grew the Heqa Kasut were not content with being advisers to successive kings but actually took the throne from them by having their own people crowned in the place of the original dynasty. Thus developed the Two Kingdoms. The old kingdom remained in Thebes, the traditional site of the rulers and the New, under the usurping Heqa Kasut, developed Memphis as its administration centre.

The exactions, by the Heqa Kasut, had become ever more burdensome and a source of complaints and discord between the two kingdoms that had grown rapidly in recent years stemmed from this generations old occupation of Lower Egypt by the Semetic immigrants. Kamose had at last built enough force and economic power to remove them as one would remove unwelcome parasites.

Some of his predecessors had attempted but not succeeded. Now the great tactician had been successful and they were now at his mercy.

The records state the ‘Kamose made slaves of the Hicksos, Or Heqa Kasut’, depending on which historical records are studied. The Hebrews claim that they were made slaves by a ‘King who knew not Joseph’ this, by their own admission puts them into this picture as the Heqa Kasut, otherwise known by some researchers as ‘The Hicksos’.

On his return to Memphis, with the commanders of the conquered relief army as captives, Kamose had the Officials of the city, with their king Apropis, brought to him at the Headquarters that he had established, in the forecourt of the main temple. Here he addressed them as they were paraded before him.

Page 15

“I shall not address you as a royal person for you and your predecessors were usurpers of the true Egyptian royal house. Your occupation of this throne has never been legal and this has now come to and end. Why this situation was tolerated by my ancestors, I know not, but, I will tolerate it no longer. To put you all to the sword is not less than you deserve, but, we true Egyptians are a merciful people so you will be allowed to live, but in captivity. All property owned at present by Heqa Kasut will be confiscated to the Crown. It can then be sold to true Egyptians or even to Heqa Kasut people who are prepared to cooperate with us in the New Lower Egypt. Your people, who choose to remain in any city in Lower Egypt, will no longer be free to do as they please but will be labourers to Egyptians. Other, who opt to join your tribes in the East of the Delta are free to do so. Any businesses owned by Heqa Kasut will be confiscated but the present owners will be permitted to work for the new Egyptian owners in whatever capacity the new owners think fit.

“As for you, pseudo royals, you will be transported to Thebes to spend the rest of your lives in captivity there. You can not be trusted to be left here to ferment a rebellion.

“What your people do in what has been known as the Land of Goshen, Nome 8 of lower Egypt, between the Delta and the Red Sea will be their own affair, unsubsidised by the Government and undefended from raiding parties that infest the Sinai. Those who venture out from this region will be severely restricted in their movements and will not be employed in any capacity save that of the lowest level of indentured labourer paid only in corn, wine and oil. Just one small step above that of captive slaves.

“Do I make myself clear?” This directly to the erstwhile King Apropis.

“Yes. Sire.” Was the humble reply. A much reduced attitude from when he arrogantly sent a message, only four years before, demanding that Kamose control the hippos cavorting in his sacred pool as the noise of the splashing water in Thebes was disturbing the sleep of Apropis, in Memphis.

Thus Kamose is recorded in the annals of history as having, ‘Made slaves of the Hicksos’.

Page 16

This was a very enlightened move on his part for the Heqa Kasut, (Hicksos) population was at least one third of the total of that occupying Lower Egypt and to expel or kill them off would have devastated the economy of that very important part of the region.

Land in the main valley was too valuable for acres to be put aside for the rearing of large animals for haulage, ploughing and the army so that Eastern Delta of the Egyptian land mass had developed to be the main source throughout the land of these animals. To largely eliminate the population here would be more than the economy as a whole could afford.

As a result of this decree, many Heqa Kasut removed themselves from the cities and joined their tribal relatives in the wide open spaces of Nome 8.

However, like all governments in all ages, Kamose made no move then, or at any other time, nor did any of his successors, to remove the 20% tax that the Heqa Kasut had imposed on all production anywhere in all of the Land of Egypt, except in the lands owned and operated by the Temples and their own people.

Kamose was the master of the Unexpected. He proved this again at this time by leaving Lower Egypt as a separate entity from Upper Egypt ruled from Thebes. He placed his son Ahmose and his young sister, Nefertari, on the throne in Memphis as joint rulers of that region as a separate nation, though under his susreignty, autonomous, but under his watchful eye. Since the royal succession went through the female line the sister had to be on the throne with Ahmose to legitimise his accession to it. Thus she ruled in her own right as Queen at the times when he was out of the country on military expeditions. When they were both at home she had an input into decisions made but not always decisive. He could by-pass consultation with her by working directly through the bureaucracy that every government throughout the ages has generated about it.

In any case, Kamose had the power to veto any decision made by his children.

There was one exemption to the total ban on Heqa Kasut activities.

For centuries, ever since men began to build in stone the stonecutters (masons) had all been members of a brotherhood of masons.

This had developed into tightly controlled artisan guilds. Only

Page 17

specially selected and skilled tradesmen could be members. They commanded very high remuneration for their work. Stone cutters (Squarers) could be hired only through the guild.

Their employment conditions and rates of pay were dictated by the guild.

There was no national or racial requirement for membership. The only requirement was skill at the trade. Over the two centuries of their being part of Lower Egypt many Heqa Kasut had become members of this Brother-hood. Because of their great importance to the overall economy of the nation members of these guilds, no matter of what racial origins or religious beliefs, were exempt from work restrictions imposed on the Heqa Kasut in general.

Page 18

CHAPTER II THE NEW REGIME. The Brotherhood of Stone Squarers was not disturbed by the new regime set up in Lower Egypt by Kamose. Political changes did not disturb their members for whoever was in power needed their services and none dared attempt to control them as there were many powerful, wealthy and influential people of great importance in both Lower and Upper Egypt in their ranks. Heqa Kasut members of this Brotherhood were permitted to reside in their own homes, not to Own them but to occupy undisturbed and use them as their own.

They were, as was everyone else of that race, barred from control positions in the new government of the region. These people were seen by Kamose to be of value in controlling the regained region of Lower Egypt to its rightful place as a part of an eventually united kingdom. Why he did not put the two regions together at this time is not recorded. Perhaps he felt that it would be more easily administered as an autonomous region under his ultimate control rather than administer the whole valley from Thebes.

A Past Grand Master of all Egypt of the Stone Squarers Brotherhood was Amram Bar Kohath of the Heqa Kasut tribe of Levi. He had married Jochabed, the youngest sister of his oldest brother Izhar. To her he had, at the time of the conquest by Kamose, four children.

The eldest was the girl Miriam, her younger siblings were Nun, Rachel and Aaron. The last was born between the repulse of Kamose from Heraklion and his conquest of Lower Egypt through the Delta regions. In the rather extensive grounds of his home on the left bank of Mother Nile, within sight of the Royal Palace, was a meeting hall for one of the more important Memphis lodges of the Brotherhood. This continued to be used regularly by its members after the conquest.

Although his possessions of land and businesses had been confiscated by the State, he was allowed to live on in his own house, employ servants of his own race and to act in a middle management capacity in State Enterprises. In this regard he was part of the control mechanism Kamose set up over the conquered Heqa Kasut.

This worked both ways as in such a position he was able, at

Page 19

appropriate times, to somewhat ease the burden of intensive compulsory labour that was now the lot of his kin. Through his high connections in the Brotherhood he had access to the new rulers of the land.

Ahmose never married and was at all times accompanied by a troupe of young men. He died at a young age from a disease contracted in battle to preserve the viability of the Empire. Nefertari did eventually marry a relation, but one not in direct line to the throne. Her daughter, Hatshepsut, ruled n her own right as Queen when the time came for her to ascend the throne. Before marriage she too was accompanied by a troupe of teenage boys. She lived to a great age. Her daughter lived even longer.

Life in the Delta soon settled into a routine. The ordinary people going about their daily tasks producing food, goods and services for the population were little disturbed by the change of regime. Tax gatherers were very soon back in business collecting the dues decreed by the authorities from time to time. The Nile continued to flood regularly twice a year to provide the life blood of the region.

Two years on from the conquest peace seemed to reign supreme in the Delta.

Page 20

CHAPTER III. CRACKS IN THE AUTHORITY OF AHMOSE Three years had passed since Miriam had received, from her uncle, Hebron, a diary as a special present on her tenth birthday. Since then she had kept a faithful record of day to day events of her life, not every day, for not every day is memorable, but enough to keep track of her life. The change of status from that of a privileged daughter of a leading citizen to a member of an ‘enslaved race’ was hard to take. But, the thought that comforted her was that this change to a life of hardship might be the incentive that her people needed to cause them to leave this land of Egypt and fulfill the destiny that El Elohim had planned for HIS people. This hope had been handed down the generations from the great ancestor, Abraham. He believed that his descendents would eventually fully occupy the land in which he had spent his life. Known over the last two millennia of human history, as Palestine.

She writes; ‘Here we are, many months have gone by and nothing is being done about getting out of this place. My people seem to prefer to live in abject humility rather than to make real plans to get to the “Promised Land’. It is difficult for we are hounded day and night by patrols. We can not meet in groups for any reason. If we do anything it will have to be in great secrecy. We really should have gone when we had the authority and power to do so. When our own people ruled the land. No one seemed to want to do anything that might ‘rock the boat’. Nor do they now, even under this foreign control. Everyone that I speak to about moving out tells me that we must submit to authority and by influencing events we will eventually get what we want. This is not the way to go but who will listen to a thirteen year old. I no longer feel like a child yet get treated as one”.

Ahmose surrounded himself with nubile young men. No woman was ever seen to accompany him in any of journeys. His private household was staffed by young men. There were no female servants. His sister, Nefertari, had an entourage of teenage boys.

Royal audiences were held jointly. He on his throne and she on hers both situated side by side at the head of the audience chamber.

Page 21

Their uncle, a half brother of Kamose’s secondary wife, had been appointed by him as Commander General of the whole army of Lower Egypt. His name was Amenhotept and his duty was to keep order in that part of the Nation. Overtly he was to see that the laws decreed by Ahmose, and endorsed by Kamose, were obeyed by both the Egyptians and their newly made servants. His secret task, assigned to him by Kamose, was to check on Ahmose and his sister to see that their basic policy did not conflict with that of Kamose.

He was destined to rule in succession to Ahmose. Not by right, but as a stop gap to prevent a worse succession.

The presence of Amenhotept more or less as the shadow of Kamose over the land engendered in the heart of Ahmose a feeling of insecurity and dissatisfaction with his role as ruler of Lower Egypt.

He contemplated the immense proportion of the population that the hated Heqa Kasut constituted. It worried him. They had neither been destroyed nor driven out of the country. He observed that they seemed to have larger families than the Egyptians. Amenhotept was Kamose’s man. He had no qualms about the Heqa Kasut. When questioned by Ahmose he was quite confident that they were no threat. He had sufficient troops to keep them in subjection. “Look at those giant Nubians we employ to help garrison this place.” He would say. “The very size of them will frighten the Heqa Kasut into behaving themselves. Their keep costs us a packet but they are worth every penny of it. Besides, all the arms of the Heqa Kasut have been confiscated. What can they do unarmed against these giant savages? They are really a submissive people. They ruled here largely due to the weakness of the Egyptian sovereigns at the time that they gained ascendance”.

“But, what if they rearm themselves? Who knows what they get up to down there in the Delta. In those wilderness regions between the river and the desert they could get up to anything without being discovered. Even amongst the myriad streams of the delta itself there are thousands of hiding places. What with swamps on the one hand and deserts on the other I do not know how anyone can choose to live in those regions.”

“It is all adequately inspected. Believe me. There’s no way they can attempt to rearm without my knowing about it and putting a stop to it. Besides, as I have already pointed pout to you, they are a meek

Page 22

people when it is all said and done. They would rather ’influence’ than ‘fight’.

“What about the myriad of them still in the cities. Amram, for one.

He still maintains his own household as though he were one of us.”

“He is, in a way. A way you know not of. I can assure you, there is no danger from that quarter.”

“How can you be so sure? What do you know of him and his that I do not?”

“We are of the same Fraternal Brotherhood. I can tell you no more than that.”

“Why have I not been invited to join this ‘Brotherhood’?”

“Very simple. You have been a ‘Royal’ all of your life and the very nature of a brotherhood excludes those of a Higher Station”.

“There is nothing more for me to say then. Is there?”

“You have said truly, My Lord.” With a slight bow that, to a close observer, could have had a hint of derision about it.

“If you say so. But, I don’t like it.” Ahmose reluctantly agreed to leave it at that for the time being. But he brooded privately on this problem.

His sister, Nefertari, loved to bathe in the river. Almost every day she left the palace in her sedan chair borne by four huge Nubian slaves. These were not employed labourers, paid only in ‘corn and oil’, as the Heqa Kasut had been reduced to. They were captives taken in the wars with Sudan and Ethiopia. They were the property of the captor and as such worked where and how bidden by their owner. They were thus expendable for their own people were prepared to sell them to the Egyptians even when they were not at war. The slaves themselves found life in highly civilized Egypt preferable to the comparatively primitive conditions in which they had lived in their home country. The trappings of civilization enjoyed by the average Egyptian were available in the surrounding nations but was confined mostly to the upper echelons of their society. Slaves did not come from these classes.

From the parapet of her home Miriam had a grandstand view of the royal procession as Nefertari went down to the river to bathe several times each week. First to emerge from the Palace gates would be a platoon of soldiers. Behind them a troupe of teenage boys dancing and singing along the way to the river. Then Nefertari’s elaborately decorated and draped sedan chair supported on the shoulders of four

Page 23

huge Nubian slaves. Following them a group of several more slaves to attend to her wants during her sporting in the water. At the end of the procession was a rear guard of several soldiers to ensure that none of the slaves took into their heads to attempt to escape. When they arrived at the broad stone steps leading into the river the leading troop of soldiers turned right and formed up on the edge of the quay facing toward the palace. The Princess’s chair was placed on the stone surface of the quay beside the stairway into the water.

The rear guard turned to the left and lined up across the stairway from the first troop, again facing toward the palace. All of the Nubian slaves then entered the water and formed a semi-circle out from the quay, all gazing fixedly outward. The ones furthest from the bank were up to their shoulders in the water and those closest were a little more than waist deep.

At this point the canopy of the chair was opened by one of the attending boys and Nefertari stepped out in all her exotic beauty.

Her flawless olive skin glistened in the bright Egyptian sunlight.

The wondrous curves of her voluptuous body were emphasized rather than hidden by the diaphanous linen shift that she wore. Her long glossy black locks were unrestrained by any headpiece and reached down to caress her breasts as round and firm as those of a young virgin.

Her two attending maids, who had been in the chair with her, accompanied her into the water where they all happily discarded their flimsy clothing and cavorted joyfully in the cool, but hardly clear, waters of the mighty Nile, the Mother of Egypt. The young men sat on the edge of the quay with their legs dangling over the edge and their feet hidden beneath the surface of the water sluggishly flowing to the sea several hundred miles to the north.

They lasciviously watched every move of the nubile figures enjoying their bathe. No Nubian slave dared look round in spite of whatever sound would come to his ears from toward the bank. To do so would cost him his head.

Any soldier with a similar idea was also in the same danger so they all gazed fixedly toward the palace. Their duty was to keep watch in that direction to prevent any intrusion on the privacy of the Princess while she was bathing. The duty of the slaves in the water was to keep at bay any nasty alligators that investigated the disturbance of the water too closely. If a slave was taken by any of these creatures

Page 24

that infested the river it was no great loss. He could always be replaced by another, on the next excursion. The safety of Nefertari was paramount.

Miriam had often seen the daughter of Apophis, the last Heqa Kasut king, in her bathing ritual. It had not been as elaborate nor as frequent as that of Nefertari but had been of much the same pattern.

She also had used slaves to protect her from the nasties in the river.

Miriam noted carefully the whole process, having a feeling that to know this would be of some importance to her in the future. She knew not how but had an inner knowledge that it would be so.

Being now thirteen years of age Miriam was able to take a larger share of the burden of the household. This was now especially important, as her father no longer had the control of outside labour that he had had before the conquest by Kamose. Being only a foreman in the works that he had once owned he could not co-opt people from the works to help out at home. It was unthinkable that a Heqa Kasut should employ an Egyptian. He was prohibited by law from doing that, anyhow. However, there was quite a number of his own people in need of assistance and he did this by employing them when he could as his personal servants where and when he could do so. Many of the city dwellers had returned to their kin in Goshen but those who had not were often reduced to abject penury. Those in a position to help, such as Amram was, did what they could but they were few in number so that the really desperate were kept only one step away from starving.

Jochabed again become pregnant. This put an increasing burden on Miriam as her mother approached her time. The nursery had to be again brought up to what she considered fit for the new babe to occupy. It had suffered three years of Aaron’s tender mercies and Miriam was determined to have it like a new pin again for the expected arrival. The wall murals were repainted in their original brilliance. New mobiles were hung to amuse the new babe. With an inner belief that this babe would be of special significance to her and her people she had the ancient reverential symbol of the double equilateral triangle hung at the head of the crib.

Not many weeks after the family knew of the expected addition to its ranks Amram came home from a meeting of the Stone Cutter’s Guild in a very agitated state. The family had all retired to bed by the time he entered the house so he was forced keep his problem to

Page 25

himself till morning. At breakfast time he assembled all of his family together. This was quite a feat as they all had work to do at various times. To call them together thus indicated something very serious was afoot. It certainly was serious. It was terrible news.

Even though the servants were of his own people he was extremely cautious on important matters so in this case he made sure that family members only were present when he broke the news. His first statement was. “This Ahmose in crazy. I know that he has problems asserting his authority as much as he would like but that is no excuse for this last decree. This will not help him. Neither will it help us, I’m afraid. He believes that it was a mistake on the part of his father in letting us as remain free as we are, or even in the country. I feel that he made a mistake in restricting us as he did.

But, that is beside the point. Ahmose is afraid of us and also afraid to run counter to has father’s wishes so he has introduced this ridiculous restriction on us. It will cause even greater resentment than our present conditions.”

“That is all very well, Dear.” From Jochabed who could not see where this was leading and was anxious to know. “You have not told us what this is all about. What is the folly that Ahmose has entered into now?”

“It is unbelievable that any same man could even contemplate such action let alone seriously decree that it should be done. It is not liked by thinking and responsible Egyptians. It is distinctly ‘unEgyptian’. Yet he intends to declare this decree today. I am most apprehensive for you My Dear.”

“Why me?” Questioned Jochabed.

“Because. Oh. It is difficult to put it into words, but I must. This monster has decreed that all Heqa Kasut, that’s our, male children are to be strangled at birth.”

Jochabed put her hand over her mouth to stifle the scream that rose in her throat. Miriam was too stunned to make any move. The other children hardly realized the significance of what was said. At last Jochabed said. “What a monster that man is. You rightly described him as such.”

“Be careful to not say that outside these four walls. He is not really a monster, although that thought did pass through my own mind., just a frightened little man not really up to the task that has been put upon him. His father would never do such a thing. He is a real man,

Page 26

keeps both of his wives happy. I find it difficult to understand why this decree was allowed to see the light of day. Ahmose must have put up a good case for it or it may be it’s a case of act first and ride out the storm if and when it comes. It is obvious that he is a deviant and therefore does not really understand real people. Amenhotept would not solve his problem this way either but he is only the head of the military. He does not make the laws he only carries them out.”

Jochabed, conscious of her position, said. “What shall we do?”

“At this stage, I don’t know, My Dear. We shall have to see what can be done and trust in El Elohim to protect us. We have about four months ahead before your time to be delivered. Ahmose may perceive his error by then and reverse his decision, I think that that is very unlikely, though. Kamose may veto the decree before it is declared. I believe that Ahmose intends to declare this decree without submitting it to Kamose for approval. He can not be certain of his father’s approval of it, neither can we be certain that he would veto it. He must preserve a façade of unity. To do so would undermine what is already a rather tenuous authority that Ahmose has, even over his own people. We must act in anticipation of the decree being effective, at least in the short term.”

Miriam said nothing to all this. She did not see that she could do anything at this stage but she did determine that whatever happened she would do whatever it took to save this expected brother, as she thought of him. She knew in her heart that his life would be important. She already sensed a future with and for him that would be of inestimable value to her people.

In the weeks that followed it was evident that the king was determined to suppress his Heqa Kasut subjects in this very way.

Orders went out to every midwife in the country to take particular care that every male baby born to these subject people was to be ‘still born.’ No effort was to be made to round up the existing male babies and destroy them. Only new born before they actually drew breath were the subject of the direction. The instructions were that instead of slapping the babe to make it cry and cause his lungs to work the midwives were to smother the baby so that it did not draw its first breath. Thus could it be claimed that each boy was ‘still born.’

Page 27

The midwives of Egypt, both Hebrew and Egyptian, had spent their lives ensuring that newborns would live in spite of the many adversities of emerging into this world. They were reluctant to carry out this order. So reluctant were they that they refrained from responding to calls from the Heqa Kasut till after enough time would have elapsed that the baby would already be born when they arrived. Thus they were in fact not disobeying the king’s decree.

They were merely rendered incapable, by forces beyond their control, of carrying it out.

The feedback to the king, on the effects of his decree, was very disappointing to him. Male heirs were still surviving amongst the oppressed people. He called in the chief midwives to inquire why this was so. He accused them of neglecting their duties to him and to their people. He still stopped short of taking the course that the notorious Herod took against his own people 1500 years later.

“This is not so.” Averred, Shiprah, their spokeswoman. “We are powerless in the face of the virility of these women. They call us to attend to them. We hurry along but when we get there the babies are already born, breathing and crying. Our instructions are to not let them breathe. If they are already breathing when we first see them we can do nothing. We must, under your own instructions, let them live on.”

Ahmose was astounded to hear such news. He dismissed the midwives and gave the situation some serious thought. He could not bring himself to doubt the word of the experts but decided to check on them by appointing inspectors to accompany them on their rounds. This was no remedy for the inspectors’ reports were that they could detect no dereliction of duty by the midwives. It was as they stated. The midwives did not appear to delay their response to calls and yet when they arrived at the scene of a birth the child was already breathing. These Heqa Kasut women certainly were very virile.

In desperation the king ordered his inspectors to do what he could not order the midwives to do. They were to take each Heqa Kasut male child, whether or not it was breathing and cast it into the river as sacrifice to the God of the river. “That will take care of that.” He thought.

Jochabed became distraught when she became familiar with what was happening in the city of Memphis. Not only in Memphis but

Page 28

wherever the inspectors were operating. The scattered towns and hamlets of the delta were not immune from the depredations of the king’s men but it was so difficult to cover them all that many a Hequa Kasut male child survived this massacre. Besides this, so many of the Egyptian people were not in agreement with this macabre decree that they sheltered their neighbours in spite of the risk to themselves if discovered doing so. These survivors were the young Israeli people who were involved in the Great Exodus of the people when it eventually did happen.

On one particularly trying day Jochabed was most distressed in the early evening when she contemplated the possible fate of her child.

“If it is a boy, I don’t know how I shall bear seeing him taken and thrown into the river to be feed for the alligators. There it is almost right outside our front door. How would I then be able to stand looking over the river every day? Even now, it makes me sick at heart to even look at the river, knowing what might be thrown into it.”

“Do not worry so, Mother.” Said Miriam. “I think that there may be a way out of this. Firstly, the new baby may be a girl. Then there would be nothing to worry about. Secondly, I am sure that if the baby is a boy, as I believe he will be, there must be some way of saving him. There has to be some way around this problem.”

“Why do you say that, My Daughter?”

“I have a feeling that he will be a boy. Not just any boy. He will be one that is very important to our people so God will guide as in our efforts in preserving his life.”

“You have had these ‘feelings’ before and so often proved to be right. Perhaps you have the ‘Gift’. Suppose you have. Have you any suggestion as to what to do about it?”

“Yes. I believe that I have.”

“Tell me.” Implored Jochabed.

“Well. Come with me to the roof. I have something to show you.”

Standing together on the roof of their house overlooking the waters of the Nile Jochabed and Miriam could also see the end of the Royal Way as it abutted the riverbank. Miriam pointed to the quay and asked. “Do you see what is happening there?”

“Nothing startling.” Said Jochabed. “Some blacks in the water and some soldiers on the quay gazing toward the palace. Those blacks

Page 29

had better be careful. They could be taken by an alligator even though they are pounding the water to scare them away.”

“Look closer” Advised Miriam. “Between the blacks and the quayside.”

“Yes. I see. Who are those few people, women obviously, having a great time in the water between the blacks and the river bank?”

“Look closer.” Urged Miriam, rather than answer the question directly.

“I can’t make out the features from here.” Said Jochabed. “Do you know who they are?”

“Of course. Why else would I bring you out to look at them? Think back to about four years. When our own Apophis was on the throne here in Memphis. Who was it used to come to the river to bathe like that almost every day.”

“Do you mean to say that that is ...........?” Was Jochabed’s astonished response.

“I do. Not just the king’s daughter as Haphisea was of Apophis. She is the co-ruler, the sister of Ahmose. She is one of those three women that you see in the water. She is there three or four times every week.”

“What has that to do with our problem? What is it to me that the king’s sister goes down to the river to bathe once, twice or a hundred times every week? We have better things to do than watch her antics. Disgusting I call it. If the alligators got past the guards and took her we might all be better off.”

“It is so easy to think that.’ Miriam responded quietly. “But. You must believe me. I believe that she will be the means of saving our child.”

“How on Earth.........?” Exclaimed Jochabed, convinced that Miriam had lost her mind. How on Earth could the co-ruler of the land be any help in saving her expected son from the decree of her co-ruler?

Surely she must abide by the rules set by her brother. How could she avoid doing so? It was far beyond the powers of her mind for Jochabed to accept that Nefertari could be the salvation of her son.

“Come inside, where we can’t be disturbed and I will tell you of a plan that has been forming in my mind for some time now.”

“Come to my private room.” Jochabed invited. So mother and daughter left the roof-top and repaired to Jochabed’s sleeping chamber where Miriam outlined her plan. Her mother did not take

Page 30

to it at all. To her it appeared to be avoiding one horror to get involved in worse one. She had been taking her own precautions up to this time. She had never ventured out of the house since her fifth month. Since she had begun to swell too far for her flowing robes to hide it. There were servants to do what had to be done in the public eye. She hoped fervently that she could hide the expected babe long enough for him to be too old to be destroyed when found. What the authorities are not told about they do not KNOW about. Miriam did not agree with this assessment. She was aware that many of their relatives in the Delta had been able to get away with this sort of thing but in the great city of Memphis, where the king’s men were thick on the ground, she could not conceive of this happening. They knew too many Egyptians and even though their servants were of their own people, some of them had loose mouths.

As the days went by they both realized that time was running out.

The new babe was expected before the month was out. Less than three weeks away and a decision would have to be made. Jochabed finally conceded to Miriam enough to suggest that the plan be submitted to Amram for his opinion. To this Miriam objected.

“What if Father refuses to go along with it? Where will we be then?

Will we discard all thought of doing anything or shall we defy him?

You know that he is ever the cautious one and we can not afford any delay in our preparations.”

“I really don’t know.” Replied Jochabed. “I would not like to go along without his approval. He can be very difficult if he finds we have done something behind his back. He has been much worse since he has had so little authority at work.”

“Surely though, if we proceed with some of the preparations now to show him what can be done and then let him in on what we propose at the last minute he will then go along with it.”

“I find it difficult to see the plan succeeding.” Finally admitted Jochabed. “I can not hide my distress from your father. If I am reluctant he will not agree.”

“That seems to me to be about right. What about if we try to hide the babe for a while and see how that works out. No one outside this house, even those within our compound, is aware of your condition. You know that I was asked to help with Aaron. Perhaps we could deliver the babe ourselves and then no one will know that he has arrived.”

Page 31

“I think that your father will go along with that idea.” Finally agreed Jochabed. So the situation was left in that uncertain frame until something definite had to be done. Miriam bided her time knowing full well that no child could be kept quiet and unnoticed for very long.

As all newborns do the child arrived in his own good time. Just three years and ten days after his brother Aaron ventured into the world. This was the third son born to Amram bar Kohath from the tribe of Levi and his wife Jochabed, the youngest sister of his father’s oldest brother.

Miriam assisted at the birth as she did for his older brother Aaron.

A Hebrew servant woman skilled in child delivery directed the operation and as the child emerged and proved to be a boy Miriam knew that her plan must be put into effect. As he took his first breath with a sharp and lusty cry muted from the outside world by the thick brick walls of the dwelling she exclaimed. “This is the child destined to do great things for his People. I can see it in his little face. Maybe he will lead us out of this land of bondage into the Land of Promise.”

“Oh, Miriam. How can you say such a thing?” Retorted the midwife. “He hasn’t even suckled yet.” Phylel, the servant acting as midwife, then prepared the newborn for presentation to his mother.

“I not only see it.” Asserted Miriam. “I can feel it within me. It is as though a voice within is saying, ‘Protect this precious child with your life. Your destiny is in his hands’. Perhaps he is the chosen of El Elohim to lead us out of oppression to freedom.”

“Oh, Child. You are a one.” Said Phylel. “All this about a baby not yet suckled. Go on with you. Here, help me to get him properly bathed and swaddled.”

So much for the reception of Miriam’s vision, even amongst the lowly who are most receptive to that kind of thing than those who live in the higher echelons of society. Ever after that Miriam was careful to whom she spoke about her visions of the future. Her mother was somewhat receptive to her notions as all mothers like to think that their children will be the shining stars of the society of the future. Now that babe had actually arrived Jochabed was far more amenable to Miriam’s plan for his survival and willingly helped her to bring it to fruition.

Page 32

By the time that Amram had arrived home that evening the child’s mother and sister had decided on a name. Not that a search for a name had not occurred but that their final thoughts came together at last. Miriam’s visions of his future finalized the search and they confronted Amram with his new son JOSHUA, for they were certain that he would ‘save his people’.

“He’ll have a lot of growing up to do before he can do that.” Was Amram’s reaction to this news. “In the meantime we are faced with this edict that requires the death of all of our newly born males.

How do we get over that one? I am as anxious as you are to see him live. If it is discovered that WE are harboring a new-born male the repercussions will be most unpleasant, to say the least. It is difficult as it is, not being allowed to employ Egyptians on the one hand and on the other attempt to settle the discontent among our own people through the neglect of their personal affairs because of the forced labour they must perform under this oppressive regime. There are influential people in this land who resent our continued occupancy of our own home and our continued position here. They would welcome any excuse to condemn us and totally confiscate our property to their use. I’m all for keeping the child, of course, but you must understand the consequences of being caught. Not only the child’s life and well being are at stake. I will use whatever influence I may have to help you if you need any.”

Jochabed assured her husband that, although she did not yet know what was to be done about it, he could be sure that whatever was done would be discreet. Miriam was amore direct. “Father.” She declared. “I have a plan in mind. It is a little early yet to do any thing about it. Before doing anything we will ask the guidance of El Elohim and his blessing on its success. Do you wish to know what I have in mind?”

“No. I think it prudent that the fewer who know any details the better your chance of success. You have my blessing, whatever it is.

I am confidant that you will not do anything foolish or put your family at risk in the doing of it.”

“Thank you, Father, for your confidence. I shall make every effort to be worthy of it.”

The restrictions on the daily movements of the Israelis assisted in the secreting of the young Joshua. It was nothing untoward for most of the people to keep themselves out of the public eye. Amram

Page 33

himself was kept busy in the brickyards which he had formerly owned but in which he now worked as chief foreman under Egyptian management. Not having the authority that he once had his time was taken up mostly by keeping the peace between his former employees and their new enthusiastic masters.

This child was fed more frequently on demand than his siblings for, as parents have known throughout the ages, a baby can not cry while it is suckling. Not only can not cry but usually has no desire to do so. Thus was the young Joshua trained to expect his demands to be fulfilled instantly from very early in life. However, this could not go on forever. There came a time, several months down the track, when Miriam and Jochabed found that they could conceal him no longer. The time had come to put Miriam’s plan into action.

Jochabed still had her doubts. “There are so many things that can go wrong.” She objected when Miriam put it to her that the time had come to put her plan into action. “What if the Princess agrees with her brother? She will then just throw him into the river and that will be the end of him. A soldier in her guard may hear him and investigate. Then she would have no choice but to let him dispose of the babe. He would have to follow his orders.”

“Would he? No such orders may have been issued to soldiers.

However, Mother, you must have faith. El Elohim will protect him.

We will ask for His protection of Joshua when we act.”

She then directed her young brother, Nun, to fetch a canister of pitch while she made a place for it on the kitchen stove to warm it so that it could be used as she had planned. The papyrus basket that she had woven since the birth of this new babe was fetched by the younger sister, Rachel, and Miriam then directed the preparation of the basket. When the pitch was warm enough to pour from its container she poured it over the interior of the basket where it set in the cool air into a water-tight inner skin of the woven papyrus. Then turning it over she had pitch poured over the concave surface that it presented. There was now another watertight skin, on the outside.

“Look what a lovely little boat that we have made.” Exclaimed Miriam to her helpers.

“It will need a loop on its side so that we can tie a rope to it.”

“Why is that, Nun?” Was Miriam’s response to this inquiry by her young brother.

Page 34

“Don’t you know?”

Queried Nun. “And I thought you were clever.”

“Alright.” Said Miriam. “I’m dumb. Why will it need a rope attached to it?”

“To stop it floating away down the river and getting lost, Silly.

Once on the water the current will take it away from us and what good would it be then?”

“Hmm. Very true. But, you know what?” As Miriam paused for effect both her young siblings looked inquiringly at her. “This boat will be among the reeds near the bank. It will not be in the current to be floated away.”

“Why?” Came from the two young ones in unison.

“Because it will carry a very precious cargo that we must not loose no matter what. Even with a rope tied to it the boat could still get lost in the river. The rope might break or come loose, then where would the vessel be?”

“What is going into it then?” Asked the two curious children.

“We’ll see.” Was all that they were told at this time.

Miriam left the family gathered around the pitch covered basket and went to her own room to fetch other items that she had been preparing over the passing weeks. When she returned her brother and sister were amazed to see her put a cushion in the bottom of the basket over a lining of green leaves. It fitted snugly to the sides leaving a good hand’s breadth of basket exposed above the cushion.

Over that was laid a small woolen rug which extended over each side of the basket. At one end of the cushion she placed a tiny pillow. Then she fetched the new brother who had been sleeping peacefully in his crib in the nursery. By the time that she had carried Joshua to the kitchen he had awakened and was taking notice of all that was happening about him.

At three months of age Joshua was showing an intelligent awareness of his surroundings and he gazed round with interest when Miriam laid him in the vessel prepared for him. But, he was restless. He was unsure of this black smelly thing that he was now in the bosom of. His bottom lip dropped in a pout and his eyes screwed up.

“He doesn’t like it. He is going to cry.” Exclaimed Jochabed.

“Quick. Lift him out.”

This Miriam did and held the babe to her breast while she crooned soothing words to him. He very soon settled down. When he had

Page 35

done so she again placed him in the basket but this time supported him with her hands as she settled him onto the cushion. The assurance of Miriam’s touch allayed his fears but he was obviously still not happy to be there. He was then taken out and they did not pursue this exercise any further that day. “Why is Joshua being put in that basket?” Asked Rachel. “Just you wait and see.” Was Miriam’s reply to this query.

Several times each day after that Joshua was placed in the new basket until he became quite used to it and was prepared to even take his daily nap therein. The younger children were amazed at these goings on. What on Earth was the point in getting the baby to sleep in this pitch covered basket when he had a perfectly good crib in which to sleep?

A week after helping Miriam to construct the tiny vessel the children discovered the reason for its existence.

Very early in the morning, while the shadows cast by the rising sun were stretched across the land, Miriam stirred her two siblings. The babe had already been fed and made content in his new basket. The lid, not covered in pitch, to allow air to reach him while he lay beneath it, was lowered over him. There he lay contentedly gurgling to himself. Soothing himself to sleep again where he would not be heard.

Miriam took the children with her. They went out of the house compound and moved slowly across the meadow land lining the river bank. To all appearances they were only a small band of children out for a picnic on the river bank. The basket holding the babe could very well be taken for a food hamper taken by the children to satisfy their hunger as they played. Finally they stopped quite close to the bank and appeared to be playing there. In a short while the animals and birds that they had disturbed by their presence settled down again to their never ending foraging for food.

When all was quiet Miriam moved, unnoticed by either her siblings or passers by, close to the bank and deposited her precious burden among the tall papyrus growing in the shallows. The children continued to amuse themselves as children have done throughout the millennia of human development.

Nothing happened.

The Princess did not choose to bathe that morning. She did not appear and the babe made no fuss.

Page 36

When the sun rose half way to his zenith Miriam moved quietly and unobtrusively to recover the basket and then call the siblings to order. Chattering idly together they returned to their home.

Jochabed greeted the children joyously. She had been so anxious about them and their mission that her household tasks had been but sketchily performed as she peeped out of the window every time that she passed it to check on their progress. Now that the children were safely home again she could feed her new babe in peace and rest easily for the rest of the day.

In the course of the day Jochabed remarked to Miriam. “I noticed that you put the basket among the reeds. How could the babe be found there?”

“Mother. You were watching us. I thought that we had agreed that you would show no signs of anxiety about anything happening on the meadow.”

“I couldn’t help it, Dear. I am anxious but I did not stand gaping out. I just took quick peeps as I passed the window overlooking where you were.” ”A quick peep?”

“Well, you know, only a minute or two each time.”

“Yes, Mother, I understand. Just as well that we have no Egyptian servants.”

“I’m sure that our own people would not give us away.”

“One can never be over confident though.” ”You are right.” Agreed Jochabed. “I must tell your father how we fared today. He will want to know.”

“Why tell him?”

“Don’t you think we should?”

“I’m certain we should NOT.” “Why?” “You know how helpless men are when it comes to this sort of thing. He could well decide that today’s result is the very reason why we should not continue with our plans. So far he has not rejected any efforts to save little Joshua. Until he does we have his blessing. If we do not succeed and the inspectors find that we have saved the baby there will be great trouble. You know that, and I know that. But, I do not believe that it will come to that. What would Father do if it did? Would he ring his hands in despair as our elders have done for generations and claim that they can not go

Page 37

against the ‘will of Elohim’. Several years have gone by since the conquest and what plans has anyone made to get out of here? It probably has not even been thought about. We should have been in the ‘Promised Land’ generations ago. But what has anyone done about it? Nothing. Life has been too good lording it over the Egyptians. Now, we are being punished by God for being so lax.

We could be now ruling in our own land instead of being common labourers for the Egyptians who now lord it over us. Why wait for the men to move? What have they done for us so far? It is time that we women took stock of ourselves and took steps to make sure that things do happen.”

“My goodness.” Exclaimed Jochabed in astonishment. “What an outburst! I had no idea that such thoughts were going through your young head. Indeed. You have put into words what so many of us women have been thinking, especially now. We have let the men take charge and they have become so full of their own importance as rulers here that they have lost sight of the ‘Land of the Promise’.

We women have been too complacent also and have not urged them enough to make the moves necessary to get us out as we should have done.

Now we must all suffer for it.

We will not tell your father of the details of our operation.”

“Yes. Time enough for that when we succeed in saving Joshua.”

Miriam now had what she had wanted all along, the control of the operation on the spot. She well knew, even at her tender age, that what she planned to do required split second decisions made on the run as events unfolded. There would not be time or opportunity to wonder about the reaction of someone not directly concerned in those events. Hesitation would be fatal to the success of the mission.

The next day the little party set out again for the riverside meadow.

It was not unusual for children from all over to play here. Their presence was largely unnoticed by any passer by. As they emerged from the Amram household enclosure the domestic animals grazing there hardly lifted their heads as the children passed them.

The small animals and the birds of the wild were disturbed as they always are by the slightest motion but they soon settled down again to their scratching and grazing in their daily search for food.

The floating basket was hidden in the reeds and the Princess came down to bathe. She entered the water with her usual entourage

Page 38

watched by the children at play but again nothing happened. Not even the approach and repel of a scaly monster disturbed the peace of the day.

She noticed nothing unusual. The sleeping babe content in his floating nest made no sound so he went entirely unnoticed.

Again Miriam returned home and still had the babe with her.

“Doesn’t look very hopeful,” opined Jochabed to Miriam as she stood beside her while she suckled the babe.

“It is essential that the Princess find Joshua herself”. Said Miriam.

“It must not look as though the meeting has been engineered. There will be other people looking on and seeing what is happening. Any one of them could cause him to be thrown into the river.”

“Why are you so sure that she will rescue him when she finds him?”

Queried Jochabed. “I haven’t questioned you on that point before but I can not help it often running through my mind. How can you be so sure? You seem to take it for granted that Nefertari will not throw him into the river as her brother has decreed.”

“She is younger than he. Otherwise she would rule instead of him.

They rule jointly so she has at least as much say as he. There are no children to either of them and it is thought likely that there will not be. He because of his lifestyle and she because she is either not that way inclined or is barren.”

“How do you know all this?” Interrupted Jochabed.

“Well. You know how it is. People do not realize when they gossip among themselves that children, especially those of us who are no longer so young, understand much more of what they hear than is believed. In the market place people talk. We hear them. Besides that there is our cousin Rachelle, who, as you know, is the best gossip gatherer that there is, works in the palace. It is generally believed that Nefertari would love to have a child of her own. One is needed for the new dynasty that they hope to found. It must appear to be her own son. A babe found in the river could be passed off as a gift from the Gods. See what is possible?”

“My. You have thought it out. Haven’t you!” The admiration in the voice of Jochabed was unmistakable.

“After much prayer and meditation.” Replied Miriam.

“But, what can we do to get the Princess’s attention.” Asked Jochabed.

“Have you any ideas?” Asked Miriam.

Page 39

“Except that a babe cries most lustily when he is expecting to be fed and is not.”

“Of course, why did we not think of t hat before?”

“What do you mean ….?”

“Well. If we do not feed him so well as we have done when he is put in his basket he will be hungry when the Princess is in the water and she will hear his cries.”

“But, if she does not come to bathe others will hear him and then there could be great trouble. Much more than we can handle.”

“You are so right.” Acknowledge Miriam.

“What shall we do then?” Pondered Jochabed..

“Let’s give it some thought and by morning we may have a solution.” Miriam’s final suggestion was accepted by them both so they left it at that and went about their usual chores for the rest of the day.

Before Amram returned home that evening Miriam and Jochabed had decided on the course of action for the next day. Consequently, when the sun arose the next morning he did not see Miriam and her siblings out on the riverside meadow. They were waiting for he right moment for their emergence. As the Princess did not emerge, neither did they.

Still another day passed before the opportunity came that Miriam had been waiting for. From their housetop they heard the sound of the bathing group leaving the palace. As it emerged from the great opened gates Miriam and her brother and sister emerged from their home compound and wandered, apparently aimlessly, down to the river side. Without any fuss or ceremony they disported themselves on the sward. Unnoticed by any passer-by Miriam saw the basket, with its precious burden, was deposited among the reeds within the hearing of the bathing party. She and her two siblings then continued to play together on the grass as though it were a normal day and they had no expectations of anything unusual happening.

While they played there they observed the small troop of half a dozen soldiers make a clear way along the Royal Road. Their spear tips twinkled in the bright sunshine and the shields on their arms shone like minor suns. Their gleaming white kilts swayed in tempo with their marching steps. Behind them came four huge Nubians, their black skins in stark contrast to the whiteness of the linen loin cloths that they wore. On their heads bright red turbans made them

Page 40

appear as giants among their companions. In their hands were the great staves that they were to use to drive off any alligators foolhardy enough to approach the bathing party. Behind them came the chair containing the Princess and her attendants. It was borne on the shoulders of four Nubians who were giants among their own kind. The teenage boys who always followed her pranced along behind and following them came the rearguard of soldiers that made up the procession.

At this point Miriam had some second thoughts. How could her plan possibly succeed with so many people about? Perhaps she had been foolish to put it into operation? Her faith was again strengthened when she thought of the might of Elohim in whom she trusted. Surely He would not let her down.

Nefertari alighted from her chair when all was ready for her to do so. The voluptuous curves of her body more accentuated than covered by the diaphanous shift that was wrapped around her. No greater beauty was displayed by her famous descendent, Nefertiti two centuries later under Ramses the Great, her illustrious father. In her early twenties Nefertari still had the firm figure and upthrust breasts of her teen years. The boredom lurking in her lustrous almond eyes was visible only to a close inspection that was allowed to no one. The three Heqa Kasut children playing in the meadow among the others there rated not a moment’s attention from her.

She was well guarded from any untoward happening or intrusion so she expected to bathe in peace.

Time passed and Miriam began to despair that today would be like other days that had passed and they would return home no further advanced in her plans.

It would be difficult to know just who first heard the thin wail from among the reeds. The babe’s empty stomach had sent a message to his brain. Miriam looked up cautiously to see the tableau in the river frozen in time. They too had heard something. Only a moment passed and they went back to frolicking in the water, splashing each other and diving under the surface of the water to come up with water cascading down their lovely young bodies as they laughed together in delight. The Nubians and the soldiers continued to gaze steadfastly out over the water and toward the palace as though their lives depended on it, as indeed they did.

Page 41

Again the movement stopped abruptly. Miriam saw Nefertari’s gesture to her maids indicating her need for silence. There she stood with her arm extended, with the palm of her hand held toward the girls and her head to one side, obviously listening intently. He nudity was all too obvious to any onlooker. She had heard something strange and her interest had been aroused.

Miriam gestures to her siblings to be quiet and whispered to them an order to remain where they were until she returned. She then moved silently and unnoticed toward the group in the water. She was soon close enough to hear what was the Princess had to say to her maids.

The first few words were lost to her but she did hear “…hear that?

It sounds like a baby crying. Do you hear it?” To the maid nearest to her.

“No. My Lady. I hear nothing.”

All stood still, their nudity forgotten as they paused to listen. There it was again. Quite unmistakable this time.

“There it is again.” Exclaimed Nefertari. “It IS a baby crying. It is not far away. It is in the rushes. Over there.” She raised her beautiful arm in a sweeping gesture that could have indicated almost anywhere along the mighty river. The rushes had so distorted the cry that it was very difficult to pinpoint it.

“What! Why?” Came from the startled maid. “What would a baby be doing in the rushes. It could be drowning.”

“Use your head, Dumbo.” Retorted Nefertari. “If it were drowning it would not be crying. It has been hidden there, of course. Go, fetch it for me. I must see it. I can think of a very good reason for a babe to be hidden there.”

The maid took two assistants with her to gather the waif but their splashing through the shallows among the reeds gained his attention and he stopped his mewling. Their innate direction finders were thus rendered inoperative. They stopped in confusion. The quiet set him off again and they were able to direct their steps toward the sound. Again the noise distracted him and they had to stop their search. Once more the quiet set him off again and this time they were close enough to pinpoint his position. They returned in triumph to their mistress pushing the little vessel ahead them through the path that their search among the rushes had formed.

The movement of his nest again quieted the babe. The lid was still closed above him and he anticipated a feed very soon.

Page 42

Opening the lid of the basket the princess exclaimed. “What a lovely boy. So chubby and healthy. He has been well cared for.

He’s gorgeous.”

“A boy. My Lady?” Exclaimed the maid in wonder at this assumption after such a cursory examination. She had not even removed his tiny blanket.

“What else. You dumb ox.. This is obviously a Heqa Kasut child hidden away from the eyes of those vicious killers that my ridiculous brother has hired to get rid of all their new born children.

I girl would not be hidden. They are allowed to live unhindered.

Even one as stupid as you should realize that. Isn’t he gorgeous?”

“But, but, My Lady. We too will be in trouble if we are found with this child. We should throw it back. What about all those people around. Some one is sure to talk.” She gestured toward the soldiers and toward the children playing in the meadow.

“Who? Neither the soldiers nor the Nubians would dare to admit that they were looking this way. None of those silly boys sitting there on the jetty would dream of doing anything without my approval. None of you had better think of ratting on me either.”

This threat was also a promise.

Nefertari went on with no further thought or mention of what her brother desired. “What a lovely boy. So strong already. Look how he clings to my finger.”

“Shush. The guards can hear you.” Warned the chief maid.

“So what?”

“But. What can you do about him? You can’t take him straight back to the palace. The king is there today. He will have our heads if not yours.” Reality was beginning to raise its ugly head.

“Hmm. You have a point there,” acceded Nefertari and silence fell as they considered this point and individually and collectively exercised their minds to find a way out of this dilemma.

A young voice interrupted their musings.

“Your Highness.” Called out Miriam in confident tones that she was hardly feeling. She paused after that first phrase to ensure that she had their attention before proceeding to the heart of her plea.

This action was far from unrehearsed. “I just happened to be passing and could not but overhear that you have a small problem.

Perhaps I may be able to help you.”

Page 43

“You are Heqa Kasut. Are you not?” This was from Nefertari for want of something better to say.

“Yes. Ma’am.,” replied Miriam proudly. “I am.”

“Then how could you, a member of a captive race help me. Do you know who I am? Would you have influence with the king?”

“Yes Ma’am, I do know who you are. You are co-ruler with King Ahmose. You have influence with the king. But that will not be necessary. There is a way that I can help you without reference to his majesty” “How, pray, could that be?” Challenged Nefertari.

“By introducing him to the palace when he is much older than he is now.”

To herself she murmured, ‘I am co-ruler and have as much say as he does. With the child a little older he could not veto my having him. Any story of his origin would be plausible. But how?’ Aloud she said to Miriam. “That is all very well, but how will he survive till then?”

“If I could arrange for a wet nurse to suckle him for you it would be possible.”

Nefertari’s mind was now in a whirl with all the possibilities that opened up before her. Ahmose was unlikely to have an heir and she believed that she could not produce one. Here was her opportunity to establish a dynasty. What a glorious prospect. She too was almost breathless as she responded to Miriam’s offer. “Could you?

Would you? Of course you could or you would not offer. How soon? This will be my child. I will have him. Go. Do as you have offered and you shall be richly rewarded.”

Miriam needed no second command. Hardly stopping for a brief curtsey she raced for home with her siblings trailing behind her.

“Mother. Mother.” She called before she had even passed through the doorway. Gasping for breath she said. “It has happened. Come quickly.”

“What has happened, child? Come where?”

“The Princess. The Princess. She has found Joshua and wants him for her own. He is safe in Elohim’s hands. The king can not slay the child of his own sister. She needs a wet nurse to rear him. Who better than his own mother? Come.”

To Jochabed, as to the princess, a vast and incomprehensible future opened up before her. She stood speechless before it. Her own son

Page 44

in direct line to the throne of Egypt. He would have the power to return his people to the ‘Promised Land’. She would have some say in rearing him and could plant that seed in his mind.

She looked at her daughter, not down at her for she was almost as tall as her mother, with a gleam in her eye that has not been there for many months. She saw an answering gleam in that of her daughter as she stood there impatiently stamping her feet.

“Come. Let’s go.” Came at last from Jochabed as she too caught the enthusiasm of Miriam and they sped off together to meet their destiny at the river bank.

Both women, for Miriam had come of age in these last few exciting moments, curtsied to the Princess and Jochabed said. “Your Highness, we are at your service.”

“You have milk?” Questioned Nefertari “That is why I am here, Ma’am.” Was the reply by Jochabed without any rancour.

The princess turned her gaze upon Miriam with a long searching look. Then she turned to Jochabed and closely scrutinized her features as though wanting to engrave it permanently on her memory. She smiled, a knowing smile that said more to the two women facing her than any words ever could have done. It told them both that Nefertari knew the score as well as they did. No word would ever pass between them on this subject. No one else would ever know what they now all knew must be a life-long secret between them. She said.

“You were very smart, young lady. You certainly seemed to know just where to go. I have never seen anyone move so fast as you did across that meadow. Your feet did not touch the ground, I’m sure.

You are sure that this lady can nurse my child well? As well as any future king must be nurtured?”

The expression of excited anticipation that flitted across the faces of Jochabed and Miriam did not go unnoticed by the sharp eyes of Nefertari. Only she saw and only she recognized its significance.

Thus was hatched a plot by these three women that was to lead to the death of one king, many children and the relocation of a whole nation of people.

As though nothing had happened the princess went on. “You shall be suitably rewarded. Regular wages for the time you will expend caring for this, MY child. All expenses involved in rearing him and

Page 45

all the servants needed to ensure that he wants for nothing. Will you find that satisfactory?”

“Oh. Yes, My Lady. You are most kind.’ Responded Jochabed as she held out her arms to receive into her care her own child. He now had not only the protection of the Princess Royal, Queen in all but title, but the assurance of financial and physical support while ever it was needed.

“Just a moment.” Called Nefertari as they retreated. “Has the babe a name?”

The two women stopped dead in their tracks and for a moment.

They dared not turn round for fear of betraying the truth to any onlookers. At last, after an eternity that occupied several seconds of real time Jochabed turned slowly and faced the princess. “I am so sorry, Ma’am. The babe is so in need of being fed that I foolishly forgot to ask you by what name you wish to know him.”

“I understand.” Said Nefertari as she paused as though deliberating on what name she should give this foundling who was now hers and destined to ascend the throne of Lower Egypt. “I think that the name given to most of the males of this HOUSE would suit. We are all ‘taken from the water’ in one way or another. None more literally than this child. He shall be known as ‘Moses’. None then can dispute his claim to legitimacy as a family member.”

“Thank you, Ma’am.” Said Jochabed as she and Miriam turned for home at last with their hearts bursting with joy and gladness and gratitude to the Great Elohim.

“Just a moment.” Again came for Nefertari. The hearts of the two women sank as they half turned, anticipating a change of heart in the princess.

“I know not where you are taking my child. How can I know where to see him?” Without waiting for an answer she called out to the guards religiously facing toward the palace. “You, on the far left.

Nod your head if you hear me.” Receiving the nod she asked for Nefertari went on. “When I give the order you will take your companion on your right, turn left and follow two women you will see crossing that meadow to your left. One of them will be carrying a hamper. Follow them. When they arrive at their destination you will stay and guard that gate until you are relieved. Your companion will return to the palace and report to me personally. He

Page 46

will speak to no one until after I have spoken to him. If you understand you will both nod your heads.”

Receiving the nods she asked for Nefertari turned to Miriam and Jochabed and said. “These two soldiers will ensure your safe return to wherever you live and one of them will guard your home till I have him relieved. Now, go. Quickly, and care well for my child. I will come to check on his progress at your hands. See that you nurture him well. Oh. One last thing. The bright young lady who found a nurse for my child is?”

“Miriam. Ma’am.” Came from Miriam herself with a deep curtsey.

“And the nurse?”

“Jochabed, Ma’am. You may be assured that he will be well and properly cared for.” Said Jochabed unable to curtsey with Moses, as he must now be known, in her arms.

“I will care for him as though he were my own.” Added Jochabed.

Nefertari’s last admonition to them was. “I shall visit as soon as I can to make the provisions I have promised and to see that all is well with my son. You may go now.”

As Jochabed and Miriam turned and walked slowly homeward they were accompanied by the ringing laughter of Nefertari as she returned to frolicking in the blessed waters of Mother Nile with her companions in crime.

Page 47

CHAPTER IV MOSES AND MIRIAM True to her word the Princess appeared the next day at the home of Amram. There could be no mistaking the status of the visitors.

First, three soldiers as a vanguard. The Princess herself was accompanied by a handmaid travelling with her in the covered chair borne on the shoulders of four huge Nubian slaves. Behind her came three servants with bundles balanced on their heads. Bringing up the rear were three more soldiers.

The whole entourage halted at the gate of the courtyard while the corporal of the guard announced the presence of Princess Nefertari and her desire to enter. The last thing he would expect of such a request would be a refusal.

Amram had been appraised of the events of the previous day and had remained at home in anticipation of this visit. He wanted to see and hear for himself this tremendous good fortune that his daughter had brought on his household. He responded to the Royal Presence by saying. “Her Highness is welcome to my humble abode. Show her in.”

Nefertari was impressed by the high brick wall surrounding the well laid out and immaculately kept compound and the well maintained buildings. The servants moving about the grounds impressed Nefertari with the status of this household and she hesitated, somewhat nonplused by the realization that the women of this household would not be used to menial work. Her previous day’s offer of wages now seemed to her that she may have made a mistake and perhaps offended the master of this household. Either that or her guide had brought her to the wrong address.

As the bearers lowered the carriage to the ground Amram approached the litter and said. “Welcome to my humble abode, Your Highness. We are certainly honoured by your presence here today.”

“Sir.” She replied. “I am seeking two women, one of them is a maiden to whom I entrusted a special task yesterday. I have been led here as the place of their abode. This splendour is not quite what I expected to find. I am afraid that I may have to seek further. Still,

Page 48

you may be able to help me. The name of the persons I seek are Miriam and Jochabed. Miriam is the young one.”

“You have not been misled Ma’am. The two people you seek do indeed live here.” He thoroughly enjoyed the momentary look of relief and surprise that flitted across the countenance of Nefertari but he kept a perfectly straight face as he turned slightly to beckon Jochabed as she stood in the portico of the main house. As she approached Amram said to the princess. “I believe you and my wife have already met.” Again he was delighted to see the fleeting look of surprise and enlightenment on the face of Nefertari as she glanced toward where he had gestured.

Recognising the ‘nurse’ that she had engaged the previous day, Nefertari rose from her seat, alighted from her litter and approached Jochabed, holding out her arms to receive the babe that was laid in them. He smiled at her as she took him in her arms thus confirming her determination to have him as her own. Turning to Jochabed she said. “Please forgive me if I have been presumptous in offering you wages to engage in menial work. I had no idea of all this.” As she swept her arm round to encompass the compound and its several buildings. “The young woman who kindly offered to help find me a wet nurse for this child, whom the Gods delivered to me from the Holy Mother River, gave me no indication that you were other than a servant. Where is that young woman? Is she nearby?”

“I am indeed your servant Ma’am. As for that young woman, she is inside the house where she is putting the nursery in order for the day. Would you care to come in and see for yourself where your child is to be accommodated and the quality of care he will receive?”

“Certainly, as that is what I came here for. My servants here have some clothing and other things for the babe. Could they come in also and help to put things away for future use?’

“They are welcome to accompany you. Come. Who are we to deny access to our humble abode to the highest in the land?”

Following Jochabed into the house and through to the nursery Nefertari was favourably impressed by all that she saw. She saw that the future king of Lower Egypt would not be reared in a hovel as she had secretly feared. Here was a home fit for the training that he would have to undergo. She made no comment on the extensive preparations made for this child, supposedly unexpected. She made

Page 49

no inquiry concerning the nursery so obviously readied in expectation of an occupant. She already knew the answer and was not surprised when Miriam acknowledged herself as the daughter of Jochabed.

“You certainly have made a suitable home for my Moses. I thank you heartily for that. Looking into his little face she said. “I have surely named him fittingly. His grandfather, Kamose, will be proud of him when he finds out about him. He will make a fine Crown Prince. His uncle Ahmose must not know about him just yet. Time enough for that later. My own Moses will be king even if his uncle does have a son. I’ll see to that.

“My gifts seem somewhat superfluous.” Continued Nefertari with a small knowing smile dancing about her lips. “There is so much here already.”

“There are four other children in this house. The youngest is only a little over three years of age so there is quite a store of children’s things accumulated about us. What you have brought will be welcome and will be used effectively. Moses will want for nothing, you may be sure.” “Í am confident that the care he will receive here will be such that even his real mother, whoever she may be, would be satisfied.”

This was the princess’ comment, she being well aware that she was talking to the real mother. She was continuing the pretence that these three women would continue for the rest of their lives. No attempt was ever made by the princess to ascertain why Jochabed was still with milk three years after the birth of her last baby. At least a year after he could be expected to have been weaned. Why ask a question to which one already knows the answer?

Declining to partake of the light refreshments offered to her Nefertari departed the Amram Household bidding farewell to Amram, as he stood at the gate of the compound, with the words.

“Good-bye, Kind Sir. You have brought joy to a lonely heart. You will be richly rewarded and I wish you well.”

“Your patronage and friendship are reward enough for me.”

Replied Amram as she was borne away from the estate.

That night Miriam wrote in her diary: ……

‘The hand of Elohim is in this. My brother is to be king of this land.

The Princess Royal herself has declared it and she can make it

Page 50

happen. As the king he surely will be able to lead us out of this land and into the land of ‘The Promise’. I must do my part by directing his young mind in this direction.

I believe that the princess is aware that the babe is one of us. She said as much when she rescued him from the river. I also believe that she is aware that his ‘nurse’ is his mother and that I am his sister. But, she will never admit this in public, or in private either.

As a foundling she has a better claim to him as her own and has a right to have him cared for as such. I wonder when she will tell the king, or if she will tell him at all. She seems quite unconcerned about what he might think or do. She appears to have made up her mind that Moses, as we shall have to get used to calling him, will be king.

I hope and pray that he will be and be able to lead us into our heritage.

God bless us all.”

Miriam was now fourteen years of age and by the standards of that time almost an adult. The increased difficulties of running what had been his own brickyards under the increasing pressure and often ‘above and beyond the call of duty’ kept Amram very busy form day to day. Repression by the Egyptian overseers appointed by Ahmose kept Amram away from home for increasingly longer periods of the day. This naturally increased the workload on the members left to run the household.

Moses, as the child of the water episode was named by his mentor, was an increased burden for his training was under the eye of the Princess Royal who visited whenever she felt inclined to do so. The whole establishment had thus to be kept up to the standard she required at all times. Not that this was impossible nor much beyond their power to do so. Amram was still a prominent and well respected member of the ‘Brotherhood’ and able to continue to live a life style not greatly diminished from that which he had enjoyed when his own people were on the throne.

As a result of these constant pressures the responsibility for Moses became increasingly the province of Miriam. This was not an easy task as the special treatment he necessarily received gave the growing child an inflated opinion of his own importance. His adopted mother was a frequent visitor to the Amram Household and

Page 51

always with a Royal escort. Between her visits she would delegate a handmaid to visit and report back to her. No human babe surrounded by such a panoply of gifts and special treatment could hope to have a ‘normal’ outlook on life. His natural mother and Miriam fought a losing battle to obtain the ‘normalcy’ that they strove for.

Moses expected and received special treatment at all times and his quick and agile mind increased his natural capacity for taking every opportunity for imposing his will on those around him. He entered into the family activities as well as any other member of it but always with the tendency to impose his will over that of others. He was soundly tutored in the Israeli traditions and lore. Aspirations of migration to the ‘Land of The Promise’ were instilled into his developing psyche in the hope that he would be the Great Deliverer that they were looking for.

When he reached schooling age his adopted mother appointed tutors from the Palace staff to imbue him with the traditional lore of Egypt.

As the months and years passed by Nefertari became more familiar with the Amram household. The formality of her visits became somewhat relaxed so that she got into the habit of more informal visits. She was then accompanied by only one maid and only two or three soldiers of the Royal Guard. While the princess visited the maid, accompanying her, often joined with her in the family activities and even joined with them for a meal, as they became almost one of the family. The soldiers, however, always remained in the courtyard where they fraternized with the servants or played parlour games or cast dice between them until they were summoned to form up again to escort Nefertari back to the palace.

As Moses approached his third birthday a fresh face appeared among the military escort. He was a young man in his late teens.

Too old to be of interest to the princess as a personal companion yet there was that in his attitude to Nefertari to indicate something more than just a lowly ‘other ranks’ of the elite Palace Guard.

This young man, Heotept, was very soon noticed by Miriam as he loitered in the courtyard of the Amram compound. As Miriam herself put it. “I felt his gaze following me wherever I went. He is an Egyptian and yet I feel an attraction between us. His gaze is not

Page 52

unwelcome, as it should be. I seem to want him to notice me. When he left today I found myself looking forward eagerly to his return and feeling trepidation that he may not come back again. He is only a palace guardsman and it is Nefertari’s whim whether he is ever asked again to accompany her to our home’ About ten days later Heotept again was included in Nefertari’s entourage on her visit to see Moses. Miriam again felt that fatal attraction to him and felt sure, from his attitude that he also was attracted to her. Being reared as she was this worried her so much that she was not her usual efficient and cheerful self. Nefertari noticed this and remarked. “Miriam, what ails you today? Are you worried about something? Is anything lacking in provision for my Moses?”

“No. My Lady.” Was Miriam’s reply. “Nothing is lacking. You are most kind and thoughtful in attending to his needs. We welcome you as a friend as well as the mother of Moses. Perhaps I am a little tired today. I had a very trying day yesterday. Moses was a little hard to manage. He had one of those days when nothing seemed to please him. He is cutting more teeth and he is not very happy about it. That is not unusual, of course. All babies have those problems.”

“Please do not hesitate to inform me if there is any trouble for, remember, you are rearing a future king of Egypt.”

“He will not let us forget that. You may be sure. You have no idea how hard it is to get him to do something that he doesn’t want to do.

Neither Nun nor Aaron were nearly so difficult.”

Nefertari did not take this gentle allusion for what it was, perhaps, intended or had just slipped out. She replied. “Ha! A true royal. I shall be proud of him. I am sure.”

Miriam made no further attempt to get across the message of Moses’ innate perverseness. She turned away and stole a glance at Heotept to see if he had heard anything of the exchange between the two women. If he had he gave no sign of it. He continued to gaze steadfastly at the servants working in the gardens. Not even a sign that he knew of her existence so close to him. However, when that visit of Nefertari’s came to a close and Heotept accompanied her out through the gateway he turned at the last moment and gave a

Page 53

friendly wave that was obviously directed at Miriam. With this she had to be content.

The maids developed the habit of calling in on Miriam during their off times and became quite friendly with her and her family. They would often join with her in her activities for the day, often not leaving till it was time to return to their duties at the palace. Thus Miriam was kept abreast of the gossip and happenings at the palace.

In the course of time she learned about a special celebration planned for Nefertari. She was about to turn twenty-five and a gala celebration of this event was to be presented by her brother the king.

The girls discussed the preparations and gossiped about who was expected to be invited to the party. All the prominent nobles had been invited and most were expected to attend. Some joyously.

Some dutifully and others who were afraid that they might offend either Ahmose or Nefertari if they did not. No Heqa Kasut had been invited, no matter how important socially he or she may be.

Although the conquest was now over four years into history the scars were not yet healed enough for either race to tolerate the other at such close quarters as a Royal Soiree. Ahmose would not have one within sighting distance if he could avoid it. So, as he was organizing this affair there was no chance that such an invitation would have been considered.

When excitement concerning the coming celebration had reached fever pitch in the market places Amram had a visit by a messenger from the palace. This in itself was not so surprising for emergencies did arise at times that required Amram’s attention. At such times a messenger would be dispatched to his home to alert him to the need for action. What was surprising about this particular visit was that immediately after the departure of the messenger Amram called Miriam into his office to tell her that the visit concerned her.

Miriam was taken aback by her father’s first words to her. “Whom do you know at the Palace, Young Lady?”

“The princess, of course. You know that, Father. We all know her well. She is almost one of the family.”

“I am well aware of that, MY Girl. It is not the princess that I am thinking of. Who else is there?”

Page 54

‘The maids. They are frequently here and often on a personal basis.

But they talk personally to me. Why would they need to send a message?”

“Nothing to do with them, I believe. Although, they could be behind it. I have noticed a growing friendship between you and them. It is not the most pleasing development to come out of all this business but I suppose there is nothing I can do about it. I can’t be sure one way or another for I have not been given the details of who is behind this invitation.”

“INVITATION”. Exclaimed Miriam as she covered her mouth with her hand in wonderment at the thought of being invited to the party that was the talk of the city. “Not the birthday celebration?”

“Yes, Indeed. To that very celebration. From none other than the Commander of the Palace Guard, Amenhotept himself. How could he know about you?”

“I certainly do not know HIM. I know that there must be a commanding officer but who he is I have no idea. One of the men who guard Nefertari when she comes here has been friendly. Just talk friendly. On an occasion we have had a conversation with him when he has been waiting in the yard for the princess to return to the palace. Why should he invite me, and how could he? He is only a soldier in the guard. What influence would he have in the palace?

It must have been Nefertari herself. She has prompted this so that she would be one step away from it.”

The glow in her cheeks and the slight nervousness of her manner was not lost on Amram. He said. “What has been going on here?

What is this fellow’s name?”

“Nothing, Father. Really. His name in Heotept and he is just a humble soldier who wants to be friendly rather than an enemy of us.”

“Anyway.” Finally remarked Amram. “You have been invited to a party at the Royal Palace. Although not coming from the king himself, a most unexpected event, or personally from The Princess it is almost in the nature of a Royal Command to such as we are now.

I don’t know that we have much option of a refusal. You are of an age when you can appear at such gatherings so there is no reason for

Page 55

not accepting this invitation. If you wish not to go I will do my best to do something about it. I still know some people of influence in the ‘Brotherhood’ and may be able to get you out of it if you do not wish to go.”

“OH. No, Father. Please do not put yourself to any trouble. I would love to go. It would be grand to see how Nefertari lives at home. She is so gracious and lovely here with Moses, as we have grown used to calling him now, and it seems to come so naturally to her. I am sure that she would be the same in any situation. The maids I have become so friendly with will most likely be there somewhere also so I shall not be alone among strangers.”

“Very well, My Dear. I shall send word back to the palace tomorrow that the invitation has been accepted. I do hope that you meet with no embarrassment there for there are people among the palace crowd that still strongly resent any of us having any status above that of the most menial labourers. They little realize the importance that we really are to the country. Kamose is the wise one.”

“Nefertari will be there for the celebration is in her honour. She must know some thing of this and will be prepared to see that all goes well.”

“MMmmm. I see.” Mused Amram, although he gave no inkling of what it was that he saw.

To Jochabed, as to all women throughout the ages, from time immemorial, an invitation to a soiree at the palace was only an excuse for shopping spree only one step below that of a Royal Wedding. The next day saw her taking Miriam to the market place to obtain the necessary materials for a gown suitable for the occasion. Miriam was a reluctant shopper. She did not wish or expect to be in any way standing out in the crowd. To meld with it was what she was planning. To be anywhere but on the sidelines was beyond her wildest dreams.

Jochabed was not to be denied. She overrode all objections and swept from shop to shop even, at times, annoying the merchants till she found exactly what she was looking for. In Miriam’s own words.

Page 56

‘What a day we had today. Mother was so cheeky. We must have entered every shop in Linen Street. I am sure that some of the shopkeepers were annoyed with her being so picky. It is a lovely fabric the colour of a summer sky at noon. Just a hint of blue away from the white. Silken threads run through the fabric about a handbreadth apart and shine in the light like silver. The girdle looks as though it is made from fine gold threads twisted together but it is of fine silk. The fabric for the cloak is the colour of ripe corn.

Mother has promised to get Uncle Izhar to make me a pair of sandals that, although made of leather will look to be made of gold.

How he does that I have no idea, but they are very popular.

“I told Mother that I thought all this to be quite unnecessary as I would most likely be spending most of my time with the maids and they would be dressed simply. This she denied, pointing out that the people surrounding the princess would all be of noble birth so would be dressed accordingly for the occasion. I would hate to be overdressed and draw attention to myself and perhaps get us well into trouble as Father thinks we might. But, there is no stopping Mother when she has made up her mind. Father has tried to get Mother to back off a little but the reception that his suggestion received caused him to ‘back off’ and wander away shaking his head’’.

In the early afternoon of the appointed day, as the sun was on his way from the zenith to the western horizon, Miriam was ready to be taken to the palace. She had been informed that she would be called for so was ready at the appointed time. She had done her best to get information from her friends from the palace as to the source of the invitation but they refused to say, making as though they knew nothing about it. Miriam suspected that they knew more than they were prepared to admit but could get nothing from them. They assured her that Nefertari was pleased that she had been invited but had not initiated the invitation. They also doubted that they and Miriam would be spending much time together.

Knowing when but not how she would be called for gave Miriam some food for thought while she was waiting. Could it be an oxcart? She would look so strange in an ox cart in all this finery.

Page 57

Maybe one of those sedan chairs that the lesser nobility were so fond of using on special occasions. No one would ever know the turbulent thoughts that passed through her mind as she stood in the portico of her home her raven locks spilling over the brightly coloured headband attempting to hold them in control. The corn coloured cloak reflecting the glory of, and beneath it the silvery threads of the dress glinting in, the bright Summer sun shining as only the sun of Egypt can shine.

Waiting time is always longer than real time so that in the few minutes that seemed to Miriam to be hours, she observed movement on the Royal Way. A royal war chariot, its gold and bronze trimmings glistening in the sunlight, with two well mounted outriders, left the road and turned toward the Amram dwelling.

This small cavalcade swept through the gate of the compound and up to the house. Seeing Miriam standing there one of the outriders halted his steed and addressed her. “I have been ordered to escort the Lady Miriam to the palace. Is it herself that I have the honour of addressing?”

“I am she.” Replied Miriam, trying as best she could to hide her excitement.

The soldier dismounted and escorted her to the chariot in which she was to ride to the palace. She did not recognize the driver to whom the dismounted soldier handed her but her trust in Nefertari, or whoever had sent this conveyance, was such that she had no qualms about entrusting herself to his skill. Her whole family was assembled under the portico to bid her farewell. Her father and mother with Nun, Rebecca, Aaron and Moses ranged on either side of them.

As she disappeared on the way to the palace Amram turned to his wife and said. “Mother. Our little girl is a woman today. She has changed before our very eyes. May Elohim preserve her in whatever she is doing. I fear for her.”

“Yes, My husband. She has been becoming a woman for some time now. Today it shows. Have no fear. She has great faith. El Elohim guides and guards her and I am positive that we will have great cause to be very proud of her some day.”

Page 58

“I’m sure we will. Yes … we can be sure of that. She has been a tower of strength to you these last few trying years and there is much to that girl that we haven’t seen yet.”

“I KNOW there is. She predicted that Aaron and Moses would both be boys, you know.”

“Did she. I had do idea.”

“You should take more notice of your children. The plan that saved our youngest son was hers. Not only the plan but the implementing of it was in her hands. It was she who confronted the princess and had her retain me as his nurse. Our daughter has been no child for some time.”

“El Elohim is guiding her. I trust that we will still be alive to see the deliverance of our people. That occupies much of her thought.”

“You do listen sometimes then.”

“Of course, Probably much more than you realise.”

“Hmmm. Men!” Muttered Jochabed as they retired from the scene.

The chariot and its escort swept up to the steps fronting the Grand Hall at the palace. Looking up, Miriam saw Heotept, resplendent in his full military uniform as an officer of the Palace Guard. Added to this was a wide collar of many coloured ceramic beads strung on threads of gold worn only by members of the Royal Family and its connections. The red cloak flowing from his shoulders was trimmed with a band of white silk half a hand in width.

She was thrilled to see him there and her joy was complete when he looked directly at her with a welcoming smile on his face. Her final little niggling uncertainties were put to rest when he descended the steps and held out his hand to assist her from the vehicle. Awe overwhelmed her as she descended to the ground to be led by Heotept up the steps and into the Grand Hall. She finally realised that she, as a member of the conquered and humbled race, was being introduced to royalty as an associate of one of them.

“I am so glad you could come.” He greeted her. “And you look wonderful. At first glance I thought you must have been someone

Page 59

else but when I saw that it was my chariot that you were in then it could be none other than you. The very person I have been longing to see again since last we farewelled. My Heqa Kasut princess.”

“No princess, Sir. Just a humble domestic servant girl who serves the royal Princess of Egypt.”

“Don’t venture to admit that here today. You’ll be my Princess here. Never a servant. And I am Heo to you as to all my friends.”

“It will be difficult to not call you ‘Royal Highness’ with that collar you are wearing.”

“Then you shall be ‘Princess Miriam’ from a distant and exotic country.”

“OH. NO. Not that. I could never carry it off and besides, we might both be in trouble for treason if we tried that on.”

“Then Heo it has to be.” Was his final word as they ascended the steps into the portico leading to the entrance to the Great Hall.

Miriam could do no more than nod in agreement.

In the Great Hall elaborate preparations had been made for this most auspicious occasion. To the left of the couple as they entered were long tables loaded down with spiced and curried meats of all descriptions. Lamb and venison cuts were prominent. Peacock tongues had been preserved in jelly. Devilled pigeon eggs were piled high on platters. As a centrepiece a suckling pig roasted whole and still hot from the spits was enthroned in its large silver tray, on a small silver pedestal. Its surface glistened from the basting it had received and a red pomegranate was held in its grinning jaws. Its eyes were opened and staring at the guests.

To the right of them other long tables held cakes made from all the different grains grown in Egypt, wheat, rye, oats and barley. The styles were legion. Some were plain and others were topped with towers of whipped cream. Interspersed with the plates of cakes were dishes of fruit from all parts of the world. Olives from across the Great Sea. Figs from far away places. Tamarinds from distant lands and great bunches of purple grapes were beside them bursting their skins with joy.

Page 60

At the far end of the hall was a raised platform, a dais, on which was a high backed, throne like chair provided for the guest of honour for the day. The Princess Nefertari herself. A huge crowd of people had already arrived and they were milling about on the vast expanse of floor between the tables. As Miriam entered on the arm of Heotept she felt overwhelmingly nervous in the face of this regal and vice-regal crowd. She involuntarily clutched Heo’s arm for support. He gently responded by putting his hand over hers and saying. “Don’t be afraid of them. You will shine here today.

Believe me.”

Before Miriam could make any response to this a voice was heard approaching. “HO! Hi. You old dog. What have you here? You are a close one. You are the sly one aren’t you? You had no companion to bring with you today. Ha, Ha Haa. I suppose this vision hanging on your arm is only a mirage and I have a vivid imagination.” Then, with a sudden change of tone he addressed Miriam. “Oh. Gorgeous one. Where have you been hiding?”

Miriam, rather nonplused, looked to Heo for guidance in how to meet this ebullient young man. Obviously not as young as he looked for he had to be a contemporary of Heo, who answered for her.

“Not hiding, Meno. Lives almost within sight of the palace. But, no one has looked that way till I did.” Then to Miriam. “Don’t let this character worry you. He is the joker of our unit. Every thing is fun to him. But, there is no one I would rather have by my side than Menoteres when the battle gets hot.”

“Get away with you. You know that the sight of the enemy send me mad.”

“Yes. I know. Mad to win at any cost with little thought for yourself and much consideration for those under your command.”

“Let’s not talk of serious matters on such a lovely and eventful day.

A day of celebration of the anniversary of the birth of the most beautiful Nefertari is not a day for being anything but joyful.”

“Agreed.” Said Heotept. “Let us be only joyful today.”

“Well!!” From Menoteres.

Page 61

“Oh. Of course. The lady’s name. First a word of warning. Hands off. Don’t even think about it.”

“You know me better than that. This gorgeous vision must have name. She is too lovely to be called ‘Hey you.’”

“I know you only too well. However, I shall take the risk. Meno, meet Miriam, the loveliest girl in this hall today. Miriam, my Dear, meet my good friend and companion in arms, Menoteres.”

“Miriam. That’s a Heqa Kasut name.” Responded Meno with a slight, almost imperceptible, hesitation and a flash of surprise on his face.

“So!” Said Heo with a stern look, which his friend interpreted as the warning it was meant to be.

“OH.” Was his response. “Not that it matters. We are all, after all, part of the same scene. We depend on them as much as they depend on us. I guess.” Then, with a welcoming bow to Miriam, he said.

“So glad to meet you. Any friend of Heo’s is a friend of mine.

Welcome to this hall and to this affair. I trust that you will enjoy yourself and return home with a good opinion of us here.”

“I’m sure I can say the same to you as a good friend of Heo. I am glad I met you and look forward to meeting you again before this ‘affair’, as you call it is over.”

“I’ll make a point of it.” Declared Meno as he turned away to meet and greet other friends and acquaintances that he knew in the gathering.

With a slight answering curtsy to Meno Miriam turned with Heo to mingle with the other guests that had already arrived and were still arriving.

Mingling with the growing crowds were servant girls attired in flowing white linen gowns supported by a single strip of material over one shoulder. In their hands were trays holding gold and silver goblets in which were choice and exotic wines from near and far to quench the thirst of the guests. Selecting a goblet from one of the trays Heo handed it to Miriam, saying. “Try this. It is the latest from Crete, the land of the finest wines. It has a very special aroma.

It has been especially prepared for ladies.” As he selected wine for

Page 62

himself he glanced over Miriam’s shoulder and recognized, across the hall, his uncle Amenhotept, who was the Famous General Commanding the Palace Guard.

Almost at the same instant Amenhotept glanced in their direction and waved a welcoming greeting to them. Excusing himself from the group he was conversing with he made his way through the crowds separating them to either side. Being a head taller than everyone else in the hall the crowds opened before him as he progressed across it. The sparkle in his eyes as he approached proclaimed his approval of Miriam before he even drew abreast of them.

“Uncle.” Said Heo before the Commander could open his mouth.

“I would like you to meet the lady I asked you to invite here today, Miriam. Miriam, my uncle Amenhotept. His bark is worse than his bite.”

“Don’t get over confidant about that, My Lad.” He exclaimed with a hearty slap on Heo’s shoulder that almost dislocated it. “This is the Lady Miriam, daughter of the famous brickmaker and Grand Master Mason. When you asked me to invite her to this DO you neglected to tell me how lovely she is. Why! The Princess Royal herself will be hard put to it to look lovelier. She will not be happy about that.

Do not let that worry you, My Dear. She’ll be so busy with her troupe of young men celebrating with her today that she’ll have no eyes for anything or anybody else. Found the baby in the bulrushes, indeed, a likely story. With all those young fellows in tow day and night she has no idea who the father can be. She is lucky you came by at that moment, young lady. She is passing it off as a Heqa Kasut child found by accident and rescued from her ‘evil’ brother’s harsh laws. Ha, ha, ha, does she think that we were all born yesterday?”

Miriam knew not in which direction to look or what to say to this last remark and the embarrassed flush and wide open eyes in wonderment that faced the uncle caused him to pause in his garrulous welcome of his nephew and his companion.

Only for a brief moment of time did he pause. Picking up almost immediately he said. “I am sorry, young lady, of course you do not know the reputation or anything of the life style of the Princess

Page 63

Royal. It was very remiss of me to speak as I did. Please forgive me. That episode is the most poorly kept secret in the palace. Heo told me that you are caring for this babe. That is where he met you.

Is it not? This came out when he asked me to invite you to this nonsense here today.”

Collecting her wits rapidly about her Miriam responded with. “I thank you most sincerely for your invitation to this celebration. I had no idea where it came from. Your position, yes. But not of the person who owned that name and rank. Of the purpose I could only speculate. I am so glad to be here. There are many nice people here to meet.”

“Lovely, ……… lovely. She knows what to say and when. A real diplomat. You are a lucky man, young fellow. Lovely to look at too. Doubly lucky. I wonder ……….. Perhaps what Nefertari claims is the truth after all. Mmmm. I guess that the less I know about that the better.” Was his final remark as he turned to mingle further with the guests, chuckling softy to himself.

“You mustn’t mind my uncle.” Said Heo in some sort of explanation for his elder’s conduct and as an assurance to Miriam.

“He is the commander of the Palace Guard and a cousin to the king.

He has very definite views on almost anything and is not afraid to speak his mind anywhere at any time. He can sometimes be an embarrassment to his associates but he is very popular with the men.

Also he is a great favourite with Kamose. There is gossip in Royal circles that he would like to marry Nefertari but she has decidedly other ideas. If he really has leanings in that direction he covers it well. He is always critical of her but is able to get away with it because of his connections with King Kamose to whom we are all subject ultimately. He is quite bitter about the teenagers who are constantly in attendance on her. They never get older than sixteen.

At that age they are drafted into National Service and are never seen in the palace again. I bore you. I am sorry.”

“NO. You don’t. I can speak only as I find her and the princess is so lovely with Moses. She adores him absolutely. More so than if she were his natural mother. She did find him in the bulrushes. I saw it happen. I saw her take him from the basket in which he was floating.”

Page 64

“I’ll take you word for that. I have seen her with him and it is obvious that she dotes on him. You know whose baby he is. So does she. But no one else will ever know for sure and the gossip does not phase her. Even if it does come from her uncle Amenhotept. Come, though. Enough of this serious talk for this evening. We are here to enjoy ourselves. Let’s do so.”

Choosing from the myriad of meats and grain dishes before them took most of their attention. The rest was taken up with the meeting the many friends of Heotept that pressed to be introduced to Miriam unless Heo ‘got in first’. Thus they drifted with the crowd and moved off with it to the outer fringes of the hall for a reason not yet but soon apparent.

A prolonged fanfare of trumpets was heard without the hall. The great bronze doors to the Palace precinct opened to admit the heralds to be followed by a phalanx of youths with Nefertari in their midst. She was resplendent in a white linen sheath trimmed with ermine and over it a long flowing cloak of fine silk in Royal Purple trimmed with gleaming gold threads and sweeping almost to the floor. Golden sandals were on her feet and on her head a golden tiara sparkling with so many gems that it seemed to glitter with a light all its own. Over her shoulders was a wide royal collar so inlaid with lapis lazuli that at first glance it appeared to be crawling with blue beetles.

The boys were dressed in off white fine linen kilts with wide red sashes aslant across their bare torsos. On their feet were tooled leather sandals. Bright silver headbands kept their long dark tresses in place and each one held a long handled fan of peacock feathers.

As the afternoon was still hot the constant movement of the fans created a cooling breeze around The Princess.

As soon as she had settled into the high backed throne like chair reserved for her she gestured toward the doorway through which she had herself entered only a few moments before. All the eyes in that great hall then focused on this entrance. They were rewarded by another prolonged fanfare of trumpets followed by the swelling sound of cymbals, tambourines and strings in concert.

Accompanying this orchestra a troupe of dancing girls erupted into

Page 65

the room and flowed to its centre where they immediately went into the routine they had prepared for this special occasion.

The diaphanous drapes fastened to their waist bands revealed more of the voluptuous curves of their young flesh than they hid as the dancers cavorted, leapt, twirled and cartwheeled around the floor to the frenzied music of the orchestra. When the dance reached its climax all but two of the dancers twirled out of the hall and left the two stars to continue to entertain the guests. As these two eventually retired from the hall they did so to the deafening applause of the guests and loud calls of “More. More. More.�

As an encore the star of the troupe returned to favour the guests with a most exotic and somewhat erotic dance that held them spellbound, At last she retired to thunderous applause leaving a trail of diaphanous drapes behind her as she ran naked form the hall.

The applause was still echoing from the ceiling when a troupe of magicians entered. They were decked in long flowing electric blue robes with high peeked black hats on their heads. Woven into the fabric of the robes and the hats were circles, triangles, squares and other mystic symbols with silver threads. In each right hand was a wand as long as the arms that held them.

When they reached the centre of the hall they all, in unison, cast their wands to the floor. Each then appeared as a deadly viper that crawled vigorously away from the magicians toward the guests gathered round them. The women screamed in terror at the approach of the perceived serpents. They drew their men away in horror. The men were not reluctant to follow the women. The magicians pursued these crawling horrors and, each grasping one by the tail jerked it toward himself and each was then seen to be holding his wand in his hand.

Gathering again in the centre of the hall each magician raised his wand above his head and gestured toward its end. There on each wand end appeared a dove, roosting. An upward wave of each wand and all the doves flew off to perch on the capitals of the magnificent pillars supporting the ceiling and there they cooed away happily in contentment with their companions that had also materialized from the wands.

Page 66

At a call from the chief magician the doves returned to the wands held out for them. A sudden movement of the wands sideways caused the doves to disappear. The applause rang from the ceiling and could be heard outside the building.

The chief magician gestured toward the dais and a translucent mist appeared to arise between it and the audience. Weaving and twisting throughout it could be seen the distinct forms of terrifying demons apparently trapped in it. Another wave and the air was clear and the hall and Nefertari were seen to be unharmed. But, the looks of apprehension on the faces of the audience and even The Princess herself took some time to fade away.

The hush that followed the departure of the magicians was soon shattered by another fanfare from the trumpeters. The main entrance doors opened wide and a herald entered. With a full knowledge of the importance of his message he called those assembled to take note that the King himself was about to enter the hall and the audience was expected to show him due honour. His honour guard of four soldiers in full ceremonial dress accompanied him to the dais and then moved aside as he addressed his sister and wished her the full blessing of the Gods on this very special day of days. His guard then moved to their place behind the dais and the courtiers that comprised his train mingled with the other guests.

One appeared to be the leader. He was the king’s current favourite.

Others among them had been in that position and were now out of favour but still were a part of his entourage. Still others were hoping that in the near future they would supplant the present leader of the pack in the king’s affections.

As these new comers greeted those known to them and those they would like to become known to the noise level in the Great Hall rose several decibels. Before this vast throng was allowed to become bored with conversing with the other social climbers to whom they were being polite on the chance that the acquaintance might be of some advantage to them in their personal ambitions another fanfare of trumpets demanded their attention. Another segment of the entertainment planned for this evening was about to begin.

As the trumpets wailed to silence a mixed troupe of dark skinned dancers entered the hall. Tall and slim with black tightly curled hair

Page 67

they whirled in their exotic and erotic routine the length of the hall.

The westering sun cast its rays through the window apertures and rendered the dance even more erotic as the dancers exposed their glistening bodies to these rays when passing along and across the hall. For encore, the two leaders again danced a more intricate and enticing routine than the group as a whole. Stripping off before the audience as they danced they made their way right down the full length of the hall and out at the performer’s exit. There was a rush from the audience to gather up the wisps of clothing left behind as souvenirs.

This performance was followed by a display of skill in which the acrobats tumbled and leapt over and around each other, from one end of the hall to the other. Finally they built a pyramid that held for a moment and then seemed to flow away across the floor and out at the door.

Storytellers lauded the exploits of the king in battle and the glory of his reign. They predicted it growing to rival and even surpass the glories that his father had earned. This was a bit ambitious for Kamose still ruled in Thebes and Ahmose was still subject to him.

More magicians produced even greater manifestations than the first lot. They made the wine in the drinking vessels appear as real congealing blood. Then with a gesture turned it back into even better wine than it was in the first place. It was hailed as veritable ambrosia. They then produced hordes of croaking frogs to carpet the floor. Then with a wave of the hand sent them all away again.

There seemed no end to the entertainments as the late afternoon grew into the early darkness of evening. This was chased away by servants bringing in flaming torches, which they placed in the numerous sconces, attached to the walls in strategic places.

The entertainment and the dancing went on into the night until it seemed it would never end. However, as the sun was half way back for his morning rising the king rose from his seat, descended from the dais and, with his entourage of young men, left the hall. This was the sign that the revelry should come to an end. The noise immediately began to die down and not long after that Nefertari also left the hall, in the company of her bevy of boys.

Page 68

“Well.” Said Heotept to Miriam as he escorted her back to her home. “Enjoy yourself?” Not very original, you might say. But then, humanity hasn’t changed much in thousands of years. Boys have been meeting girls in much the same old way for all the same old reasons from time immemorial.

“Overwhelmed.” Replied Miriam. “Just seemed too much to take in all at once. How often does that happen?”

“Not as often as you might think. But, often enough to keep all the entertainers fairly busy. Not always in the palace, of course.”

“I don’t think I could take it too often.” Remarked Miriam.

“I promise you something less overwhelming next time.” ”Do you-plan a next time?” Coyly inquired Miriam.

“Of course. Tonight is only an introduction. If I am to have any say in it.”

“What an introduction. I do appreciate it. That is, that you have taken me to such a gala event. So public, too and me being of a people not the most popular in royal circles at this time. Your image will not be enhanced by associating with a Heqa Kasut girl.”

“A fig for my image. You knocked all their fine ladies into a sack.

There was none there to compare with you. I would like nothing better than to take you again somewhere. If I may.”

“Whatever you say, My Lord. Really though, my father may have something to say about that. He has very strict ideas about what is right and proper.”

“I don’t dispute that. He is well known and highly esteemed in the best circles, being of the ‘Brotherhood.’ He let you out tonight.

Didn’t he?”

“What do you know about that?”

“Enough to believe that he will not stand in our way.”

“So, it is ‘our way’ already and we have been out only the once.”

“Once is not nearly enough for me.” Declared Heotept. “Can we make it again? When I can get away from military duties, that is.”

Page 69

“And I can get away from duties at home and to The Princess.

Which you are well aware of.”

“Is that a ‘yes.’”

“You may take it as such, subject to my father’s permission.”

“Of course. Here we are at your gate. Good night, My Princess, till we meet again. And may it be soon.”

“Good night Heo. We will meet again.”

“Again and again.” Joyously cried Heotept as he wheeled his chariot about in the courtyard and headed back to his barracks singing heartily all the way. No thought entered his head that he might be on forbidden ground. Fraternizing with the enemy, and he with family connections with the Royal House. To young love in all ages such impediments have ever been treated with the ignore that they deserve. Race and class distinctions belong to the old and staid.

Yet, somehow, the young grow old and so often take on the prejudices and biases that they disdained in their youth.

Page 70

CHAPTER V MIRIAM AND HEOTEP After the morning meal on the day following the celebrations at the palace Miriam was delighted to regale her parents with a description of the occasion. It was no surprise to either parent as they were well aware of the opulent life style pursued by the previous occupants of the palace. They had had fairly close contacts with the Royal family of their own people. They fully expected that the present incumbents would follow a similar life of opulence for the descendents of Jacob had embraced Egyptian customs and religion since becoming a part of the scene. The only real difference was that some of the Israelis still had a niggling desire to fulfill the destiny that has been promise to Father Abraham. The land of Canaan was theirs for the taking. The only question was, When?

More than two centuries down the track and they were still dreaming of the promise. Some of the more radical among them berated the elders for dallying and allowing them to become frustrated because of the many missed opportunities over the centuries of being the rulers of Lower Egypt. Now, because of the conquest by Kamose the opportunity was lost forever.

None of these thoughts entered Miriam’s head on this morning after.

She recounted to her father Amenhotept’s version of the origin of Moses. He was highly amused. He, of all people knew the truth.

From Miriam’s description of the entrances made by Ahmose and Nefertari Amram was confirmed in his opinion of their deviant life styles. From his connections in the Brotherhood he had a better working knowledge than did those Israelis who were not so of the natures of these two vassal rulers of lower Egypt. He had his misgivings about his daughter associating with them. At the same time he had great faith in her stability and sound judgement.

However, as a father he was concerned by her close proximity to these influences.

Added to this was his concern for his son Moses. His son, but not his son. As the son of Amram he was condemned to die but as the son of the Princess Royal he had before him the prospect of a better life than Amram could provide in his reduced condition. He was also conscious that it could also lead to the consummation of the

Page 71

Promise made to Father Abraham. Being a cautious man by nature and training He did not rush into confrontation. He preferred to watch and wait while putting in a quiet word here and there to influence his hearer to strive for better things.

He did not point out to Miriam the pitfalls that she would be likely to meet in associating too closely with the Palace. He preferred to point her toward the preservation of her own integrity in any circumstances and leave the implementing of it to her. She had given evidence that she had a great capacity for sizing up a situation and turning it to her own advantage. This gave him faith in her ability to improve on this trait as she grew fully into adulthood.

Jochabed had quite a different viewpoint than that of her husband.

The centre of her attention were the young men at the celebration.

Who were they? What did they look like? All to her mind were potential husbands. It was also an oblique way of getting a picture of Heotept. If he were to be her daughter’s escort she would like to know more about him. If it came to that, could he support her in the manner Jochabed would like him to? Would he do so if he could? She wondered if he had marriage in mind or was ‘just testing the waters’. She was as powerless as Amram in doing much more than stand by and watch developments.

The young corporal of the Guards had grown considerably in her eyes. He was a nephew of a cousin of the King in Thebes. Great possibilities opened here to Jochabed’s imagination. With both a daughter and son closely connected to the ruling House she would enjoy a privileged position among her peers. It could lead to the family being in a position of prominence in the hierarchy when the Israelis finally made it to the Promised Land.

Both parents cautiously expressed their apprehensions regarding the relationship with an Egyptian, especially at this particular time.

Miriam neither justified her actions nor commented on their remarks. She thanked them for being concerned about her. She intimated that she was prepared to take things one day at a time and hoped that they were willing to do the same. She did affirm that she trusted in Elohim to guide her to do that, which was Right in HIS Sight.

From this time on Heotept’s visits to the Amram household were not confined to his duties as an escort to Nefertari. Nor did he hesitate

Page 72

to invite Miriam to other festivities related to his social contacts within and without the Royal Circle.

Finally he sought a private interview with Amram.

In Miriam’s diary under the date of the 12th day of the fourth month of that particular year appears her impressions of that day and the result of the conversation between Amram and Heotept.

“Today is the most wonderful; day of my life. I knew before he came why Heotept wanted to talk to father this morning. We have had some lovely times together and have so much in common. We each feel that life without the other would be unbearable. We each want nothing else than to make the other happy. Heo, I firmly believe, will come with us when the opportunity arrives when my people can return to the land of Promise from whence father Joseph brought the family over two centuries ago.

“I was quite nervous about his interview with Father but having sounded him out several times I felt that he would not deny us happiness, even if he did put some conditions on his blessing. To marry Heo without Father’s blessing would be unthinkable. I would be sorely tempted to find some other way but such thoughts need never be considered. I am so happy that it is so.

“Father had Heo worried at first for he gave no sign that he might be prepared to approve of marriage to his daughter. He made Heo go through a detailed account of his ability to support a wife. Where his profession as a soldier might take him. His prospects for advancement in his profession and where it could lead him. As I said to Heo afterwards, this was rather naughty of Father for through his contacts with prominent Egyptians in his own Lodge he would be able to find out all about Heo without asking him anything.

However, I guess he wanted to hear it from Heo’s own mouth and have his assessment of his future. Also he would want to show that he is still master in his own household if not in what was once his business.

“My dear father. He will do anything that I ask of him. He umms and aahs a lot and plays for time so often and loves to give advice and recommend caution in all things but very seldom does he come to an eventual NO. He knows that I love Heo very dearly for he has already asked me several times how I feel about him. He knows that I am prepared to carry whatever burden it takes to be the wife of an

Page 73

Egyptian at this time. We have already discussed it at length. He is well aware that some of our own relatives are married to Egyptians.

Aunt Hepzibah, his sister-in-law is of Egyptian birth. Also quite a few other Israeli people have Egyptian partners. Even though our status as a People has been greatly reduced we still live in the same country and meet each other in the market place and in the streets.

Tue love knows no barriers of race or nation. It blossoms where it will. It overcomes all obstacles.

“He is the most wonderful; father in the world and I love him very dearly. I would not have him any different. I know that I shall be vastly happy with Heo and I am sure that when our God leads us out of this land to the Land of Promise he will be willing to come with us.”

If Miriam’s life was full before it was now overflowing. She was still her mother’s main support is the care of the growing Moses who grew in demands as well as stature. Well aware of his importance by the special treatment that he received he had no hesitation in making demands and expecting them to be fulfilled.

Neither was he slow to put on a tantrum if they were not. Jochabed, herself, added to the workload for, as mothers have done throughout the ages, she saw the marriage of her eldest daughter as the event of the century.

Amram considered it to be unseemly that such a great todo should be made about this wedding. “After all.’ He said. “We are now a conquered people, virtual slaves. We are very fortunate, indeed, that a member of the ruling clique, even a minor one, will be marrying our daughter.

Too much publicity could cause unpleasant repercussions that will bear heavily upon us. There are many out there who would have us even further oppressed than we are.

Ahmose is not the worst of them. They would welcome any excuse to drive us out and confiscate what little is left.”

“Isn’t that what we want?” Retorted Jochabed. “You men are always running off at the mouth about returning to the Promised Land but I’ve never seen any effort by any of you to make it happen.

When our people ruled in this city there was many an opportunity.

But, No. The time was never right. I have no intention of letting my daughter be looked at by those Royals as ‘the girl that Heo rescued from despair.’ She will hold her head high as a worthy consort for a

Page 74

Royal or my name is not Jochabed. Isn’t Moses already a member of the Royal Family? His ‘mother’ declares that he will sit on the throne in Memphis if she has her way.”

“Have it your own way.” Countered Amram. “But, don’t say I didn’t warn you.”

“Warning taken.” Was Jochabed’s last word on the subject as Amram, at a loss for further words, went out of the house on whatever business he had to attend to and Jochabed continued her preparations for the ‘wedding of the century’.

Many days were spent in the markets finding fabrics that would suit.

Much searching through the household stores of fabrics to find the perfect material for the decking out of Miriam for her wedding ceremony. The decking out was Jochabed’s concern. She refused to enter into any discussions regarding the ceremony itself and what should be done about it. All that she was prepared to see was a young couple about to launch into the stream of life. Any other implications of this union she left to those who wanted to strain at it.

No longer was the traditional marriage solemnized by the laying on of hands of the patriarch of the family after a promise by the happy couple to live in harmony together. After two and a half centuries of absorbing the culture of the Nile Valley Israelis now expected an elaborate ceremony. Having no established priesthood family elders were still the active marriage celebrants for their people. They still called on Elohim, the God of Abraham, to give his blessing to the happy couple. This was not god enough for the priests of Re. No family member could bestow an adequate blessing on a royal, even a minor one. They were not prepared to accept what they considered to be a lay person performing a wedding ceremony. On the other hand the elders of Amram’s extended family felt that a blessing from the priests of Re was worse than no blessing at all.

Miriam was well aware of these behind the scene discussions and resented them. So many marriages between Egyptians and Hebrews had taken place over the years that all this fuss over her marriage to Heotept seemed to her to be rather futile.

“This is different.” She was told. It was conceded that this was not the first time that an Egyptian Royal had married an Israeli. It was long past history that Father Joseph had married the king’s daughter when he was made Grand Vizier and many of his descendents had done the same. Father Joseph’s great grandson had ascended the

Page 75

throne in Memphis by reason of the fact that he had married the Princess Royal of that time. Through her the succession had come and her father had then moved to Thebes and left Memphis to the newly weds. The two kingdoms had continued in parallel ever since.

“What is the difference this time, then?” Queried Miriam. “We are still very much a part of the scene although very much reduced in status.”

“That is the whole point.” Argued Amram. “Father Joseph was Grand Vizier. Others since have similar status and until the conquest by Kamose we were at least equal to the Egyptians and apparently in harmony with them. Now we are looked down on as of the lowest form of life. Not considered fit to hold positions of trust in society. We are not allowed to own property although some of us still reside in own our own homes, and our people still live in Goshen. Thank God that they have not interfered with that arrangement. It surprises me that we are still exempt from the twenty per cent tax that Father Joseph imposed on the Egyptians centuries ago. They ignore that yet kill our children. I’ll never understand Ahmose. To get back to the subject. Having lost all status we could be causing difficulties for our People with this union.”

Jochabed cut in here to declare that she had no intention of looking on the dark side. Her only interest was the happiness of her daughter and if this was the way to do that, then, so be it. If Amram wanted to go around with a long face worrying about possibilities rather than facts then that was his worry. She certainly was not going to join him in being miserable. She had found nothing to be alarmed about in her contacts with Egyptians. Until she did she would carry on as she was. That was that.

“Is there trouble in the Brotherhood?” She asked Amram.

“Of course not. We are all brothers there irrespective of what happens in the world outside.” Replied Amram.

“You are not immune. They are all people too. If there is no enmity there, there is very little outside. Not enough for you to take on so about it, anyway.” Was Jochabed’s last word on the subject.

Amram, having no counter to her argument, retired from the fray and left the two women to their wedding preparations.

The succession to the throne still carried through the females of the line so there was no complication there as far as Heo and Miriam

Page 76

were concerned. He was not likely to ever ascend the throne. The succession would never be a consideration. It was the religious aspect that was worrying those who were responsible for the blessing of the marriage. The Israelis had no organized priesthood on which to draw whereas the Egyptians had several thousand years of religious tradition and a long established priesthood. It was the reconciling of these two divergent streams that was causing the arguments.

Eventually a compromise was reached. A joint ceremony would have to be performed. A simple laying on of hands by a senior extended family member in a traditional Israeli fashion on Miriam to bless her and her spouse. Immediately following an Egyptian priest would bless Heotept and his spouse. There would thus be a mystical equality about the ceremony. Both Gods would be called upon at almost the same time. Before the ceremony the actual site was to be sanctified beforehand so that the Egyptian blessing would be as effective as if it were held traditionally in a temple. The great pomp and circumstance of a traditional Egyptian wedding in a temple would be curtailed and limited to questions to and answers from the bride and groom to establish their bona fides in public. After the two short ceremonies they would then be declared man and wife.

This disputation was ignored by both Miriam and Heo, as much as they were able to. They had to find a place to live. It had to be furnished. Neither of these things would happen of itself. They therefore set about making things happen.

Heo approached his father who had possessed considerable rural land and several city properties before the conquest. These had been increased by Kamose for services rendered at the time and by purchase when opportunities arose. Although as reluctant as was Amram about this union he accepted the inevitable as he could not change it. He and Amram were well known to each other. It was not well known that they were both members of the Brotherhood but in different lodges. They thus had an opportunity and were better able to work out an amicable arrangement than would otherwise have been the case in such a marriage.

One of the houses belonging to Heo’s father, had been recently vacated by its tenants. He gave that to the couple as a wedding present. That was his contribution to their future happiness. It needed some repairs and renovations. There were additions to be

Page 77

erected to accommodate Miriam and Heo. The tenant had been a tradesman and what was good enough to shelter him and his family was in need of improvement for Heo and his anticipated family.

As a dowry for the new bride Amram contracted to do the renovations and fully furnish the house. The work on the house would benefit Heo but the furnishings would remain the exclusive property of Miriam for all time. If she and Heo ever parted or after his death these she could take with her as her own property in her own right. This followed the custom then extant in Egyptian culture.

With the added responsibility of a wife and the prospect of children Heo needed an increase in salary and status. He was consequently promoted to a Captain of the Guard. He was one of several.

The house they were to occupy was conveniently situated for his attendance on duty at the Palace. When the Guard was sent on duty to any other part of the kingdom Miriam, left at home, would be close enough to her parents for her to have peace of mind during the absence of her husband.

Since Amram’s income and resources had been greatly reduced by the suppression of their people after the conquest he was not able to fulfill his promise from his own resources. His three brothers and their families came to the rescue and thus ensured that Miriam received a dowry suitable to her station in life as the wife of Heotept.

Because of his expertise as a stone mason, brick maker and Master Builder, Amram personally attended to the renovation of the dwelling. Although no longer the owner, Amram, in his position as works manager was able to co-opt the services of workmen under his command to construct the lotus pool that every well appointed Egyptian house could not afford to be without. The clay used to line the pool and render it waterproof was of the best available and was laid carefully and well. The marble edging was finished by Amram himself, to ensure its perfection. The flagstones surrounding it were laid under his personal supervision. They were fitted so well together that the joins were hardly visible. The raised portico before the entrance to the house was floored with ceramic tiles laid in a pattern that radiated outwards from the door opening to the outside edge of the construction.

Page 78

At the entrance to the house compound, on either side of it, was erected a pillar carved from one piece of stone and shaped to represent a clump of papyrus. These supported a transom of a stone carved in the form of a long narrow basket. The pillars supporting the portico roof were fluted with capitals carved to represent lotus flowers. The windows facing outwards were fitted with glass, a newly invented product, to protect the house from the elements.

Being a newly invented product glass was very expensive and so was used only where it would do most good for whatever was spent on it.

The life style of a Captain of the Palace Guard, especially one with Royal family connections, needed a larger than usual entertainment section. This was provided. It needed more guestrooms than when occupied by a tradesman. An increase in entertainment required more servants so larger servants quarters had to be constructed.

The furniture was supplied by Amram’s brother, Izhar. The wood used in its construction was the best cedar that could be obtained from Lebanon. It was smoothed and polished to a mirror finish.

The legs ended in carved lion’s claws in the best Egyptian tradition.

The fine tapestry that covered the chair seats and back panels was supplied by Hebron from stocks left over from before the conquest.

Mirrors made from polished silver and others, made from the newly invented glass, were supplied by Uzziel. He also supplied the glowing copper vessels for the kitchen.

Heo and Miriam spent as much time as they could viewing the work and commenting and advising with regard to the placement of furniture and fittings. Whenever possible Heo would borrow a military vehicle, call for Miriam and together they would travel to their new home to view the progress being made.

Six months went by before the house was ready for them to occupy.

This was good timing. By then the wedding preparations were also ready. On the 9th day of the 12th month of the seventh year of the reign of Nefertari and Ahmose in Memphis Heo and Miriam were joined in matrimony.

Miriam was resplendent in a shift of the finest linen. Plain and pure white as it clung to the contours of her youthful figure. Over it was a cloak of creamy silk trimmed with ermine. No royal collar or noble headdress for her but over her shoulders was draped an azure cape and her hair was kept in place by a silver headband. On her

Page 79

feet were slippers with hard leather soles and tops of silver thread woven together by her uncle Uzziel in an intricate pattern supporting a glowing pearl in the instep. The brooch that fastened the cloak at the front was made and presented to her by her uncle Hebron. It was in the form of a double equilateral triangle of pure silver, a very ancient symbol of perfection, with a glowing amethyst suspended in its center by almost invisible silver wires. While the finishing touches were being put to Miriam’s attire and appearance the guests began arriving in twos and threes and fours as guests have done from time immemorial to such events. They stood in groups, scattered over the courtyard, chatting with those with whom they were familiar and making themselves familiar with those whom they met only on such occasions. At length their attention was drawn to the sound of trumpets heralding the approach of the chariot in which Heo was transported to meet his fate.

It was a two-horse vehicle and the two horses pulling it pranced grandly under the tight reins held in the hands of the driver. Their necks arched proudly as the bells on their braided manes tinkled brightly in the morning sunshine.

Miriam had been ready and waiting in her mother’s private apartment where she had been prepared for the event. On hearing the cheering that arose on the arrival of Heo she proceeded toward the entrance porch where they were to meet. Heo made his way, after alighting from his chariot at the gate, through the passage that opened before him in the crowd of guests to the same place. He was dressed in full military dress uniform befitting his rank as Captain in the elite forces of the Palace Guard. His white kilt was straight and true at the back and swept forward, with many pleats, to be fastened at the waist with a lapis lazuli brooch in the form of a large scarab beetle with all of its wings outstretched. His tunic was of the finest silk, glasslike in its transparency. Round his neck was the broad royal collar of coloured beads interlaced with gold thread and adorned with rubies. On his head was a bronze helmet sporting the plumes of a Captain of the Palace Guard. The plumes gently waved in the breeze of his movement as he approached his intended bride.

Over his chest, draped from his left shoulder to his right hip was a sash that was the insignia of his office. It was of white corded fabric with the chevrons of his rank in a golden blaze across it at chest

Page 80

level. The peace of a wedding could not be disturbed by the wearing of a sword and shield, so these had been left behind.

Miriam was waiting, in the company of her parents, and a maid-in – waiting to attend her as a bride, in the entry portico of the house.

Heo’s aide, nowadays referred to as ‘the best man’ had arrived earlier and as Heo made his way toward the house he left the company of his group and walked by Heo’s side to meet Miriam.

As the nuptial pair stood together in the portico facing in toward the main room of the house the guests moved to gather behind them in the grounds so that all could see and hear the proceedings.

The celebrants, who had been waiting inside the house emerged from their obscurity and approached the happy couple.

After asking the necessary questions to establish the identity of the couple before him the Israeli elder of the tribe of Levi, of which Amram was a member, laid his hands on the head of Miriam. His Egyptian counterpart laid his hands on the head of Heotept. The Israeli called down the blessing of Elohim on the happy couple.

Immediately after he had finished speaking the Egyptian priest called for the blessing of Re to be bestowed. While they were operating their assistants diligently scattered the perfume of burning incense around them all.

At the completion of the ceremony the couple was turned to face the crowd of guests and introduced to them as man and wife. They were doubly married and doubly blessed and the crowd greeted them with resounding applause.

Descending the steps to the courtyard Miriam and Heo mingled with the assembled guests. To their right were trestle tables groaning with the weight of the various meats prepared for the banquet.

Lamb, beef and venison were there in abundance. Dishes of quail and fowl garnished this display. To their left were tables loaded with breads and cakes and all kinds of exotic fruits to tempt the palate.

Servants moved among the guests with new goatskins of imported and local wines, which were poured into the bronze and crystal goblets held in their hands. Beer brewed from malted barley was provided for those with less heady tastes in beverage. The progress of the newly weds between the tables was slowed considerably by the hearty congratulations showered on them as they passed along.

Every person there was anxious to add his or her voice to the babble.

Many wanted to touch them for luck. Eventually Miriam and Heo

Page 81

reached the lotus pool and stood quietly at its edge. The concourse of people also quieted for this was a most important part of the festivities.

Moored to the edge of the pool at the feet of Miriam and Heo was a replica of a Nile riverboat with its sail set ready to go. The gentle breeze wafting across the courtyard had filled its tiny sail and it was straining at its moorings. In the vessel were two tiny statues representing the happy couple. When all attention was centred on the vessel its mooring thread was cut and it began its journey across the pool. This was considered to be an augury of things to come.

There was thus great interest by all those watching so as to ascertain the future well being or otherwise of Miriam and Heo. Before the vessel reached the halfway mark it hesitated as it was waylaid by a piece of floating weed but the gently breeze propelling it along seemed to suddenly increase for the express purpose of overcoming this obstacle and it proceeded on its way though not entirely smoothly. At one stage the breeze almost died away but then it picked up again and without any further trouble the little ship made it safely to the farther shore. The whole crowd watching heaved a collective sigh of relief as the vessel’s successful journey augured a safe though not uneventful life for Miriam and Heo. This outcome was not entirely happenstance. The Egyptian priests had spent many hours examining the entrails of certain birds and small animals to discover the most auspicious day on which to hold this wedding. Thus it was that they established the date so that all that was humanly possible was done to ensure the future happiness of the couple. Now it was up to the Gods to do their part in making it all come about.

The happy couple moved among the guests absorbing further congratulations and expressing their appreciation to those who came to witness the great event. Among these was Heo’s uncle Amenhotept, never one to miss the chance of being a part of a celebration of any kind. Indeed, some people accused him of living from one party to the next, but as he was still in great favour with Kamose in Thebes he must have never neglected his duties to his king.

“Heo, My boy.” He said, when he was able to catch up with them.

“You are a game one. Always did your own thing regardless. Your bride is the loveliest I have seen in many a day. Good thing

Page 82

Nefertari could not be here. The competition would not do her a lot of good. Ahmose is still smarting but he will get over that. May the Gods guide and guard you both. You certainly have my blessing, for what that is worth.”

“Thanks, Uncle. Your blessing is worth a lot to us and we certainly appreciate your presence here today. Nefertari sent a message of goodwill and congratulations and expressed her regret for being unable to attend. We understand and I’m glad that she is happy for us. We both are.”

“Keep a firm hand on him, young lady”. To Miriam. “He takes a bit of handling.”

“Never fear, Uncle. I can address you as such? I hope”.

“Most welcome you are to do so.” Interrupted Amenhotept at this point.

Miriam continued. “I too am happy that we have your blessing. We trust that we will never give you cause to regret it. Your support so far is greatly appreciated.”

“Don’t either of you worry about Ahmose. Nefertari can handle him. I know that she is on your side.” Were the last words of Amenhotept as he moved off to mingle with the other guests.

This parting shot worried Miriam a little, as she had not heard of anything of opposition from the palace. She turned quietly to Heo and asked. “What was that about the king? Can he make difficulties for us?”

“Too late now, anyhow.” Replied Heo. “The deed is done. He can do nothing about it now. He might rave somewhat in private but as Uncle said, he will not go against the wishes of his sister when she puts her foot down. As joint ruler her power is equal to his and more so if she chooses. Have no fear from that direction.” ”If you say so. I’ll take your word for that. You know more about the palace and its goings on than I do and I don’t expect that I shall ever get closer than I am now. I am just so happy to be your wife.”

“Yes, My Love. Whatever happens we can face it together. You have made me so happy that I can see nothing but good before us.

Besides, didn’t the little boat tell you that all would be well in the end?”

“You are right. Let us remember that.”

They were kept busy the rest of that afternoon with their guests until, as the sun began to sink into the western desert, a chariot

Page 83

appointed to speed them on their way appeared at the gate. From here they were transported to the docks where a riverboat awaited them to carry them to Tanis where they planned to spend a few weeks before taking up their married life earnestly in their new home in Memphis. The guests were left, as wedding guests always have been, to party on until they were exhausted enough to wend their weary and besotted ways homeward to recover as best they could the next day.

Moored at the naval dockyard’s executive wharf was a ship from the army supply fleet. It measured thirty cubits from its six cubits high Papyrus bud stem to its forward bent papyrus bud stern post, which reached four cubits above the deck and three cubits toward the bow.

On either side of this stern post stood the two helmsmen. One to each massive steering oar. Eight rowers to a side were in place with their oars shipped at the side ready to be dipped into the water of the river to propel the ship away from the wharf and into the main stream. There the pull of the sluggish current would aid the rowers to speed the boat on its way to Tanis.

Just forward of the centre was a mighty mast stayed fore and aft and to the gunwales. On it the great lanteen sail was furled for the run down river against the prevailing wind. Just aft of the centre, where the ship was at its widest at twelve cubits, was a cabin nine cubits wide and twelve long. Its door opened toward the stem of the ship.

Behind it was the spacious chamber fitted out especially for the honeymoon couple. It had been decked out in many coloured bunting draped over the rigging and strung from stem to stern, by Heo’s Company of Guards as a symbol of their good wishes to the happy couple.

The chariot carrying them stopped at the shore end of the wharf.

Miriam and Heo alighted and saw before them the double row of Heo’s companions forming a guard of Honour reaching from the chariot to the gunwale of the ship. They traversed this aisle and mounted the gangway onto the deck. The captain met them there and ushered them into the cabin where light refreshments had been laid on a small table just inside and to the right of the door. As if they had not had enough to eat at the wedding feast. Clothes for their journey were laid out for them to change into. Other garments, for their use during their stay in Tanis, were hung neatly in a closet beside the bed. The lion’s claw legs of the bed were firmly fixed to

Page 84

the decking of the cabin. A tester over the head of the bed was supported by simulated papyrus bud pillars. Over it was draped a diaphanous screen to protect its occupants from night flying insects.

That is if they got any sleep on their first night together. As the day died in the west the ship was loosed from its moorings by the crew and rowed out into the stream where the flowing river took it down stream. From here it was guided by the crew, in its progress, to the delta branch that led to Tanis. Oil lamps suspended from the stem and stern posts warned other river users that they were not the only travellers that night.

Two day’s journey down the river for Memphis they approached Tanis on the Right Bank. Its roadstead, in the mouth of the East River of the Delta, was crowded with ships from all parts of the world. The large trading byremes of the Phoenicians, the Greek sailing vessels with their square rigged single sails suspended from a single spar on a mast stepped just forward of the centre of the hull.

There were riverboats waiting to load for trading towns along the thousands of miles of the Nile. These ranged in size from the large forty cubit long, ten cubit wide sea traders to small ones, which were not much better than bundles of reeds.

This city was not much more than fifty years old. It had been built to replace another, which was now fifty miles inland owing to the continual progression of the Nile Delta into the Great Ocean, as the Mediterranean was named then. It was situated close to the mouth of its delta branch as it emptied into a great shallow lagoon. This lagoon was separated from the Great Sea by a narrow neck of land no more than five miles wide at its widest. This land was twenty miles across the shallow water and was visible only from the highest points of the city. This great lagoon was over sixty miles in length as it stretched along beside the coast of the Great Sea. It opened to the ocean to the north east of Tanis and was so shallow that even a moderate wind was sufficient to make its surface quite choppy. Yet, it was deep enough to float the great trading ships of the Phoenicians whose empire extended from Tyre to beyond the Pillars of rock that formed the gateway to the vast ocean in the west. On almost any day one cared to look numbers of these ships could be seen idling on the surface of the waters, waiting to tie up at the wharves of Tanis.

It was in these surroundings that Heo and Miriam planned to spend a few weeks of their honeymoon.

Page 85

Tanis was not only an important river port but was the capital of that 19th Nome. There were twenty of these administrative units to Lower Egypt at that time. Each was semi-autonomous and its governor answered directly to the king in Memphis. Upper Egypt was administered similarly with the same number of Nomes with each governor answerable to the king in Thebes. Ahmose was still a vassal king to Kamose who had conquered Lower Egypt and set his son and daughter on the throne under his control. Thus, although the governor of the 19th Nome was answerable to Ahmose directly it was to Kamose that he was ultimately, though indirectly, answerable.

Heo’s uncle, Amenhotept, had arranged with the governor in Tanis, a first cousin of his, to accommodate this couple during their stay in that city. On their arrival at the docks and when the ship was close enough to the wharf for a man to jump ashore a messenger was sent to the governor to inform him that his guests were about to disembark. A few minutes later the crew moored the vessel and a loading ramp was run out from it to the wharf. Miriam and Heo left the ship by this loading ramp. While they waited for transport to take them to their destination their servants unloaded their luggage.

They had not been waiting long when they heard the rattle of chariot wheels over the cobbles. A two-horse vehicle drew up beside them and the driver called out. “Two passengers for the Governor’s Palace?”

“Sure are” Called Heo. They were then ushered on to the platform of the chariot and whisked away to the palace. Their luggage was to follow later in a much slower ox drawn cart that had been sent for this purpose.

Many days were spent sailing on the shallow waters of the lagoon that stretched away from the confines of Tanis. Sometimes just enjoying the motion of the small boat as it moved across the surface.

At others they fished to while away the hours. There were cousins of Miriam to visit, as Tanis had been the administration centre of the homeland of the Israelis for generations before the conquest by Kamose. They still lived there largely unaffected by the change in rulers in Memphis. To visit any branch of her family here Miriam and Heo had a vehicle put at their disposal by their host even if any particular journey took more than a day to complete.

Page 86

The vast open pastures of this land were vital to the supply of draught and food animals for the whole nation. Great herds of cattle and camels grazed on land too remote from the river to be irrigated but with sufficient rainfall to grow a good cover of pasturage. In the dryer parts flocks of sheep and goats cropped the sparse grass and bushes. These animals supplied the bulk of the wool, skins, meat and hides used in both Egypts. Land in the immediate flood plane of the river was too valuable for the growing of grain, even then, to be taken up by pasture so the animal products from the main river valley were not sufficient to supply the needs of the teeming millions that inhabited the valley. Thousands of horses were turned off these Delta fields every year to satisfy the needs of the vast armies maintained by the two kings. The empire building that they both indulged in depended on the maintenance of these armies in battle readiness, even in peacetime.

It is no wonder that Ahmose felt so insecure about the Israelis so much essential to the well being of his nation and yet so numerous as to appear to be a threat to his sovereignty.

Fourteen days after their arrival in Tanis Miriam and Heo returned to Memphis and took up residence in the house prepared for them and went about their daily lives. Heo went to his guard duties and Miriam to manage his household and eventually to mother their children.

Page 87

"AMERICAN ENCYCLOPEDIA and OTHER SOURCES." Much the same as in the Encyclopedia Brittanica with slight variations in dates, AMENHATEL, the son of Thutmose III reigned jointly with his father from 1450 till his father's death in 1425.

POPULATION estimated to be round 5 million souls during 1400s.

PRIOR TO 1600 BC. Asiatics, semitic tribes, infiltrated Egypt over several decades. In 1786 ANKHU became Vizier and amassed more power than the kings, SEBEKEMSOF and SEBEKHOTEP III. AMANEMHET was vizier in 1691 and actually became the first Heqa Kasut king. His son SESOSTRIS was a great builder and constructed many store and trading cities. His sons SESOSTRIS II and III carried on in his tradition, It was SES III who established the capital of Lower Egypt in Itj-Taury, a few miles to the south west of Memphis.

The traditional kings continued to rule from Thebes but their power was limited to Upper Egypt.

During this period of Egyptian history the Asiatics occupied many domestic and artisan positions in the general social life of the nation.

They became part of the fabric of Egypt.

FREEMASONRY OF THE ANCIENT EGYPTIANS Manly P. Hall Philosophical Research Society. Los Angeles California ISBN NO, 0-89314-803-2 L.C. 80-26436 Fourth Editon.

Parallels the degrees of Freemasonry with the degrees outlined in the section "Initiation of Plato." (He is traditionally considered to be a 'brother in the Craft'.)

HISTORY OF THE WORLD, This work lists events and dates without comment* Cambridge University Press.

For the period of 15th and 16th Cent BC it states that Amenhotept was not of Royal Lineage. Related but not in direct line to the throne. It lists Thutmose I as 'illegitimate'.

Page 88

CHAPTER VI MIRIAM’S AMBITION TAKES ROOT. .

Heotept’s duties with the Palace guard kept him occupied daily and Miriam found her time taken up with the running of the household.

Every Few days she would relieve her mother of some of the burden of rearing Moses. On those occasions she would hire a taxi chariot if Heo could not arrange a military one to take her across town to her mother’s home. If there were no servants there from the palace that day she would take Moses back to her home to relieve her mother completely of him for that day. Sometimes she kept him overnight when that was convenient. His demanding ways and quickly flaring temper made difficulties for Jochabed with her other children so that to have him somewhere else, even for one day, was a welcome respite. If there were people from the palace at Jochabed’s home Miriam would stay there for the day to help get things done and preserve some sort of harmony and peace among them. Moses, at seven and a bit, was starting to assert himself as a person, fully aware of his importance in the general scheme of things.

Miriam’s household at such times had to fend for itself. Her servants were efficient and loyal so she very seldom had any worries on that score.

Since he had attained the age of four years, Nefertari had provided a tutor for her SON to instruct him in the way of life that was expected of him as a future ruler of Egypt. He was resident in the Amram household. Although this tutor was from the palace and subject to supervision from there as well as from the Priesthood, which had a vested interest in the rearing of any royal, Miriam and Jochabed were able to give Moses full knowledge of his natural ancestry and the culture they embraced. He was instructed in the origins of Israel in the wilds of Mesopotamia and their journey from there to being rulers in Egypt. The story of Joseph and his success in saving the people of the whole region from a disaster was instilled

Page 89

in him. Moses learned of the promise of Elohim to lead his people to their destiny in the Promised Land of Canaan. No doubt he also became conversant with the fact that Canaan was at that time occupied by thirty vassal kings owing allegiance to either Egypt or Chaldea, whoever was in the ascendancy at any one time. They all paid tribute to one or the other or both most of the time. They did recoup some of these losses by charging trading caravans tolls on their passages through the land. What they lost on one deal they gained on the other.

Most aristocratic boys in Egypt at that time were taught to read and write so instruction in those arts was not unusual and was to be expected. What was special in the tutoring of Moses was that he was oriented toward his expected career as probably ruler in the land. The culture and traditions of Egypt were therefore a must in his curriculum. He was instructed in the basics of diplomacy and foreign relations. Added to this he was burdened also with the knowledge of Israeli lore and traditions. These had been subject to changes brought about by the long sojourn in Egypt. Here they had absorbed the concept of a 365-day year of twelve months. The quarter of a moon phase as fixed period of seven days had become part of their culture. They learned to direct their worship to one God whom they named Elohim. It was thus that their later religious economy was based on what they had experienced in Egypt.

It was a continual source of wonder to Miriam that Moses had been left so long in their charge. She had expected that by this time Nefertari would have taken him into the palace to be tutored there with the other royal children. Nefertrai had no other children at this time, neither did Ahmose. This did not mean that there were no children at the palace. Courtiers, staff and workmen who made up the population of the palace all had their children that needed care and education. Most of these were destined to be diplomats or administrators of Estates or Nomes so were in need of education to fit these roles.

Miriam believed that it was the hand of Elohim over the affairs of men that impressed Nefertari to leave Moses within the influence of the Hebrew tutors that were employed in the Amram household to educate his own children. Two others followed Moses. Two more girls were added to the family in subsequent years. Although

Page 90

mentioned many times in Miriam’s record they do not feature in the momentous events that occurred toward the later years of her life so they need no further mention in this narrative.

Nun, however, second child and eldest son of Amram, does play a considerable part so he is worthy of some mention. He had aspirations of a military career when a young lad but this was quashed when Lower Egypt was conquered by Kamose. His background had then become racially alien and rendered him unsuitable for military service in any branch, particularly in the Royal Guards, where his ambition had centred. Heqa Kasut were accepted, under Ahmose’s successor, into the regular army but were restricted to the ‘other ranks’. The only occupation available to Nun, at this time, as a growing man, was in lowly labouring work.

His father’s influence in the Brotherhood was not sufficient to lift him above this level. This drove him to fulfill his ambitions in another direction.

Nun eventually found work as deck hand on a river vessel. He was an honest and faithful worker and always anxious to please. This led him to great success in this line of endeavour. This put him in the right place at the right time to play an important though minor role in the events that led to the EXODUS. The Succouth of biblical fame was situated on the branch of the Nile delta that emptied into the head of the gulf of Sweis, the western arm of the Red Sea. The name of this anabranch has been lost in the mists of antiquity but ancient maps indicate that it flowed into the depression that is now known as the ‘Bitter Lakes’ and from there to the head of the Gulf of Sweis. The town that occupied this strategic position was known then as Bur Toufa. This commercially strategic position enjoyed by Succouth generated great wealth for it during the reign of the Keqa Kasut. Under Ahmose this did not materially alter for trade through that waterway still proceeded at an even greater rate as it was no longer subject to the tolls imposed, by the Heqa Kasut on all such trade passing through land under their control. This city became the headquarters of a shipping empire that Nun built in his mature years. This was further evidence to the mind of Miriam that Elohim was guiding and directing events.

Page 91

Moses and Aaron were only three years apart in age. They grew up together. They shared the same Hebrew tutor and no doubt Aaron also absorbed a great deal of the instruction that Moses received from his Egyptian tutor. Although the younger of the two, Moses treated Aaron as though he were the younger. His connection with Nefertari led his older brother to accept this reversal of roles.

Perhaps he thought that Moses, as the foster son of the Princess Royal was due a certain amount of deference. Perhaps it was merely a matter of a necessary attitude to keep the peace. No record of this has been left but it is known that Moses was a very demanding child. He was quick to retaliate for any real or imagined wrong to his person or surrounds, sharp and not always kind in riposte. Yet, he had an underlying timidity that showed its head at the most unexpected moments. Just as he would be expected to carry through some project he would suddenly throw it all up in despair and turn completely away from it. Never was known to give any other reason than to say, in exasperation. “I’m sick of that. It won’t work anyway.”

Miriam hoped that this trait would eventually be trained out of him as he came to maturity. She hoped that the responsibilities that would be thrust on him as he approached closer to the throne of Egypt would cause him to overcome this fault. She determined, at this early stage, that as his older sister and in many ways his mentor she would do all in her power to influence him to use his power as king to move her people to the Promised Land.

Her disappointment in later life at the total let down that Moses imposed on her would have devastated most people and driven them to give up the struggle. This was not Miriam. She rose above this disappointment and brought release to her people by turning this disappointment, when the time came to do so, into a recipe for success.

Page 92

CHAPTER VII. MOSES TO THE PALACE. Before Moses had attained his ninth birthday the King had come to his thirtieth and it was thought appropriate that this be celebrated appropriately.

Ahmose’s recent success in subduing the Libyan tribesmen and assisting his father in putting down a rebellion in Nubia, demanded that the highest in the land should attend this victory celebration and birthday rolled into one. Kamose had formally requested the assistance of Ahmose in this campaign and he had been glad of the opportunity to ‘show his mettle’ to indicate that he was fully in control of Lower Egypt. He might be a lover of boys rather than of women but he had been well-trained in military matters and knew how to fight to defend the honour of his country. This was thus a double celebration and worthy of all that the wealth of Egypt could supply.

All the notables that were acceptable were invited for this triumphal gala. Anyone who was ‘anyone’ was invited to be present. Heo as a relative, though distant, of Ahmose was doubly entitled to an invitation. This time, however, the invitation to attend came to Heo as a Captain of the Guard and Miriam as his wife did not need any special invitation to be there. She was now a part of the Palace scene. Quite used to mixing with the people attached to the court.

Her charm and beauty had won the hearts of all but the most prejudiced of those who moved in court circles. Heo's uncle Amenhotep as General Commanding the Palace Guard and as a special envoy from Kamose moved freely in court circles and was highly regarded by all connected with it. It was not generally known that he was in regular communication with Kamose by sending confidential reports to him. These reports were read and studied by that Great King whose decisions were not uninfluenced by those same reports.

Amenhotept was popular with all whom he came in contact. He attended all social functions not only in his official capacity for security reasons but his personality was such that no function seemed to run so well without his jovial presence. His backslapping

Page 93

and ‘Bon Homie’ made him in great demand for keeping boredom at bay in functions from the officer’s barracks to the royal court itself. His impact on any gathering was such that no party seemed to be complete without his presence. No party ever became boring when he was there. He always had some anecdote to relate. Stories of the barracks, of diplomatic faux pas were ready on his tongue to amuse and entertain.

His duty was to protect the lives and well being of the royal pair at any public function. There never has been any sure guarantee that no rebel can get through the security net at public functions and Amenhotept’s geniality disguised a keen sense of what was in order.

He could ‘smell out’ a rebel in the densest crowd even while apparently taking no notice of the movements of the people jostling one another in the crowds. His men of the " other ranks " greatly appreciated his friendly approach to them. His discipline was strict but just and many a man remembered well his help in personal and regimental difficulties. Heotept, of course, admired him greatly and not only as his uncle.

On the appointed day Heo and Miriam were conveyed to the palace in their own chariot by one of Heo's drivers and entered the festive hall as the other guests were gathering for the celebrations. This time there were no surprised greetings they were well known to the local courtiers and their women. They were soon surrounded by the friends they had made since their marriage and joined in heartily with the festivities.

The tables ranged around the outer edges of the vast room were groaning under the weight of the exotic dishes both from Egyptian and foreign sources. Every country of the known world was represented by the food spread before them. Even iced dishes cooled by ice brought from the far distant Alps of Armenia. No expense had been spared for this celebration of the thirtieth birthday of the king of the Delta.

At the appropriate time a furious fanfare of trumpets brought silence to the assembled throng. All eyes turned as one to the great doorway leading to the Palace courtyard. Four guards in full uniform advanced toward the opening. Behind them came the Grand Vizier and his companion in service. Then the king himself accompanied by his retinue of six young nubile men. Behind them the chancellor and chamberlain of the kingdom. The column

Page 94

advanced toward the temporary thrones erected at the end of the Great Hall. The guards halted before the thrones. The vizier and his companion moved off to seats readied for them at the side of the dais. The king then mounted the centre throne and sat there in royal splendour. There were three thrones there. One was in the centre for the king and one on either side. The one on his right was to be occupied by his father, the king in Thebes, Kamose, and that on the left by his sister the beautiful and notorious Nefertari.

The Grand Vizier, Chancellor and Chamberlain took their places on benches arranged on the dais before, below and to either side of the king. His retinue was seated on benches arranged behind him. The soldiers took their stations on the floor on either side of the dais.

A gesture from the king and the festivities continued. Some short time later another fanfare, equal in duration and volume to that of Ahmose, introduced Nefertari and her train of young men and handmaids who took their allotted places on the dais. As she took her place she turned and waved happily to the assembled crowd.

They responded with a loud and prolonged ovation. Judging by the scowl that then decorated the face of Ahmose at this display, he was not at all pleased by this show of affection for Nefertari. Another gesture from the king and the festivities continued.

The voice of the crowd was somewhat muted as it was obvious to them that a vacant throne meant that another dignitary was yet to come. There was little wonder as to whom it might be. They did not have long to wait.

The comparative silence was broken by the longest and loudest fanfare of trumpets to be heard that day. There was dead silence in the entire hall. The unifier of Egypt and conqueror of the hated Heqa Kasut was about to enter. His retinue was longer and grander than either of the other two, naturally.

The nubile boys that followed the others were nowhere to be seen. He was a man among men. When his retinue had settled into their places the reception by the guests was loud and long. “Long live Kamose the Great.� Was heard to echo and re-echo from the walls and ceiling of the vast hall.

The crowd then settled down to enjoying itself.

The buzz of conversation is an inadequate description of the sound made by the great number of guests. The roar could be heard even outside the palace walls as thick and stony as they were. When enough time had elapsed for the guests to have lost their first interest

Page 95

in the mountain of food a sound of trumpets was heard coming from an opening beside the dais. Accompanying the trumpets were cymbals, lutes, lyres and drums. The music drew nearer and the orchestra finally emerged into the hall. From the instruments came a bright and happy tune that made one want to dance to it.

As the guests were responding to the merry tune there appeared a troupe of dancing girls from the other side of the hall and their gyrations amidst the cloud of diaphanous silks and fine linens that swirled about them fascinated the guests. The musicians stayed in the centre of the hall and the dancers swirled around them. The audience so entered into the spirit of the dance that it was not long before it was hard to tell which were professional dancers and which were guests.

The loud and uproarious acclamations that were showered on the band of performers expressed the enthusiastic appreciation of the audience and led to an encore more lively than the main act. The dance troupe left the hall and their star performers remained behind to give a most exotic performance. Their routine ended with a shedding, one by one, of the diaphanous robes that barely covered them as they danced toward the door. Finally the last few steps were made as, naked as the day they were born; the dancers departed the hall. The fabrics thus strewn about the floor were snapped up by the men in the audience in a frenzy of excitement accompanied by much jostling and good natured repartee and an ovation that made the previous one seem like a whisper. This performance was followed by a pair of clowns leading a dancing bear. The peals of laughter at their efforts rang to the ceiling.

After a short pause for further food and wine the Grand Vizier, being present amongst the guests, had a herald call for silence and then made a speech first welcoming the guests to this function and then extolling the virtues of the king and his prowess as a military commander. Like all politicians from time immemorial he went on and on, apparently liking the sound of his own voice. Just as the guests were tiring of hearing his voice he called for them to see that their goblets were filled and then called a toast to king Ahmose on this auspicious occasion. This was joined in heartily by all present and confirmed by applause, as much for the end of the speech as for honour to Ahmose. In response Ahmose thanked his subjects for their expressions of loyalty and called them to honour his father

Page 96

Kamose the Great with a toast. When the applause for this had died down Kamose responded and urged a toast to his lovely daughter and co-ruler in Memphis. Again there were loud cheers for the lovely lady, the beautiful Nefertari, the people’s choice.

No joyful function, or function of any sort, being complete without magicians they were the next to appear. Magic figured largely in the Egyptian psyche. No project, large or small, was conducted without first consulting the appropriate oracle. There were magic signs for almost every aspect of living and dying. The circle represented the eternity of the Cosmos. The triangle was symbol of all the wonderful attributes of God, the Great Creator of all animal and vegetable life.

The conversation of relief that followed the Pompous Grand Vizier was hushed at the appearance of the five magicians that now materialized into the hall. Their flowing robes of shining satin and their high hats of silk were impressive enough to gain the attention of any crowd without them doing anything other than stand in the centre of the hall. Their ebony batons held before them were sufficient to quiet the crowd. They started off with the usual and well known by casting their staves on the floor where they crawled toward the audience as deadly asps. The women in the front row screamed on cue. Before the reptiles could reach their feet the tails were grasped by the magicians and they where whipped back into the form of staves. Standing in a circle facing the audience the magicians pointed to the goblets in their hands and each person found that that the cup appeared to be full of blood. The screams of revulsion from the women suddenly ceased when with a flick of the fingers the magicians returned the good wine to the drinking vessels.

The magicians employed on this occasion continued their act with the usual cloths from an empty hand and eggs from behind guest’s ears. Not forgetting the doves and pigeons that flew from an apparently empty box to roost on the projections on the walls and finally, while the magicians were continuing their performance, to simply disappear from sight.

Call it what you will. Mass hypnotism, trickery, hysteria or whatever it is of no consequence to label it. To the Egyptians these acts were real. The doves were real, the blood in their goblets was real and the serpents crawling across the floor were so real to them that if any person had been bitten he would have been seriously ill

Page 97

even unto death.

So the day eventually became night. More food and wine were brought to replace that consumed and after the torches had been placed in the sconces in the walls a space in the centre of the hall was cleared for the premier act of the evening. This was to be a wrestling match between two giant Nubian slaves. These had been captured in the recent campaign from which Ahmose and Kamose had returned victorious. They each knew well what was in store for them. The winner would be freed from slavery and given a purse of gold and be allowed to either stay in Egypt or return to his own country. The loser would not be so lucky as to even return to his present status but would be condemned to a life of slavery in the galleys of the Phoenicians. If he were extremely fortunate he might escape from this servitude and return home but such cases were extremely rare.

A great fanfare of trumpets heralded the appearance of the contestants. They looked magnificent in their nakedness. They were both four cubits in height. Their bodies glistening with the oil that had been spread over them to make the contest more interesting. At a call from the supervisor of the match the two locked arms and began circling each other each trying for an advantage over his opponent with whom he was so obviously perfectly matched. In order that the audience would not be confused they each wore a headband of a different colour. One was yellow and the other red thus enabling their moves to be followed as they moved round each other and round the area in which they were wrestling.

The crowd became impatient at the seeming lack of action as the two continued to circle each other. Calls came from the audience.

“Come on Red. Kick his lights out.”

“Yellow, wake up and head butt him.”

“For the sake of the Thoth, do something.”

There were many such calls till at last Yellow managed to swing the legs of red from under him and down he went with a resounding thud onto the stone flags of the floor. In a flash yellow was on to him to hold him to the floor and get his shoulders to stay there. But this was not to be. With an agility surprising in so large a person he got out from under and landed on the back of yellow and took hold of his hair and pulled his head back so severely that it would seem he could not get out of it. However, yellow slid his body out from

Page 98

under and followed the direction of pull so that red was thrown to the floor on his back.

So the contest continued for an hour. At one time Yellow appeared to be wining, then it was Red and then neither. Even the judges were hard put to make a decision. At the end of the first hour a break was called for. When the contest was renewed it continued as it must till one or the other was too exhausted to carry on.

Another full hour passed before this happened and when it did the winner, the wearer of the yellow band, was loudly applauded and taken before the king who handed him a document declaring him free to go where he willed. A small bag of gold coins to help him on his way was handed to him by the Chancellor and he was conducted from the palace by two of the Guard. The cheers that greeted this presentation echoed again and again from the high vaulted ceiling of the hall. Once escorted from the hall this successful contestant was on his own. There was always work available for such a person.

His great strength would always be at a premium for the heavy work in the erection of public buildings. He would always be in demand as a wrestler for private contests. He could have an interesting and rewarding life.

The loser also got his reward. His fate was sealed. Two of the Guard came forward and took him into custody intending to take him away to be locked in prison until the next opportunity to transport him to the port at Tanis where he would be assigned to a crew on a Phoenician galley.

“Stay.” Called a voice of authority. It was the Grand Vizier. He had further entertainment for the guests with this fellow. When he had the attention of the audience he continued. “With us this evening are quite a few friends from Lebanon and other places. For their particular pleasure this fellow is to be auctioned right here and now. I now call for bids for possession of him. You can see well his strength. It was not lack of strength that lost him this contest. It was strategy. His opponent was too smart for him. He may not have the smartest brain but he has plenty of muscle.” At this the captive lifted his head to hear this faint praise as a slight smile of pleasure passed across his face.

“Come now.” Went on the Grand Vizier. “He must be worth quite a goodly sum to at least one of you. Let’s start at two hundred shekels of gold”.

Page 99

“Make it three hundred in silver.” Came from the audience.

“You can do better than that, Hiram”. Was the challenge.

“Not as a starter, My Lord.” Came the answer.

“Who will top that?” Called the Grand Vizier. He fancied himself as an auctioneer.

Immediately someone called out “Four.” Another made a bid for four and a half. At the five hundred level in silver an enterprising bidder called “Gold.” So the auction proceeded with numbers being shouted from all quarters of the hall. At last with the bidders exhausted the Grand Vizier was able to return to the king’s treasury three times the amount that had been expended on the winner’s purse.

More entertainment followed, singing and dancing continued, till at last the stayers determined to see the festivities out to the last began wending their way home as the rising sun was making a glowing track across the waters of the Nile.

Miriam and Heo were not the last to leave but were not the first either. When they felt that they had had enough they took their leave of their associates and returned to their home. When they did arrive home Miriam questioned Heo on the justice of the condemnation of the loser in the wrestling match while the winner gained so much more.

"Well, My Dear," explained Heo. "As you no doubt know they were both eunuchs and can never again live a normal life. This is done to all such captives as we do not want them breeding among us. The winner may or may not return to his former home. He could obtain employment here or in Upper Egypt. He would know enough about protocol to obtain employment in the diplomatic service if he stays here or in the same service of his own king or in neighbouring Ethiopia. Winning would itself give him a certain prestige wherever he goes or whatever he does. He could become a very wealthy man.

Probably will”.

“That is all very well.” Remarked Miriam. “But what of the loser.

He goes out as nothing and he worked as hard as the winner.”

“The loser is in a far different position.” Explained Heo. “He would be of no use to himself either here or at home. The fact that he has lost eliminates any shred of manhood that a eunuch can claim. He would be constantly ridiculed by others whom he associated with in his service here, and would return home to a life

Page 100

of squalor in his own country. In the galleys he has the chance of becoming rather important in his occupation there. Did you notice the high price paid for him?”

“Yes.” Said Miriam. “I wondered how anyone could pay such a large amount for one person.”

“It was far above what he would bring in the market but there was a lot of excitement there tonight.

“His knowledge and understanding obtained from his experience in the palace here will give him the edge on other oarsmen and in no time at all he will most likely get appointment as an overseer on a ship. As you know oarsmen are usually chained to their oars and when a ship goes down they go with it. If the loser of tonight's contest can avoid shipwreck, which he may well do right from the start, until he gets a job on the control deck he would then be safe, for in the event of a sinking, he would be free to get away from the ship and save himself. Not only that but there are many privileges that overseers have that makes the job worthwhile. He gets better accommodation both on the ship and ashore in port, for one thing.

He gets better fed and, of course, the best of all he does not spend all his time bending to an oar. Believe me. He will be far better off than if he had not entered the contest. He also has the opportunity of seeing the world. Something he would have never had the chance of had he stayed as a slave here in the palace. " "I see", replied Miriam. "He actually wins something too although not as much. " "Yes, that is the truth of the matter. They both certainly benefit from entering the contest. " As they finally retired to bed Miriam was content concerning the fate of the two contestants and she said to her husband. “Thank you so much for explaining it so to me. I feel much better about it all now.” .

In this year also Jochabed's last child, a girl, whom they named Sarai attained her second year of age. Nun finished his training as a ship’s officer but being a member of the race ‘enslaved’ by Ahmose he could not continue to serve on Egyptian ships. To continue in his chosen occupation it was necessary that he obtain a post on a foreign trader. As there were as many of these plying the river as there were Egyptian ships this was not difficult to do. By the time that Moses

Page 101

had passed his ninth year Nun was second in command of a Red Sea trader. On his visits home to the family in Memphis he brought tales of exotic lands beyond the sea as well as stories of the lands bordering the Red Sea itself.

As Moses grew his foster mother began to introduce him to the palace scene. Periodically she would request his presence at the palace for sometimes many days at a time. Here he became aware of the vast library that had accumulated over the generations of recordings by both the Egyptians and the Israeli rulers of the Delta.

In Thebes, where he later spent much time, there was the greatest library that the world had ever seen up to that time. The accumulation of many centuries of record keeping.

After he had passed his tenth birthday Moses’ visits to the palace increased in frequency and duration. More time became available for a much closer examination of the writings themselves. His mother and Miriam had grounded him securely in the traditions of his true race and although he accepted these he became more anxious as time passed to take part in the life of the palace. He became impatient for the life of the palace and gave his guardians less peace each year and at times even complained that he was still confined to his father's house. He was hailed as the son of Nefertari although there were some who harboured doubts. His consciousness of these doubts was to colour his life and perhaps lead to his greatest mistake.

His twelfth birthday was a gala occasion, which required another palace festival.

He was now considered to be at the age of responsibility so Nefertari had him as the honoured guest at a festival at the palace.

To this festival Amram and Jochabed as his guardians to this stage were invited. Jochabed was rather diffident about accepting the invitation, as she was not certain that she could bear the pain of this final wrench as her son was finally taken from her. However, Amram insisted that they accept on the grounds that by mixing with the Egyptian society they would help to gain the confidence of the king and help towards the eventual departure from Egypt and a pilgrimage to the PROMISED LAND. Jochabed’s response to this sentiment was. “You men muffed it before when you were in control here for over two centuries. What makes you think that you

Page 102

will be more enterprising now?’”

To this Amram had an answer. “It was different then. Now we are feeling the pinch of oppression we are thinking in strong terms of getting out.”

“Now? When it is too late. HUH.” Was Jochabed’s response to such an argument. However, she decided later that she would be better to be part of the change than to ignore it.

In spite of her misgivings Jochabed accepted the invitation and on the appointed day she and Amram were present at the festivities.

She thoroughly enjoyed the singing, music and the dancing and the entertainment presented that day and night but she was shocked to realize the deviant life style of the two ruling personalities. She had almost forgotten what life could be like at the top. Their circumstances had been so shortened since they had been deprived of privileges they had enjoyed before the conquest.

Nefertari’s life style, with her troupe of young men was not lost on Jochabed. . WAS MOSES DESTINED TO BE ONE OF THOSE? and Ahmose with his male companion. WOULD MOSES FOLLOW THIS EXAMPLE? She hoped not. She and Miriam had trained him well in the traditions of Hebrew Lore and she prayed that he would not depart from what he had been taught. It was now in the hands of Elohim, they could do no more.

The climax of the festival was the declaration, by Nefertari, that Moses was the crown prince of the realm and failing the production of an heir, male or female, to Ahmose he, Moses, was to be the next king of the Delta. He, like all members of the royal House, was ‘drawn from the water’.

Following a fanfare of trumpets Moses was ushered from a side room to the banquet hall by a troupe of the palace guard led by none other than Heotept, his brother-in-law. The coronet of a royal prince was placed on his head, as he stood before Nefertari and her brother, by the High Priest of Memphis who then proclaimed him to be next in line to the throne after the present king. Throughout the ceremony Nefertari's countenance glowed with the triumph of the occasion in stark contrast to the expression on the face of her brother and many other high-born persons present. While not registering total disapproval his face showed that he was not overjoyed by the succession that he saw presented to him. There was an underlying and not entirely hidden resentment that this ‘bastard scion’ should

Page 103

be considered as a successor to the throne. The priests were, almost to a man, opposed to this succession but they were not prepared to say or do anything at this time. They were waiting to see what opportunity might present itself for them to refuse to elevate him when the time came to do so. Nefertari had the power to make such a declaration at this time and there was none there that dare contradict her.

Amenhotep was one of the first to congratulate the newly crowned prince and his 'bon homie' was in such high gear that he could well have been covering a possible disapproval of the situation. Such was not the impression that Moses himself received. He fully believed that Amenhotep supported the move made by Nefertari, his 'other mother'. Only Ahmose may have suspected his true opinion for he himself was against it and his perception may well have been a matter of wishful thinking.

Moses was proud of the new robes with which he had been invested, from his golden sandals to the high striped headdress covering his shoulders and appearing to support his head upright. A headdress that only royals were permitted to wear. His cape was not yet trimmed with ermine nor was it of royal purple. It was of fine silk a glowing royal blue colour trimmed with fine white linen. As befitting his eventual rank, as a commander in the army he had a boy-sized sword, in a gold and silver scabbard, buckled to his waist by a band of gold. He was then conducted, by the Royal Chamberlain, to the seat on the left of Ahmose, opposite to that of Nefertari. She sat on the right hand of the king.

Jochabed was in a turmoil She was concerned for Moses' well being in the social life of the royal household and yet was proud that he was considered so close in line to the throne. The thought of his position there increased her own hopes of Israel's success in making the expected pilgrimage to the PROMISED LAND. She murmured a quiet prayer to Elohim. “Please, Lord, Guide him a right when the time comes to deliver Your People.” Amram said nothing.

Miriam also in her diary comments on the event to the effect that surely Israel's God is leading and preparing the way for the fulfillment of the promise made to Jacob all those generations ago.

She despairs of any other men in Israel making any move for they have talked for so long and done nothing. Moses is in the right position at the right time and the ‘slavery’ of his people she hopes

Page 104

will be the incentive needed to impress him with the need to lead them out of Egypt.

She little knew at this time the heartaches that she would experience and the disappointments she would face before that blessed event actually occurred.

At the time of Moses’ induction into Palace life Miriam was a 26 year old mother of three children. Twin boys and a girl. The boy who emerged first into the light of day was named Dathan and the one to follow him, Abiram. These had been seven years on Earth and their young sister, Neferi, had just turned four. Both boys and their father doted on this fairy tale princess that had come among them.

Amram was disappointed that his eldest son, Nun, now twenty-four, had ‘gone to sea’. This disappointment was somewhat tempered by his son Aaron who had followed in his footsteps and had become a worker in stone. However, there was a considerable problem for as a member of the conquered race he was debarred from engaging in this work as a self-employed tradesman. He could work as an apprentice or as a journeyman but could never aspire to be a master craftsman and independent builder. To enter into the stone mason’s trade Aaron must be a member of the guild. To be a member he must be a free man. Since Kamose had ‘made slaves of the Heqa Kasut’ Aaron was not a free man.

The reputation of the Craft Guild was such that Kamose had granted a special exemption to its members from his decree of slavery. Thus did Amram and his colleagues in the Brotherhood enjoy the status of free men. As a Past Grand Master of all Egypt Amram was highly respected in the Craft and it was unthinkable by its members that his son should be debarred from membership on a ‘technicality’.

Every law ever made has a way round it, over it or through it. A whole session of a Brotherhood meeting was devoted to finding a way of making Aaron eligible for membership. There was no apparent loophole showing at this time. Finally it was decided that grounds would be sought to make this possible. Laws could not be changed or regulations altered.

While this was going on in the Brotherhood Nefertari had requested Jochabed to ask for a special token of appreciation for her work in rearing Moses so well as she had. When Jochabed approached Amram with this request he saw his opportunity at once. Without a

Page 105

moment of hesitation he said. “Ask her to grant freedom to all of our children. No strings attached.”

“Is that all?” Exclaimed Jochabed. “What about us? You and me.

Surely you can think of something we need for ourselves.”

“WE are already virtually free. We live in our own home. We live comfortably, more so than most of our people. We can not ask for more than that. If there is ought that you would like to add to what I have asked you are free to do so.”

“You speak truly, My husband. To ask for more than we have would be selfish of us. We have had twelve years of our son and now he is elevated beyond our wildest dreams when he was first expected. I will do as you suggest and ask for no more than the freedom of our remaining children” Thus when pressed for her request Jochabed asked only for that which she and her husband had determined on. This was willingly granted. More was offered but refused politely by Jochabed. The necessary certification was supplied on the day that Moses was taken to the palace to take up permanent residence there. When the packet containing the papyrus scroll of certification was opened another was found to be with it. This scroll was eagerly taken out

by Jochabed. To her utmost delight it was found to be a deed of possession of their home. No longer did they occupy it by favour.

It was theirs by right.

The Amram household had barely settled down after the induction of Moses when they had a visit from Nun. The ship that he now commanded had docked in Memphis and he took this opportunity of visiting his parents. They were happy to see him, as they did not get this chance very often. He brought with him some news that gladdened Jochabed’s heart. She had, for some time, been concerned that a man of twenty-four years was still unmarried.

When he informed her that his condition was soon to be brought to an end she could not contain herself for joy. Her first question was typical. “Who is this lucky girl? Is she one of us or one of ‘them?”

“What difference does it make, Mother? Would one or the other make her more or less welcome?”

“NO. My son. None whatever, but, one of our own would bring much less in the way of complications. I’ve had enough of those for a while.”

“She is one of us.”

Page 106

“Where is she from? Where did you meet her? What has taken you so long?”

“Easy now, all in good time.”

“I am sorry. It is just hat I am so anxious for your happiness. I wish that your father were here. He would like to hear this too”.

“I’ve already told him.” He smiled at his mother’s surprised look and explained to her how this had happened.

“Part of my cargo was straw and some tools for the brickyard and he was at the docks, to take delivery of them, when we moored. He asked after my health and so I told him that it couldn’t be better and why. He congratulated me there and then and seemed not too concerned about any details. He had plenty on his mind with the shipment he had come to collect’.

“Typical. Tell me more about the lady.”

“Of course. She lives with her parents in Loukes Lemnen. That is a free port on the western shore of the Red Sea. It is a little way south of the mouth of the Gulf of Sweis. Directly north east of Thebes.

As you may know, in each of these free cities is a small enclave of our own people who do very well from trade. Often they are the main core of the trading population of the port. As the ship’s captain I have the right to do a little trading on my own account whenever the opportunity arises and it can be done without detriment to my owner’s interests. This is not the only port city that I have visited or traded in, of course. My association with Helene’s parents became more then merely trader and client. One thing led to another until I asked her father for her hand in marriage. He graciously accepted my request although I am only a humble sailor with no great prospects of land or property.”

“But, you are doing well. Aren’t you? You are well able to support a wife. What more could they want?” Jochabed could not resist interrupting at this point.

“That is true, Mother, but what I have is so little compared to the wealth of her parents. They own property all over that city. Her father has offered to finance me into a ship of my own. I am reluctant to take it as I do not want to be under an obligation to any man, even my father-in-law. Besides, I have a chance of getting command a ship of the fleet owners I now work for. That is a better chance of success than starting from the bottom on my own.”

“No doubt you know what is best on that score. When is the happy

Page 107

event to take place, and where?”

“The first question is easy to answer. As soon as it can be arranged.

The other is a little harder. You and Father and her parents are so far away from each other. In Egypt we are restricted in our movements. Even Father, I think, would not have enough influence to get you both to Loukes Lemnen. Being a free port it would be considered to be the same as going to a foreign country for you and to bring them this far for their own daughter’s wedding is a bit much to ask. We do have a problem” “Why not meet them half way. That could be arranged, surely.

Your father would know for certain about that.”

“What do you mean, half way?”

“Succouth is the commercial centre for our people. We are all related somehow so they must have relatives living there. It is right on the waterway from the Red Sea to the Nile. You have cousins living there. Miriam visited them on her honeymoon. I believe that they would be willing to accommodate us for the event.”

“Mother. You are a genius.”

“NO. Just a mother who wants to see her son happy.”

Amram, when consulted, was pleased with the prospect of his son marrying so well and with his future prospects as the owner of his own trading vessel. He saw the possibility of a fleet of ships under the name of Nun bar Amram. He put the necessary moves into place to have the wedding solemnized at Succouth. It was to be a simple Israeli ceremony. The elders of the tribe of Levi laid their hands in blessing on the couple bowed before them and called on Elohim to be with them and to prosper them. The two day feast that followed was the highlight of the whole exercise.

As this city of Succouth was central to Nun’s activities as an international trader it was there that he and his new bride settled.

Rachel, Miriam’s sister, younger than her, but older than Aaron, was still unmarried when Nun settled in Succouth. Jochabed arranged for the newly married couple to take her with them to Succouth to assist them in settling into their new home. She had a somewhat ulterior motive in this offer. All her efforts at finding this daughter a mate had failed. No man in Memphis, Israeli, or Egyptian, had been to her liking. No that there had been any dearth of suitors. Rachel had continued uninterested. Jochabed was prepared to forgo the assistance of this daughter in her own home if by sending her to

Page 108

another city she could be found a mate. Even in these new surroundings it was some considerable time before Rachel found a man she felt she could be happy with. When she finally did so Jochabed took some days to recover from the shock but rallied from this and did for this daughter just as proudly effectively as she did for Miriam. Not on such a grand scale as she did not marry into any royalty or even Israeli high society.

The life of Moses was now intimately woven into the palace schedules. He visited his mother and sister when time allowed and if he thought of them at such a time. As a future king he was expected to become adept at military science. His rank at his induction was purely honorary so his training had to commence at the lowest level to give him the grounding he needed to be able to command. The discipline irked him. He claimed that the officers ‘picked on him.’

He did not relish the idea of being a king if it meant enduring all these hardships. He was happiest in the great library where there was such a wealth of history stored.

There he read about the exploits of the ancients. The Galgemish Epic was there for him to read. The origins of life as the ancients saw it was there for him to study. The story of king Hamurabi of Babylon and his tablet of ten laws set in stone six hundred years before was there for him to read about. Here, he had his first insight into the duties of man to his God and to his neighbour. He found much more about Atlantis and the Atlanteans than was still extant when Plato investigated the tales, a millennium laster. These were not closely related nor very relevant to the events that produced the Israeli people so those tales were not included in Moses’ history.

Miriam endeavoured to guide his mind in the direction of being king for in that she saw the deliverance of her People. With him at the head they could correct the mistakes of the past and find a way to fulfill the Promise. Whenever Moses visited her home, which was more frequent than his visits to their mother, she did her best to orient his thoughts toward what he could do for his people when he became king.

He questioned his father on Hebrew traditions and studied Egyptian records. The two did not always coincide. He asked Mriam about this.

“The written record.” He said. “Is often different from the spoken

Page 109

one. One could expect that the written one would be more accurate.”

“What do you mean by that?” Queried Miriam.

“Well. Tradition has our people being here for three hundred years yet the written records show only a little over two hundred. The seven good years followed by seven bad ones under Joseph appear in the written records as four and five. Do our people have different time scales or bad memories? That is the sort of thing I am talking about.”

“I’m sure that you will find that most historians colour their records to suit their viewpoint. To show up their own people in the best light. Why don’t you put it all together and write a history yourself?

You would have the time to do so.”

“If I did, would you help me?”

“I would not be much help as I have not studied any of that and my time is pretty well taken up with keeping this household going.

Father and Uncle Uzziel would be your best help there. Also our old tutor, who still lives there, would be happy to have something to do. He was well versed in Hebrew history and tradition.”

Moses found this suggestion attractive and spent much of his spare time in that very project as his life went on at the palace. As he grew in stature and maturity in the palace environment his time became very much taken up with training as a royal. He was expected eventually to be proficient in military lore and science as every king in those days was expected to lead his armies into battle.

He had to be able to think on the battlefield in the heat of conflict.

Whether Moses was up to this only time and training would tell.

His history writing became a life time work and his life became so full that only a few spare days and hours, when the opportunity arose, could be devoted to this project. It is doubtful if very much of this history was actually written while he lived in Egypt. His later years in exile were most likely his most productive on his ‘History of the World.’

Page 110

CHAPTER VIII MOSES’ FIRST STEP TO POWER. As Crown Prince Moses was, at fifteen years of age, appointed a sergeant of the guard, which was still, at first, a nominal appointment, till he had learned the rudiments of military discipline and action. His ultimate post would be at least a general in the regular army. In the guard he was to learn discipline and military maneuvers on the home front. As king he would be expected to lead his army into battle, just as all previous kings had done. No battle skills could be learned in the guard. It was merely a preliminary to his real training. However, it was a necessary part of that training. In this capacity he was under the eye of Heotept, his brother-in-law.

Miriam took this opportunity of ‘keeping an eye on him’.

Moses’ royal status entitled him to rise quickly through the ranks.

His own inability to shape up as good officer material delayed these promotions somewhat. For this he was inclined to blame any one but himself. Good officer material should be able to take orders as well as give them. Moses had the ability to do the latter but was not very good at the former. Even as a foot soldier he had been prone to question orders given by his superior officers. He had the habit of going over their heads if the situation warrented it according to his lights. This trait did not endear him to his superiors. Especially when he made it evident that he expected his promotions to come ‘on time’.

Miriam records the doubts that Heo expressed over the possibility of Moses ever being an effective military leader, He did not seem to be able to accept discipline and if an officer can not accept discipline himself how can he ever demand it from his men or even expect it.

Neither did he exhibit that emotional control any good officer needs to be able to assess a situation objectively and give effective orders.

Miriam was well aware of Moses' inability to accept discipline having reared him from babyhood. She was used to being the sounding board for his complaints concerning the supposed unfairness of his treatment by his superiors and elders. She could well understand how he would feel about his superior officers, especially as his rank as Crown Prince made him in fact superior to

Page 111

them. What Heo had to tell her regarding Moses' treatment of those under him she found of particular interest and her heart sank at the thought that Moses may not be of sufficient strength of character to lead his People from Egypt.

Early one day, during the second year of Moses’ service in the Guards, Heo said to Miriam over their morning meal. “I am at a loss to know what to do about Moses.”

“Is he in trouble?” Asked Miriam.

“Not in trouble. He is trouble. He never goes quite far enough to get into it. Just minor skirmishes with the junior officers. Always stops short of actually creating an almighty stir, as though he is afraid of taking it all the way. He often delays the carrying out of orders by questioning them, or showing, by his attitude, that the does not agree with them. He can get away with it in the Guard but it will never do in the army. He is due for promotion to officer but is not yet really ready for it. As Prince Designate he can not be left in the ranks indefinitely. If he were anyone else he would have no chance of promotion but I must recommend it within the next few days.”

“Can you make a probationary appointment?”

“Ordinarily, yes. May not be able to do it in this case. As you know, his influence goes very close to the throne.”

Yes. I realise that. In what way is he unsatisfactory?”

“Well. His main problem is lack of personal control. A few days ago he was inspecting his squad in the course of readying them for a parade. One of the men had his kilt just a little awry. It is normal in such a case to quietly chat with the man and get him to straighten it quickly before the squad joins the parade. Not Moses, instead of that he berated the man severely. He could be heard all over the ground. It was not only embarrassing for the man concerned but also to his fellow junior officers. It shows a distinct lack of that restraint that is essential to effective battlefield action.”

“Does he carry on like that often? Or was that a lapse of some sort?”

“Not that often. But often enough to be noticeable. Especially when Uncle Meno passes and sees and hears it happen, as he did the other day. He hates that kind of thing. He seldom raises his voice above parade ground level and gets instant response and the men all love him. He is also very conscious that Palace Guardsmen are true

Page 112

Egyptians. They are mostly the sons of nobles and are expected to set an example to regular army officers who have mercenaries under them as well as serving Egyptians.”

“That was bad. Was something bothering Moses that day? He used to fly into rages as a child if things did not go his way as he expected them to do. Sometimes it was a backlash from some previous upset. I hoped that as he matured he would grow out of that.”

“Could have been, but that does not justify that kind of behaviour.

True, he should be beyond that kind of outburst as an adult. Much more so as an army officer. In the field a commander must be seen to be supportive of his men, not ready to tear them apart.”

“Perhaps action in the field may be the answer. The more active roles there may give vent to his energies and give him less time to brood.”

“Mmmm. Might be worth a try. But, only as a very junior officer.

An expedition is soon to be raised for a campaign against Nubia.

There are some problems there that need attending to.”

In the course of time Heo made his recommendation for Moses’ promotion to corporal. What happened to it in the channels of government was never clear but he did not get posted to the main army readying for the Nubian campaign. Nor did he get any major promotion in the Palace Guard at this time.

Not only did Heo express to Miriam his disapproval of such action but also, Miriam herself confides to her diary that she and her people may be in for yet another disappointment in their dream of a return to the home of their FATHERS. "Surely," she writes, "Moses as eventual king is in a far better position to move his people out than was father Joseph who was only a powerful vizier. As king he can decree that we leave. He will need no permission. Although Father Joseph was given permission for a great number to return to Palestine for Jacob’s burial they all returned voluntarily to their homes in Egypt. Perhaps the people still do not want to go. Even slavery of a sort is preferable to subduing and developing a new and backward country. Still GOD promised us the land and we should be doing something about it."

Some months after the conversation between Miriam and Heotept on the future of Moses, Ahmose led his army against the rebels that had again been giving trouble in Nubia. His was a supporting role to

Page 113

that of this father Kamose. Nubia was the responsibility of Kamose to control but this rebellion had risen so swiftly and spread so quickly that he needed the extra support that the troops of Lower Egypt could give him. The plan was for the two armies to meet in Thebes and from there, advance against the rebel to the South.

Although Moses was not a part of the main army he was given posting as corporal in the personal bodyguard that was to protect the person of Ahmose. This could put him in the thick of the battle but not necessarily so. The duties of the bodyguard were to keep intruders away from the king when he was not actively engaged in battle. Thus Moses’ chance of getting into the real stress of battle was rather slim. However, he would be expected to get some experience in taking as well as giving discipline as a junior officer.

Five thousand foot of soldiers and a thousand chariots had left three days before to march to Thebes when the king assembled his bodyguard in the Grand Square within the palace walls in Memphis to escort him to the rendezvous with Kamose in Thebes. The reserve equipment had already been loaded on to the ships that were to take this contingent to its destination. First a troop of a hundred set off, four abreast, while the king remained standing on his inspection dais at the top of the steps leading into the Royal Apartments. Next, his own bodyguard, who were ranged about him, opened to allow him to step down amongst them. They then formed a protective square around him as they moved off out of the palace grounds. Behind them came another hundred soldiers, again four abreast, as they all headed for the boats waiting to transport the king to Thebes.

This was not as grand a spectacle as the movement of the might of Lower Egypt a few days previously but it was more glittering. The host of civilians lining the Royal Way was not smaller than the previous one that has sent off the fighting men.

The plumes of the helmets of the first hundred waved gaily in the slight early morning breeze. The brightly polished spear points held aloft as they marched sparkled like diamonds in the slanting rays of the rising sun. The burnished bronze surfaces of their swords hanging at their sides shone like rubies as they caught errant rays of light striking between the movements of the men. Flashes of gold came from the brass helmets and metals of their leather armour as they strode along the King’s Highway. Above the heads of the

Page 114

marching men could be seen the king in his litter that was borne by his admiring young men. It was quite a sight to behold with its silken canopy decorated round its edges with hanging tassels and tiny bells that tinkled as the litter swayed on the shoulders of its bearers. In his jewel-encrusted breast plate and armor topped by ostrich plumes he drew resounding cheers form his assembled citizens.

The rear hundred looked just as impressive as the vanguard but, by the time that they came to pass the crowds they had either run out of cheer or so no point in cheering the same thing all over again. The cheers that they met were considerably muted.

At the boats the first hundred boarded the three boats moored upstream. The king and his personal entourage boarded the fifth boat. The rearguard boarded the last three boats of the ten-boat fleet.

The three boats carrying equipment and stores were thus situated between the two guard platoons for security of the force in its eightday journey to Thebes. Secure in the southern Capital these soldiers were given two days leave while waiting for the main body of the army to arrive. Some spent it carousing in the entertainment palaces and whorehouses with which every city has always welcomed soldiers stationed in its confines. Others, not so inclined quietly viewed the magnificently impressive temples and palaces of the city itself. The legacy of a thousands of years of glittering civilization was something every Egyptian could be proud of.

Moses’ greatest interest was the magnificent library that had accumulated there over the centuries.

It was the most comprehensive in the world at that time. In it were manuscripts gathered from every nation. From the lands to the east of Mesopotamia, from beyond the remote Euphrates was the source of much of the material. Writing from the great Sumerian king Hamurabi was to be found there. His codified laws had been famous for five centuries. Here were stories of Atlantis and its five kings.

All this was too much for Moses to absorb in two days. But it whetted his appetite for more and he vowed that he would return again and again till he had his fill of its treasures. It was this visit that determined him to push on with his investigation of his natural family’s history. This germ of an idea that had grown through his early teen years now took hold of him and it became his obsession

Page 115

in the years to come even after his destiny to rule in Egypt was fulfilled. This obsession was to influence his life in ways not foreseen by him or Nefertrai, even by Miriam herself, at that time.

Ahmose had adopted the recently developed strategy of leading an army from behind. Generals were thus able to preserve their expertise for another day if the battle did not go as planned. This was fortunate for Moses as he thus escaped the fiercest heat of battle when the combined forces of Kamose and Ahmose met the rebel Nubians.

Three days march to the south of Thebes lay the city of Syene, the last before the approaches to Nubia became evident. This city had not been encroached, neither had its surrounding countryside for the Nubian rebels had not yet left the safety of their own country. All that they had done at this stage was to eliminate the Egyptian representatives in Nubia and repudiate the treaty binding them to pay tribute to Egypt. This expedition was to teach them that this was not acceptable. The regular flow of tribute could not be disturbed. It was needed by the Egyptian treasury.

Two days march beyond Syene the Egyptian army entered Nubian territory but still met with no resistance. To have gone by water would have required a huge fleet strung for many miles along the river. This would make it vulnerable to ambush in many places.

With the army spread over several miles on either side of the river banks there could be no surprise attack against them and they could ’live off the land’ as armies did in those days and for several millennia afterwards. The fleet that had transported Ahmose and his escort to Thebes now carried that king and his entourage up the river at a discreet distance from any hostilities that the army might become engaged in. Ahead of it was a smaller fleet carrying Kamose who preferred to be at the head of his army than to follow it.

Three days march into Nubia the dust cloud spied by the patrols heralded the gathering of the Nubian rebel army. They were not advancing. Their strategy was to wait for the arrival of the Egyptians in the hope that they would be tired from their long advance and less able to resist the Nubian onslaught that was to drive them from the country and free it from the heavy Egyptian yoke. The Nubian army was drawn up in battle array stretched out, as the Egyptians were, on either side of the river. They were ready

Page 116

to turn back what they considered would be a tired army and drive it back down the river from where it came.

The energy of the Egyptian troops had been carefully cosseted by their commanders in the long march and they were as fit and fresh, as were the Nubians whom they faced. There had been no forced march. More of a leisurely stroll that has been insisted on by Kamose who knew the value of fresh troops. They had fed off the land and rested at night as they progressed across the country.

These fresh troops were able to attack so fiercely that before the first day was over the tide of battle was in their favour. The halt in their advance that had been noticed by the Nubian generals was not a pause to regain strength, but a pause to assess the strength of their opposition. As a charging predator animal pauses to gather strength for its spring so the Egyptian army paused before making its fatal attack on its enemy.

The small advance made by the Nubians during that initial pause was soon driven back and by the end of the day it was not to be as easy for the Nubians as they had thought. As the dust settled on the winding down hostilities to enable both armies to rest for the night the Egyptians had established themselves in a strong position in advance of the point of contact made that morning.

While the sun was resting from his daily labours the two armies prepared for the expected dawn attack by whichever got to it first.

The Egyptian army started the action of the day. It was much stronger than the Nubians expected and by the end of the day they were in retreat. It was not a rout. They moved back with appropriate rearguard action to allow their reinforcements to come to their assistance. It could not have been a surprise attack for the Nubians had been ready for it. What did surprise their commanders was the strength of the attack. They had expected that the thrust of the previous day had been the last gasp of a tired army. They soon realized the error of their strategy. At this point the river makes a huge S bend in its course. It was on the northern arc of this bend that the confrontation took place. Rather than retreat along the river the Nubian army moved to follow the diameter of the curve and thus shorten their retreat course and bring their reinforcement closer.

The city was on the inside of the bend and they believed it would be thus secure from the part of the Egyptian army that did not cross the river to pursue them. They fully expected that they would have the

Page 117

support of the city garrison as they neared it. In this they were doomed to disappointment.

The Egyptian fleet had continued on up the river, keeping pace with the segment of its army that had stayed on the Right Bank. Having little opposition from what Nubian troops were left on that side of the river his body of troops came to the bank opposite the city of Meroe at the same time as the fleet came to it by water. As they passed the junction of the Nile tributary flowing in from the northern mountains of Punt, not the Blue Nile, they could see their troops on the West Bank successfully driving the Nubians before them. This was no surprise for the small riverboats commandeered as they advanced were used by the Egyptian commanders on the West Bank to communicate across the river with the army advancing along the east bank.

The army of Kamose had not yet entered the city but had it surrounded so that its surrender was inevitable. Ahmose had his army hold what was left of the Nubian army captive on the east bank. The Egyptian navy and a flotilla of small boats were ready to transport his men across the river when the city capitulated. If it did not then they would invade from the riverside, where a wall had never been built for protection, while Kamose held siege from the land ward side. The Nubian troops that were facing Ahmose could not be prevented from entering the water and escaping into the city.

This put new life into the defenders and they defied the two surrounding armies to take the city. The blockade put in place by Kamose and Ahmose eventually had its effect.

Although not short of water, food supplies could not be replaced from without the city. The end was inevitable though it took time for this to actually happen. During the several weeks of siege regular sorties were made on the land side walls and from across the river until the attackers were rewarded by the collapse of the defense and the city garrison surrendered to the victorious Egyptians.

With as great pomp and ceremony as could be mustered from the fleet and army so far from home the two kings entered the conquered city. The rebel king was deposed and his supporters taken captive to be returned to Egypt with the returning troops, there to be employed as slaves. The Egyptians were not wholesale slaughterers of captives. They preferred to employ them in the erection of the mighty buildings for which that culture has become

Page 118

justly famous. Commanders and troops that could be spared were set to garrison and govern the city. A system of payments of reparations was instituted and a system of collecting this and transporting it to Egypt was organized.

The two kings of Egypt retired in triumph to Thebes where a weeklong celebration of the victory occupied them and the people.

During these festivities the captured king was paraded before the people who jeered him soundly and cheered Kamose most enthusiastically for when kings prospered thus so did their subjects.

Moses took this opportunity to spend some more time in the greatest library in the world to continue his research into history.

At the conclusion of this festive season Ahmose returned in triumph to Memphis where there was another triumphal parade and Ahmose received his accolades from the people of Lower Egypt. By the time that Ahmose returned to Memphis the main bulk of his army had already arrived and when his fleet tied up at the Royal wharves they formed an escort by lining the whole of the Royal Way from the piers to the gates of the palace. This maneuver kept the crowds at bay when the king and entourage disembarked.

First to be heard and seen was a long and very loud fanfare of trumpets to announce the imminent appearance of the king. Then the escort in the leading boats emerged to take their places on the quay. The king then emerged from his cabin on his boat. The white charger that he was to ride to the palace in triumph was waiting there right where the boat had moored. As he stepped from the boat to mount the beast he waved triumphantly to the crowds that had come to welcome him home. The escort then moved off to the road to the palace and he followed on his high prancing steed. Behind him came the rearguard and before him the trumpeters kept up their triumphant blaring all the way to the palace. It was not until they whole party had entered those gates that the trumpeters took the instruments from their mouths and gave a great collective sigh of relief. The captives taken from the court of Nubia and allotted to Ahmose were part of the procession. They were chained together in a long line that stretched from behind Ahmose’s steed for several hundred paces. As the procession advanced toward the palace the soldiers lining the way closed in behind it, formed into ranks six abreast, and followed it to the palace. Behind their closed rank the people became a solid crowd following them.

Page 119

At the palace the king mounted a dais that had been erected outside its main entry. The captives were lined up on the ground immediately before him. Soldiers of the Palace Guard kept them in place. As many people as could crowded the courtyard and as many were outside wishing that they were inside. The king addressed the assembled crowds. Stewards were posted on the walls to relay to those outside what the king said in his address. He thanked the soldiers for their supreme efforts and loyalty in the campaign against the rebels and assured the people that he would ever protect their interests. He concluded this political speech to the echoing of great rounds of applause.

In all this Moses was merely a member of the King’s escort, learning what would be expected of him as a future king. Nefertari made no secret of the fact that she considered him to be the next incumbent on the throne. No successor could be expected from Ahmose’s loins and Moses was the next best to a natural son.

Women were not barred from occupying the throne of Egypt. Far from it. They preferred to stay off it. Since it was the king’s duty to lead the troops into battle their lives were always at risk.

Consequently it was usually the men who were put on the throne with the blessing of the woman who determined the succession.

Thus while the king was absent from ‘the office’ fighting in far distant places for the glory and honour of the nation the women ran things at home.

In this case it was Nefertari, full sister to the king, who had ruled in his absence on the Nubian campaign. The king was in the full vigour of his manhood so the prospect of a successor was well on the back burner. This in no way diminished Nefertari’s ambition to have her Moses take Ahmose’s place when the time came for him to do so. This whole operation had kept Moses from Memphis for seven months. When he returned home he had passed his eighteenth birthday and was considered to be a man in his own right. He had learned much about discipline, how to take orders as well as to give them. No longer were the men under his control subject t his fits of violent temper. He had learned to keep himself under control.

Although approaching the end of the third decade of her life Nefertari retained in the body the contours of youth. The firm flesh of her lithe limbs and well cared for torso glowed with the vigour that many a younger woman could well envy. He face was as

Page 120

unlined as it was when in the full flower of her youth. From her dark almond eyes shone a love of life that is seldom matched, let alone surpassed, by others in any walk of life. Her long dark tresses cascaded over her shoulders enticingly and her full red mouth gave to any viewer an invitation to heights of enjoyment that are seldom reached by most in even a long and eventful life.

She had been with the king on the dais as he responded to the cheers of the crowd following his triumphal entry into the city and the palace. She was draped in a silken gown shot through with gold thread and trimmed with ermine. She wore silver slippers encrusted with rubies, topaz and beryl stones. Her royal blue and white headdress matched that of the king for she was joint ruler with him.

As the celebrations wound down to a close and the loud rejoicing of the people gave way to the quiet of evening Nefertari retired to her quarters to recover from the exertions of the day. After changing out of the heavy official robes she had worn she was reclothed in a light silken shift. This revealed more of her seductively beautiful form than it covered. She then dismissed her retainers with the excuse that she wished to rest from the rigours of the day just passed. They also had had a strenuous day and were glad of the respite. They left her reclined on a velvet couch in her private salon.

Only her most personal maid remained to attend to any particular wishes that she might have during the evening.

Moses went with his fellow soldiers to their barracks after his duty time had been completed and the guard had been changed. There, after partaking of a hearty meal, he changed out of his armour and service clothes, bathed and was reclothed in garments fit for him to wear on his reentry into the palace.

To get to his own apartment in the palace he had to pass those of Nefertari. Before leaving for the Nubian campaign he had promised his foster mother that he would call in on her at his first opportunity after his return. This he now proposed to do. He had changed into his palace garments of a plain white kilt below a fine silken blouse type shirt at the barracks rather than in his own apartment. He thus was more presentable, if she were awaiting him, than he would be in his rough soldiering clothes.

Nefertari heard the footsteps echoing through the stairwell as Moses ascended them. Not the heavy tread of military boots but the soft whisper of house sandals as they lifted their owner up the stairs from

Page 121

the ground floor. Then the steady forward movement as he approached her apartment. She continued to recline on her couch, awaiting his coming.

At last he stood in the doorway filling it with his magnificent physique. For a moment she sat transfixed by the beauty of his body. The body of a well-trained soldier who is well aware of his attractions. Was this really the boy she had seen growing up in the palace, learning to be a royal? He surely was born to lead. No peasant could have come so far from his roots as this man had done.

He must have had some breeding to start with. Of course he had.

Nefertari had instinctively known all along that Moses was not the offspring of a peasant mother. She had always more than just suspected that Jochabed was more than only a wet nurse for the foundling she had rescued from the river. As he grew to manhood she observed an increasing resemblance to the family that reared him. Her first opinions were confirmed by the passage of time. No one at the palace knew the family as she did. She had been careful to keep contact between them and palace population to a minimum.

She felt secure in the belief that these people had no real knowledge of the origins of Moses. No one had ever mentioned, in her presence, any perceived likeness between Moses and his nurse.

Uncle Meno was the one exception to this situation. He made some snide remarks at times, but one never knew whether he was serious or joking. She could never tell from these remarks whether he knew or suspected anything or of he was just being entertaining at he expense of whoever was nearest to him. She found him a little bit hard to take at times, more often than she liked to admit.

Moses stood in the doorway seeming somewhat at a loss as to what to do next. Nefertari’s speculative expression as he entered puzzled him. Had he done something of which she disapproved? His mind did a quick run through of his activities known to Nefertari since he had last spoken to her. Had a bad report come to her concerning his actions during the campaign? He could not return from Nubia till the army brought him back with it. Was she miffed over his taking so long to appear after the return of the troops? He had to perform his duties as an officer, however lowly he might be. Finally he told himself, “Oh. To hell with worrying about it. Here goes.�

As he proceeded into the room he held his arms out in supplication, silently asking for forgiveness for anything he might have done

Page 122

unwittingly. Nefertari sprang from her reclining position refusing to interpret his gesture in any other way that that which suited her own purpose. She rushed toward him and threw her arms round his body hugging him to her. She buried her face in his shoulder as she murmured. “It is so good to see you safely home again.”

As his arms closed around her with the shock of impact he said.

“Wonderful to be back. I have been looking forward to this moment ever since I left.”

“You naughty boy.

You should have had your mind on your work.”

“Oh. I did. Believe me. I certainly did what I was expected to do. I have been commended by no lesser person than Amenhotept himself. Now! That’s something.”

“It certainly is, My Love.” As she drew back to get a better look at Moses’ face. But only for moment. She had no sooner drawn back than she took a tighter grip on his body, drew him even closer to her and nestled into his neck showering it with kisses. Her arms moved from his waist to his shoulders then to his neck as she drew his head down to hers and kissed him heartily on both cheeks. Then, holding his head firmly between her hands she kissed him fully and lingeringly on the mouth.

Moses already had his arms about her slender form and matched her seizure of him, responding with relish to her luscious kisses. He enjoyed immensely this enthusiastic welcome.

“Hey. I’m home. I’m not going away again straight away.”

“I know you’re not. I am just so glad to see you home again safe and well. My, you have grown. Much in stature but much more in attitude. You are now a real man. This campaign has made you.

You left here as a big boy. You have come back as a man, and what a MAN.” With this she took hold of his head even more firmly and kissed him again on the mouth but this time did not let go. His hands moved up her back to hold her shoulders even closer. Their lips clung to each other, as do limpets to a rock as his lips responded to the caresses of hers. He enfolded her closer in his arms as her tongue found its way between his teeth and into his mouth where it explored his palate.

His tongue quickly responded and found its way into the deepest recesses of her delightful mouth.

Page 123

He held her so tightly that her feet had left the ground as she bent her knees in ecstasy of this contact leaving her silver slippers standing neatly on the floor where her feet had been.

As his manhood began to rise against her she took her hands away from behind his head, lowered her feet to the floor and pulled away from him letting her lips lovingly caress his as she withdrew.

As she stood again on her own two feet Moses exclaimed. “What was that all about?” Most likely for want of something better to say.

“Oh.” She said. “I shouldn’t have let my emotions run away with me. I have missed you so much since you have been away so long.

It seems like years though I know it has been only months. I’m sorry I got carried away.”

“I can see nothing to be sorry about.” Responded Moses, not game to look down at his rising kilt and willing it to subside.

“Come and sit here on this couch beside me.” Invited Nefertari as she led him to that piece of furniture that she herself had been occupying as Moses came into the room. “I’ll get you a drink. You must be thirsty coming straight from the barracks.”

“How do you know that I came straight from there?”

“You haven’t been to your room yet.”

“So, been spying on me, have you?”

“Of course not, silly boy. I was just anxious to be the first to greet you when you returned, is all.”

By this time her maid had returned with two beakers of wine imported from exotic lands far away across the Middle Sea. She placed one in the hand of each of them and said. “Will there be anything else Ma’am?”

“Thank you. No. I’ll not require you again. You may retire to your quarters.”

“Thank you, Ma’am.” The maid replied as she withdrew from the royal presence.

Sitting beside Moses on the couch Nefertari held up her wineglass, touched his with it, and said. “Here’s to you. Moses, the man.”

Not to be outdone he responded after drinking her toast with her. He touched his glass to hers and said. “Here’s to the loveliest creature in the whole nation. May she continue to love me forever.”

Throwing her arms about his neck Nefertari exclaimed. “Oh. Moses. Love you I do. Have done since I first took you a waif from the bulrushes. I shall always love you. This love is from the

Page 124

Gods. We have been destined from eternity to meet and love each other. Don’t you feel so too?”

“Whatever you say.” Was his response to this? “Without you I would be nothing. You have made me what I am and for this I love you truly. What would I do without you?”

“How true. You say the nicest things.” Muttered Nefertari as she clung even tighter to her man and buried his mouth in her kisses.

Her tongue explored his mouth again and his arms went round her back and followed his hands as they crept downward, his fingers exploring the track of her spine as it pursued its way to her beautifully rounded buttocks.

Pausing only long enough to murmur. “Love me. My man. Love me. I need your love so much.” She showered his neck with nibbles that sent messages to his hands as they fondled her firm round arse. They reached involuntarily down and pulled up her shift so that she was naked from the waist down. Her left hand reached down between their bodies to undo the buckle that fastened his kilt and dropped it to the floor.

In their writhing, his legs were drawn up so that he lay prone upon the wide seat of the couch. His manhood as erect as it ever could be. While her mouth remained fastened to his she arched her back so that her legs straddled his hips and her body arched over his. His hands moved upward under her shift curled about torso and found her firm, youthfully rounded breasts. His fingers fondled their nipples, now hardening with her passion.

As she impaled herself on his risen manhood and threw her arms up in the air with a joyful cry he lifted her shift above her head, threw it to the floor and cupped both her female charms in his hands. His thumbs fondling her two purpled nipples sent an electric shock through her body that led to even greater response to him. Taking his shoulders in both her hands she rose slightly on her knees. As she came down on him again he rose to meet her and they both groaned with the joy and pleasure of their coupling.

Taking their time to savour to the full every moment of their copulation they at last entered the gates of paradise together.

Lying relaxed beside Moses on the confines of the couch Nefertari said. “You’ve done this before Boyo.” It was not a question but a statement of fact.

Page 125

Moses was a little nonplused by this statement so forthright, but bravely came back with. “That was an answer, not a question.

What and how would you know, Mother?”

“Who do you suppose supplied the maids you have been learning on?”

“Mmm. I see. One learns something every day. So, my success in that department was not entirely my own work. May I suppose that they reported their successes to you? Now you make me feel like an experiment.”

“You may, up to a point, but, you were no experiment. Far from it, My Love. Never did I get any specific details nor did I ask for them. I just was not having you come to me totally innocent without experience. I wanted you a man, not a boy. You have just proved that what I did was right. The last ones were virgins. Let’s do it again.”

“I noticed that they seemed less experienced. What about somewhere more comfortable.”

“You did notice the difference then.”

“Couldn’t miss it.”

Leaping over his prone body, Nefertari reached down, took his hand in hers and led him at a run to her sleeping chamber. There they plunged into the soft embraces of her queen-sized bed where they exhausted themselves with lustful loving as the night wore on toward morning.

Ahmose was almost ready to leave the meal table after the morning repast when Moses made his appearance after the night of pleasure with Nefertari. He was sitting at his customary place at the head of the table on Moses’ left as he entered the room. Nefertari was sitting on Ahmose’s left on the opposite side to Moses as he entered.

Servants were ministering to the needs of the two royals as they ate.

As Ahmose wiped his mouth with a linen napkin Moses’ weary looks prompted him to remark. “Ho. The campaign was too much for the young fella. Even a good night’s sleep wasn’t enough to restore him to full operating efficiency. You need more training and exercise, young man, to toughen you up.”

The retort that rose to Moses’ mind was. ‘Look who’s talking. I didn’t see you at the front of the action. We men did all the work.

You took all the glory.’ But, he knew better than to voice these

Page 126

thoughts. How he had learned control! After a few moments of hesitation he replied. “That is exactly what I intend. I shall be at the barracks as soon as this meal is over. There are several days of intense activity on the programme.”

“Good for you. To make a good soldier one needs lots of practice.

Don’t miss an opportunity to get stuck into it.”

Moses’ quick and furtive glance at Nefertari at this gratuitous advice was responded to by a minute raising of her eyebrows as she weighed in with. “You didn’t tell me about that.”

“I’m sorry. There wasn’t time. I got back only last night.”

“Yes.” She said to that. “I heard you come in. It was very late.

You must have had a wild night out to get in so late.”

“So, that was it.” Cried Ahmose. “Humping the servant maids all night. Didn’t take you long to get on to them. Or was it some peasant you met in the streets on the way home?”

Taking his cue from Nefetari’s remark Moses responded with.

“Neither, actually. I had a lot on my mind and needed some time to think about it.”

“Is that where you keep your mind?” Was Ahmose’s final shot as he rose from the table to go about his business for the day.

As Mosers took his place at the table he remarked to Nefertari.

“What’s with him this morning? I didn’t think that he cared what I did as long as I kept out of his way. He practically ignored me the whole time of the campaign. To him I was just one of the men guarding his royal person to ensure that he got safely into and out of Nubia.”

“All you macho men are the same. You think that because he doesn’t have women he has no feelings. He has them alright. He gets very frustrated. He would love to have an heir but with out a woman there will not be one. He is quite conscious of that but finds himself unable to take a woman. He finds them repulsive physically.” Nefertari explained this to Moses as she leaned across the table to take his left hand in her right.

“You mean, he’s jealous because he can’t DO IT with a woman?”

He couldn’t be jealous of me.”

“He’s not. How can he be? He is KING. His word is law after the rest of us have had our say. We women have plenty to say. He gets frustrated in a general way and gets a bit miffed about you

Page 127

‘normals’. He likes to have a dig at you now and again. He can’t dig where he should and doesn’t want to learn how.”

Moses laughed heartily at this little riposte, and remarked. “I’m learning, and how.”

“Ready for more lessons?”

“Do you have to ask?”

“Guess not. You are an apt pupil.”

“When’s the next lesson?”

“Whenever you like, if you can stand it.”

“Can I stand it!. You heard your illustrious brother. I need the exercise.”

“Don’t overdo it today at the barracks, then. You can’t work all day as well as pleasure all night. Even at your age you’ll break. The burning at both ends of the candle do meet in the middle some time along the way.”

“Then I shall have to learn to manage on two or three hours sleep at night in the early morning. Won’t I?” “Can you do it?”

“I can but try even if I die in the attempt.”

“I can’t see you dying. You mustn’t yet. I have big plans for you.”

“I wont. Believe me. What big plans?”

“You surely won’t. Time enough for the plans later. Trust me.

Now eat your breakfast. The more you eat the less sleep you can get along with. So, eat up big.”

“Trust me. This shall be a very hearty one, then. And every one thereafter.”

“Only one condition.”

“YES! Only one?”

“No more palace maids, or any other maids either.”

“Who needs ‘em?”

They both laughed heartily and joyfully at this and Moses got on hastily with his breakfast before he took off for the barracks while Nefertari watched him with the same look of satisfaction on her face as a tigress watches it victim before pouncing on it.

All empires suffer from the same problem. The vassal states get restless in direct proportion to the increase in levies imposed by the central power. Libya was no exception. Before a year had passed after the pacification of Nubia the Libyans were making difficulties

Page 128

for their masters. Relying on the distractions caused by the Nubians the rebellious vassal king in Libya ousted the Egyptian governor and imprisoned him and all of his staff. He then declared the independence of Libya. A trial of the governor followed which resulted in him being condemned to die for treason against the State of Libya. His staff was kept in the dungeons for an indefinite period.

In due time this news reached Egypt through various sources.

Egyptian spies relayed this news toward Egypt on the very day that the governor was arrested. Traders travelling between the two countries brought stories of the happenings to the market place of Egypt and these also found their way to the King.

This action could no go unchallenged.

A Libyan campaign of conquest had to be organized to teach these people a lesson. This meant another mobilization of the Nation’s armed forces.

Since the Nubian campaign there had been some changes in the military hierarchy. Amenhotpet, related to the king, had been in particular favour with him for some time and when the General in Command was killed in battle he was promoted to replace him.

This was not entirely an initiative of Ahmose. He had in mind another General more in keeping with his own ideas.

The suggestion of Amenhotept came from Kamose in such a way that Ahmose had very little alternative than to appoint his uncle to fill the vacancy. The ultimate rank of Commander-in-Chief belonged to Ahmose as King of Lower Egypt and could not be conferred on another. Not that Amenhotept wanted that position at this stage.

His contact with Kamose gave him all the power that he needed.

Other vacancies down the line had to be filled on the return to Memphis from Nubia and so throughout the echelon of command the army had quite a few new commanders. Heotept was one of these. His new post was that of G.I.C. of the Elite Palace Guard.

Moses was promoted to divisional commander of the Guard. He was still in training for the real thing.

Some months elapsed while the army was being re-equipped for the foray into Libya. The armament and accoutrement makers, Hebrews amongst them, all enjoyed the large profits to be made in ordnance supplies. Since much of the personell of the army came from the ranks of the farmers and artisans of the nation the actual

Page 129

operation of the campaign was timed to commence after the completion of the wheat harvest. This occurred early in the second month of the New Year. This month corresponds with the month of April in this twentieth century AD. To minimize the chances of Libya knowing in advance of his plans Ahmose sent his agents to every town and village in his realm, which owed him men for his army. Each headman was instructed to have a certain number of men ready at the time appointed. These were not to travel to Memphis and there assemble. This could be a warning to any Libyan spies in that city of the mobilization. Each small group was to travel as unobtrusively as possible to the oasis town of Fayoum, one hundred and fifty miles south west of Memphis. This town sat then, as it does now, on the edge of a vast lake fed by underground springs and an anabranch of the mighty Nile. Desert on all sides of this oasis made detection of an assembly there that much harder for any spies than it would be in the capital city. Here the productivity of this oasis was such that an army of twenty thousand men could be sustained there for some months, if necessary. From there they could be deployed at the king‘s pleasure.

Ahmose anticipated that the rebel king in Libya would expect an attack along the fertile coast of the Middle Sea. Along here was forage enough to sustain an advancing army. Like his father before him Ahmose was a tactician of the unexpected. In this he had an ideal assistant in Amenhotept who had fought with Kamose and was familiar with his attitude and tactics. The strategy was to mount a pincer movement on a grand scale. One arm of this pincer was to come from the sea and the other from the land, but from an unexpected direction. No action would be taken along the fertile coastal lands.

As with his army, so it was with his navy. Tanis was to be the rallying point before the attack but only just before. No more than fifty ships were prepared at any one point. Fifty ships each at Buto, Saas, Naucratis, Bubaskos and Avaris in the delta and fifty each in the port cities of Pelusium and Gaza, then in Egyptian hands. This gave a total of four hundred war galleys to be ready for the invasion of Libya at a minimum risk of detection by Libyan spies.

Reprisals would be expected by the new Libyan administration, the trick was to not let them know when or from where. They would be

Page 130

sure to expect an attack after the next wheat or barley harvest. The question was, of course, which one? These events were five months apart. Thus the strategy was to confuse the spies that could be expected to be operating in Egypt.

Moses’ division of the Palace Guard was detailed to accompany the army as a personal guard to Amenhotept. This would give the members of this division experience in the field as it was expected that he would be active at the head of the invasion force. Generals were not yet familiar with fighting from the rear. Moses was reluctant to get into the thick of the fighting and Nefertari was not pleased either that he should be in danger close to Amenhotept.

She was able to pull a string or two but was not prepared at this stage to appear to be personally involved to the extent of demanding that he be left in the Home Guard. She did suggest to her brother that the division commanded by Moses should be retained at home for protection of the capital but he refused to take this into account.

Besides, he pointed out, the disposition of the various divisions had already been determined and he was not prepared to make last minute changes. As clincher to his argument he pointed out that as she considered Moses to be the next in line to throne she must accept that he needed experience in the field. He must take his chances with everyone else and where better could he be trained than under the eye of such a doughty fighter as shrewd strategist as Amenhotept.

A week after the army began its long march across the desert that lay between Fayoum and Libya the eight small fleets left their hideouts and emerged from the several mouths of the Nile and followed each other at random but all headed in the general direction of Cyprus. The movement of the troops from Fayoum had been missed by the Libyan spies. They had been too interested in the various fleets being prepared in different places. They tracked these fleets down the river and saw them head for Cyprus and other places toward the northeast.

These messages were relayed to the rebel government in Libya and thus they were convinced that they had escaped immediate retribution. This led them to believe that they had sufficient time to strengthen their forces before the inevitable invasion. This belief emboldened this government to send a delegation to Egypt to demand recognition of them as the legitimate government of Libya.

Page 131

This delegation was sent to Memphis rather than to Thebes in the attempt to take advantage of any friction there may have been between these two kingdoms. The journey of these delegates did not cross any of the routes of the forces of Egypt. Consequently, when they arrived at Memphis they were unaware that the Egyptian army was about to attack their capital at the very time they were seeking an interview with the government in Memphis.

No hide no Christmas box.

They were at first treated with the usual courtesies due to diplomats.

They were escorted to and accommodated in the diplomatic quarters in the palace. In due course of time they were ushered into the royal audience chamber with due protocol due to their rank as ambassadors. They expected to face Ahmose on the throne so were quite unprepared for the scene that met their eyes.

They were doubly confounded. Not only were they confronted by Nefertari rather than Ahmose or both of them but their interpretation of the expression on the face of Nefertari indicated that she was distinctly unfriendly. This was not unexpected under the circumstances of their authority. But, the absence of Ahmose appeared ominous to them.

In honeyed tones, that did not match the smouldering fire in her eyes Nefertari addressed these envoys. “Noble envoys, I must apologize for the absence of my brother, the king. He is away on an important and urgent military mission the details of which I am not at liberty to divulge to you at this time. What can I, the humble sister and servant of the king, acting in his absence and on his behalf, do for you?”

“Your Supreme Highness, we have been sent by our king to negotiate peace with your illustrious brother the king in Memphis.”

“Why with the king in Memphis? You must be aware that he is subordinate to the king in Thebes, the mighty Kamose?”

“Your Supreme Highness, we were sent to Ahmose as a first step toward Thebes. If the plea we bring from King Jelibah finds favour ……………….”

The sentence was not finished for Nefertari interjected pointedly with an impatient gesture of her right hand that cut the voice of the envoy, right there. “I know who you are and from whom you come.

That Jelibah is the king of nothing. He has usurped the authority set there by Kamose yet has the effrontery to send emissaries here to us

Page 132

in an attempt to legitimize that take over. He should have known better than to attempt thus to insult us.” Her voice did not rise above a light conversational tone yet the iciness in it cut through the air like a knife. It penetrated the minds of the two envoys and froze their thoughts so that they were speechless for a few moments.

“Well. Have you nothing to say?” Nefertari cut into the silence.

“Y, Yes Ma’am. We had hoped to negotiate with King Ahmose.

His governor in Lubia, over all Libya had, we believed, overstepped the authority invested in him by King Kamose and has been oppressing the people. Having had no reply to our pleas to Thebes we were forced, against our will and loyalty, to take unilateral action pending the approval of King Kamose.”

At this point Nefertari held up her hand for silence. When she had obtained this she declared in ringing tones but yet little above conversational level. “I have never heard such a load of Camel dung. There were plenty of opportunities for you to approach Thebes. The governor set up by Kamose was right there for you to speak to. You had the power to communicate directly with Thebes or you could have sent to here at any time. Why not?”

“We were not able to for your governor would not let any envoys leave the country.”

“Don’t give me more camel dung. You never made any attempt whatsoever. Your King Jelibah wanted to rule Libya himself and conned the rest of you into supporting him. He took advantage of the campaign in Nubia to seize power that was not his. I can assure you he will not last many more weeks.”

The quick and furtive glance exchanged by the envoys was not lost on Nefertari. She was fully aware of the implications of what she had said. She momentarily faltered, thinking that perhaps she had said too much, too soon. The envoys had the same thought together without consultation. ‘There must be action being taken and if we can get home quickly enough we can give a warning.’ Their immediate response was. “May we understand from what you have said that your position is that this subject in not negotiable. Your consider that the present authority assumed by Jelibah is illegal?”

“Absolutely.” Declared Nefertari in no uncertain terms. “You are wasting both my time and yours.”

“Might we ask then, why we have been accepted as legitimate diplomats?”

Page 133

“You may ask all you like but I am not bound to answer.”

“May we request information on what is being done about this situation?”

“AGAIN. You may request all you like but do not expect an answer.”

“In that case, then, have we your permission to retire?”

“Certainly NOT. I have some questions to put to you. Where did the fighting forces used to overthrow our governor come from?”

“WE are not at liberty to answer. Even if we were we have no personal knowledge of that sort.”

“You really expect me to believe that. You were probably part of the conspiracy.”

“We can assure you, we were not personally involved in the movement. We are but humble messengers.”

“You are trying to drive a wedge between us and our father in Thebes. Otherwise you would have gone straight to him.”

“Of that we know nothing. Your Supreme Highness. We are but humble messengers. We merely follow orders.”

“A likely story. Guards, arrest these men and take them to the royal prison. The interview is at an end.”

“We demand diplomatic immunity.” Cried the leader of this delegation as he desperately tried to rectify the rapid deterioration of their mission.

“Diplomats come from legitimate regimes. You did not. Take them away.” Was Nefertari’s response to this plea.

Not to be denied the leader again claimed. “You received us as envoys.”

“That status has been revoked.”

“When?”

“Just now. So.” “On whose authority?”

“Mine. What do you propose to do about it?”

Realizing immediately that there was nothing they could do about it they wisely refrained from any further comment or claim. There was no opportunity to do so for they were being led away as directed and by the time that Nefertari made her claim to supreme authority the envoys were beyond any further conversation.

Nefertari was making sure that any information gathered by them either before or during this audience could not be transmitted to

Page 134

Libya. They would stay in prison till the war ended and their fate would be decided then. Also she was establishing right there her supreme authority in the absence of Ahmose.

While this diplomatic disaster was occurring at the palace in Memphis both Egyptian forces were moving toward their objective.

Three days after the incarceration of his envoys King Jelibah was sitting in State holding audience with petitioners.

He was interrupted by an urgent messenger. On being informed that the message was for his ears only he dismissed the petitioners before him assuring them that he would hear them later.

When informed of the fate that had overtaken his envoys to Memphis and the absence of both Ahmose and Amenhotept he rightly assumed that an expeditionary force was on its way to chastise him for his rebellion. In the absence of any other intelligence he was still unsure of the timing and nature of the attack.

His defense forces were already mobilized and in place to repel any attack from all expected quarters. A message readying them all for an eminent attack was dispatched to all fronts. But, they were not prepared for what did happen any more than were the defenders of Tanis and Avaris two decades in the past.

This message had hardly left the palace when another messenger, weary and worn from a long and fast run, was ushered into the presence of the king. Approaching between the double row of officers of the Palace Guard and ministers of the government the messenger went down on his knees. Bowing his head to the floor he implored the king’s forgiveness for brining bad news.

“We have already had seriously bad news. What could be worse but that the invasion has already begun? The thing is, HOW? Whence come you?”

“From Lemna, Your Majesty.”

“But, that is impossible, that village is miles to the west. It’s from the wrong direction. What of Manaes, our garrison city close to the border with Egypt?”

“I know not Sire.”

“Did you not bother to find out or are you all too stupid to know what is going on around you?”

Page 135

“With all due respect, Sire, Manaes is on the other side of the country, a thousand miles from Lemna. We were surprised at Lemna, Your Majesty.”

“Surprised!! What do you mean, surprised, indeed.”

“Begging your pardon, Sire, yesterday at dawn thousands of Egyptian soldiers came in from the desert before the sun shone his face above the earth. While we were getting ready for our day’s work, in no time, the village was surrounded and our elders captured. They are now prisoners of these soldiers who have overrun Apis, further east of us and closer to you.”

“Who sent you to us?”

“No one, Sire. I escaped. A cordon was thrown around the village to prevent any message getting out and our leaders were confined in the headman’s house. Soldiers are quartered all over the village to watch us all.”

“You did well to escape then. How many other came with you?”

‘Two, sire.”

“Where are they now?”

“We were discovered escaping. One died immediately of an arrow in his back. The other carried on for miles till he could go no further. I left him in the village of Barnea. Whether he lives or not I can not tell you.’

“Any other casualties? Of our people, I mean.”

“None that I know of, Sire.”

“Did no one offer resistance? Are you people of Lemna all cowards?”

“NO. Sire. We are not. The attack was so sudden that there was no time to organize any resistance. Besides, such weapons as we had were no match for their chariots and bowmen.”

“Chariots too! From which direction did they come? You said from the desert. You mean that they circled in from the coast after sacking Manaes to make it look as though they came from that direction. Your patrols missed this maneuvre.”

“From the desert, Sire. We had patrols placed strategically along the coast to the east. Their lines stretched from the sea to the desert, we would have intercepted them there. This would have given us time to defend our territory. Even though we would have been overcome by them, we certainly could have sent a message or warning to you while delaying their advance.”

Page 136

“Hmm. I see. Guards, take this creature out and flog him for bringing bad news. Ten lashes should be enough. Then throw him out.”

The messenger was totally astounded by his reception of his news.

‘You bastard.’ He thought. ‘Why did I bother? We got better treatment from the Egyptians.’

The king was too busy conferring with his ministers to see the look of utter hatred that passed across the face of the messenger as he was led away to receive his ‘reward’ for alerting the palace to the danger awaiting them.

Dismissing his generals with orders to increase their watch over the walls of the city and their patrols in the surrounding countryside the king ordered his midday meal to be served on the terrace overlooking the city and its harbour. While eating he contemplated his next move in response to this surprise attack. His problem was to figure out just where and how the Egyptians would strike next.

After such an unconventional move anything could happen. Surely the three weeks it would take to march across the desert from Egypt to Lemna was the limit to expect from any army. He would be best not to expect an attack from that direction again. Besides, from a study of the past tactics of Kamose he was not likely to try the same strategy twice in the same battle. What about the sea? What was the Egyptian navy up to? He had intelligence that they had moved north and east. Would they have had time to change direction and attack from the sea?

He looked over the city and his attention was drawn to a drama developing some distance out from the harbour mouth. He saw a large Phoenician galley with sail set and two banks of oars thrashing the water in haste to outrun two smaller ships pursuing it. The galley was flying a Phoenician trading flag so appeared to be a legitimate trading vessel. The pursuers were lighter but faster craft.

They were gaining on the galley as it approached the harbour mouth.

The king immediately assumed that he saw pirates pursuing a trader, a not uncommon occurrence in that day and age. ‘The pirates are game coming so close to a harbour.’ Was the thought that first came to the mind of the king. That is what he was supposed to think.

He looked up beyond the tableau being enacted before his eyes and saw, across the expanse of ocean stretching to the horizon, a forest of masts. The forest stretched for miles on either side. Beneath

Page 137

those mast had to be an invasion fleet. Egyptian, of course. How fortunate he was that the pirates had pursued their quarry so close to enable him to be warned of the danger approaching. They were no doubt waiting there for a signal from land forces about to attack from the that quarter.

Calling for one of the guard nearest him he dispatched a message to prepare a defense against a sea challenge and also an attack from the land to the south. He then turned his attention again to the happenings in the harbour.

He saw the galley sweep along toward the harbour and enter its mouth at full speed. When it cleared the entrance to the harbour its sails were swiftly lowered, the action of the oars reversed and the vessel became dead in the water. As the great ship stopped its forward movement the dockworkers quickly turned the great wheels that raised a defensive chain across the mouth of the harbour to prevent the pirates from continuing their pursuit. It was expected that this action would turn them away as it usually did those who were thus unduly bold.

The king peered closer. There was something strange about this scenario. The pirates were not veering off. They increased their speed and before the ponderous chain could be put in place they were over it with their shallow draft boats and ranged themselves on either side of the galley. The king was annoyed. He had enough on his mind with this expected invasion by Egyptian troops. Now he had an incursion of pirates to add to his woes.

He took another look. The shock of what he saw caused him to rock back on his heels and turn suddenly to an aide by his side. “YOU.” As he pointed to him. “Run quickly and inform Colonel Chaiman of the harbour patrol that we have Egyptians in the harbour. Do not let them land. I repeat, DO NOT LET THEM LAND.” The ships in the harbour, both the pursued and the pursuers had dropped their flags and on each ship was unfurled a flag of Egypt.

The messenger had barely left the room when the king looked again out to sea and saw that the masts he had previously observed were now sprouting from the hulls of numerous ships that had passed the horizon and were advancing on his city. At each masthead flew an Egyptian flag.

Selecting another aide the king cried. “Take another message. To General Amenthos this time. ‘A vast fleet is advancing on the city.

Page 138

Put all the men that you can to defend the shore to prevent a landing.

We haven’t much time.’�

By the time that the message arrived General Amenthos had already seen the advancing fleet and had deployed his men along the shore as he had planned to defend the country from this invasion. On being told of the situation in the harbour he detailed a company to reinforce the garrison there to prevent the landing of the troops that were sure to be on the ships.

Too late. By the time that this company arrived at the harbour the guards had already been overcome without the Egyptians leaving the ships. The bowmen on them had discharged a forest of arrows into the ranks of the guards who had fallen like autumn leaves leaving the wharves clear for the Egyptian soldiers to disembark with very little trouble and occupy the harbour area. They had no trouble in keeping the reinforcements from ousting them from this stronghold.

So much for the sea approaches. The king strode anxiously to the southern terrace of his palace to see what was happening on that side of the city. His worst fears were confirmed. Thousands of Egyptian soldiers were advancing across the recently harvested grain fields.

In the vanguard was a thousand chariots, each with two bowmen on its platform. Behind them came thousands of foot soldiers advancing at a run flanked by hundreds of chariots on either side of their phalanx.

A formidable force indeed. He did not yet worry unduly for he had five thousand men to defend the city. He had no doubt that the soldiers advancing from the south could be held from invading the city. He rushed back to view the events in the harbour. What he saw was not cheering at all. The whole harbour area was occupied

by Egyptians. His soldiers were kept from advancing on them. The protecting chains had been lowered back under the surface of the water. There was now nothing to stop the Egyptian fleet still advancing toward the shore from sending a flotilla into the harbour to reinforce what was already there. His own fleet was too far away to call to his assistance. It was guarding the shore to the east from where the attack was expected. That was now seen to be a useless exercise.

The king quickly summed up his chances and came to a decision.

Page 139

He would abandon the land to the south and retire those defenders within the city walls. With the gates shut the attackers would be kept at bay long enough, hopefully, to enable the army within the city to drive off the occupiers of the harbour area. If he could keep them out of the city he could withstand a short siege, but only a short one. However, this respite would give him a chance to negotiate if he was not able to break the siege.

As the defenders retreated from the south into the city the Egyptian bowmen inflicted heavy casualties on them. The invaders from the sea were kept on the beaches and the shiploads within the harbour were not allowed to increase their enclave in that portion of the city.

The siege was thus set in place. The city was embargoed from the sea and cut off from regular supplies form its countryside. Its doom was sealed.

Less than month from the commencement of the siege the city had exhausted its supplies of food and water and the citizens demanded surrender. As far as they were concerned all that they had gained from the rebellion was to exchange one oppressor for another.

The king attempted to bargain. He offered a conditional surrender that would leave him as a vassal of Egypt but still king of Libya.

This was not acceptable; neither were any of his other suggestions.

Full surrender was demanded and finally achieved.

The conquerors, Ahmose and Amenhotept, entered the city in the full splendour of their royal status.

Seizing the opportunity this gave him of removing an irritant from his side Ahmose appointed Moses as interim governor of the city of Lubia and the country of Libya. He was well aware that this move would bring trouble on his head when he returned home. The professional diplomats would be disappointed and troublesome over being bypassed. Nefertari would be on his back for leaving Moses to the mercy of whatever might happen in a restless Libya. Time enough to cross that bridge when he came to it. Moses as governor in Libya would remove him from the palace in Memphis. It would please the priests, as they were not happy with Mosses concept that he had publicized, of a single Godhead. They were very happy with their family of Dieties with all owing allegiance to a central AllPowerful figure who kept the quarrelling family in order. They would support his decision to leave Moses in Libya. There were other jobs going for the disappointed diplomats in other regions of

Page 140

the empire. He would compensate them with some plush positions in those places. That would keep them quiet and under control.

Nefertari might be really troublesome but he felt that he could handle that somehow or another even if he had to go to Kamose to back him. She would have to accept the situation if he were in favour of the moves that Ahmose had made. That was last resort.

He was reluctant to use this if other means would suffice.

All in all, a very successful campaign.

Page 141

CHAPTER IX NEFERTARI IS DISAPPOINTED.

Ahmose and Amenhotept returned in triumph to Memphis. They returned by ship. They brought Jelibah back with them, not in chains, but a captive nevertheless. He was held as hostage to ensure the continued ‘good behaviour’ of the people of Libya. His son had been installed as king in his stead but under the regency of Moses.

The deposed king was kept under house arrest in Thebes when he was eventually taken there after the triumphal parade in Memphis.

He occupied a minor palace in Thebes so lived in some measure of comfort but with an Egyptian staff and fairly restricted movement.

His chances of escape were minimal with the constant threat of instant execution if he attempted to. His life also depended on the continued good behaviour of the Libyans. Any problems there would lead to the forfeiture of his life.

As governor in Lubia Moses was a visible presence of Egyptian power in Libya. He was the final local authority. He had the power of veto over decisions made by the administrators appointed by Ahmose before returning to Egypt. Before he left Ahmose set out specific guidelines regarding the administration of the country.

Moses was to be guided by these and to see that others also kept within them. Although holding supreme authority in Libya Moses was subject to Ahmose in Memphis almost as much as Ahmose was to Kamose in Thebes.

The triumphal parade in Memphis stretched from the Royal Wharves to the palace gates. As its head was entering the gates its tail was still disembarking from the ships that had brought it all home from the scene of the conquest.

At its head was a platoon of the Palace Guard. This was followed by a section of the military band making martial music on the lutes, cymbals, lyres and drums accompanied by the strident notes of the trumpets. A following troupe of players sang the praises of the king and Amenhotept. The royal party was carried in four chariots. The first held Amenhotept and his aide. In the second was the captive king without his crown and with a rope tether about his neck. Each

Page 142

end of this was held by a guard, one on each side of him. Then came the king in his royal chariot with its frame overlaid with gold leaf and set with precious stones that all sparkled brilliantly in the bright Egyptian sun. The fourth chariot, at the rear, contained two mighty warriors who were the personal bodyguards of the king.

Behind this procession trailed a long line of ox carts holding the spoils that had been taken in Libya. This treasure more than compensated for the tribute that had been lost due to the rebellion of Jelibah and his people, and the cost of the corrducting expedition.

The whole way was lined with a double row of the heroic soldiers who had survived the war. Their armour and dress were spotless and the bright points of their spears glittered as they moved slightly from side to side as their holders stood to attention for the passage of the parade.

Behind these rows of soldiers were hordes of people cheering lustily for the conquerors. It was that same cry that has rung out through the ages for every conqueror who returns from a successful campaign. “Long live the King.” Echoed from the walls of all the buildings within earshot of the crowds. The roar died only when the king entered the gates of the palace and was lost to their sight.

Inside the palace courtyard the king’s chariot pulled right up to the steps leading to the Great Hall. He mounted these steps and turned to address the multitude of nobles who had crowded in to the courtyard. They left no room for the common herd. He thanked them for their loyal support and affirmed to them that his only aim was the glory of Egypt. He promised even greater conquests in the future and lauded the expertise and loyalty of Amenhotept saying.

“If I should leave no heir the Glory of Egypt will be safe in the hands of the great Amenhotept.”

This declaration appeared at that time to be largely academic, as he was considerably the younger of the two men. Amenhotept was of his father’s generation so that his chances of outliving Ahmose seemed rather remote. Nefertari interpreted this statement in this light and so was not worried at that time by its implication. She would live to regret her thus discounting the face value of this declaration made that day by Ahmose.

The next day, when the festivities were drawing to a close, Nefertari tackled Ahmose over his leaving Moses back in Libya. She had expected him to come back to the safety of Memphis. He denied

Page 143

having anything to answer for. Moses was not only safe in Lubia with a garrison of soldiers at his command but was holding an important position in the hierarchy. He was the governor of a province. A direct representative of the Royal House. What more could the woman want?

“You are up to something.” She accused him.

“Dear sister. What could I be up to? Your precious ‘son’ is now holding down an important position. It is good training for replacing me when the time comes. That’s what you want. Isn’t it?”

This she could not very well deny. Yet she did not want him to be so far away from her side. This she could not admit. She thus had no other alternative than to respond to Ahmose’s challenge with. “I guess that you are right.”

“Of course, I’m right. He’ll be safe there. He has a strong garrison and the Libyans have been so soundly trounced that they will not be able to get up again in a hurry. Besides that, Jelibah will be held hostage in Thebes permanently to ensure their compliance. The position is a sinecure.” ”I sincerely hope so. They are a rebellious lot. What about if they care so little for Jelibah that they consider his death to be a small price to pay for another rebellion?”

“We’ll cross that bridge when we come to it. Jelibah’s son will not be old enough to rule for another two years at least. Moses is virtually in full control of the country. If he handles it right he could make a fortune for himself as well as keep Libya in line. A smart governor can shave off a lot of the tax for himself without reducing what is due to us. As he is ‘family’ we will not see anything that might happen on that score.”

“As long as the as Libyans don’t get unhappy over the taxes and start another rebellion to free themselves from them. Moses may not be able to handle it on his own with only a garrison force at his command.”

“Can you see him being severe or greedy?”

“No. I guess not.”

“Of course not. He hasn’t the guts for it. He’ll be alright.”

“You bastard. I still think that you are up to something.”

“Think all you like. It makes no difference. You will not dare to countermand my appointment” “Whatever it is you won’t win. You know.”

Page 144

“We’ll see about that.” He shot at her as he walked away from the argument.

That night Nefertari wrote a letter to Moses telling him how disappointed she was that he was still in Libya. She warned him that she believed that her brother was up to something that would not benefit either of them. She wished him success in his post and urged him to prolong it no longer than was necessary. By the time that her letter reached him in Libya Moses had had time to miss her and he told her so in his reply. He assured her that although he would do his duty by his country and by her, particularly her, he would look forward eagerly to the time when they would be together again permanently. In the meantime there would be furloughs to be spent at Memphis and he expected that he would be recalled from time to time to report on his stewardship in Libya.

Not many months after his return from the Libyan campaign Ahmose was confined to his bed by a mild fever. It was only enough to confine him to bed for a few days. Not enough to incapacitate him. So he thought. He was not many days in bed. He soon felt well enough to get up and attend to the affairs of State.

Yet he could not seem to shake off the tiredness and listlessness that the fever had generated. Every few days he would suffer chills and spasms. The best physicians in the land could not tell what it was that had attacked him. It must have been brought in from Libya, for they knew nothing like it in Egypt. Ahmose’s health should have been improving but it was not. He would be well for some days, even for weeks. Then, for no apparent reason, he would fall sick again. Several months after his first attack he seemed to rally and to enjoy good health for a considerable time.

This did not last as long as was hoped. He seemed to have lost the power to resist disease. When he went down again he seemed to be worse than when he first contracted the malady. Each time he became ill was worse than the last. Every time that he seemed to recover his recovery was not as good as the previous time. He continued to go down and down in health until at last he succumbed completely and went to join his ancestors. Toward the latter half of his second year after the conquest of Libya he was no more.

He was buried in his own tomb in the Valley of the Kings, right across the mighty mother Nile from the ancient and revered city of

Page 145

Thebes. It was a grand occasion and the following festivities were long and exhausting to all those who took part.

Although grieved at the untimely loss of her brother Nefertari lost no time in preparing to have Moses return to Memphis to claim the throne. Not that the throne was vacant for she was joint ruler with her brother and sole ruler without him. Her first move was to send a letter to Moses instructing him to return immediately to put in his claim that she would be backing. The letter was sent by an official who carried instructions for him to be the replacement for Moses as governor. This letter never reached its destination.

Amenhotept had his own private espionage network and was thus able to intercept both letter and messenger and return them to Memphis without the knowledge of Nefertari. The return of Moses from Lubia was not in the plans that he and Ahmose had put in place as his inevitable death approached. His instructions had been quite explicit. Ahmose was in the last stages of his illness and was anxious to contribute to the continuance of authority in what he considered to be the right hands.

He addressed Amenhotept thus. “Cousin, I do not wish that that waif of Neffies should ascend the throne. I suspect that he is really not Egyptian. Don’t you? She has a fix about him. I know that she will try to have him crowned after I go to join the Gods.”

“Don’t worry about that now. You have many good years in you yet. Leave that sort of thing till it is necessary?”

“No. Cousin. I am not going to make it. I will not be able to keep him from the throne if I am no longer here. You must.”

“How can I? You know that I have no authority outside of the army, cousin or no. Your father is likely to leave Nefertari to run things in her own right. She could do so. She can then invite whom she likes to rule with her. I could have no say in that at all.”

“That is not how I see it if we play it right. I know that the Temple is against him. The High Priest would welcome any plan that keeps him from the throne. That gutless pipsqueak couldn’t manage a cesspool, let alone a kingdom. They suspect his religious leaning just as I do. He has imbibed some of those accursed Heqa Kasut ideas from that nurse of his. I told Neffie there would be later problems from that source but she would not listen to me. She was always sympathetic to them, you know.”

“Yes. I know.” Was Amenhotept’s response to this.

Page 146

“She always hated my decree to have all the newly born Heqa Kasut males strangled. But, it was the only way. Father had been too easy on them. All of their leaders should have been destroyed or all driven out of the country. We would have managed somehow without them. It was the mistaken generosity of old Sesotris, disguised as gratitude that allowed them to take over as they did.

Since father refused to throw them out I had to arrange it for them to die out gradually. Neffie and many of her friends were factors in preventing that from happening. Keep the restrictions on them when I am gone.”

“You can be sure that I will do that, but how? Only the throne can keep such pressure on.”

“You are so right. You will be the throne.”

“What!! How!!”

“Easy. The Temple has already been alerted that I favour you. To make doubly sure I have made a will stating that you are my heir and will take my place on the throne when I die. The High Priest holds this and will exercise it when necessary. Got that?”

“Yes, but. Nefertari, as I said before, can rule in her own right and put him there regardless. Kamose is getting old and feeble and she will be able to get him to ratify it. Then where are we?”

“I know all that. But, that little upstart is governor in Lubia. See that he stays there until after you are declared king. As soon as I die, go to the High Priest. He will back you. Got that?”

“I hope that this works. I’ll be dead if it doesn’t. You know what Nefertari is like when she is crossed.”

“She won’t dare to defy the High Priest. Our father as well. I have already have him on side.”

“Phew, you have gone high. Haven’t you?”

“If you want to win you must use the appropriate weapons. You’re safe.”

Amenhotept left the bedside of the dying king well satisfied with the morning’s work. But, still with a guilty feeling that he neither liked nor understood.

About ten days after the burial of Ahmose Nefertari was very worried. Her letter to Moses should have had a reply by this telling her that he was returning to Memphis. She had received neither reply nor Moses and was now fearful for his safety; She summoned Amenhotept to audience to find from his if he knew of the

Page 147

delegation she had sent to Libya. He could be expected to know of movements into and out of the country. His denial of any such knowledge immediately aroused her suspicions, as it was his duty to know of such movements. She summoned the High Priest hoping that she would be able to extract some information from him.

He was ushered into her presence in the throne room of the Palace.

On either side as he approached was a line of the Palace Guard in full military regalia with their bronze swords strapped to their thighs and their spears held at the ready. The High Priest was not intimidated by this show of power. He could wield a power that she was not entirely ignorant of. He strode from the entrance toward the princess with purposeful tread, his head held high and his staff of office in his right hand.

“You summoned me. Your Supreme Highness.” He addressed her firmly.

She noticed the deliberate omission of the term ‘majesty’ to which she believed she was entitled, now more than ever. Her brother’s death made her no less majestic than when they ruled jointly.

Whoever took his place would rule jointly with her. She tensed imperceptibly but calmly returned his salute.

“Welcome. Oh High Priest of On. I am concerned about the progress of the plans for the coronation of the new king to replace my brother at my side. I would like to know what part I will be taking and how soon the celebrations will be taking place.”

“Plans are not yet complete Ma’am. We need a few more days and all will be well. I trust that the delay is not inconvenient for you.”

“No. It is not. The intended king is not yet returned to Memphis so anther few days will not be out of the way.”

“NOT IN MEMPHIS. I was speaking to him only this morning.”

The surprise in his voice and his explanatory phrase alerted her to a definite hitch in her plans for Moses. She could not believe that Moses would have returned and not told her of his arrival. He could not be in his apartment for he had to pass hers to get there and she had not seen him. Unless he had only just arrived and not had time to call on her yet. But, this was early afternoon and the High Priest said ‘morning’. She ploughed on.

“My son, Moses, whom I intend to declare king in my brother’s place has not yet, to my knowledge, returned from Libya. It is this

Page 148

delay that I am speaking of. To whom were you speaking this morning, if it were not to him?”

“A thousand pardons, your supreme Highness. There must be some error here on my part although all appears to be in order. I have orders here but, they say nothing about your illustrious son.

Amenhotept, the late king’s beloved general and highly esteemed mentor and companion in battle is the designated successor to him.

Nothing about anyone else.”

Nefertari was livid with anger but kept her emotions in check as she replied to the speech of the High Priest. “By what authority do you make such a statement? I have the authority to replace my brother by my side. I have the right to appoint his successor.”

“Yes, Ma’am. That is true in one sense but remember, you were both and you still are subject to your father, Kamose, in Thebes.

The scrolls that I have here are signed by Kamose himself. You are shown as in agreement with the decision.”

“HOW DID THIS GET BY ME.” “I have no idea. I was assured that you were familiar with and in agreement with this decision.”

“What assurance could you possibly have? I can’t have your head but I can make life very difficult for you and the Temple crew.

Show me the paper work.”

“Certainly, Ma’am.” Murmured the High Priest as he stepped up to the dais and reached across the steps to put his documents in her hand. She opened the scrolls, each in turn, by rolling them out from the top downwards and read quietly and quickly while the High Priest retreated the required five paces from the throne dais.

Nefertari’s lips were a thin line, her brow thunderous and her eyes sparked with murderous fire as she absorbed what was written on those scrolls.

“You knew about this.” Was not a question. It was a statement of fact as she saw it. The copy of Ahmose’s will and the signed declaration of Kamose revealed to her the intrigue that had gone on behind her back and she was sure that the Temple had had a hand in it. This she could not and never would be able to prove. It revealed to her the perfidy of those who were supposed to be serving her.

“Why was I not consulted about these arrangements?”

“I received the scrolls, Ma’am, only a few days before the demise of the late king, may he be now enjoying paradise. I was informed by

Page 149

the bearer that you were fully aware of their contents. There is a note there over your signature and seal stating that you are in agreement with the provisions for the replacement of Ahmose.”

“Where?” She heatedly demanded while looking further into the scroll she held in her hand.

“Further dow…”

“Oh. Here it is. I never at any time sighted, let alone signed this document.”

“My apologies again, Ma’am. Please look again carefully. That is your seal under your signature. Is it not?”

“MY GOD. So it is. This must be a swindle somehow. I have never seen these scrolls or any of these papers before this moment. I swear it before all the Gods of Egypt, both past and present.”

“Do you declare it not genuine, Ma’am?”

“How can I. Neither the seal nor the signature can be denied. What startles me is how it could have been obtained without my knowledge.”

“Only you can personally use the seal and authenticate it.”

“I know that, you dolt. I am not convinced that you were not involved.”

“I did not hear you say that Ma’am.”

“I meant every word of it.”

“I hope not. For your own sake, Ma’am.”

His total calm before her fierce anger rang a warning bell in her mind. ‘These cursed priest have more power than they are worth.’

Was the thought that ran through her mind but which she dare not give voice to. His words and attitude were warning enough to he to be very careful if she wished to succeed in her ultimate plans.

She rolled the scrolls tightly together and gripped them so firmly in her left hand that hey were in danger of being crushed. Her right hand went to her forehead as she composed herself to handle this situation that she realised could get badly out of hand. Moses had not returned as she had requested. It was now obvious to her that her message had been intercepted. She was certain that if the message had been received he would be in Memphis by then. She was as certain as she would ever be that there was an intrigue against him, and through him against her. ‘Curses on the soul of Ahmose. May he never find peace throughout all eternity.’ Her thoughts not put into words.

Page 150

Some minutes had passed while she took control of herself. When she was again able to comprehend her surroundings she observed that the High Priest was still standing calmly before her. Certain now that he was involved up to his ears in this whole intrigue but unable to make an accusation Nefertari said to him. “My apologies to you. Please disregard anything that I may have said in the heat of the moment. This has been a great shock to me. I can not deny my signature and apparent agreement to these arrangements.

The stresses of these last few weeks must have driven it from my mind.”

“No apologies necessary Ma’am.

Merely a minor misunderstanding. May I now have your permission to withdraw?

There is much work to do to prepare for this coronation.”

As though waking from a trance she said. “Yes. By all means.”

However, the baleful glare to which the retreating back of the High Priest was subjected as he strode through the doorway of the audience chamber would have killed him on the spot if they had been darts flying from her eyes. Barely audible to the guards standing near the throne she muttered to herself. ‘You double died traitor. You are in this up to your disgustingly ugly ears, you bastard. You pile of camel dung. You heap of alligator vomit.

After all that I have done for the temple. I’ll not forget this. Neither will I ever forgive. You will all suffer before I am finished with you.’ She then sat on the throne for some considerable time to compose herself before leaving the audience chamber and returning to her own apartment.

Moses was quite content with his life in Lubia. He lived comfortably in the governor’s palace. The actual day to day running of the country was in the hands of officials appointed by Ahmose before he left it all in the hands of Moses. The young king to be was involved in the daily administration to train him in holding the reins of government when he would come of age. Moses exercised the right of veto within the guidelines set down by Ahmose.

While happy with his position in Libya he also looked forward to the time when he could return permanently to Egypt, which was his home. The place where he was born and which had moulded his life. He saw that the sooner he trained the young king to be to take the throne the sooner he would be able to return to Egypt. There is no evidence that the ever took advantage of this position to amass a fortune for himself.

Page 151

Moses was commander in chief of the garrison forces that occupied the country from Piara on the border with Egypt in the east to Barce on it western extremities. This gave him valuable experience in managing armed forces that was to stand him in good stead in later years. It did not give him experience in fighting a war on foreign soil but it gave him experience in the logistics of army movements while he was safe from the harm that a foreign campaign would subject him to.

Once every year it was necessary for him to report to Thebes to give an account of his stewardship during that time. This journey was always made by ship. No governor in his right mind would subject himself to the rigours of travelling overland across the great stretches of sandy desert that lay between Lubia and Egypt. Ships were fast, comfortable and readily available. Many hundreds of Phoenician trading ships plied the waters of the Mediterranean Sea in those days.

When Moses made his annual diplomatic journey to Thebes he travelled from Lubia by Phoenician galley to Memphis and from there to Thebes by a Royal Barge. He would spend a week in Memphis on the way to Thebes and another one on the way back to Libya. One week was needed for the audience with Kamose. This once mighty warrior had lived on earth for more than eighty summers and was grooming the younger brother of Ahmose to take his place in Thebes when he passed to the realms of Glory. This future king took part in these audiences so that he would be familiar with the running of the empire when he became its head.

The one week in Thebes was so occupied by audiences with Kamose and other diplomatic business that there was no time for Moses to spend on his ‘History of the World’. This private project of his had to be put aside till he returned to Egypt permanently and hopefully would have more time to spend on this tome.

When in Memphis on these journeys Moses occupied his own apartment in the Royal Palace. This was kept open for him by the palace staff under the orders and supervision of Nefertari.

Amenhotept moved into the quarters that had been occupied by Ahmose in a separate wing of the palace.

Not all of the time spent in Memphis on his way to and from was spent in bed with Nefertari. They did have to find time to eat. He also spent some time with his natural mother and with his sister

Page 152

Miriam. He was thus able to keep up with the family news. His siblings were part of the Egyptian scene, as he was, but without the privileges that he enjoyed as a member of the royal Household.

His older brother Nun had greatly prospered. After his marriage he had settled in Succouth. This was the administrative centre for the region where most of his people had been settled since they first migrated to Egypt. Being a Heqa Kasut and thus prevented from conducting a business in Egypt, Nun was obliged, at the beginning of his career, to trade from Succouth outward to the ports on the shores of the Red Sea. This led to trade even beyond the confines of that small sea. To expand his business into Egypt he needed to use another name than his own. His father’s connections through his membership of the CRAFT enabled him to have Egyptian nationals prepared to work with him as he expanded into the heartland of the nation.

As the wife of Heotept, Miriam enjoyed al the privileges of an Egyptian national. One of the names that covered Nun’s business was that of Miriam. Nominally she was one of his employers and he an employee and business manager. His trading empire eventually spread throughout the Nile valley, even beyond Thebes to as far as the first cataract.

When fully qualified in his trade Aaron settled in Goshen. He married Elisheba, the daughter of a citizen of Bubastis. This city was situated at the junction of the eastern arm of the delta and the anabranch that emptied into the Red Sea. Here Aaron was able to build an effective business both with the Egyptians of the delta and the Israelis of the eastern regions. He had three sons, Dathan, Abihu and Eleazer and a daughter named Ithamar. Dathan and Abihu, with their great uncle Korah, became involved in a rebellion against Moses on the trek from Egypt almost a lifetime later.

The crowning of Amenhotept coincided with Moses’ second diplomatic visit to Egypt. Although Nefertari was not in agreement with the turn of events she had very little alternative than to attend that coronation. After all she was still half the throne in Memphis and there was no point in being at enmity with one's partner in business. Moses was aware of the development for news of events in Egypt was taken to Libya by courier on a regular basis. The expatriates there were anxious to keep in touch with home as

Page 153

expatriates have ever been throughout history. Moses was glad that he was in Libya. He had no aspirations to ascend the throne in Memphis or anywhere else. There is no indication in any of the records that he ever aspired to be a leader. Any leadership that came his way appears to have been more or less forced on him and accepted by him very reluctantly.

When he arrived in Memphis and was confronted by Nefertari’s disappointment he explained to her that he was quite convinced that the time was not yet ripe for him to take such a step. She should not concern herself on his behalf in this matter for he was not concerned himself. He was quite happy to see Amenhotept, whom he greatly admired, ascend the vacant throne. He expressed the wish to witness the coronation if that were possible. This was not only possible but he was expected to be one of the royal guests at the ceremony. It was timed to occur during his return week after visiting Thebes. Indeed, he returned to Memphis in the same fleet of Royal Barges that brought the old and feeble Kamose to attend the ceremony in the grand, most ancient and sacred Temple at On. It was in this temple that all the kings of Egypt had been crowned till the descendents of Joseph had usurped the delta throne and caused the legitimate kings to retire to Thebes. During the reign of the Heqa Kasut the power of the priests of this temple had waned considerably. Kamose had restored them to their former status by having Ahmose and Nefertari crowned there when he set them over the delta.

On the appointed day the nine boats of the royal fleet set off from Memphis for the day’s journey down the river to On. The three lead boats contained the royal family members that were to witness the coronation. The fourth boat was occupied by a contingent of the Palace Guard without which no monarch would venture from the palace. The fifth boat carried the declared king and his immediate staff. The crews of the last four boats were hosts to the nobles who had been invited to take part in the celebrations on this auspicious occasion. The coronation would occupy the first two days to be followed by three days of riotous celebrating.

On arrival at On the king was to be was whisked away by the temple staff to undergo the purification ceremony that would take most of the first day. While he was being subjected to this treatment the guests were conducted to the accommodation that had been

Page 154

provided for them. They were not permitted to be at the temple, even in the outer courtyard until the day was far spent.

As the sun sank toward his rest in the western desert the Royal Family assembled in the outer room of the temple. This was known as the Holy Place and it was constructed in the form of a double cube lying on its side. That is, it was twice as long as it was wide and the same height as its width. The other guests were confined to the courtyard. Those inside the temple witnessed Amenhotept clothed in a plain linen shift and sitting immediately before the small altar of incense that stood against the wall of the Most Holy Place. This Place was constructed in the form of a perfect cube and had no source of light other than the glory of the God Horus whom it housed. There were no windows in its walls and its doors were kept shut except for the passage of the High Priest on very special occasions. Against the wall dividing the Holy Place form the Most Holy Place was an altar, two paces wide, waist high and an arm length deep. On either side of this altar was an opening into that most sacred precinct. The congregation was hushed into complete silence as the High Priest, no less, invoked the blessing of the Gods on this declared king. At the conclusion of the service the High priest called on Horus to take Amenhotept to himself and render him fit to rule the sacred land of Egypt aright. He was then given a potion to drink. This was given to him in a golden goblet etched on its sides with many magic signs to ensure the success of the ceremony. The purpose of the ceremony was to make the new king ‘One with the Gods’.

Before the eyes of the royal family gathered to witness this acceptance by the Gods Amenhotept appeared to relax and then to lean over and finally to recline on the couch on which he had been sitting. Those in the front row would have noticed that the king did not even appear to be breathing. To all intents and purposes Amenhotept was dead. Four priests then took this apparently lifeless body and placed it in repose on the top of the altar. Thus he would remain till he was resurrected the next day. At this point the royal guests and those who had been confined to the courtyard repaired to their accommodation in the city. There was nothing more for them to see or do that day.

The assistant priests ushered them out of the temple and conducted those in the courtyard away from the temple precincts.

Page 155

Amenhotept felt himself slipping from consciousness. He seemed to float up to the roof and from there witness his body lying in State.

He saw his apparent death take place and knew that his soul was then in communication with the divine till it was returned to its body the next day.

As the sun rose over the eastern plains the following morning the people again assembled in the places they had occupied previously.

The king still appeared as though dead. Those of the royal family at the front of the temple room were the first to notice the fluttering of his eyelids. Then his chest began to heave. His limbs moved about and finally he sat up. The High Priest was at hand to control the ceremony, of course. During the night the couch on which the king had reclined has been removed and a temporary throne placed before the altar, facing the audience.

When the king had fully recovered he stood up from the altar and stepped forward. From either side of the chamber came assistant priests holding the regalia that was to constitute the crowning of the king. A Royal Kilt was attached to his waist. Golden sandals were placed on his feet. On his head was placed the Royal blue and white horizontally striped headdress so indicative of the Egyptian royals.

This was draped over his shoulders. In his hand was placed the Royal Sceptre. Finally the High priest personally placed on his head the crown of Lower Egypt. He then introduced him to the assembled congregation as their new and thrice blessed king.

The assemblage in the temple room then parted to allow Amenhotept to proceed down the aisle thus made to appear before the assembled nobles in the courtyard. He was met there by round after round of thunderous applause. “Long live the King� resounded again and again from the temple walls and surfed over them to the throngs of people outside them. It was taken up by them and echoed back to the courtyard occupants.

In the outer courtyard a myriad of tables had been set up to provide a feast for all those who attended this ceremony. Tons of exotic foods from all parts of the world tickled the palates of all those who partook. Nobleman and commoner alike were never to forget the extent and variety of the feast that Amenhotept provided on his coronation day. Most of them returned the next day to repeat the performance of the first one.

Page 156

In the late evening of the third day the crowds began to disperse.

The locals drifted away to their respective homes in the city and its surrounding countryside. The noble visitors repaired to their accommodation to return to Memphis with the royal entourage the next morning. In the morning of the day after the return of the whole mass of people to Memphis Moses set off in a Phoenician galley to return to his post in Libya. There he spent several more years before the opportunity came for Nefertari to recall him.

During the next several years Amenhotept led punitive expeditions into Nubia, Gaza and the Sinai to keep the inhabitants there in their proper place and to ensure that the tribute from these places continued to roll into Egypt’s coffers. This was part of the job.

Moses had returned to Libya for the sixth time when Amenhotept mounted the greatest military expedition of his reign up to that time.

The Hittites north of Syria were restless. The trading caravans coursing through Palestine were being subjected to higher and higher tolls. It was time that Egypt showed these people that she was a force to be reckoned with. The Hittites had already occupied that territory that stood between the Jordan and the sea of Tarshish.

They had moved down from Cappadocia and were threatening Egyptian interests between the River Jordan and the Great Sea. This could not be tolerated.

The region of Palestine was then occupied by twenty-five minor kingdoms. This was not of itself a threat to Egypt but it would be to her interest to make Vassal States of them all before the Hittites did so and thus constituted a military threat to Egypt.

The first place to feel the weight of Egyptian armour was the fortified city of Lachish. In the forefront of attacks from the south this city had been sacked many times. Archaeologists have found remains of these sacking stacked one on top of the other.

The fall of Lachish led to an increasing roll of success as Amenhotept advanced northward. Ten kings, occupying the land from Lachish to Joppa and beyond the Jordan to the outer reaches of the Tigris Valley, were conquered and their cities contracted to pay tribute to Egypt for years to come. At least while Egypt was strong enough to enforce the treaties thus made. Three of these kings, of Jericho, Salem and Kirjath Ariat were taken in triumph as captives to Memphis. A messenger was dispatched to Memphis to alert

Page 157

Nefertari that he was returning in triumph. The time lag was such that he could be expected to arrive no more than seven days after the messenger. These seven days were used in preparing the city for the reception of the returning conqueror. This was the longest and most far reaching of any military campaign that he had launched since being installed as king in Memphis, joint ruler with Nefertari.

Nefertari had taken advantage of the long absence of Amenhotept on this campaign to recall Moses from Libya and install him as General in Command of the Palace Guard. The young king of Libya had long passed his coming of age and had been installed as king of that land. His vassalage was confirmed at his coronation and he knew better than to make any attempts to terminate it at this stage.

There was to be a “State Reception� for the conquering hero. The elite Palace Guard, now under the command of Moses was alerted to be the reception vanguard. New uniforms were issued and orders were given for all equipment to be polished to its highest degree.

Numbers of practice runs were made. This gave the population a preview of what to expect on the great day.

Nefertari had already missed one menstrual period and was now late with the next one. She had to do something about it. Neither Moses nor anyone else could be told of the true source of her pregnancy.

On the day of Amenhotept’s return to Memphis the Royal Way from the royal wharves to the palace gates was lined with a double row of Palace Guards in full regalia. Their rounded bronze shields made a thousand small suns shine as they moved on the arms of their bearers. Their white linen kilts, stiff with starch at the front and shiny smooth in the rear glistened in the bright Autumn sunshine.

Their bright bronze and copper spear points glittered like a thousand bright jewels as they stood to welcome the returning conqueror.

His small fleet approached the wharf and the boat carrying him tied up at the pier with the others to either side of it. His boat was thus aligned for him to alight and immediately move toward the palace between the double row of soldiers welcoming him. His personal bodyguard alighted with him and accompanied him on his triumphal progress. There were two chariots awaiting him. One for him and another for his bodyguard. The horses proudly pranced along the lines of soldiers lining the way. Their drivers kept them to a

Page 158

walking pace so that the assembled thousands of city citizens could see the king as he passed by them.

When in the palace courtyard Amenhotept mounted the steps leading to the Great Hall. Waiting for him on the dais formed by the top step was the Royal welcoming committee. This consisted of Nefertari, the Grand Vizier on her right and the Chief Minister on her left. Moses was at the head of that contingent of the Palace Guard that had been detailed to keep order in the courtyard. These men were ranged along the ground immediately in front of the lowest step to keep the crowd from mounting them. Nefertari was arrayed in her personal finery. Her shift was of the finest linen with a cape of white linen trimmed with sky blue silk over her shoulders.

The royal headdress of blue and white horizontally striped fabric was on her head with its wings draped over her shoulders. Over this she wore her crown of Lower Egypt. The officials on either side of her wore the headdress but no crown. On each was a brass helmet that signified his rank as well as the staff of office held in his hand.

On either side of the flight of steps was a troupe of entertainers who played martial music to which the troops marched as they took their places in the courtyard. After the official welcome they were to entertain the crowd with music and dancing. Outside the Palace gates was another troupe of entertainers to keep the huge crowd of citizens amused both before and after the king addressed them. As the walls of the palace compound prevented the assembled citizenry from hearing clearly what was said inside the courtyard two speakers were ranged on daises outside the walls. These were stationed actually outside the opened gate so that they could hear what was said by the welcoming party and the king himself and relay it to the people.

Amenhotept’s chariot entered the gate and wheeled round the lotus pool to stop immediately beside the lowest step. Moses was in position here to escort him to the dais. As Amenhotept alighted from the platform of the chariot Moses stepped up to him and saluted. He saluted in return. Moses then said. “Please follow me, Sir�. He then led Amenhotept up the steps and presented him to Nefertari.

The Chief Minster moved aside to allow him to take his place beside the Queen so that she was on his right hand. He then turned to the assembled multitude and addressed them.

Page 159

“My hearty thanks go out to you for the very warm welcome you have extended to me and my men on our return from spreading the glory of Egypt to the world. Your loyal support at home has made our task that much easier. The loyalty and prowess of your sons on the battlefield has been a credit to Egyptian manhood. Our enemies have been vanquished and tribute to Egypt re-established. The country is safe from invasion and you can all work in peace and harmony with each other. The soldiers have been returned to you to help in the wheat harvest that is ready to be taken in. I again pledge myself to be your loyal servant and to keep open the path down which the blessings of the Gods come to us.”

The captive kings were then introduced to the people and led off in turn to their respective prisons. These were not the miserable cells in which ordinary prisoners were confined but, as with Jelibah, they were minor palaces in which they were confined at the king’s pleasure. This was a rather tenuous way of assuring that tribute would continue to flow into the coffers of Egypt. The compulsion was only as good as the value that the Vassal Sate continued to place on the captured king's head.

At the completion of the welcoming ceremony Amenhotept stepped back from the dais into the entrance foyer of the Great Hall with the other personalities that had graced it. As they retreated into the shadows of the hall Amenhotept turned to Nefertari and said. “For the thousandth time of asking. Will you marry me?”

To his complete surprise she replied. “Yes, of course.” Just like that.

For want of something better to say at this surprise he replied to her.

“You surprise me. That is an understatement. What brought this on? Did it just slip out?”

“No. Just got used to you I guess. Perhaps I am tired of saying ‘No’.

Anyway, I’m ready to marry you now if you are still serious about this.”

“Never more serious in my life. When?”

“A soon as we can make all the arrangements.”

“How long will that take?”

“Not long. Much of it is in hand already.”

“You had this planned?”

“No. Just anticipated. Remember, You have asked me to marry you after every campaign since your first campaign at my brother’s side.

Page 160

Before we were both made rulers here in Memphis. You were sure to ask me again this time. After such a spectacular success you could expect to be particularly cocky and I was sure that you would ask me again. I have just crowned your success with the reward you seem to have been always looking for, Cousin.”

“You make it sound so cut and dried.”

“There was always the risk that you would have got tired of asking, then all my preparations would have been in vain.”

“That would never happen. This is the greatest reward that I could possibly have. You make me very happy. I shall endeavour to see that you do not regret it.”

“Oh. You will. I will not regret it. I can assure you of that.”

Nefertari said as they moved into the audience chamber for another official reception for Amenhotept, a more private one, from the members of the extended Royal Family.

The mountains of food and the rivers of wine supplied to the festivities were barely enough to meet the consumption capacity of the revelers as they partied on throughout the night. Amenhotept had a double victory to celebrate. The conquest of foreign lands and the other half of the Throne. This guaranteed not only his actual occupancy but made any progeny of his entitled to succeed him.

The succession to the throne of Egypt had, for many centuries, been determined by the women of the Royal Family. His child, whether male or female would be entitled to rule in its own right as a direct descendent of Kamose. In the records Amenhotept was listed as ‘not of Royal lineage’. This marriage made his progeny legitimate, through Nefertari.

Amenhotept was pleased to believe that this marriage to Nefertari would ensure Moses exclusion from the throne in Memphis. At best he was, in his view, an Egyptian bastard the result of an early indiscretion by Nefertari, at worst an Heqa Kasut foundling. Even more unworthy of the throne than the bastard he was generally believed to be. It was only his family relationship and the determination of Ahmose to keep Moses from the throne that put Amenhotept on it. Marriage to Nefertari would legitimise his ascension and ensure his progeny a place there. With that in place Moses would be that much further from the throne.

Amenhotept could not be sure that this would be the outcome for it was entirely in the hands of Nefertari to make the final decision. By

Page 161

that time it could be expected that Kamose would be gone to the Gods. There would be no one to stand between her and her ambition for Moses. He was not aware of any ulterior motive that she might have and so he was content with his own reasoning on the future of the throne In Memphis.

At Kamose’s request the wedding was to be held in Thebes. It would save him making the journey and it would also be symbolic of his ambition to unify the two kingdoms.

A fleet of ten ships was needed to transport the wedding party to Thebes. Besides these there were many boats carrying the nobles that had been invited to partake of the celebrations. The whole fleet covered several miles of the river’s surface as it wended its way under full sail up the sluggish stream. The progress up the river became a triumphal parade as the entourage stopped at various towns on the way. At each stop the Royal Party would head the procession from the wharf to the town square where a special celebration of triumph would be conducted by the local mayor or head man. The overnight stay of the party put a great strain on local accommodation. Every inn would be filled and the overflow would have to stay on the boats.

At Hardai, the administrative centre of the17th Nome several days were spent in celebrations. For these were double celebrations. The conquering hero returns and the most popular Queen for decades was about to be married. All the citizens were anxious to show their loyalty to both Nefertari and Amenhotept. The same reception was afforded them in Akhmim and in Dendara, the capital towns of the 9th and 6th Nomes. Thus with all the other Nome capitals that they called at. It was difficult for the Royal Party to get away from each town and city as they progressed, but get away they did and at last after three months on the river they arrived in Thebes.

Nefertari had arranged for Moses to stay behind to head a caretaker government, while she and Amenhotept were on this extended tour.

He had already had experience of administration in Libya and she argued that he would be thus suitable to trust with this responsibility while they were away. It was not as though he would be on his own for the staff of the various government departments would still be available and able to carry the day to day load. Only the highest officials of those departments close to the throne would be accompanying the Royal couple to Thebes.

Most of the

Page 162

administration would still be in place and Moses would be the coordinator. Her underlying reason, which she kept strictly to herself was to train him for ultimately ascending that throne that he was now taking care of.

Moses was quite happy with this arrangement. It gave him an opportunity to collate all the information that he had gathered over the years for his ‘History of the World’. He was about a quarter way through the period he was working on and enough work on it to keep him occupied for several months in what spare time he would get from his admin. duties. To go further he would need to get more time in the vast libraries in Thebes but that could wait for another opportunity which he felt sure would come his way in time.

The cheers of the crowds as Nefertari and Amenhotept emerged from the temple after their nuptials was deafening. The birds flying overhead screamed in alarm at the sound and veered away in their flight. On the edge of the stream the water birds feeding in the reeds of the shallows cried out in alarm and rose in clouds in the clear blue sky. They wheeled away both down and up the river in their flight from the alarming noise. Although she had lived for almost half of a century the bloom of youth still graced Nefertari’s countenance. It glowed like a bright jewel set in the blue and white striped Royal Headdress. Her slim figure was encased in a form fitting white shift belted at the waist by a golden cord. Golden sandals shod her feet as she emerged from the Temple and proceeded down the steps to the ground with her left hand held in Amenhotept’s right and her forearm in the crook of his.

A gold trimmed chariot drawn by four white horses in shiny, gem studded harness stood ready to take them in State to the palace.

Here they joined in the festivities that had been planned round the lotus pool. As befitting the Royal Palace of Kamose this was a small lake some hundred feet in diameter. Like all lotus pools it was not very deep for lotus were expected to cover most of the surface of the water. For the purpose of the celebrations a passage had been cleared across the pool so that there was a clear stretch of water between two banks of the flowering Lotus plants. The usual omen was sought by launching two small replicas of a royal barge. These were put on the water at one end of the cleared space. They were launched together, one carrying an effigy of Amenhotept and one an effigy of Nefertari. The slight breeze that wafted them on their way

Page 163

did not last and they were left becalmed less than a quarter way across the water, but still together. There they floated on the smooth mirror of the lake surface. The spectators held their breath for such a stop indicated a short life for the two royals. The look of dismay that momentarily flitted across the face of Amenhotept went unnoticed by the others. Before the air became too tense a slight breeze rose again and stirred the smooth surface of the water. The two little boats sailed bravely onward. After several stops and starts the two boats eventually reached the farther shore.

This was interpreted by all of those present to mean that the happy couple would have a long life together though there would be troubles to overcome, and minor setbacks to be endured. A more or less common sort of expectation to any married life.

Before the darkness of the setting sun overtook them on the evening of the third day of the festivities, Amenhotept and Nefertari boarded a ship to take them on a tour of the upper reaches of the river, beyond Thebes into the heartland of the now pacified Sudan. This was country that Nefertari had never visited and yet was the source of so many of her personal servants. She was interested in the lifestyle of these people and was glad of the opportunity to visit them in safety. It was a long time since there had been any trouble for Egypt from this direction. Besides this, their little fleet of boats was mostly occupied by guards for the important couple.

Her interest in her new surroundings did not last many weeks. By the time that the fourth month of her married state had expired Nefertari and Amenhotept were back in Memphis. She had sorely missed the luxury and opulence of her apartment in the royal Place in Memphis. She had lived in royal Egyptian luxury all of her life and the lifestyle of even the royals in Nubia was so far short of what she had been used to that she could not stay with it for long. Her new husband thoroughly enjoyed himself in the Vassal Kingdom of Nubia. As conqueror he was rather restricted in what he could do when he first had experience with the place. As a tourist he was able to fully enjoy the exotic culture. Of course, they were the guests of the present rulers who were anxious to show their allegiance to Amenhotept. They wanted no more trouble than he did.

Moses was a little disappointed at their premature return as he was thoroughly enjoying his role as administrator of the delta regions. A

Page 164

few days after the return of the couple a short hand-over ceremony took place in the Audience chamber of the Palace.

Moses called together the ministers of his caretaker government and arranged them in correct protocol order on the throne dais. Nobody occupied the throne; they were arranged beside and in front of it.

Nefertari and Amenhotept with their retinue entered by the great double brass doors of the chamber. As they were announced by the herald the people on the dais stood to receive them. They bowed to the constituted authority. They were bowed to in return. Then they advanced to the dais and Moses came done its steps to welcome them personally back to Memphis.

He said. “Welcome home. Queen Nefertari and King Amenhotept.

Congratulations on your new status. I trust that my stewardship has been satisfactory. All my associates and I have worked diligently to make sure that the kingdom is handed back to you in as good a condition as you left it with us. We would be pleased if you would step up to the dais and take your rightful places on the thrones.�

As he spoke the ushers on either side of the Royal Party led them up the few steps to the thrones and their side chairs. When they were seated Moses handed each his/her own sceptre, the seal of authority.

In their absence he had not used the Royal Sceptre but the lesser staff of office to indicate his rank. When he finished speaking he stepped back and down the steps to the floor of the chamber with the other officials who had stayed on the floor while Moses presented the sceptres.

Amenhotept stood and thanked Moses and his associates for the work that they did in keeping the kingdom running while he and Nefertari were away. The various acting ministers then presented themselves in turn to Nefertari and Amenhotept to give a report on his activities while in charge of his department. Each was suitably praised by both Nefertari and Amenhotept for the lucidity of his report and the effectiveness of his administration of his department.

When all had finished the royal couple promised that each would be suitably rewarded for the faithful discharge of his duties.

Their rewards were not monetary but consisted of appointments to government posts that enabled them to enjoy a better lifestyle and with good prospects of promotion. Moses had his reward in the sense that he had gained valuable experience in the art of

Page 165

government. He was further rewarded in Nefertari’s bed as soon as the opportunity presented itself.

Page 166

BIBLICAL EVENTS RECORDED IN SEQUENCE. EXODUS. 1; 7-22. Brief record of claimed oppression and main events associated with that.

11; 1-10 Moses born 11-15 Moses fled 16-22 Moses in Midian.

111; 1-22 Moses is commissioned by God who reveals himself as I AM. The new name of Jeh Har Hwey is established over the old El Elohim. In 22 he advised the people to take as many valuables as they can from the Egyptians before their departure.

IV; 18-26 Moses is now accused, by his wife, of slackness on the journey to Egypt, He was uncircumcised and so were his sons. She returns to her father. 27-31 Aaron and Moses meet and confer with Hebrew elders.

V; 1-5 First interview with Pharaoh.

6-11 Pharaoh angered imposes further oppression. 14 Hebrew overseers still in direct contact with workers. Egyptians are overall managers. 20-21 overseers Hebrew overseers now protest to Moses against the increased work loads and restrictions.

22-23 Moses complains to God regarding these restrictions.

VI; 24... God assures Moses of eventual deliverance.

VII;1-6 Aaron speaks to Pharaoh and gives evidence of his authority. 7 Age of Aaron stated as 83 and Moses as 80. 12 King's Magicians duplicate the signs given by Aaron.

But his rod consumes the rods of the other magicians. 18-21 First real plague but is duplicated by king's magicians. V. 22.

VIII; 1-15 Plagues of frogs. Again it is duplicated by king's magicians.

16-20 Plagues of lice. The magicians could not duplicate.

20-24 Plagues of flies. The king proposed that the people sacrifice in Egypt. This was not acceptable to Aaron and Moses. They requested three days journey into the country. The king agreed and the plague was removed. The king went back on his word.

Page 167

W

IX; 1-7 Mysterious disease of cattle on Egyptians only. King refused to let the people go.

8-12 plagues of boils on the magicians as well, They could not duplicate this either.

13-17 The king continues obdurate.

18-26 Vicious thunderstorm. Lighting and hail destroyed ripening crops, The king called and confessed his sins and promised to behave. No hail fell in Goshen.

27-35 The King calls off but changes his mind again as soon as the pestilence is removed.

X; 1-20 The king negotiates a removal but terms are not acceptable to Aaron and Moses. Plagues of locusts. King accedes to demands but again reneges when plague is removed.

21-28 Darkness overtakes the land and the king again negotiates but again the terms are unacceptable. He insists on something being left behind to ensure their return. But Aaron and Moses insist on everything leaving the country. King threatens to slay them if they appear before him again.

XI; 1-10 Death of the f first born sons throughout the land is threatened.

XII; 1-27 Preparations are made by the people to exit the country and ceremonies are instituted to celebrate the expected deliverance.

28-36 Many valuables are now obtained from neighbours and friends. The deaths occur as predicted and the King demands immediate removal of the people. The newly formed nation of Israel assembles at Succouth as it proceeds on its way out of Egypt, XIII; 5-31 The king again reneges and pursues the fugitives only to be soundly defeated in his attempts to reverse his decision for them to leave.

XIV; onwards tells of the experiences on the way to Canaan. At the border Moses fails the people to their destiny by refusing to take the advice of his military commander, Joshua.

Page 168

CHAPTER X NEFERTARI’S DECISION One morning early in the sixteenth year of the reign of Amenhotept Moses and Nefertari awoke entwined in each other’s arms. His head on his left shoulder, the delightful scent of her hair in his nostrils, his left arm about her shoulder and his left hand exploring, for the umpteenth time, her left breast. Her left arm rested across his breast and her left leg nestled between his.

“Moses. My love.” Murmured Nefertari as though talking to herself. “You must marry.”

“What’s that? Must I? Why?” All came out together in the shock of this sudden demand.

“You must be king when Amenhotept ceases to reign. To secure the succession to yourself you must marry and it must be to the right person to ensure it.”

“But I am already Crown Prince. That means I’m next in line, doesn’t it? The king’s daughter is a girl. Isn’t that sufficient to put me on the throne, especially as Amenhotept has not left a will as Ahmose did.”

“Not really. The priests of On still support Amenhotept and are likely to support his daughter to succeed him. He is not directly in the Royal Line but has been accepted by the Temple. Others of influence also support him because of his close connection with Kamose and the memories they have of him and Ahmose. They could well use her to keep you from the throne as they did when Ahmose died.”

Nefertari always referred to her daughter, Hatshepsut, as the daughter of Amenhotept, never admitting even to Moses whom she knew to be the natural father of her child.

“But. I was not really ready to take the throne then.” Protested Moses. “Also I was out of the country as Governor in Libya. What has that to do with Hatshepsut? Oh, Oh, perhaps I see the light.

You are thinking of …. “Mmmm.”

“But, she is like a baby sister to me. I have seen her grow up in this very palace. She is certainly beautiful. Almost equal to her mother.”

Page 169

Nefertari filled the pause here by replying. “Flattery does not become you but, I must admit, will get you everywhere. In the full bloom of youth she is certainly a beauty and is not lacking in suitors.

But, there is only one that she can marry to my satisfaction.”

“I am not rejecting her particularly but I am not really in need of a wife.”

“That is not the point, My Dear. On your own you have a chance of missing out on the throne the next time round. Married to Hatshepsut you can not be denied what is yours by right.”

“You have the right to determine who succeeds you and you are coruler now as you were with Ahmose.”

“That’s all very well. But, look at what happened last time. The chances are that Amenhotept will die before I do and he could assure his own successor as Ahmose did. He has not yet done so but he could if pressured enough by the Temple at On.” “The High Priest that supported Amenhotept is now dead.”

“No matter. I can not trust his successor any more than I could him.

However, I know that he will support Hatshepsut. With you as her husband he will have no option but to put you on the throne with her.”

“I have no desire to be married to anyone but as you put it that way I have very little choice. None actually.”

“You are so right. There is no other way of being certain of the outcome.”

“In that case I can only say. Let’s go.”

“Yes. Let’s.” Muttered Nefertari as she wriggled beneath him and they again consummated their passion for each other’s bodies.

When Amenhotept returned from Midian where he had been engaged in disciplinary measures against the tribes that inhabited the Sinai Peninsular he was faced with a faite accompli. Moses and Hatshepsut, the girl he believed to be his only daughter, about to be married. He was not happy about the arrangement, in fact he was distinctly unhappy but there was nothing he could do about it. He put a brave face on the situation as he always did when confronted with unpleasant situations that were beyond his power to alter. He so heartily congratulated the pair that neither of them ever suspected that he totally disapproved of the match. She was not just his daughter, as he believed but the daughter of Nefertari as well. Her

Page 170

mother’s impeccable Royal blood assured her ascension to the throne and she would take this suspected Heqa Kasut with her.

Three months after the return of Amenhotept from Midian, in the seventh month of the sixteenth year of his reign Hatshepsut and Moses were married by the full rites of Egyptian lore in the Great Temple at On. It was a gala occasion. As future queen she was due for all the honours that could be heaped upon her. It was more than a decade since such an occasion had arisen and the most was made of it by all those concerned.

Heralds were dispatched to the remotest corners of the kingdom to announce the wedding. Invitations were sent to selected noble families of the Upper Kingdom as well as to Kamose himself who was now too frail to travel outside of Thebes. This fact deterred many of those invited from accepting the invitation. Kamose sent his chief minister who was accompanied by eighteen nobles from Thebes to aid in the honouring of this fortunate couple. With their families and retainers they made a party of about one hundred people.

Amram and Jochabed were included in the guest list as ‘foster parents’ of the groom and Miriam and Heotept as cousins of the bride.

As noted previously, On was situated on the east bank of the Nile and about one day’s journey from Memphis. During the several days prior to the date of the nuptials the guests descended on the city where they were accommodated in the various inns which dotted its centre and environs, or the private homes of relatives who lived there. These were quite numerous as there was hardly a family in Egypt that did not have some member, however remote, connected with the priesthood. The Heqa Kasut influence was now so far away that this Great and Most Sacred Temple had fully regained its former position in the life and hearts of the people.

A short flight of steps, as wide as the temple building itself, led up to its imposing entrance from the outer courtyard. On the platform that was formed by the vast expanse of the top step stood Hatshepsut, in that early afternoon, ready to receive her intended spouse. She was arrayed in a Royal Robe trimmed with ermine and her feet were shod in gold sandals decorated with a large and lustrous pearl attached to each instep.

Her handmaids accompanying her were ranged in two rows behind her and to her

Page 171

right. They were dressed in the finest of linen shifts and carried, each one, good luck charms on her wrists and ankles and held an unlit torch in her hand.

Moments after taking her place before the temple Hatshepsut saw Moses approaching along the passage way made between the assembled guests in the courtyard. He wore a perfectly white starched kilt and a silken blouse with the insignia of a governor of a province across his chest. He led his retinue across the courtyard and up the steps of the temple to stand at the side of Hatshepsut. His retinue mounted the steps and ranged themselves in two rows behind him and to his left so that he and Hatshepsut faced the assembled guests with Moses standing on the left side of Hatshepsut. From this position they acknowledged the cheers of the crowd then turned to enter the Holy Place of the Temple. Their attendants stood aside to allow them to enter the vast open doors. They were followed by the privileged guests who filled to capacity the floor space of the Holy Place. Those without the necessary permits to enter stayed in the courtyard.

As they entered the open doors the High Priest met them and conducted them down the centre of the floor to the altar where their nuptials would be confirmed. This stood against the wall of the Most Holy Place into which no one entered unless on very special occasions and then only after an extensive cleansing ceremony that rendered him fit to stand in the presence of the supreme God Re. The High Priest stood with his back to this altar and with his hands held over their heads he called down a blessing on them from Re. “Let it be known to all present here today that this couple, Moses and Hatshepsut, have plighted their troth and do promise faithfully before the Great Re, creator of the universe, to honour each other in blessed matrimony. May their happiness together be complete and their union prosperous and productive. I call on Isis and Osiris to witness this event today and pour their blessing also in all that they do as they face life together. O Re creator of Heaven and Earth and sustainer of all life be with this couple as they go through life together. Bless them and prosper them. May their children be many and well founded. May they live long upon the Earth and when they are called to the life hereafter may their journey to Paradise be rewarding and happy.�

Page 172

The two young people were then anointed with holy oil and partook of the blessed bread that was always on show on the long tables along the south wall of the Holy Place. This bread was specially blessed when placed there and was considered to be food for the Gods. To partake of it was to receive a special blessing and to enhance one’s chance of a long and happy life. They were then asked to face the congregation and were introduced to the assembly as man and wife.

As they returned to the courtyard the crowd in the temple walked out behind them and followed to the palace of the High Priest where a special wedding feast had been prepared. The food and drink supplied for this event would not have been out of place in the Royal Palace in Memphis. At the appropriate time jugglers, dancers, magicians and musicians entertained the guests well into the far reaches of the night.

The guests gathered round the lotus pool in the courtyard of the palace were dismayed when the two symbolic vessels launched across it made such an erratic journey. They moved off together.

The one carrying the image of Hatshepsut sailed gaily across the surface of the water in company with that of Moses. But not for long. The ship carrying the image of Moses baulked a little more than half way across, while the other kept going. Moses’ boat circled off to the side but while it was circling Hatshepsut’s boat slowed down so that Moses’ boat was able to almost catch up with it. Before it could draw level it shot off again on a tangent and stayed where it was while the ship carrying the image of Hatshepsut continued on to make the other shore without further mishap. Every viewer interpreted this omen in his or her own way. Some read a dire and gloomy future in the omens. Those who believed that they knew much more than anyone else were pleased to see that the ‘bastard’ Moses would be well out of the way before Hatshepsut came to the end of her life. Others reflected on the stability of the Monarchy regardless. This has been the fate of omens from time immemorial.

Toward morning the happy couple took ship down the river to the Middle or Great Sea and across it to Palestine where Moses was to take up his duties as Governor in the rebuilt city of Lachish. His territory took in all the land between Dead Sea and the Mediterranean with Joppa as its main seaport on the Middle Sea. It

Page 173

extended southward to Timna at the head of the Gulf of Aquaba giving access to the Red Sea and all points east.

When his three-year term there was completed Moses and Hatshepsut with their young son, Moseesa, returned to Egypt to occupy a suite specially prepared for them in the royal Palace in Memphis. There they resided for several years until Amenhotept died and Moses ascended the throne of Lower Egypt with Hatshepsut as his Queen. Or perhaps it may be more correct to say that Hatshepsut ascended the throne with Moses as her King.

Page 174

Chapter XI MOSES RULES AS THUTMOSE I .

Another of Amenhotept’s military expeditions was forming under his direction and was almost ready to move off.

The thousands of foot soldiers, accoutred and ready in the barracks just across the river from the capital, were ready to move off. Their support battalions were assembled down the river on barges ready to move further downstream to transfer to the ships awaiting them at Tanis. Thousands of chariots were ready with their horses and men alerted to move off overland to the location of the campaign.

Supply trains were in readiness to follow the vast army setting out to discipline another Vassal State that needed a lesson.

At Tanis the invasion fleet was assembled. Three hundred ocean going vessels had been assembled in the estuary of that eastern branch of the Delta, on which the Heqa Kasut had built their model port city of Tanis, till the water was hidden beneath the carapace of wooden hulls sprouting a forest of masts. Most of them were huge transports hired from the Phoenicians traders who had a virtual monopoly on ocean trading ships.

Each vessel held a hundred soldiers and their stores. The chariots and mounted cavalry would go along the shore to meet the fleet at its destination. Three hundred ships assembled in the one place could not be missed by any alien spies. Where they were heading for was the secret they were there to find out. It was also the duty of the Egyptians commanders to see that they did not or it was at least made as hard for them as possible.

Spies for Nubia could rest easy. Such a fleet in such a place could not be massing against that country. Many of the troops massing here had come down the river from Thebes thus depleting the army of Upper Egypt. To attack Nubia by sea the feet would have to be assembled at a Red Sea port such as Leuckos Limnen on the coast opposite Thebes, so it was obvious to them that this array was being headed to some other country.

Spies for Libya had sent messages to their government that this huge fleet had been assembled and could be sailing in their direction.

Page 175

Syria and the kings of Palestine were also alerted by their spies but no one knew in which direction the fleet was pointed. Whichever country was hit by this invasion force would be hard put to resist it.

They each examined their recent histories to determine which of them had caused this build up. At the same time they all prepared to resist whatever was thrown at them.

As next in line to the throne Moses was to participate in this campaign. It was part of his training for this exalted position. His military training to this point entitled him to have command of a regiment and be a member of the War Cabinet. To help in this exercise of chastisement of Syria would add to any glory and honour that was to come to him as the next ruler. He would receive a first hand knowledge of what was needed to maintain the imperial power of Egypt.

Only seven years before this time Syria had made a peace treaty with Egypt after Amenhotept had driven her back from the land of Palestine. She had agreed to leave Canaan in peace in return for leniency and increased trade through Lebanon. She had paid dearly in reparations for her annexation of Canaan, a part of the Egyptian Empire. Egypt then not only retained her vassalage of Canaan but also added that of Syria to her trophies. Like all conquests, the impositions of the conquerors generated resentments that came to the fore when the conquered had secretly rebuilt their strength to the level that they considered sufficient to drive off the oppressor. So war has followed war throughout the centuries of human development.

Syria was no exception.

In the year prior to this build up in the Nile Delta Syria had infiltrated into Canaan by first settling her people round the Lake Chenereth (Galilee to you). From here they established settlements along the fertile Jordan Valley. This news had been sent to Egypt by its governors in Canaan. It could not be allowed. Amenhotept, in spite of failing health mounted this campaign to ‘teach Syria a lesson.’ What a lesson it was planned to be.

Nefertari, as joint ruler, was to ‘keep the home fires burning’. The daily running of Lower Egypt was to be hers while the men were away doing what men were supposed to do in those days. She did not like the idea of Moses being away for the many months that the campaign would take but her wishes were overruled by the King.

Page 176

She did get a small concession in that Moses was to stay behind to attend to the tidying up of loose ends of administration while Amenhotept was away and to join the fighting forces when they arrived, ready for action, on the shores of Palestine. It was arranged that he would get passage in one of the supply ships scheduled to follow the army.

A message was delivered to the palace that the army was ready to move off. The Palace Guards had already been alerted and were assigned to the barracks vacated by the regular army. It needed only the presence of the Great General himself to complete the force.

The Royal Barge was tied up at the Royal Pier in readiness to receive him. Amenhotept and his personal bodyguard of two hundred men paraded from the Palace to the riverside along the Royal Way. They were preceded by the trumpeters of the Palace guard and accompanied by harpists and cymbalists of the Royal Band to send them off in right Royal Style. The Palace guard lined both sides of the roadway as the entourage wended its way to the boats. The sun glinted from the shiny spear tips of the Guards’ weapons held aloft to make an arch of steel (bronze) under which the parade advanced. The dazzling white of the soldiers kilts and the brilliant colours of their tunics were as sparkling jewels set in the claws of the golden flashes from the bronze armour and the fittings of their accourtrements. The plumes on their helmets waved joyously as they set out to chastise the rebel nation.

That evening Nefertari, Hatshepsut and Moses sat at table in the Royal Dining Hall relaxed after having partaken of a sumptuous dinner they toasted the success of the campaign against a recalcitrant Syria. Their peace was disturbed by some urgent movements in the adjoining passage. Someone was trying to get past the guards and was not too pleased by their obstruction.

Nefertari said angrily, to one of her attendants. “See what that disturbance is all about, will you?”

A few minutes later she says. “Ma’am, there is a messenger in the passage being denied access to you. He says that it is extremely urgent and for your ears only.”

“Bring him then, but, it had better be good.”

The messenger was ushered into her presence and bowing low he said, hesitantly. “My message is of extreme importance, Your Majesty.”

Page 177

“Well, in that case you had better get on with it. Don’t stand there gawking. Say what you have to say and get out.”

“Please Ma’am. The King is dead.”

“What!!!” From both Nefertari and Moses, almost in the same breath, as they rose together to their feet in astonishment.

“Is this a sick joke?” Demanded Nefertari.

“No. Ma’am. It is deadly serious. We had just passed the city of On when His Majesty complained of sharp pains in his chest. They were severe enough for him to cry out in pain. His personal physician, travelling with us as usual, rushed to his side but he had already slumped over the arm of his chair and been caught by his aide on that side of him. The physician put smelling salts to his nose to revive him but it was already too late. He had gone to his fathers.”

A significant look passed between Moses and Nefertari. On her face was the barely perceptible glow of satisfaction in anticipation of at last being able to have her protégé on the throne of Lower Egypt.

On Moses face was a momentary expression of dismay at the thought that he, as heir presumptive, would be expected to lead this great army assembled for battle. He was ill prepared for the task as he had expected many more years to elapse before Amenhotept would relinquish the burden he had carried for the last twenty years.

He was too schooled in etiquette for this expression to last more than for the briefest of fleeting moments. It was immediately replaced by one of deep concern for the Nation in the impending crisis. But at last his time had come without relation to his fitness to fill the shoes left to him.

“Have the relevant commanders been notified?” Demanded Nefertari.

“Yes. Ma’am. They have been notified, but not the men, and were being called in to conference when I left with the news. The moment we docked in Giza the conference was called and I was dispatched. I have been ordered to seek your pleasure in regards to procedure from this point. Do you wish the expedition to proceed with another commander appointed by you or should the commanders elect one of their number to lead them forward?”

“Very well. You must be exhausted after your dash here. You will retire to your quarters and send a fresh messenger to me. By the

Page 178

time that he arrives I will have an order for him to take to the commanders assembled at Giza”.

When the messenger had left the hall Nefertari turned excitedly to Moses, threw her arms about his neck, kissed him soundly on both cheeks and said. “MY Love. You will now be king. No one can prevent it this time. All is prepared. It is the will of the Gods.”

Overwhelmed Moses replied. “But we will now be parted for a long time. It will take a year at least for this campaign to come to an end.

This expedition can not be stopped. It is essential for the good of the realm that it continue and be successful. I will be expected to lead it and I know so little about foreign warfare. I could lead us into defeat and also be killed. Then I would never see you again.”

“Silly boy.” Retorted Nefertari. “With you away the Nation will be without part of its head. Besides, I do not want you away at this time. You must not go. The second in command knows the plans every bit as well as Amenhotept himself did. They put them together. He is the logical new commander. For years he has fought by his side. He is familiar with his thoughts on how to implement their plans. I shall promote him immediately to Commander in Chief. The Minister for war will agree to this arrangement. I believe that he also has confidence in Akhetanet to replace Amenhotept effectively. Never fear. You will not be joining this expedition but you will be crowned king while it is away. I need you here more than they need you in the army.”

By this time the messenger asked for had arrived and Nefertari ordered him to go first to the office of the Minister for War and request his presence at the Audience Chamber. The messenger was instructed to return with the Minister and wait for her further instructions. From among her attendants she selected a messenger to go to the High Priest at On to summon him to her presence. This would take at least a day for him to travel to Memphis for this purpose.

That being done she removed herself from the dining hall and repaired to the audience chamber to receive the minister. Moses she directed to retire to his rooms and to take his wife with him. Her instructions to him were to wait there for further word from her as to what to do in the next twenty-four hours. While waiting for the arrival of the War Minister Nefertari returned to her own quarters there to be attired in her official robes for his reception.

Page 179

When the War Minister arrived at the Audience Chamber he knocked as usual on the closed doors which opened to reveal to him Nefertari seated on her throne with her regular attendants ranged beside and below it. The usher who opened the door conducted him into the presence of the Queen and officially introduced him to her.

She said. “Welcome, Honoured Sir.” He replied. “Ma’am. To what do I owe this honour?” As if he did not know of the crisis that had just struck that Nation.

She then addressed him. “As you are no doubt aware this Nation is in a temporary state of Crisis. Our illustrious King Amenhotept has been struck down by the Gods at the very beginning of his expedition against our enemies. The Heir apparent to the throne is not yet ready to take his place at the head of our armies, besides that, he needs to be crowned to establish his authority so he must remain here for a time. However the army is ready to go and any delay would jeopardise its readiness. Have you a suggestion of a person how can adequately replace our late Illustrious General?

The troops are not yet aware of the tragedy. They had great faith and confidence in Amenhotept so his replacement will have to be someone who has their confidence for him to be able to take his place at such short notice. Like tomorrow.”

“Of course, Ma’am, we always have contingency plans ready for any such emergency. This could have happened in the field and so we have to be prepared for immediate replacement at any time. It is normal, as you are probably aware, for the Second in Command to take full command and promotions then take place all down the line.

Akhetanet is the appointed second, by Amenhotept himself, so he is the logical choice as he would have been appointed with this very event in mind.”

“I am pleased that you see it that way for that is also my thought on the matter. I know from discussions with the late lamented King and General that he had primed Akhetanet for this very position.

Actually, I had attempted to persuade the King to send this General in full charge of this expedition, as I did not think that his health was fit to take him as its Chief Commander. If he had taken my advice and stayed behind he may still be with us. We will never know this for certain. You have my approval of this course of action. Make whatever promotions are necessary to complete your echelon of command and send the expedition on its way. My son, Moses,

Page 180

before the morrow is over, will be declared King and crowned as soon as possible. He will then follow you to head the army in the field. If you are successful before he arrives he will head the peace delegation. Is that all clear?”

“Yes Ma’am. I am in full agreement with these arrangements. They follow closely my own thoughts on the matter. It appears that you have a very thorough and practical knowledge of the armed forces and how they should be organised. You have no directions in regard to the lesser levels of command?”

“No. That is the prerogative of you and the commanders in the field and I would not encroach on these rights. To know who they are is my right and duty and I expect that you will acquaint me with the new personell arrangements as soon as you are able.”

“Certainly, Ma’am. May I now have your permission to retire to implement these changes and send our forces on their way?”

“You certainly have and I look to you to do whatever has to be done with all dispatch.” Was Nefertari’s virtual command to her War Minister as he retreated several steps while still facing her before turning and leaving the hall.

From the Audience Chamber Nefertari went to Moses’ private apartment and instructed him to be ready for the next day. To do this he was, first, to dress in the full regalia of Heir apparent to the Throne. He was to wait in his apartment till summoned. Moses expressed his surprise that that regalia had already prepared in such short notice.

“What short notice?” Retorted Nefertari. “Amenhotept has been ailing for some time now although it has not been apparent to anyone but me. What has just happened was due so I have been prepared for this. It is no real surprise to me. Just do as I say and be ready to take the call that I shall send to you some time tomorrow morning.”

“Yes, Ma’am. Whatever you say.” Replied Moses as he gave her a military salute.

“Watch it, boyo.” Warned Nefertari. “Don’t get sassy with me.”

“Sorry, Your Majesty, I was merely acknowledging my appreciation of what you are doing for me. I did not mean to be derisive.” Said Moses in his own defense.

The next morning, at the summons of Nefertari, Moses entered the Audience Chamber and was ushered to the presence of his foster

Page 181

mother as she sat on her throne at the head of the hall. To her right was the High Priest of On, seated on a chair on the lower level of the dais. On her left was the empty throne that had been occupied b y both Ahmose and Amenhotept in their turns. Official ministers of the Crown were ranged appropriately on either side.

As Moses approached they all stood and bowed respectfully to him.

The High Priest intoned. “Hail, Your Highness, Crown Prince of Lower Egypt.”

Moses hesitated but the High Priest beckoned to him to proceed toward the thrones.

As he drew near he was motioned to halt a few steps before the dais and to turn to face to assembly. When he was facing them the courtiers and ministers said, in unison and sorrowfully. “The King is dead.”

Moses was then conducted onto the dais and stood before the empty throne, facing the assembled people. He was then greeted by the joyous call. “Long Live the King.”

The High Priest then invited him to take his seat beside his co-ruler, Nefertari the joint ruler with him of Lower Egypt. This declaration was, of course subject to ratification by the Great Kamose, still on the throne of all Egypt in Thebes. This great conqueror was still on that throne and in full control of his senses although now somewhat frail in body. Nefertari had already approached him regarding a replacement for Amenhotept and his approval had already been given for Moses to take that place. He was not greatly pleased by this development but there was no alternative. Ahmose had left no issue. Nefertari had only one daughter and she was married to this man. What else could the old man do but accept what had been arranged, possibly by the Gods?

All that remained now was for Moses to be crowned in the High Temple at On to confirm his kingship. The business of the Nation could proceed without more than a slight hiccup in the general harmony of its society.

Thus did Moses become the king that was recorded in history as Thutmose I. That is the name that he chose to rule by. Several alternatives were presented to him but after consultation with Nefertari Thutmose appealed to him as the most appropriate. It incorporated the family name ‘Mose’ with that of Thoth, signifying

Page 182

that he came from the Holy Mother River and was favoured of the Gods.

After the declaration that the king lived the High Priest addressed Moses personally.

“Your majesty. Your coronation must be arranged. What is your wish with regard to this? Do you intend to lead the army against our current enemy before the ceremony? Or have you made other arrangements?”

“Most honourable Sir. It has already been arranged that the army shall proceed as planned under its Second in Command who has been promoted to Supreme Commander and other echelons appropriately upgraded. All strategy is in hand and in place. The troops are anxious to be at work. Any delay could be crucial to the success of the campaign. My presence personally can make no difference to the progress or the outcome. My coronation will proceed at your earliest convenience.”

“Thank you, Sir. All shall be done with the utmost dispatch. May I now have your permission to retire to attend to these matters?”

“Certainly.” Said Moses with a grand gesture of dismissal as the High Priest took two steps backward, turned and strode out of the chamber.

While the Royal Suite of the King was being refurbished according to his and his wife’s tastes Moses ruled from his current apartment.

This entailed a considerably greater amount of work for everyone but was tolerated by all the servants and courtiers as it was expected that the refurbished suite would be more pleasant to work in than the old. Every new king or queen wanted what they considered an improvement on the old so all the public servants and officers of the crown were quite resigned to this disruption of their regular routine.

Meanwhile the body of Amenhotept must be preserved and interred in royal style. The very day that the news of his death was received Nefertari ordered that his body be removed to Memphis. There it was put immediately into the hands of the embalmers. This expert team took charge of the body the moment that it arrived at the Royal Wharf and transported it to their workshop where it was fully and correctly treated to be discovered by archeologists several millennia later.

When properly prepared for it the body was left on display in its marble catafalque in courtyard of the Temple to Isis in Memphis.

Page 183

This was to enable the citizens of Memphis to make their last farewells to their popular and revered king. After a suitable passage of time the final wrapping and mummification was completed and the body was then removed to Thebes, the place of his birth. It was from this city that the funeral cortege was to precede to the tomb prepared as his last resting place. His tomb had been five years in the making. It was cut from the base rock of the desert escarpment across the river to the west of Thebes, this area is known today as the ‘Valley of the Kings’. Pyramids had gone out of fashion as royal tombs several thousand years before.

As the army that he had led was not to be recalled the funeral cortege was largely made up of older officers who had served all their lives in the Palace guard in the years before Amenhotept became king. The procession was headed by a contingent of younger members who had recently been serving under Moses.

They were followed by the veterans. Behind them came the catafalque on its wagon, it was far too heavy for any team of men to carry. Bringing up the rear was the royal Family itself, Nefertari and Hatshepsut in a litter fit only for such royal personages. Moses and his family followed in another litter. The leaders of the procession had their feet on the wharf on the Thebes bank of the river as the tail of it was leaving the Great Temple of that city.

Several boats suitably adorned were waiting at the wharf to take the entire party across where another wharf received them and the procession set off from the west bank as it had approached the east bank. The distance being somewhat greater for this journey there was considerable space left between the West Bank and the tail of the procession. At the entrance to the tomb the military procession halted and seemed to split down the middle as the lines moved aside to form a Guard of Honour for the body of the king as it was taken into the tomb. It was thus the old soldiers, who knew him best of all, were the last to farewell the royal body as it entered into its last rest. None of these was allowed into the inner chamber where the body of the king was to lie for eternity. Only his immediate family, his wife and daughter, were allowed to enter the inner chamber where a sarcophagus had been prepared, carved from a solid block of marble. Into this was placed the catafalque containing the embalmed body. Its lid was sealed and then the lid of the sarcophagus was also sealed as the High Priest blessed the operation

Page 184

and the body of the dead king. In the outer chambers a large collection of artifacts from the life of Amenhotept had been arranged so that he would have a comfortable after-life.

When the ceremony was completed the whole entourage filed out of the tomb and each room was sealed off as the party left it. Finally the tomb entrance was sealed in such a way as to hide it from any chance wanderers or searchers for treasure. The workmen who did this work were later sold off into slavery into a far country so that the knowledge of the locality of this tomb would not become known to anyone in the world.

Miriam, being Moses’ older sister, mentor and guide had developed a close friendship with his wife Hatshepsut. The two women worked closely together in the refurbishing of the ‘King’s Suite’ preparatory to the family moving into it. This was the suite that had been occupied by Ahmose when he and his sister were joint rulers.

It had been in disuse, except as for guest accommodation, since he had died. When Nefertari married Amenhotept they had occupied her quarters as being more suitable for their needs than any others in the palace. The two young women spent many happy days together choosing drapes and furniture to suit the taste of Hatshepsut. Men are very seldom consulted in such operations. If they are it is only out of courtesy and very seldom is their advice taken.

Nefere and Mosesa, the children of the new king and his wife, were consulted for they were no longer small children and it was thought appropriate that they should have choice in the decoration and furnishing of their rooms.

With Amenhotept moved into Nefertari’s quarters the inhibitions that had restricted the intimate relationship between her and Moses fell away to some extent, but not entirely. Now that he was no more their intimacies were resumed to the level that they had been at before that marriage. She and Moses were joint rulers so that there were many occasions when they should and could be together.

Many consultations were necessarily in private as the topics for discussion and decision were confidential. The tight prohibition against Israelis in the army had broken down under Amenhotept.

Now that he too was removed it was possible to make further changes in the chain of command. Moses took advantage of this situation and promoted his young nephew Joshua, the son of his brother Nun, to a captain in the Palace Guard. He knew not at that

Page 185

time just how crucial the military expertise of this young man would be when eventually his people did tear themselves away from Egypt and head for their ‘Promised Land’.

Aaron had long since followed his father into the ‘Brotherhood’. He was now a Past Grand Master in the Craft. Being a member of the oppressed race he was not allowed to own or operate a business on his own account. However, there was no restriction on his working for an Egyptian owner. As his brother Nun had done, he registered his business in the name of a friendly Egyptian who was his ostensible overseer. The Egyptian thus became the equivalent of today’s ‘silent partner’, the one who provides the finance and takes a share of the profits but does not do any of the work.

His brother Nun resided in Succouth and owned and operated two fleets of trading ships. One traded in his own name down that river branch to the Red Sea and to many far and away exotic places far in the East as well as closer by in the Arabian Peninsular. The other traded into and far up the Nile to beyond Thebes. It was registered in the name of a friendly Egyptian. This was the very person who had been his father’s partner in the halcyon days of Heqa Kasut supremacy. He was now quite an old man and was glad of the opportunity to still have income without having to be actively employed on a day to day basis. Nun’s in-laws still lived and traded in the city of Leukos Limnen, the Red Sea port for Thebes, where he had first met the girl who became his wife.

Moses promoted Heotept to Vizier in charge of National Security.

He had been working in this department since Moses had been governor in Lachish and had been Inspector General for some time.

Now the incumbent Vizier was due for retirement and it was appropriate that Heotept fill his vacated shoes. This appointment did not require Miriam and Heotept to change their residence so they continued to live happily in the house where they had begun their life together. Their children were growing up into the social life of the aristocracy of Egypt.

Miriam played a large part in the preparations for the coronation of her younger brother as Thutmose I of Egypt. Her uncles’ families provided much of the regalia required for the ceremony. Moses had to have his own individual crown made as his own personal property. The Royal Crown was kept under close guard in the Royal Treasury and was worn by the monarch on only very special

Page 186

occasions. Not everyone has the same sized head. His own royal armour had to be fabricated. The royal Barge was refurbished and redecorated to suit the personal tastes of the new monarch and his consort. Fully six months were required for these preparations to be completed.

While this half-year became history the Egyptian army had arrived at Gaza and been deployed into the surrounding country ready for the push to drive the Assyrians from their occupation of territory claimed by Egypt as hers. An encampment of twenty thousand soldiers with their supplies and back up cavalry could not go undetected. The Assyrians marshaled their troops ready to repulse the Egyptian invader. It was to be quite an extensive war.

At length the coronation day arrived. The Temple at On was hung with streamers, bunting and the banners of the various regiments of the Home Guard as well as those of the noble families present at the event. Over the high altar hung the banner of the new king. On either side of the aisle leading from the main entrance to the High Altar were rows of chairs provided for the many guests expected to be present. These were from the high and mighty families of Egypt and the diplomatic corps present in the country at that time.

As the sun rose over the Red Sea Thutmose and his queen Hatshepsut, with their retinue, left the palace grounds in Memphis and passed between the two banks of wildly cheering citizens on either side of the Royal Way. Their progress toward the riverbank where their transport to On was awaiting them was at no more than a walking pace so that they could adequately greet the assembled citizens who were so loudly wishing them well. At last they boarded the royal barge awaiting them and with the cheers of the crowd ringing their ears they took off for On. The journey down the river was quiet and peaceful carried as they were on the bosom of the waters flowing to the sea. Most of the day was taken up by this journey powered by the flow of the river assisted just enough by the oarsmen to make steerage way for the four ship flotilla. The first vessel held a contingent of the Palace Guard, the second the royal party itself and the third the VIP guests who were privileged by rank or family ties to be close to the king and his queen. Miriam and Heotept were among these as well as the Grand Vizier upon whom the king depended for much of the day to

Page 187

day running of the nation. The last ship held supplies for the trip and a small contingent of guards.

The royal entourage floated past the city of Giza on the left bank as the sun approached its zenith and as this ancient city slipped by the river branch leading to On came into view to their right. As the sun began its journey toward the west the Holy City of On came into view in all its glory on the Right Bank. Its panorama was dominated by the magnificent temple, which was the very reason for its existence. Above its many roofs appeared the towering columns that supported the massive gables and lintels that supported its massive roof. As the flotilla approached the bank the jetty on to which they were to debark came into focus. Stretching from this jetty to the very steps of the temple was a stone paved walkway guarded by two rows of couchant lions with permanent expressions of ferocity on their stone faces.

The first ship to tie up disgorged its human cargo of the Place guard who quickly and with precision worthy of the Parade Ground formed a guard of honour for the Royal couple as they stepped with great dignity from their ship to the surface of the stone jetty. Behind them the VIPs debarked and formed two lines leading along the way to the temple. When these were all in place the Royal Couple advanced beneath the crossed swords of the guard and followed the VIPs toward the Temple. As they moved past the last of the Guard this body of men formed two lines abreast and followed as the rear guard of the procession all the way to the temple steps.

Beyond the guarding lions was a tremendous crowd of people all turned out to see the new king. Between each pair of lions stood a soldier in full armour, facing the crowd, to make sure that no citizen approached close enough to cause an alarm for the personal safety of the king. When the leading couple of the escort placed their feet on the bottom of the flight of steps leading up into the temple a fanfare of trumpets broke out that seemed to be coming from everywhere at once. The people were wrapped about with sound.

The trumpeters could not be seen for they were stationed on the roof behind the parapet. The sound of their trumpets washed over the lintels and surrounded everyone and everything.

As this procession entered the temple the VIP column moved off to each side and took their places as spectators of the rest of the ceremony. Thutmose and his Queen Hatshepsut were conducted by

Page 188

assistant priests, acting as ushers, down the centre of the floor to stand together at the High Altar. This stood just outside and to the right of the Most Holy Place into which no one but a specially cleansed High Priest was ever allowed to enter on pain of death for it was the special abode of God Himself. The floor on which they walked was covered with a carpet of freshly picked lotus flowers.

At the altar they knelt while the High Priest held his hands over their heads in blessing. He prayed to Almighty Osiris to bless this new king and his consort.

“Oh, Mighty Osiris, creator of Heaven and Earth grant to this your servant, Thutmose, wisdom to lead your children aright. Make him successful in battle against our enemies, against infidels and usurpers. May the wisdom with which you endow him be such that he will lead his people to greater prosperity. That Egypt might grow in might to the confounding of her enemies. May he have long life in your service and in the service to his people. May your blessing rest upon us all throughout his reign.”

As he completed his prayer the High Priest took from the attendant on his right side the High Crown of Lower Egypt that he was balancing on a red plush cushion and placed it on the head of Thutmose saying. “With this crown I create you king of Lower Egypt. May your reign be a long, prosperous and happy one. I trust that you will discharge your duties aright”. Stepping to his left he took from the attendant on his left side another crown identical to the one placed on Thutmose’s head. This he held aloft and while bringing it down on to the head of Hatshepsut saying. “With this crown I declare you to be the Queen of Lower Egypt. Serve her well at the side of your king, as one of two equal halves of a complete whole. May Isis, the Earth Mother, grant you a long and happy reign.” If he had any foreknowledge of the heartaches that Thutmose would bring to her he was not about to reveal it.

After the crowning the newly crowned king and Queen stood still facing this wise old man while he lectured them on the responsibilities that fell onto the shoulders of a king. Towards his subjects and to his temple.

On either side of the High Altar was a throne, each a replica of the twin thrones in the throne room in Memphis. To these the king and his queen were escorted by the temple servants. The High Priest then called on all those present to bow their heads and declare their

Page 189

allegiance to the new rulers. Their voices raised in unison the cry.

“The Gods save the king and Queen.”

This great cry echoed from the walls of the Temple Chamber and rebounded from the ceiling on to the heads of the gathering. As it began to die down in the chamber it was heard to rise from the thousands gathered in the great courtyard outside. The sound rose and fell like a tidal wave as it bounced from the surrounding buildings and finally died away in its own echoes until silence again reigned in both the chamber and the courtyard.

Before the silence could be broken by the inevitable chattering of the crowds, a fanfare of trumpets shredded the air. As these notes died away a Temple Herald announced to the assembled nobles and VIPs in the chamber. “People of Egypt. Behold your sovereigns.”

Again the voices of the assembled host were raised in greeting.

When these praises had died away the newly crowned king and his queen were conducted from their thrones and ushered between the rows of guards lining the aisle to the great entrance doors of the Temple. When they first set foot off the dais they were congratulated by Nefertari herself, who had been at the very forefront of the assembled nobles. She stepped up to them before they could move off and taking one hand of each of them in her own said. “My heartiest congratulations to you both. This is the dawn of a new day in the annals of our nation. Rule wisely and well as I have taught you both. Hatty, remember well all that I have passed on to you. Moss, Heed well the advice of your wife, she will be my voice when I have passed to the abode of the Gods.” This was said in a tone of voice and at a volume that could be heard and understood by no one else in that chamber but the two whom she was addressing.

As they stepped out onto the patio at the head of the entry stairway they paused. The herald then addressed the multitude in the courtyard with the same greeting given to the nobles inside the building. Loud cheering and calls to the Gods for protection to the royal couple echoed and reechoed from the surrounding buildings until peace and quiet was at last restored and Thutmose and Hatshepsut were able to walk through the crowds as the crowned joint sovereigns of Lower Egypt. A united Egypt was not to be till their grandson took his place on the throne in Memphis.

Page 190

The afternoon was well advanced when the celebratory feast began in the great paved plaza between the temple precinct gates and the bank of the Nile. As darkness approached from the west torches were lit to illuminate the scene. Hundreds of people milled around the tables and the drink stalls provided free for all those who attended on this great day. The loud cheering of the throng and the friendly greetings of the nobles that they met with gladdened the heart of Moses, now Thutmose, as he and Hatshepsut mingled with the crowd. At last, wearied by the strenuous efforts they had put forth that day they retired to the quarters prepared for them, there to enjoy a well earned rest. It was the only one they would get for on the morrow they were scheduled to return to Memphis to resume the royal duties from which there is no respite for those committed to them.

Moses was not as happy as he should have been. This was noticed

by Hatshepsut. She asked him. “Are you not well? You seem to be under a burden”.

“No”. He replied. “I am quite well. It is just that it has been a rather heavy day and there is worse to come for I must be off tomorrow to join the army”.

She accepted this explanation with some reserve and Moses knew that he had not told the truth. He sensed that something as missing from his coronation. He had witnessed Amenhotept’s and felt that something was missing from his own. He was not sure what but sensed that it would come to him sometime after things had settled down.

The first duty of the newly crowned king was to travel to Caanan to inspect the progress of his armies and to assess the results. Within a few days of his coronation the ongoing preparations for this visit were completed and Thutmose set off from Memphis by ship to visit Caanan. Although prepared, not without trepidation, to lead these troops into battle if necessary he was privately happy that this was no longer expected of him. By the time that he and his party had arrived on the scene the Syrian occupying forces had been driven back and were fast retreating beyond the borders that had been established by the abrogated treaty. From the HQ establishment Thutmose reviewed the situation and suggested a more violent action against the retreating rebels. “Have you posted guards on the border?” He asked.

Page 191

“Guards on the border?” Queried Akhetanet. “May I respectfully request, Sire, the reason for your remark. I believed that the strategy was to drive them back into Syria. Not to stop them from returning.”

“Of course, some will have got through already. But, the stragglers could be stopped at the border and all of them put to the sword.

Might teach them the lesson of the dire consequences of challenging the might of Egypt.”

“May I again respectfully suggest that such action would have a negative effect. It could well make the nation so angry that their reaction will be to lick their wounds and plan the next insurrection.

A treaty agreed to with mutual respect between our two nations is more likely to be adhered to than one that is forced by too severe a subjugation of the defeated people.”

After some further discussion Thutmose accepted the strategy of a softly, softly approach to the vanquished in the hope that they would be more satisfied with the concluding treaty. A spin off from this would be a less exhausting and expensive garrison to maintain the peace at the border. Accordingly he gave orders that this strategy was to be put in place. He then left the battlefield to return to Memphis. It was thus left to the army to complete the mop up operations and to re-establish the border garrisons to secure Egyptian territory against a further invasion in the foreseeable future.

In an attempt to carry out the destiny that Miriam and Jochabed had imbued him with and reminded him of, at every opportunity, Thutmose allowed the restrictions on the monotheism of the Heqa Kasut to relax. A quiet word was passed to Heotept, as Director General of State Security to ‘go easy’ on those who did not conform strictly to the temple requirements in the matter of religion. This was hardly necessary as under the influence of Miriam this was already actually happening. It did, however, cause a further relaxation of observance of the ‘rules’ by a significant reduction in the incidence of inspection of religious activities. At first this reduction in the observance of traditional religion was not noticeable, as very few native Egyptians were monotheists. They were quite happy with the panoply of Minor Gods controlling and assisting in their everyday lives. As the numbers of Egyptian dissenters grew they came under the notice of the Temple authorities. This led to a growing, though covert, dissatisfaction by them with the administration of Thutmose.

Page 192

His power base at this time was too great for them to actually do anything about it.

Thut also lightened the burden imposed on the Heqa Kasut by the previous regime. As government priorities changed the demand for bricks was considerably lessened and the demand for pastoral products increased. This gave the Hebrews more time to spend on their own pursuits and attend to their own economy in their segment of the Nation. The resultant prosperity had a somewhat negative effect as far as the dream of Miriam was concerned. The concept of a ‘return to the Promised Land’ receded again into the background of Hebrew thought. The effort to get there far outweighed any benefits that they might get by going there.

Egyptian hegemony takes a holiday during the reign of Thutmose I. It is viewed as a period of consolidation. The empire does not spread over greater areas of land. Lines of communication were strengthened and the authority of the central administration had more effect in the empire as it is ‘streamlined’. International trade through the numerous ports scattered along the shores of the Great Sea and the Red Sea surged to new heights. The prosperity of the two Egyptian nations appeared to be assured and secured by firm treaties with all the neighbouring States, particularly those world traders, the Phoenicians.

Hidden in these conditions were the seeds of the sudden and unexplained downfall of Thutmose I.

Page 193

CHAPTER XII THE DOWNFALL OF THUTMOSE I. In the twelfth year of his reign Thutmose I becomes dissatisfied with the reports he was receiving of restlessness among the Hebrews. He had eased their burdens considerably and had hoped for a better reception of his measures for a peaceful and gradual migration in accordance with the desires that he believed, through Miriam, that they had. A rapid and uncontrolled exodus would harm the economy of his realm so that had to be avoided if at all possible. He was in no hurry to consummate his plans. He made no positive steps to return his people to Caanan. He was content to ‘let things take their course’. This was his reply to every prodding by Miriam to get an exodus moving. He has set the stage. It was now up to the people to make their moves.

There were also the problems that would arise with the settling into Caanan. It was already well populated and ruled by thirteen kings when Abraham went through the country. There were now thirty minor kings. Each kingdom was not large as it consisted of a city surrounded by productive land dotted with small villages and towns within a radius of no more than twenty kilometres of the controlling city. From this city the ruling king protected his domain from marauders and sorties out on his own raids to settle imagined or real grievances.

The one common ground between these rival minor kings was that they all owed allegiance to the king of Egypt. This allegiance required the payment of vassalage and this was a common point of resentment round which they could be rallied from time to time for the purposes of rebellion or defence.

After many months of work on him Miriam persuaded Moses to formulate a positive plan for resettlement of their People in ‘The Promised Land’. It was arranged that a thousand migrants would move into Caanan each month. The regional governors were instructed to assist these migrants to settle in their respective areas.

Agriculturalists and pastoralists among them were to be given grants of land on which to settle. Artisans were to be helped to settle into the towns and villages there to carry on their trades. They would

Page 194

thus become part of the scene in each kingdom without great disruption, either there or in Egypt itself.

It could be expected that as the people settled into Caanan and made it their home this would encourage a greater number of migrants each month. Over a ten year period enough people would have moved into the country to make it appropriate for Moses as Thutmose to move there as sovereign of the whole country. He would then be a king of a part of Egypt. Probably would have to change his sovereign name, as it would not be suitable for a king of a predominantly Hebrew Nation. His son Mosesa would then be old enough to take his father’s place on the throne as joint ruler with his mother. Moses may have to become a vassal king to his son but that was the price he would have to pay to be King of the Jews.

Miriam was not entirely happy with the ten year period but when it was explained to her that such a plan would cause the least disruption in both regions she accepted what was to her a compromise. To look forward to a move at last, even ten years away was to her better than the lack of move that had plagued her all her life.

Making plans was one thing. Getting the people to move was something entirely different. Since the pressure that had been put on the Israelis by Ahmose had been relaxed under Amenhotept and still further under Thutmose they seemed to have lost all incentive to leave the country. The thousand volunteers needed every month did not eventuate. A few hundred fronted the organisation for the first few months then soon dried up to dozens. The message was spread throughout Goshen that there would be no restrictions as to numbers. This did not attract any great numbers of migrants. Then would be migrants were offered the costs of removal to Caanan of themselves and all their movable property. Still no takers appeared in viable numbers. There seemed to be no way to prise the people from the entrenched positions they had made for themselves in what had now become their homeland.

To obtain first hand information regarding the attitudes of the people Moses disguised himself and wandered the streets of the city of Memphis both by night and by day at random times. He found no enthusiasm for the movement although there was no resistance either. Lethargy met him at every turn. He was getting quite

Page 195

annoyed with his people to think that after all the trouble he was going to they were taking no notice.

This, however, was not the only problem that exercised the mind of Moses at this time. He had become aware of what was missing form his own coronation and it rankled with him. He had realized by this time that the Death and Resurrection ceremony performed on Amenhotpet had been omitted from his crowning.

Although he was present at that ceremony it had taken him all of the passing years for the difference between that for Amenhotept and himself to register. To be a true king in Israel he felt that must be subjected to this special ceremony. He determined to find out how this was done so that he could have it implemented when he made the move. He studied all that there was on the subject but could find nothing. There was nothing to find in the places where he was searching. If only he had joined the Brotherhood before he became a royal he would have known that such secrets as he sought were never written down for all to see. They were passed on from particular person to particular person, generation to generation. Just as in the Priesthood. At no time more than three people being privy to the secret ceremonies. Not even the king himself knew. These secrets belonged exclusively to the High Priest and two others who were totally trustworthy. This trust was such that the persons concerned were expected to and were prepared to defend it to the death. He remembered that Amenhotept had reclined on the High Altar, where he was given a potion to drink, in the evening of the day before his coronation. He had been left in the temple overnight for some sort of purification rite and the ceremony of coronation was completed the next morning. Thutmose had had no over-night experience. He felt that he had been cheated of his right and determined to find out how it was accomplished. It was obvious to him that the priests knew the secrets but he also knew that he could not go to them directly. He would have to find some devious way of obtaining what he now believed had been deliberately held from him.

Thutmose’s (Moses’) experience in roaming the seemier parts of the city incognito had not had pleasant results for him but it had opened for him a source of information not obtainable otherwise. This knowledge thus gained he determined to use to his advantage in this

Page 196

quest for knowledge that he must have realized, from his researches, he had no right to. Again he donned his disguise as in Inspector of Workings and ventured out into the shadier sections of the city.

To avoid detection he would wander in the Palace Gardens of an evening and when no one was in sight he would slip out by a small gate designed for the admission of workmen. This was very seldom locked as the workmen were in and out at all different times of the day. What Moses was unaware of was that he was not exempt from surveillance by the minions of Heotept. To ensure the safety of the Monarch his own movements were monitored form day to day. This was Heotept aware of Moses’s nocturnal wanderings.

Eventually, after several clandestine forays he found a group of minor criminals who were prepared to do anything for a price. They were well aware that something was done in the coronation ceremony that made a human into a Horus. What it was they did not know anymore than anyone else in the country. They would like to know for it could be a source of illegal income. How illegal they did not care as long as it was income. They confirmed Thutmose’s suspicion that he had been deliberately kept from this part of the ceremony. During the conversation about the coronation of Thutmose one of them said. “You know, the general gossip in the city is that Thut is illegitimate. Although Amenhotept was of uncertain lineage and he got the full treatment. But, this fellow Thut is known to have been ‘taken out of the river’ of all things. What a story? Everyone knows how Nefertari lived, rest her soul. What better way to cover up what sh’d be’n up t’ than t’ say th’t she’d found the kid hidden in the reeds. If h’d really bin Heqa Kasut in those days he’d’ve not lived two seconds when Ahmose found out.

Nar, I’m sure th’t that poofter suspected that the kid w’s really Nefertari’s little ‘indiscretion’. That’s why the priests refused to give ‘im the full treatment. They’d never give an illegitimate a passage t’ paradise.”

Moses was appalled at this revelation but could not afford to make any comment for fear of revealing his true identity. It confirmed his suspicions that he had been deliberately denied the full ceremony at his coronation. He felt that he had been cheated somehow of his rightful dues. Whether king in Israel or Egypt to have this honour was essential. This knowledge he must have.

Page 197

They also confirmed Moses’ suspicion that the secrets would be found in the Great Temple at On. For at least two millennia, except for the Heqa Kasut interlude all the kings of Egypt had been crowned in that most ancient and sacred of temples. If the secrets were anywhere they would be there. Kamose had died full of years and been buried in the Valley of the Kings several years before Nefertari. Thutmose convinced himself that he should be declared king of All Egypt. Not even Nefertari had been granted this honour.

An administrator had been left in Kamose’s place so that although the government of Egypt was now virtually centred in Memphis, the ancient capital, no move had been made to declare the rulers in Memphis sovereigns of All Egypt. This also had caused Moses some concern regarding his status as Thutmose I. Without revealing his true identity to these underworld characters he was dealing with Moses contracted with them to obtain these secrets and reveal them to him. The price was very high for these characters well knew that the penalty for this crime would be an agonising death for anyone careless enough to get caught in such a project. The operation could expect to be very time consuming, as a conspiracy would have to be set up within the Temple organisation to even find how such secrets could be obtained. Then further time to set up the mechanism by which they could be stolen.

Moses’s final instructions to these criminals were. “You will be paid well. Here are five hundred talents of silver as a starter. When the secrets are delivered to me there will be another five hundred in gold. I want a progress report every three months. This is to be delivered on the first day of each third month from now to a person by the name of Mereret. He is the third ranking overseer of the king’s household staff. You will not give a report directly to him but submit to him a request for an audience with the king for six days hence. You will give the name of Abkan as the person requesting the audience. On the evening of the sixth day you will receive a visit from me in response to that request. Nothing will be put into writing. The report will be given verbally to me when I come to you as I have just outlined. Is that all clear?”

“Yes.” Was the reply. “But, what’s in ‘t for you? Y’re paying high. There must be a much bigger profit f’r you in it.”

Page 198

“That is entirely my business, Both what the information means to me and what I intend to do with it. All you have to do is fulfil your contract. Are you prepared to do so?”

“Yes. F’r that kind ‘f money we’ll do anythin’.”

“Only one condition, and this is not negotiable. If it is not adhered to the contract is cancelled immediately. There is to be no violence and no person is to be harmed. It may take a little longer that way but that is how it has to be. Do you accept this condition?”

To this the spokesman for the group said. “If that’s the way y’ want ‘t. Then that’s the way you’ll get it. It’ll most likely take some time longer that way and will cost more.”

“Cost more!” Exclaimed Moses. “You are getting a king’s ransom now. Do you want the Earth?”

“That’s wat y’re ask’n f’r.”

“Well then, include a financial statement in your quarterly report and if the price gets too high I will exercise my right to terminate the quest at any such time.”

“Fair enough.” Agreed the negotiator as he parted from Moses that evening.

The first report indicated no significant progress had been made and Moses resigned himself to a long wait for results. Several reports later it was made known to Moses that a young and ambitious priest of the Temple at On had been bribed to reveal how and when these secrets could be obtained. These secrets were known only to the High Priest, himself, the assistant High Priest and the Priestly secretary of the Temple. On the last day of every month the High Priest attended the Temple at noon with only two acolyte attendants, for special meditation with Horus. It was planned by the conspirators that two of them would take the place of the acolytes assisting him on this special occasion. When he was deeply into his meditation he would be forced to reveal enough of the recipe of the secret potion to be useful to them.

Moses was incensed at this news. He said. “Part is not enough. It is all or nothing. If you want to be paid you will get everything.”

“That’ll stretch our resources further. We must have more money.”

“Here is another two hundred in silver that I happen to have with me. Will that be sufficient?”

“That’ll do for now.” Was the response. “But what if we can get no further?”

Page 199

“Like I said. That is up to you to find a way. But, of course the no violence rule still applies. If you get no further then there will be no gold.”

“Very well. We’ll see wat we c’n do.”

On that note the conspirators parted to meet only once again in circumstances that altered all their lives dramatically, some tragically.

While this transaction was taking place Thutmose did some other clandestine patrols of the city. In the course of one of these he entered the very brick-yard that had once been the property of his father. There he saw an overseer taking to a worker with a whip, rather severely. Having had this treatment outlawed not many years previously he was incensed to see that it was still going on. He was already in an unsettled frame of mind from the clandestine enquiry that he had going and disappointed in the lack of Israeli response to his emigration plans. This was too much and his violent temper took charge of him. In a flash he snatched the whip from the overseer and laid it into him with all of his might. All reason was blinded by his all-consuming anger. The workmen tried to stop him from doing any real damage but to no avail. “Take that” He cried.

‘That and that. See how you like it to be whipped severely for no reason.” All cries for mercy were ignored and the deterioration of his victim went unnoticed till he fell lifeless at his feet.

The workmen were horrified.

“Who the hell a’ you?” Demanded a spokesman for the group gathered round the scene. “Look wot you‘ve done now.” Cried another. “You come in off the street and lay into someone.”

“Who gave you the right to come in here and knock us about?”

Came from another worker. “You’ll get back to your office, wherever that is and we will cop the shit for this.”

‘My God. What have I done?” Muttered Moses to himself as he looked down at his handiwork. He lifted his eyes from the corpse and saw that the crowd was about to seize him. Their leader called to him. “We’ll take you to the works manager. You’ll suffer for this. Not us.”

“Hold it. Right there.” Commanded Moses in his best Parade Ground voice. In a flash he recalled that the manager could well be his father. Then the fat would really be in the fire.

Page 200

At the sound of his command the men stopped in their tracks and Moses addressed them. “Nothing will happen. No one need know about this” Wat’d’y’mean. There’s ‘is body as large as life. The evidence, right there.”

“Use your head, Man. Hide it. Bury it in that sand blow just over there. That will not take long and it will never be found., if you do it right.”

The sadistic deceased had not been popular with the men and they were glad to see the last of him, without retribution to them, for his treatment of them so were very quick to take notice of the suggestion. Snatching a shovel each from nearby they set to work on the loose sandy ground and very soon had a pit deep enough in which to throw the body and quickly cover it up. They trampled over the surface to cover the signs of shoveling.

The men returned to their work and Moses to the Palace, by a circuitous route. No one would ever know about this episode. But his mind was not at rest.

He had exerted much will power over recent years to control these outbursts. He thought that he had succeeded, but this was a breakdown. His wife had been so supportive and would be sorely disappointed. He could not tell her about this. He must control himself at all costs. Nefertari was no longer his guide, having died only the year before.

At dinner that evening his wife noticed his unsettled state and remarked on it. Thut, Is there anything wrong? You do not look well, rather pale, Is there a crisis you should be sharing with me?

Any problems of your are also mine. It will be easier on both of us to share.”

Nothing, I tell you.” He declared. “There is nothing to worry about.”

“That is what the children used to say when they were young and did not want me to know what hey were up to” Moses rose so quickly at this that he bumped the edge of the table and made the platters rattle and upset the wine goblets, spilling their contents over the cloth. This agitated him still further. “Stop hounding me.” He cried. “It is nothing. I tell you. It is nothing.”

As he rushed from the room Hatshepsut shrugged her shoulders in exasperation at his immature behaviour. He had had bouts of

Page 201

sorrow over the death of Nefertari, but it was time that those were easing off. She was her mother also, perhaps men were more prone to long regrets than women. Her death had not been unexpected for three years prior she had contracted a wasting disease that saw her deteriorate from a well preserved late middle age to an ancient withered crone. At only 85 she died of advanced old age. This was not an uncommon but not a well known disease.

Hatshepsut was puzzled by this upsurge of grief. She felt that there must be something else troubling him but decided that he would be best left to his own devices for the evening. She did not pursue the subject with him.

Over the morning meal she again inquired as to what was troubling him. She again offered to help if she could do so.

“There’s nothing you can do.” He averred. “There is nothing anyone can do. I must do it myself.”

“About what?” Obviously, from his manner there must be something serious on his mind.

“Well. Memories, really. A conversation I overheard yesterday brought back memories I could well do without. I’ll be right later.”

“You do seem much better this morning. Quite settled really.”

“Yes, thank you. I feel much better now and I have it under control.”

“She was my mother, too, you know. What was it that you heard?”

‘Phew.’ Was the thought that rushed through his head. ‘I am in the clear on this track.’ What he said was. “I’d rather not bring it up again. It was too painful and there is no need for you to endure it also. Besides, it will not do me any good to repeat it.”

“I guess you are right at that. We will not speak of it again.”

So the conversation ended and they both went about their respective duties of the day as scheduled by their advisers.

Thutmose had got out of that one nicely, any closer to the truth and he would have been in real trouble. He had run out of ideas to keep the trouble at bay. Now no one would ever know. He fervently hoped.

At that last meeting with the criminals in his employ Moses had not been informed that to get to the High Priest in his meditation mode two priests guarding him had to be killed. Not intentionally, of course, but it did happen. This was fortunately soundless and the

Page 202

event did not disturb the High Priest. As he rose from his meditations and made to leave by the south door one of the conspirators, dressed in priestly robes, who had been posted there accosted the High Priest and demanded the secrets they had been asked to obtain. He refused to comply with their request saying that even if he were willing to do so he would need the cooperation of the other two for each person knew only a portion of the recipe.

Thus it needed the three of them to prepare it. They aimed a blow at his head to convince him that they meant business but his evasive movement meant that the blow glanced off his skull and landed on his shoulder. The High Priest, bleeding from hi serious wounds, then made to escape these two by getting out at the south door of the temple but they pursued him, caught him roughly, and again demanded the recipe. He refused them again giving the same explanation. They did not believe his statement and being ignorant thugs the more violent of the two swung his club so effectively that he stumbled and fell dead at their feet. Not knowing what to do about this development they wrapped the body in some sacking lying nearby and fled with it to a site far from the city where they buried it in a sandhill. From there they fled southward and, as far as the reporter to Moses knew, they were still running. He had no idea where to. He did know, however, that these villains could be connected to him so he needed the promised money to get himself out of the country.

By the time that this report was being given it had been discovered that the High Priest was missing. The young venal priest had been apprehended and was now before the Temple Court for trial and punishment. It was expected that he would be tortured and could break under pressure and lead the authorities to those who had bribed him. No one knew just where such an investigation could lead. The whole gang would have to escape the country. This would be very costly.

Although not yet aware of the search and actions in the Temple of ON Moses was beside himself with rage at the total disregard of his instructions and the obvious incompetence of these criminals.

There was very little chance that the crime could be traced to Moses for he had put plenty of barriers between the criminals and his role as Thutmose.

But in the heat of the moment of severe

Page 203

disappointment he overlooked this safety check. When he was able to speak he raged on and on. For the moment he was concerned that the crime could be traced to him and this scared the living daylights out of him. Thus it was abject fright, more than anything else, that motivated his diatribe.

“You totally stupid bastards. You lumps of camel dung. Alligator shit is of more use than you lot. You were given strict instructions that there was to be no violence, and what do I get? A dead High Priest and the surety of a man hunt throughout the whole country for the idiots who perpetrated the greatest crime of the century.” He raged. “Don’t expect me to pay anymore for a botched job. What you have already is money for nothing. Not only nothing but a National Manhunt. The hottest on record. Use what you still have of what I gave you to get away. I told you that force would never work. But, No. You ignorant bastards have blown it completely.

There will be even greater safeguards than before this stuff up. You would not have half a brain between the lot of you. You deserve everything that comes to you. I’m off. You had better follow the murderers as fast as you can.”

“Hey.” Interrupted the gang leader. “You got us int’ this. ‘Ts up to’ you to’ get ‘s out of ‘t. You’re on the Palace Staff. Y’ must h’ve some influence somewhere t’ get ‘s out ‘f the city, at least.”

“Me? NO way. I have no influence that would get such criminals as you off the hook. You have slain the High Priest of ON, of all places, and deserve everything that is thrown at you. You will get no help from me.”

“That’s w’t you think.” Was the quiet response to this outburst.

“What can you low life do? Empty threats will get you nowhere.”

“Not empty threats.” Moses was told quietly.

The very quiet confidence of that statement sapped some of Moses’ confidence. “What do you mean? Not empty threats.”

“Just what I said.” Was the cool reply. “We know who you are.

You gave us your name, remember. It is probably a false one. I am prepared to find that it is so. My people will find out who you really are and you will go down with us unless you find us a way out of this city and protection from pursuit. We’ll need the rest of the money promised to get away.”

All the rage taken out of him by this cool appraisal of the situation Moses was forced to think quickly while on his feet. His inherent

Page 204

timidity came to the fore. Through his mind flashed all the possibilities of what might happen in several different scenarios.

None of them was particularly pleasant. He rapidly came to a decision. This fellow must be placated for the time being till he had found a way out for himself that would leave them carrying the guilt. He said quietly to the gang leader. “You have a point. While not conceding that I have any responsibility to do so I will see what I can do for you. There must be something. Give me till tomorrow evening. You can not be caught up with before then. Here is the little gold I have with me at the moment. Remember, this was to be a progress report, not a total disaster that it has turned into by your own incompetence. At this time tomorrow I will meet you hare with a plan that hopefully, if you play it right, that will get you out of trouble at very little expense.”

“What about the gold? There’ll be no move without that.”

“You must have some left from the huge amount of silver you have already been given.”

“It’s all gone. What we did was very expensive.”

“I don’t believe you but I guess I will have to take your word for that.”

“You haven’t any choice.”

“Don’t worry then. That will be taken care of.”

“It had better be. Tomorrow without fail.”

“Without fail.” Acknowledged Moses as he left the hide out.

However, he had no intentions of ever carrying out this promise or of ever seeing this character again.

He turned and walked quickly away from the scene. Then, as he drew further away from his possible nemesis he moved more quickly. The night was still young so he hailed a passing taxi chariot and directed the driver to proceed to within the vicinity of the Palace. He paid the driver with the few loose small coins still in his pocket and alighted some five minutes walk from the walls of his sanctuary. At last he would be safe.

But NO. NO. NO. Panic hit him a severe blow in the stomach. He pulled up short as though he had been hit. That was the very last place where he would be safe. His enemies at court and the Temple were waiting a chance for the slightest whisper of gossip about him to give them an opportunity to depose him. There was sure to be gossip about this

Page 205

momentous event. He had not heard of it before he had left the palace that evening but it was sure to break out at any moment.

Nothing could be surer. He suspected that there were hidden intrigues against him in several places. Heotept had assured him that this was not so. He was chief of National Security and he knew of no plots against the king. He was solid on the throne. It was not that Moses did not trust Heo, his brother–in-law. He did not trust palace intriguers who were not within the jurisdiction of Heo. NO. He could no go back within the Palace walls.

In his panic he had forgotten that any accusers from this debacle would not recognise him as the king himself. He really had covered that aspect very well. They took him to be a spy of some sort.

Perhaps, a paid informer who had overstepped his limits. What a very different reaction there would have been from the gang leader if he had had any suspicion that he was dealing with the king himself. Thus did Moses argue with himself about his chances of survival from this tragic outcome. Still he had better err on the side of caution. If he disappeared it was more likely that he would be thought to have been murdered and disposed of, along with the High Priest than to be fleeing with his guilt. Thutmose was never a suspect for the murder of the High Priest of On. The young trainee priest who was discovered to be the traitor, who had let the conspirators into the Temple, was apprehended by the temple guardians in the course of time. His punishment was to have his genitals torn out while he was still alive. He was then wrapped in mummying cloth and entombed in a criminal’s grave. His mummy has been found with its mouth opened in a long drawn out scream as he was being incarcerated. Moses never did learn of this for he fled before it all happened.

As for Moses! What could he do? Where could he go?

He retreated from the garden gate of the Palace as he was about to enter, and wandered about the city in a quandary. He wandered toward the desert. The desolate sands beyond the sphinx had a distinctly unwelcome appearance. Again he approached the river.

Here he had several opportunities. He could throw himself into it and there would be an end to all his troubles. Peace forever would be his lot. He shrank from this action. Whether this was from weakness or strength I will leave for you to decide. His

Page 206

contemplation of the river led him to resolve that this would be his way of escape. Up the river may only get him into further strife.

There was the old Egypt. A country where he never did fit in. It would be even harder for him now with this load of guilt. It must be down river and out to sea. There were numerous possibilities there and so many countries in which to lose himself.

Another problem then hit him. He had no money. He had found enough trouble raising the bribe for the criminals. Kings do not normally carry money nor do they need it. Everything is provided by the State. He had only to gesture and some servant would be at hand to supply his wants.

If only Nefertari were alive how different it would be. She would be able and willing to help him. She would see that it was all put right.

With her gone to Paradise there could be no help from that quarter.

He was on his own with a vengeance. He had no idea that the price that Nefertari paid for his ascension to the throne was an unopened door for him to that very Paradise that she was now enjoying. Did she look down in sorrow at what her protégé had made of himself by his greed and cowardice? Moses was so well known as being so far removed from the royal Line that in the Archaeological records Thutmose I is declared to be Illegitimate, but no reason is given why such a person was allowed to ascend the ancient and sacred throne.

His immediate predecessor had also been ‘not of Royal lineage’ but was such a well known and popular figure, with a slight family connection the House of Kamose, that he was credited with legitimacy. He was crowned with full honours and buried in a Royal Tomb. Not so for one who was suspected, ever so faintly, of having Heqa Kasut connections.

Moses’ thoughts returned again to the ending of all things in the jaws of an alligator when the thought of big sister, Miriam, came to him. Why, of course, she would help him. It was so many years since he had needed to ask for help from her that he had almost forgotten about her as a prop. She had resources at her command that few could match. Surely she would be able to understand his desperate need. As the afternoon wore on he made his way to Miriam’s house.

He approached the outer courtyard as one familiar with it all, as indeed, he was, so often had he visited his sister over the past years, almost a half century of them. He boldly entered through the main

Page 207

gate and approached the main door. A servant came out to meet him.

Not being in his royal robes and on foot unaccompanied by any retinue he was not recognised. This servant had welcomed Thutmose to this door numerous times but in the dress of an Inspector of Workings he was an unknown visitor.

His noncommittal greeting was. “Yes, Sir. How can I help you?”

Realising that he was not recognised Moses took advantage of this and answered. “Is the Lady Miriam at home? I would like to speak with her.”

“Whom shall I say is calling?” Was not an unexpected response.

After a moment’s hesitation to think of a nom-de-plume at a moment’s notice Moses replied, in a possibly not very convincing tone. “Just inform her that a messenger from the king wishes to interview her.”

The servant, having no ability or authority to decide whether or not Moses was a legitimate visitor, ushered him into the house. “Please follow me, Sir.” From there they entered the house and Moses was instructed to.

“Please wait in this ante-room. I will notify the Lady Miriam that you are here, Sir.” The footsteps retreated down the passage and Moses heard a voice faintly in the distance saying. “A visitor for you, Madam. He says that he is a messenger from the king. Looks like and Egyptian inspector of some sort, to me, rather than a messenger. I wonder what the blighters are up to this time.”

“Don’t worry, Caleb. It may be an urgent message from Heo. He has sent them before, you know. I’ll go and see. Where is he?”

“In the little parlour, Ma’am. He looks familiar somehow. Must have been here before on another errand.”

“Thank you, Caleb. I’ll go to him. I’ve warned you before about that royal address. You could get us both into trouble.”

“Sorry, My Lady.” Was said without any sign of remorse on his ancient visage.

Moses was pacing to and fro in the room when he heard her footsteps approaching. He was gazing out of the window as she entered. She said. “Yes. Can I help you?”

He turned and she recognised him immediately, even in his disguise.

She exclaimed in surprise. “Why Moses, What on Earth are you

Page 208

doing here? And in that get up too. Is this some fancy dress affair?

Pardon me for not kneeling before you, your Majesty. You should have given me proper notice and I would have. Even in your royal robes it is difficult enough to kneel to my young brother. When you come dressed as a minor palace official it is impossible.”

By this time the worried look on his face registered with her. She stopped her ribbing and putting her hand to her mouth said. “Oh. I am so sorry. There is something terribly wrong. Isn’t there?”

“Yes, there is. I am responsible for the death of a man and I am in great trouble.”

Again a smile crossed her face. “Pardon my mirth, my brother.

But, if I recollect it aright you have been responsible for the deaths of a great many men. Many in the military campaigns you have been involved in. Not so many, but still quite a few, as the result of judgements made in the course of your reign. What is so different about this one?”

“But, but. This one is murder. That is entirely different. In a fit of uncontrolled rage I flogged a man to death. I don’t know what to do about it.” As he said this he wrung his hands in perplexion.

“Come now. You are over wrought. You must have it all wrong.”

“I haven’t, I tell you. I know what has happened.”

“Then tell me all about it. We will then see how it sounds to a person not personally involved. Your quick temper always was a problem. I thought that you would be over that now that you have full authority over the whole realm.”

Moses told her all that had happened with the Egyptian overseer when he taken to him in a rage. He did not have the guts to tell her the real truth. He told the story as though it has just happened that morning, not that it had occurred several months previously.

Miriam’s reaction to this tale was certainly not what he had expected. It was obvious that she was doing her best to suppress her mirth at the narration. “Oh! My little brother.” She at last responded. “What is all the fuss about? So you accidentally killed an overseer of serfs. For that is what our people have been reduced to. If anyone realises that, you should. He was one step better than a serf, al though an Egyptian national. Just a common labourer.

You are the KING. The only ones who could accuse you are other common labourers. What weight could their word have against that of the king?”

Page 209

“That is not the point. The Temple Priests and some of the Palace crowd are looking for an excuse to get me. They would welcome this scandal as an opportunity to turn me out.”

“What proof could they possibly have that is any more than malicious gossip? Stand up to them. Pull rank against them. They can not prove anything. Or can they?”

She had a niggling doubt about the veracity of his claims.

“No! No! I’ll have to get out of the country before they catch up with me. They’ll have me deposed, destroyed or killed in reprisal” “What nonsense. The courtiers don’t know your real origins. Some might suspect it but nothing can be proved. For more than fifty years you have been accepted as the son of Nefertari. That is the reason for you being king. It has gone on too long now for anyone to break that down.”

“That has nothing to do with it. There is a group out to remove me.

It is encouraged by the Priests, who claim that I have encouraged heresy. It is true that I have not cracked down on a belief in a God supreme to all others and not just the head of a family as Horus is, but I have not suppressed the traditional religions either. This is not good enough for them. They encourage those who would find an excuse to have me deposed and punished by death, if possible. This would clear the way for someone more controllable by them.”

“You know that even if they do succeed in removing you Mosesa would rightfully succeed you. He is the son of Hatshepsut who is the daughter of Nefertari, the daughter of Kamose. There seems no advantage to the Temple to have Mosesa in your place.”

“If I get out of here now before they find out what I have done and remove me then Mosesa can carry on from where I have left off.”

“He wont, you know. He is not so interested in the fate of our people as you are.”

“He might not be but his mother is sympathetic.”

“That’s all you know.” From Miriam set Moses back somewhat.

“What do you mean? She is a personal friend of yours. You two are as thick as thieves.”

“How little you know. You men see only what is immediately under your noses, and often not even then. We are friendly but underneath she really only tolerates me because I am the wife of Heotept, a powerful government official and the cousin of her late

Page 210

mother. If it were not for that she would barely give me the time of day.”

“All the better reason that I should get out.”

“It is not. With you on the throne there is a chance of our people getting out and to the Promised Land in the near future. Very little with your son in your place and his mother guiding him. A couple of labourers know about what happened with the overseer, no one else? Who can possibly take their word against that of the KING? Running away will only cause you to be suspected. Staying and fighting it off will prove your innocence.”

Moses was still not prepared to tell his sister the truth. If he had she might have taken a different attitude to the whole episode.

“I told you. It is not a matter of their word against mine. It needs only a whisper of gossip and my enemies will expand it into a strong case against me. They will listen to no arguments in my favour.”

“Oh. Stop worrying over nothing and get back to the Palace before a search party is sent out to find you. Seeing you in that getup almost anything can be suspected of you. Why are you dressed like that, anyway?”

“I have made some excursions into the city incognito to find out for myself what the feelings of the people really are. I have not been entirely satisfied with the accuracy of the reports I have been getting.”

“Don’t you trust Heo?” “Oh. I do. Implicitly. But, I suspect that his underlings are not as honest or reliable as he is.”

“You’ve a nasty suspicious mind, My Brother. If you have any suspicions you should tell Heo and he would deal with it. Besides, if there were any likelihood of trouble do you think that Heo would not tell me?”

“He should not discuss affairs of State with anyone. Especially those for whom he has a personal responsibility.”

“I am not ‘anyone’. I am his wife and sister to the king.”

“There is that, I suppose. But that is now beside the point. I must get away.”

“NO! Go back to the palace and tough it out. Don’t let the gossip of a couple of labourers throw you. Or is there something else that you are not letting me about?”

Page 211

This disturbed Moses’ façade that he had carefully built since making his decision to run. He shouted his reply to this challenge

by Miriam.

“YOU still don’t understand. Do you? It is almost certain death for me to return to the Palace. If not today, then not many days hence.

Believe me. It is far better that I disappear.” This last sentence was said in a much calmer tone.

This did not entirely allay Miriam’s suspicions.

“You are a wimp, Moses. You are not the Joshua that we first named you. Stay and fight it through. You will be fully supported by all of us, particularly Heo.” “NO! I daren’t. Don’t try to make me go back, please. Help me to get away. Just let me have some gold and I’ll get myself away.

There are boats going up and down the river. I should be able to get to Succouth and from there, Nun will surely help me to get way on a Phoenician trader. I’ll get clear away on one of those.”

“You can’t do that.

“Why not?”

“Because, my little brother, your big brother, Nun, is now in this city.”

“What! Here in Memphis?”

“Yes. Right here. He called here only yesterday. He expects to be here for few days. He has business here for a while. Go back to the Palace and forget this foolishness.”

“No. I can’t go back there. Neither will it be any good for me to be still here when Heo gets home.”

“He’s your brother-in-law. Don’t you trust him?”

“It is not a matter of trust. It would be his duty to The Crown to turn me in.”

Miriam could not help laughing at this. “But YOU are the Crown.

How can he turn you in to yourself? You have already done that and pronounced judgement and exiled yourself. Really, Moses, it would be so very funny if it were not so tragic.”

Page 212

“Women! They never understand the real issues of life. I’ll get down to the docks and see Nun myself. He will be in his office at this time of the day.”

Miriam said not another word. She turned on her heel and retreated to her private room and left Moses pacing the room in agitation not knowing what she was about to do. When she returned she put into his hand a small leather bag, saying. “There is some money in there.

About fifty pieces of gold. That should take you a fair way, including the bribes you will have to pay to get anywhere. Now get out of here. You sicken me. I will not send you with God’s blessing. You are turning your back on HIM” “But…but.”

“Oh. Get out.”

Miriam watched him stumble across the courtyard till he had left the property. She then retreated to her own room. She stamped her feet in anger, sank to the nearest couch and cried her heart out. “O, God, give me strength.” Was the cry that came from the deepest recesses of her soul.

Page 213

"THE STORY OF THE PHARAOH TOMB MAKERS" John Rower Wiederfield and Nicolson LONDON ISBN 1297785001 AMENHOTEPT founded the village of the Tomb Makers at THEBES. His shrine is at the heart of the temples.

Originally a group of houses which he developed.

Thutmose I, possibly Moses, built a wall around the village.

Temple of Hatshepsut was built by Thutmose II. Amenhotept married Nefertari the sister of Ahmose.

(Rameses the Great had a daughter named Nefertari.

This has led to some confusion when assessing the date of the Exodus) "THE SPLENDOUR THAT WAS EGYPT" Margaret Murray In the Sidgwick and Jackson "Great Civilization" series.

At Martin's Press NEW YORK Middle Kingdom and other sections……………

Splendour of the stone buildings and the invention and use of glass during the 15th century BC. The era of the Exodus "THE BOAT BENEATH THE PYRAMID" Nancy Jenkins Thames and Hudson Ltd. LONDON 1.80 No Library number.

River vessels of a hundred feet and more in length and the technology for their construction and maintenance were well known in Egypt centuries before Moses and the EXODUS. "AGES IN CHAOS" Vol I Immanuel Velikovsky Sidgwick and Jackson LONDON 1,53 No Library number.

Contemporary maps of Egypt and Eastern Mediterranean Lands.

Sets Exodus time circa 1700 BC. There are some glaring faults in this assessment,

Page 214

"THE EXODUS ENIGMA" Guild Publishing LONDON

Ian Wilson 1985 No Library number

Pg. 83 "It is plausible, then, that the harsh oppression of Biblical Israelites, immediatley preceding the Biblical Exodus, took place in the reign of Hatshepsut and Thutmose III rather than in the reign of Rameses II." Elsewhere in that same chapter it is pointed out that Hatshepsut was part of the Egyptian scene from the time of Thutmose I. Was actually the wife of Thutmose I and the mother of Thutmose II. Thutmose III was the son of Thutmose II to a concubine. Hatshepsut reigned in her own right as Queen after the untimely death of Thutmose II until Thutmose III was of age. Then retained joint rights till her own death.

Pg. 115 .... Wilson attributes the plagues to the eruption of Thera which occurred between 1500 and 1450 BC. (This is rather stretching the facts.)

"WORLD HISTORY" Rodney Castleden Parragon LONDON 1994 No Library number Thutmose I of Egypt was deposed and succeeded by his illegitimate son who reigned with his half sister, wife and mother, Hatshepsut.

Thut II dies young and is succeeded by his infant 'nephew'.

Hatshepsut reigns in her own right until Thut III is of age then as co-ruler till her death.

Page 215

CHAPTER XIII HURRIED FLIGHT Moses’ mind was in turmoil as he made his way to the docks.

Perhaps he should have taken Miriam’s advice and spoken to Heo. He would know of any repercussions that had arisen from the murder of the High Priest. He certainly did have his finger on the pulse of the Nation. If anything was happening he was the one to know about it. He need not have gone back to the Palace to face any danger there. An interview in this home could have led to a decision and action taken then. How will Miriam explain to Heo the missing money? It was probably her own and needed no explanation. What if Nun refuses to help? Where could he go then? He was disappointed by Miriam’s attitude to his dilemma. He was sure that she would be more sympathetic. She was very strong on the return to Caanan. She had always been the mover and shaker in that project with no real help from him or anyone else. No doubt she would be very upset about that. Can’t be helped now. He could not go back. If he lost his life over this the whole Exodus was shot anyway.

So full of self pity was Moses that before he realised it he had arrived a Nun’s Port Office. He sidled into the outer office and asked when the next ship was due to sail up river, or down river.

Preferably down river, as long as it was moving away from Memphis. He then asked to speak to Captain Nun. Again, he was not recognised by the receptionist who asked him to wait in the outer office till the captain was available.

Eventually Nun came into the room and said. “Yes, Sir. What can I do for you?”

Moses was not facing him but was gazing out of the window at the busy docks where goods were being loaded and unloaded. As he turned to face his older brother it was not immediately obvious who he was. However, it did not take Nun many moments to recognise his visitor. As this knowledge dawned on him he exclaimed. “Hey, Man. What are you doing here in that get up? On a secret mission

Page 216

of some sort. Or is it a fancy dress party you are going to and called in to see big brother on the way? You are Moses, aren’t you?

Thutmose, rather, the first of his line.”

“Shush, not so loud. Someone will recognise that name. I must speak to you alone. Moses, is OK. That name will have been forgotten by this and will not connect with me as I am now.” As he said this he nodded his head and looked fertilely around to see who might have heard his brother’s outburst in greeting.

“Why the secrecy? Is this some game you are playing?”

“No. Can I see you alone?”

“Yes, of course, if you insist. Come into my office. We won’t be disturbed there.”

When they were settled into a coupe of easy chairs in the office Moses said. “I was on a secret investigation that went wrong. I am in deep trouble.”

“Why come to me. What could I possibly do to help the king?”

“GET ME OUT OF THE COUNTRY.” “You have to be joking. What are you really on about?”

“What I said. I must get away.”

“Why the urgency and why ask me? You have a whole royal fleet at your command. Just order a ship and there you are.”

“Stop joking, this is serious.”

“You’re the joker. Come on. Is this some sort of test?”

“No. It isn’t and if you listen I’ll tell you why I am here.”

“O.K. Go ahead. This will have to be good.”

“You always were inclined to laugh at me. This is no laughing matter. It is a matter of life and death, for me that is.”

“Come off it, Moses, you always were inclined to dramatize everything. Nothing is ever as bad as it seems at first look. Also, look at what you are wearing, you certainly seem to be playing games again.”

“Will you listen to me? I am not playing games. I am deadly serious.”

“Why the get up then of a building inspector or some such civil servant?”

“Because this is, or was, a disguise.”

“Then you are playing games.”

“I suppose I was in a way but it has blown up in my face and my life is now in danger if I stay in this country.”

Page 217

“Right, then. You had better get it off your chest. I won’t say another word till you have finished.”

“Thank you.” Then Moses proceeded to tell Nun his version of the episode in the brickyard as though it had happened only a few hours ago and not several months previously. Nun sat quietly doing his best to keep a straight face at what he considered to be a comical situation. Here was the king of Lower Egypt in mad panic because he had accidentally caused the death of an overseer of common labourers. It had to be the funniest thing he had heard for years. If he wanted to use this tale as an after dinner joke he would have to change the names and dates. But it was a good foundation to work from.

Moses came to the end of his narrative and was so engrossed in the seriousness of his situation that he did not notice the faint smile that flitted across the face of Nun. He concluded his tale with. “So. If I could get passage on a ship of yours there would be no questions asked and I could get out of the country. I can pay for my passage.”

“But, you have just told me, if I heard it right, that Miriam gave you that bag of gold so you are paying with someone else’s money.”

“That’s true, I suppose but I was not game to go back to the Palace to get any. I had no option. Would you help me?”

“I really don’t think that I should. You should go back to the Palace and tough it out. You might find the backbone that you have never had much of. What is a labourer’s word against that of the King?

No labourer in his right mind would even dream of accusing the king of anything. How would he know who you are anyway?

Weren’t you in that silly get up when it happened?”

“Yes, I was.”

“There you are then. Just like I said. Who could possibly know it was you.”

“You don’t understand any more than Miriam did. Neither of you know what it has been like since Nefertari died.”

“So that’s the problem. Mummy is gone and the little fellow can not cut it on his own.”

“No need to take that attitude.”

“That’s the real reason behind all this. Go back to the palace. Pull rank on anyone that makes any fuss. Have a few dissenters exiled or executed to teach the rest a lesson. How long is it since you terminated that overseer? He probably deserved it; they are a

Page 218

sadistic bunch, at the best of times. They often get rather big headed and need bringing down a peg or two. You have probably done the place a service actually and should get a medal for it. Your brotherin-law and wife’s cousin is head of National Security. Go to him.

He’ll sort it out. He is able to see that anything that might come up can be still born. You amaze me. Really you do. Hundreds have been killed in battle by you and your armies. Many criminals have been sentenced to death by you and your judges and you run scared over an overseer, who will never be missed by anyone, least of all by the workers he probably persecuted. Are you telling me the truth?”

“Of course. War is different. Men expect to die in battle. The execution of criminals is justice in action. What I did was murder and there is no justification for that. That is a crime. The priests of ON wield the real power in this country. They are looking for an opportunity to get rid of me and if there is any investigation of a complaint they will blow it up to take advantage of it. They would have me executed or deposed and put Mosesa in my place believing that he would be more amenable to their policies.”

“Even that is not enough. There is much more to this than you are admitting. It strikes me as a cover story for something much worse.

What did you really do?”

“I can’t tell you.”

“So. The overseer is just a cover story.”

“That’s not what I said.”

“Not in so many words but it is so bad that you can not tell me. This overseer’s death was a long time ago, wasn’t it? It is now past history but that is your excuse for running. Whatever you did you were in that silly gear so no one will ever recognise you. No matter what is said you weren’t there. Simple.”

“You make it sound so easy.”

“It is, believe me. This sort of thing is happening every day. How many wanted criminals disappear every year and are never found?

You would never know for no one will tell you about the ones that get away. They do not all flee the country. Most of them are amongst us still. We know about them on the waterways.”

“You will help me to get away then, how to disappear.”

“That is not what I said. To do so would be against my better judgement. We were hoping for great things from you, especially

Page 219

our sister, Miriam. She will be bitterly disappointed. Some of our people have already left the country. Only a trickle but this could improve with more encouragement from you. Without you it will die and we will have to start all over again.”

“If I am taken out the same thing will happen so my going now will make very little difference.”

“Miriam is sure that Hatshepsut is not in favour of our people moving out. Even my wife is against me.”

“Have you any idea of where you want to go?”

“I have completed a ‘History of the Children of Israel’ and left with Miriam some time ago. It may be of some use to the people in the future but I will be far from here. If you can get me out I’d like to go with you but you must not know where I am. I have no idea myself yet.”

“I have. Go back to the Palace and tough it out. There has been no news on the waterfront that could possibly lead to you. This is where the gossip comes to and often grows. Or, is what you have done too new and terrible to have got out yet? Get back now and you will be ahead of any news and be able to discount it.”

“I can not take the risk.”

“You are determined to go no matter what I say about it.”

“Yes. Will you help me? If not, I am not sure what I shall do.

Probably hire a boat or a camel or something to get away on.”

“Since you are determined to run away from your responsibilities then I guess I haven’t any other choice than to help you, in the hope perhaps, that we can get you back before it is too late if you do change your mind. You will be helpless on your own. You would not last two days in the real world. You have never really lived in it.

There is a ship here due to go upriver in another hour or so. Its first port of call is Tajoy. From there you could hire a camel or donkey to get you across country to Myosss Noomos on the western shore of the Gulf of Sweis. My wife’s people have a branch office there.

I will give you a letter of introduction to the manager. He will aid you in getting transport across the gulf to the Sinai region and you can disappear there without a lot of trouble.”

“Many thanks. You are saving my life. What is the fare to Tajoy?”

“I’m not saving your life, I believe I am helping you to lose it. Keep your gold you will need all that you have to get yourself started in a new career. Come. I will show you to your ship.”

Page 220

“Thank you again. I shall be eternally grateful.”

“Don’t be. I should be packing you off back to the Palace, even screaming and kicking. Probably kick myself all night for not having done so. Most likely get kicked severely by Miriam for doing this.”

With that Moses followed Nun out to the docks where a large river trader was readying to sail. The crew had finished stowing the cargo and were trimming the ship ready to cast off and follow the wind. The gangplank was still connected to the dock for the captain had not yet received all of his paper work. Nun stepped lively along the plank beckoning for Moses to follow him. He hoped that no one would recognise him. How could they? None of the people hanging about the dock expected the king to visit. They could not recognise the king in the garb of a minor government official. As in all ages such people were not highly regarded and considered to be best ignored by ordinary mortals.

Nun strode purposefully up to the captain and introduced Moses as his young brother, as indeed he was, and said. “There is a family problem arisen suddenly in Tajoy and my brother has been asked to attend to it. I would appreciate it if you would drop him off there when you berth. Do not wait for his return to you, as he will return here on another ship when his business there is finished. His fare will be taken care of in the office. I’m sorry to spring this on you so suddenly but it was only an hour or so ago that I learned of the problem and the need for him to travel.”

“No problem there, Sir. Can always find room for another on a ship.

He will be safely deposited and is will make no difference to our schedule.”

“Thank you, Khein. Safe journey. And to Moses. “May GOD go with you. I can’t think why.”

Nun turned quickly on his heel, departed the ship and strode along the dock back to his office. The crew warped the ship form the dock, set the sail to the wind and ran before it against the sluggish current. The kept close to the bank as there the current has the least force.

That evening a visitor was announced by Miriam’s house servant.

Nun was escorted into the main room of the house. Heo was at home and Miriam was obviously upset. Heo was trying to comfort

Page 221

her but having little success. What she was trying to say between sobs did not seem to make sense to the listeners. He looked up with relief when Nun was announced.

“Ho, Brother.” He greeted Nun. “Perhaps you might be able to make sense out of what your sister is crying about. What with weeping while she is trying to tell me I have not been able to make head or tail of it. It is not like her. There must be something terribly wrong for her to take on so. There has been very serious trouble at the Palace this evening and I have plenty on my mind trying to make sense of that without having to face more trouble when I return home.” Another burst of weeping from Miriam.

“See what I mean.”

“There is trouble right enough. Miriam, you have always been so strong, the rock that most of us cling to when in trouble. Don’t let us down now. I did my best to stop him but he would go regardless.”

“Who would go?” Asked Heo with some suspicion of what the answer would be. It could possibly be related to the trouble he had had that afternoon at the Palace.

Nun told him of his experience with Moses that afternoon and where he was expected to be at the very moment.

“So, that is what happened to that fellow. But that was months ago.

He was good riddance anyhow. He is not the first and I doubt if he would be the last. It doesn’t happen often but they are no great loss in general. What has it to do with today? Hmm. I wonder?”

“What fellow?” Asked Nun, hoping to get Heo’s version of the episode. It could be more accurate than the one Moses presented him with. If anyone knew about it, Heo would.

“Oh. An overseer disappeared about, ah, two months, or so, ago. It was not reported so it could have happened some time before that.

No one regretted his passing. He was not liked by even his own colleagues for his unnecessary bullying ways. He was a minor tyrant and was suspected of taking bribes for almost anything. It is believed that his workmates terminated him. No one was sorry at his parting. The only sign that he was no longer was that he did not turn up for his pay. Then it took ages for any move to be made to locate him. No one knew anything, neither was anyone interested in finding out. Rumour had it that he had merely absconded when he realised that we were closing in on him, for crimes committed

Page 222

outside of his duties. So. Moses claims to have ‘done him in’.

Interesting that. Why get all thingy about it now, so far down the track?”

“I knew it was storm about nothing, or a cover up for some thing much more serious.” Responded Nun. “If only he could have waited and spoken to you. Well. It’s done now.”

Miriam said. “I also tried to get him to wait till Heo came home, but he would have none of it.”

“I’m surprised that he ran off like that. I thought that he trusted my judgement. He must know that one of my major duties is the safety of his person. It is to him that I am responsible. You are right, Nun, it has to be something more important than that.

“He has been wandering the streets in disguise for some months now. Has had some thing on his mind that he has refused to share with anyone. My men have seen him sneaking out of the little garden gate giving access to the grounds for workmen. He went out last night and they tracked him for quite a distance until he went into a rather seedy place. They did not see him come out. He must have escaped through a back entrance unknown to my men. He was not observed reentering the gate. We have been worried that he may have come to serious harm. At least we now know that he is alive and running.

“He declared to me.” Put in Miriam. “That he does trust Heo implicitly but had grave doubt about some others in government.

The Temple crowd seemed to be his greatest fear. He was terrified that they would use any excuse to get rid of him.”

“It is the High Priest that we are having trouble with right now.

That makes it very interesting.” Said Heo. “What we must do is try to get him back. Running away only proves his guilt, if there is any.

Do you think that is possible, Nun?” “What guilt? No. Let that pass. My ship will arrive at Tajoy early in the morning of the day after tomorrow. A good rider on a swift horse will get there before that and be able to intercept it. With the right information to him we may get him to return with the messenger. I can authorise a passage for him on a ship or another horse can be hired.”

“That could be done. But discreetly.”

“How discreet will it need to be?”

Page 223

“No one knows yet that Thutmose is not at the palace. I have been able to keep the lid on that. However, there are some urgent requests to see him and Hatshepsut is evasive as though she knows some things she is not prepared to divulge. Mosesa claims that his father never tells him anything so how could he be expected to know anything. Now I know where he is, but does that do me any good?

Much harm if I am not very careful.”

“Have you someone who could ride to Tajoy by tomorrow night?”

“Yes. I do have several I could trust with such a mission. They will do anything and ask no questions. Even if they knew it was the king they were sent to bring back no one would ever know. We will take precautions though. If we had a letter addressed to him personally but without official seals he might read it and take notice of it.” He then moved over to his writing desk, picked up a piece of papyrus and a brush. After writing swiftly for a few moments he called.

“Malakal” to one of the servants. Take this note to my office. You will find someone still there. Hand this to him and say that I require immediate action. He will know that that means, and return here quickly.”

“Yes, Sir.” Was the response with a salute that revealed his military origins.

“How shall we word this note?” Asked Nun. “If it appears to be official he will probably take fright at it. Yet we need some kind of official verification of what Heo has said. Surely he can take Heo’s word.”

Miriam, who had brightened up at this conversation, cut in with.

“Heo must have some input and somewhere have his official seal to show that the letter does come from him.”

Heo had the solution. He returned to his desk and began to write.

He assured Moses, if he ever read the letter that the person terminated never was and never would be attributed to him. He then asked Miriam to add her word of appeal to it. Finally he placed his personal seal at the end of the letter to confirm that it was from him and not his office. All read what he had written and were pleased with what they saw.

“I don’t know how to thank the two of you for all this. I do hope that he gets the letter and takes notice of it.”

“No thanks due, My Darling.” Was Heo’s response. “The safety of the king is my bounden duty and his being your brother makes the

Page 224

task doubly important to me. If it is at all possible to get him back unharmed and on his throne again I shall do so. It is my duty to do so. When and if he gets back there will be no more of these romantic incognito jaunts into the city. I shall see to that. He was warned several times about the dangers of roaming the city unaccompanied but he would not listen. He could not be told so directly as we were not supposed to know about them. He is lucky that someone did not take advantage of him and terminate him.”

“He was always rather headstrong.” Put in Miriam.

Shortly after midnight a visitor was announced and Heo’s messenger was ushered into the room. He was acquainted with his mission. As Heo had predicted, he asked no questions. He repeated his instructions, saluted his commander, mounted his horse and rode away. With a strong North wind blowing and eight hours start the ship would be hard to overtake. In his saddlebag he had an official pass that would give him priority at every staging point of the journey. Those stages were at twenty-five mile intervals. Here his tired horse could be exchanged for a fresh one and the rider could take a short spell before pressing on further.

So the night wore on. As the next day dawned the blazing sun rose across the eastern desert over the left shoulder of the rider as he pressed onward. He hoped to reach Beni Hakon before the ‘Flying Swan’. It was not planned that the ship would pull in there but the messenger planned that if he could arrive before the ship he would hire a ferry to take him out to it in the stream. His pass would allow him to board and he would take his message to Moses. Hopefully he would heed it and return with him.

As the sun reached its zenith Haito, riding at a gallop, entered the outskirts of the town nestling against the bank of the Nile. Beyond the masts of the ships tied up at the wharf he noticed one breasting the current under a full sail. He was too far away to make out for certain its flag. The streets of the town were crowded with carts of vendors and pedestrians all mixed up together as they hurried about their business for the day. The cry of ‘Make way for the King’s messenger’ reduced his delay in getting to the docks. On arrival he inquired about the ship he had seen leaving. After several attempts he discovered that it was the very ship he had hoped to intercept.

However, he could get to takers to ferry him out to it. It was

Page 225

claimed that it was moving too well to be overtaken by a ferry being pulled against the current.

On making further inquiries Haito learned that a government official of some sort had left the ship the moment it berthed and had hurried away. The ship had stayed no longer than to let the man off. His informers wondered what sort of trouble there was in the city to require such an emergency visit from an official. Haito could get no more information about this person. No one had seen in which direction he walked. Being a government official no one was very interested in getting too close to him so no one saw where he went or whether he hired an animal for transport.

Haito could go no further without a short rest. He needed time to decide what to do about this new development. Why would his quarry get off here? It was not that far to Tajoy from Beni Hakon that to travel by donkey rather than by boat would save very little time. He must be still in the town. He had no idea what his quarry looked like so searching for him in this town, small as it was, would be pointless. He could not accost every one he saw dressed as a government official. There would no doubt be other officials on some jaunt or another. Every livery stable would have someone hiring an animal early in the morning. That would get him nowhere also. Then again the man who disembarked may not be his quarry.

He had no option than to take his rest and then push on to Tajoy.

There he would find what had happened and be able to take an accurate report back to his master. Consequently, he sought out an inn where he could have a short sleep and change his horse for the last stage of his journey.

His first call at Tajoy as the dawn was breaking over the town was to the dock area where he inquired of the ship he was seeking. It had not yet arrived so he stabled his horse and arranged for accommodation for two in case he succeeded in getting his man. He would not be able to recognise his quarry as he had only a name to go by. He was allowed to watch from the dockside tower so as to have early knowledge of the ship’s arrival. From there he had a panoramic view of the river and its shipping. Boats going up river on the eastern and western banks and others going down river on the midstream current. Some were just setting out on their journeys and others were making in to the wharves. At last he saw what appeared

Page 226

to be Flying Swan ensign. He paid closer attention to this ship and sure enough, it was the ship he was looking for.

He hurried down from the tower to meet the ship as it berthed. The sailors had hardly finished mooring the boat when Haito requested permission to come aboard. He presented his credentials as a ‘King’s messenger’ and quickly gained admittance to the deck where he was led to the captain. He inquired of the whereabouts of Moses Ben Amram, brother of the owner. It was essential that he interview him before he left the ship.

“I’m very sorry, Sir.” Responded the captain. “You are out of luck.

The person you seek is not on this ship.”

“He was known to board in Memphis and his stated destination is this town.” Even as he asked the question, “Where is he then?” He knew what the answer would be. He must have been the person seen leaving the ship at Beni Hakon. Further questioning revealed to him what had occurred.

As the ship approached Beni Hakon Moses had asked to be off loaded there. The reason he gave was that his trip was urgent and if he could obtain a fast horse there he would be able to get to Tajoy before the ship. This seemed to the captain to be a very reasonable option and as Moses was prepared to compensate him for the lost time involved in a quick call in to that town he acceded to his request. He expected that Moses would be somewhere in Tajoy.

As this seemed a reasonable assumption Haito took leave of the ship and prepared to search the town for Moses. He doubted if he would have been able to hire a fast horse, as he did not have with him the credentials that Haito had at his command. He would most likely get a donkey, in which case, he would have not yet arrived. This gave Haito the chance to scour the town for him. This he did but without success. Most of the day was taken up with inquiring at lodging houses for any new tenants. In each one he visited he left the name of Joshua Ben Amram expecting that Moses may have reverted to his first given name. He gave Moses as an alternative.

He left also the description given him by Heo when he left Memphis on this mission.

The next morning, after a refreshing sleep and with no news of his quarry, Haito began his return journey a disappointed man. He very seldom failed in any mission he was sent on so that a failure such as this preyed heavily on his mind.

Page 227

He was not to know that he had been searching in the wrong town.

Moses had not continued on to Tajoy as he had stated when he left the ship at Beni Hakon. He knew of a little used track that led from this town to the little fishing village of Ailea on the shore about a hundred miles north of Myos Noomos. Here he expected that he would be able to hire a vessel to take him across the water to the Sinai. Here he would be able to disappear altogether and be free from pursuit.

Moses’ imperious bearing, his official looking clothing and his bag of gold obtained for him everything that he needed. He left the town with a camel bearing trading goods and a guide to see him safely to the coast. A stay of a few days in Ailea enabled him to hire a boat to take him across the water. While here he had the sense to sell the camel and the trading goods that it carried. This replenished his cash resources for further flight. On the Eastern Shore of the gulf he made landfall at a tiny village, the twin of Ailea, but whose name has been lost in antiquity. From here he joined a camel train of traders going inland. Their destination was Serabet-el-Kadem, the commercial capital of the Sinai region. He felt that he could disappear in the crowds that inhabited this city. On arriving in the city Moses sought and arranged long term accommodation for himself. He set himself up as a freelance scribe. These people were in great demand in such a city in those days as most of the population was illiterate. Even successful traders were often not able to read or write their bills of sale or ladings. Most employed scribes to do all their paper work for them. Moses declined to be employed. As a freelance operator he was freer to disappear among the population. Also he would be able to move on at a moment’s notice if he position became endangered. He had no intention of returning to Egypt. He might have been the world’s greatest wimp but he was not stupid.

Four days after leaving Memphis Haito returned to the home of Heotept to report the failure of his mission. He offered to resign his commission in retribution for this but Heo flatly refused to hear of it. In his view it was certainly not the fault of Haito that the pursuit had failed. He had done all that was possible. Moses had been astute enough to slip away somewhere where he could not be easily found. No one at this stage had any idea that Moses had gone overland from Beni Hakon. It was assumed that he had slipped

Page 228

away from Tajoy. Search was made in the region between there and the coast and across the gulf in the Sinai. Here a lead appeared but it fizzled out and as no further news came in the search was abandoned.

By this time it was well known that the king was no longer in the palace and pressure came from the hierarchy there to do something about it.

Miriam poured out her disappointment into her diary. She wrote; ‘Oh. My brother, why have you deserted us? We are all so sadly disappointed. Your flight has been for nothing. It was a perceived but not real danger to yourself that drove you. In official circles you are in no way connected with that very much-unloved overseer who disappeared so long ago. There was nothing for you to run away from. As far as anyone knows you have just mysteriously disappeared. All sorts of rumours are going about as to what has happened to you. These range from your having gone mad and wandered off into the desert to you having been captured by an enemy and held to ransom. The Libyans are getting most of the blame for this last one, although some gossips are blaming some fanatical faction in Caanan. There are so many released captives from these places and from Nubia that not all can be accounted for.

Heo tells me that you were warned about your wanderings in disguise in the city unaccompanied. So much for it being a secret. If only you had stayed on the ship to Tajoy you would now be on the throne and all would be well.

My poor little brother. Although you are a man of sixty years you are still my little brother. The one I spent so much of my life protecting from others and from yourself. Mostly from yourself. So much we hoped from you. At last we had a chance to ‘Go Home’, and you blew it.

Perhaps I relied too much on human effort. Perhaps God has other plans for getting us to the Promised Land. A way that will show that He is leading. That we are not going from here because of our capability to do so in our own strength but because HE HAS CHOSEN TO TAKE US OUT. Oh. GOD. After almost three centuries we are still here. When are we to be led to the Home that you have chosen for us?

Now that Egypt rules from Aleppo to Nepata, from Libya to the Gulf of Aqqaba, what is really the point in leaving Egypt? We

Page 229

would still be under Egyptian rule for all of these regions are vassal States of the empire. This though, would have made it so easy for you to move us from one part of the empire to another. You could have had the Caananites removed to make way for us. Why is it that whatever was proposed ‘the time was not yet ripe for a move’.

Would it ever have been ripe? Could you not face the prospect of being a vassal to the king in Memphis or in Thebes? Such a king would have been of your own choosing. Perhaps you were not able to tear yourself away from Nefertari. I know that she was more than just a foster mother to you even after you were married to her daughter for yours and Nefertari’s convenience. Were these relationships more important to you than the leading of your people, GOD’S CHOSEN TO THE LAND PROMISED TO THEM? I still love you very much. May god have His hand over you and lead you back to us someday’.

Occupied as he was at that time with investigating the murder of the High priest of On, Heo and his whole department was stretched to its limit. It had very little resources to search for a king who had disappeared, but the search could not be left to subordinates. Heo realised that the disappearance of the overseer was too far back in time to be the real reason for the flight. He had his suspicions but could not see how Moses could have been implicated. He knew that on the night of the murder Moses had been in the Palace so could not be personally involved but could be in some remote way responsible for what had happened. He must have been up to some foolish mischief on his secretive nocturnal wanderings. Besides, he was his wife’s brother and in that direction it would be better to let sleeping dogs lie.

As far as could be discovered a gang of ruffians had invaded the temple intent on robbery of the treasures held there. Not content with robbing tombs they set their sights on the temple. Heo could see no reason for Moses to be involved in such action. Never did anyone dream that the secrets of the coronation ceremony were the target of the aggressive invasion. Neither was the temple hierarchy about to admit that there were such things as secrets to be stolen.

Thus that line of investigation was never pursued and the missing Thutmose I was never suspected of being in any way involved in that crime.

Page 230

There is no record of the actual perpetrators of that crime ever being brought to account. The young assistant priest, who betrayed his trust was caught, arraigned before the Temple court and suffered a terrible punishment for his crime. The death of that High Priest left a huge and unfillable gap in the transmission of these vital secrets sought but not obtained by Moses. However this break in the secret knowledge of the temple was filled is not known but it is recorded that the subsequent kings of Egypt continued to be crowned in ON with the expectation of ascension to Paradise assured. Just as they had been from time immemorial.

The idea of a king just disappearing without trace was unacceptable to the official mind. Diligent search was made for a body that could be that of the king. Every possible site was investigated for several weeks. At last the body of the overseer killed by Moses was discovered under the sand blow in which it was buried. Workmen short of sand for a job dug into this mound and found a body. This was referred to the management of the brick yard. Heo’s people, following their policy of investigating even the most remote possibilities, exhumed the body. It had been largely preserved in the hot dry sand and could be transported somewhere for investigation.

As no body that could be positively identified as that of Thutmose had been found, this body, having many similarities to the semitic appearance of Moses, was eventually taken to be that of the missing king. Some criminals must have been involved. An extensive investigation was made of the movement of all known criminals but none was ever apprehended for this most heinous of crimes.

Once it was established that Thutmose was dead his successor could be announced and his body interred with full royal honours. This was discovered by archaeologists several millennia later in a tomb that had been visited by grave robbers so had very little to offer the searchers except a body in a sarcophagus.

What Miriam thought about the body taken to be that of Thutmose and buried as his has not been recorded. Later events reveal that she knew about this and also knew that he had escaped Egypt to live in a foreign country.

Page 231

CHAPTER XIV THE SUCCESSION The search for the missing VIP person, the brother of Heo’s wife, was spread throughout the land from the Delta to Thebes and further south to take in the whole of Nubia. No trace of him could be found anywhere. Not even a body that could be his. Heo knew that here would be no body for Moses had fled. If he had been abducted it would have been during his flight and he did not think that here was much chance of that. He knew from what he had heard on the night of his disappearance that he could be found in the Sinai if anywhere.

He had men assigned to this area on ‘the off chance’ of finding him.

The agents working the city of Serabet-El-Kadem, the chief city and administrative centre of the Sinai Region, had a lead or two that they followed as far as they could. This newcomer to the city was a superb scribe and was self-employed. The descriptions they received of him tallied with what they had been given in Memphis.

They followed up these leads and seemed to be getting close when he disappeared never to surface again in spite of a more intense search. They were thus forced to return home their mission unaccomplished.

Indeed, they did get very close to Moses. Too close for his comfort.

He was happily engaged in plying his trade in the furtherance of his new career when he heard of the agents searching for a missing Egyptian. He suspected the worst. The prospect of being dragged back to Egypt in chains, of facing arraignment in court, being convicted and sentenced, probably to death was more than he was prepared to face. He did not wait to find out if his suspicions were founded on anything but a vivid imagination. He ran off again.

This time away from human habitation. The wilderness of the great Sinai peninsular would hide him effectively for all time.

The search was called off after three months. The Temple was anxious to have a king on the throne and many of the priesthood were glad to see the end of that particular Thutmose. They accepted readily the body found indecently interred in brickyard as that of the missing king. It suited their purposes for him to be no longer on the scene. His son, Mosesa, was of an age that made him eligible to

Page 232

mount the throne and being the son of Hatshepsut, the daughter of Nefertari, the daughter of Kamose the Great he was in direct line to the throne. They welcomed the end of the reign of the bastard of Nefertari. The next king would truly be a God King..

Hatshepsut ruled in her own right as Queen until her son, Mosesa was eventually crowned and installed as King. She nominated him as the rightful successor to Thutmose, his father. The Temple carried on from there. As king he would be the Commander in Chief of the armies of Egypt and entitled to lead them on disciplinary forays in the empire and on conquering campaigns when needed. He took the name of Thutmose as his reigning title.

He has thus come down to us as Thutmose II. The only point of resemblance to his father’s reign was his name.

Within two years of the disappearance of Moses his son was installed in his stead with full pomp and ceremony in the Holy City of On. He was in his early twenties and still not married at this time although he had been bedded well and had sired two sons to his favourite concubine who would have been his wife had she been of noble enough birth. His first son he named Amensese after his much-admired maternal grandfather, Amenhotept. His second son carried a variant of the family name as Moseesen.

Eventually, to consolidate his position as king and assure his progeny of their succession he married God’s Mother, the Queen Hatshepsut. She was his natural mother and her daughter, Neferere was the daughter of Moses.

Under Thutmose II the concessions granted to the Heqa Kasut by his father were taken away a little at a time until they were reduced to almost the status they had under Ahmose. His mother and queen supported him in this policy, as she had never believed that the concessions granted by Thutmose I were in the best interests of the nation. The twenty per cent general tax imposed by Joseph almost three centuries before was not repealed. Nor was it extended to the Israelis or the Temple. Neither were the Israelis disturbed from their occupancy of Goshen, the delta regions of the Nile. No reason for this is given in any of the chronicles. Perhaps they were considered to be one hundred per cent taxed by their common labourer status.

All land titles in the Nile valley still remained in the hands of the king as Joseph had engineered it so long ago. Yet the pastoral lands of the delta were never regained from the Israelis. Egypt being so

Page 233

agriculturally minded the delta pastures may have been considered to be worthless.

The living conditions of the Heqa Kasut continued to deteriorate.

Work quotas were increased from time to time and Thutmose’s military campaigns still further increased the need for their lowly paid labour. Their travel was restricted by new and harsher regulations. Trade with the people of the delta was made more difficult each year by restrictions on market days and price control regulations on their activities. No religious restrictions were imposed but tax concessions were given to those who returned to following the ancient Gods of Egypt. This pointed the people away from the monotheism that Moses had sponsored. The Temple was granted land for expansion and the Priesthood was given special status in the consultation processes of government.

Amram and others of his race who were members of the Brotherhood continued to enjoy certain privileges that no one seemed interested in reducing. But, on the whole, the restrictions on the Hebrews began to become an increasing burden as the years rolled by. This caused the interest in a migration to the Promised Land to grow in strength again. It had never really died, the good life had relegated it to the ‘too hard basket’. As a society the descendents of Joseph were realizing the opportunities that they had missed over the centuries to make good the promise traditionally made to Abraham. All over Goshen and in the cities where the Israelis lived groups formed secret societies or clubs with the sole purpose of achieving an Exodus; Somehow. Miriam became increasingly involved in these activities. In a privileged position as the wife of the Director of National Security she was able to organize places and times of meetings in ways that enabled them to escape detection. So little disturbance did these meetings make on the general fabric of Egyptian life that no concerted effort was ever made to suppress them. Heo turned a blind eye to much of this activity because of his sympathy to the Cause. Thus the Exodus Movement was kept from the Public Eye. Moses, as Thutmose I had been a holding monarch.

He consolidated Egyptian hegemony and carried out disciplinary military actions but did not extend the boundaries of the Empire.

Thutmose II had in him the drive of Kamose and Amenhotept and began a series of conquests that extended Egyptian influence to the

Page 234

borders of Ethiopia to the South East and to Damascus in the North East.

At the same time he held both Nubia and Libya as vassal States.

THE GENERAL LAYOUT OF EGYPT AND IT NEIGHBOURS

Page 235

CHAPTER XV MOSES IN EXILE Moses fled from the city of Serabet-el-Kadem in a panic when he suspected Egyptian agents were looking for him. He left the comforts of this city and traveled east and south into the mountains of the peninsular. Eventually, after many days of running he paused in the shadow of Sinai, the mountain that gives the peninsular its name. In an oasis under the shadow of the mountain he sat on the coping of a well to rest. This was a very pleasant spot. There was a covering of grass on the harsh sandy ground. Palm trees shaded the well site. Within his sight were houses scattered in groups throughout the oasis which covered several square miles. He was exhausted from his long day and had refreshed himself from the cooling waters of the well. The bucket was back in the water waiting for its next customer.

He was feeling particularly sorry for himself. His funds were depleted by paying for his sustenance during the several days of wandering after he had left the city in such a hurry. He now had no home and no income. He could not help comparing his present situation with what he had left behind in Egypt. What a fool he had been to get involved with the low life of Memphis. Perhaps he should have taken the advice of Miriam and Nun and toughed it out in the palace. If he had met the agents from Egypt as they were scouring the city of Serabet he may have found that he was not the horror that he imagined himself to be. He may not have been a fugitive from justice but just a missing king who would have been returned home with joy, having been found safe and sound. If only, if only. Then again it may be better for the country with Mosesa on the throne. He was more militant than his father and would possibly do more for the nation than he had done.

His musings were disturbed by the sound of movement far off. He looked in the direction of the sound and noticed a small cloud of dust trailing a mob of sheep being led toward him. The day was coming to a close and the shepherds were no doubt bringing them in for the night. They would need to be watered before being bedded down in their pens. Leading the sheep were two attractive young

Page 236

women whom Moses watched eagerly as they approached. Here could be the chance of getting some accommodation. If he were to draw their water for them they may be inclined to lead him to some temporary accommodation till he could find some gainful occupation in this large and prosperous looking oasis.

From another direction came another flock of sheep led by three young men. It appeared to be a race between the two flocks. The women arrived first and Moses offered to and was about to draw water for them when the men arrived and rudely barged in and shoved the women aside and made ready to water their own sheep.

In his best parade ground voice Moses called out. “Stand aside there.”

The shock of hearing a voice of authority raised against them caused the men to step back.

Moses continued. “These women were here before you. They have the right to draw first.” He then continued to draw water for the shepherdesses to water their flocks in the troughs provided at the wellhead.

In this semi-desert region Egyptians were not well liked. Moses was still wearing the clothes that he had on when he left Serabet in such a hurry. He no longer wore the clothes of a government official. He had changed from those before he left Beni Hakon a whole lifetime ago. Being the centre of administration Serabet was a not a place where Egyptian dress would stand out in the crowd. This was not so in this isolated oasis where his dress branded him as an enemy.

The young men whom he had corrected resented his interference.

Their feelings, like the rest of the population of this region ranged from total disregard to outright hatred. The demands of the Empire were blamed for all the real and imagined economic and social problems faced by the people.

Egypt was regarded as the exploiter of the region. The gold and copper mines benefited only the prosperous cities that had grown up near them. The poor tufted grasses and edible bushes of the rest of the region could sustain their flocks of sheep and goats and small herds of camels. These supplied their meat, wool, milk and hides for their own use and sale to produce income that barely left them sustenance after paying the taxes demanded by Egypt. In the

Page 237

scattered oases dates and vegetables supplemented their diet of meat, cheese and sour milk.

The sheep at the troughs were not allowed to drink in peace. These young men considered that their maleness gave them the right to take precedence if they thought fit. They resented the interference

by Moses. They resented even more his appearance as an Egyptian.

The boldest of them pushed forward in an attempt to remove the sheep drinking. As he moved he called out. “What right have you here? Egyptian dog. You have no right to let these women first to the water. Go back to where you came from. We want none of your sort here.”

In his anger Moses had no fear of them. He said. “Who gave you the right to push aside those first at the well. If you had any decency about you, you would have drawn the water for these ladies before watering your own flock. If you do not know how to behave it is time that somebody taught you.”

“I suppose you will do the teaching. Dog of an Egyptian. It’s you who’ll be taught a lesson.”

Moses continued to lean on the staff that all travellers carried with them in those days. “Do you propose to do the teaching?” Was his challenge to these men. His anger was up and at such times he was afraid of nothing. He appeared to be calmly waiting for whatever might come at him. His staff was heavy; their crooks were light and flimsy. They were effective for controlling sheep but no match for a heavy fighting staff.

The one who had challenged Moses rushed at him with his crook upraised in a threatening manner. In mid-step of his third pace toward Moses the aggressor brought his crook down to strike Moses on the head. Instead of Moses’ head it struck the heavy staff held horizontally above it. This blow did no harm to the staff but left the shepherd with the stump of his crook in his extended hand. Before realising what had happened his companions rushed to his support and struck out simultaneously at Moses. He quickly shifted his hold on his staff to take one end in his two hands and swing it in a wide arc before his head. The attackers ducked their heads to avoid the blow that hey expected but still held their crooks aloft. The blow from Moses’ staff on each crook snapped them both off as straws are broken by the wind. Each shepherd was then left with the stump of a crook in his hand. They backed off.

Page 238

“Well”. Challenged Moses. “What have you to say for yourselves, now? If you haven’t knives to throw perhaps you would like to try fists at close quarters.”

By this time their sheep were getting restless and beginning to break from the flock and move away while the sheep at the water troughs were drinking their fill undisturbed by the men fighting. These wandering sheep must be gathered back into a flock.

“Not now.” Growled their leader. “We have our sheep to attend to.

You’ll keep, Egyptian dog.”

“Do you have enough strength left to draw water for them?” Asked Moses innocently as they moved away.

Raising his truncated crook at Moses the leader called out. “Keep out of our way if you know what is good for you. We must water these sheep now. We will deal with you another time.”

“Don’t mind if I do.” Replied Moses as he turned to the women to see that they had adequately watered their sheep.

When their sheep had drunk their fill the women thanked Moses and moved off. While the men were watering their sheep he moved off to sit under a palm tree musing on the enemies he had just made.

They dare not attack him just then for they not only had their sheep to attend to but they had no weapons left. It worried Moses a little to think that he had started off so ill in this place. There was nothing he could do about it so he prepared to make himself comfortable for the night, hoping that if they did come back during the night he would have sufficient warning to defend himself.

He had scarcely settled down when he heard voices approaching.

He turned in alarm but then relaxed when he realized that they were the voices of women in conversation. He looked closer. The young women whose sheep he had watered had returned. They appeared to be heading in his direction. “Good evening, Ladies.” Said Moses as he rose to greet them. “To what do I owe the pleasure of your return?”

The elder replied. “Our father sent us to apologise to you for leaving you here after you had been so kind to us. We told him how you forced those terrible men to await their turn at the well. They bully us every time that we arrive at the well together. Not all the men here are like that. Our father, Jethro, also requests the pleasure of your company at our humble evening repast. He has had a table laid for a guest and will be very disappointed if you do not return

Page 239

with us. We do apologise for our behaviour and add our invitation to that of our father. I am Deborah and this is my sister Zipporah.”

“How can I refuse such hospitality.” Said Moses. He was reluctant to admit that his only alternative was a precarious bed in the open under the palm tree that was then sheltering him. Also he had the unwelcome prospect of being attacked during the night by a force beyond his capacity to resist. “I am very pleased to have been of service to you and will be very pleased to accept your kind invitation.”

With that he followed the two women to their home.

When his two daughters had arrived home with the sheep that evening and given an account of their experience at the well, Jethro was highly intrigued. An Egyptian, of all people to help humble shepherds was an event in itself. The trouble at the well with this rabble was not uncommon and was often the cause of distress to him. What was an Egyptian doing in this end of the world without an escort to protect him for the pent up anger of the people? He was bold enough to take on those ruffians without hesitation and at a moment’s notice. He had enough authority in his voice to stop them in their tracks with it. He would surely have antagonised them and would be in danger. This train of thought led him to a final one.

What was this fellow running away from? Jethro, as the Chief Priest and magician of Midian, was no stranger to difficult and often strange events.

He had seven daughters and no sons. As much as he disliked doing so he had to thrust on his daughters the day to day chores that sons would have shouldered. Their basic livelihood depended on the adequate care of the sheep, goats and camels he owned. He could not care for them adequately and at the same do justice to his duties as chief priest and Magician. His daughters did a fine job but he wished for sons to do these things so that the women could more effectively care for the household needs of his family. They lived in the village of REUEL situated on the extreme eastern edge of this oasis under the southern shoulder of Mount Sinai. The germ of an idea emerged in the mind of Jethro. It began to grow and as a result of its growth he sent his daughters back to ask this stranger to sup with them.

Page 240

When he at last set his eyes on Moses he told himself that this was no ‘ordinary’ Egyptian. He saw a man who was used to being obeyed, who could command a situation. No wonder that he had brought the cowardly ruffians to heel. A man who was not afraid to brand himself as an Egyptian and wander about here alone. Or, on the other hand, too ignorant of local conditions to act any differently. Then again, he may have been running so fast away from something that he had no time to think about removing his Egyptian brands. There was something else about him, too. Take the Egyptian clothes from him and what did you have? He had a Semetic look about him. He spoke very well too, in an educated Egyptian accent. There was much food for thought here.

All in all he appeared satisfactory to Jethro. He was a crafty old dog and he could see opportunity when it knocked at his door. This one was not just knocking at his door it was hitting him in the face.

This fellow was obviously not young, must be sixty something, but he had quite a few good years in him yet. Jethro could not go on forever and he had the future of his daughters to think about. What he needed was a man about the place and none of the locals suited his taste. Those pups who constantly harassed them would like to get on to them but he would have none of them. To him they were the riff raff from the original inhabitants of the region. His family was descended from the Hebrews who had migrated from Egypt after Joseph’s descendents had usurped the throne of Lower Egypt.

They had removed themselves from Egypt but had not had the drive to go all the way to Palestine. It was much less harrowing to settle among the half-civilised tribes in this sparsely settled area than to face the seventeen kings that occupied Caanan at that time. Now that there were twenty-five of them they had less chance than ever.

These thoughts were racing through Jethro’s mind as he invited Moses into his home and had him take the place of a guest at their table set for their evening meal. He did not live in a tent. His people were not nomadic as the original natives were. They had settled in and developed the oasis. It had developed into a trading post as it continued to service the needs of surrounding oases. His was a substantial house befitting the chief priest and magician of the area. It was nothing compared to the palace in Memphis where Moses had spent most of his life but it was far better than the

Page 241

humble abodes he had been forced to shelter in since his panic flight.

Mose found Jethro to be a man he could get along with. During the first evening after they had partaken of a substantial meal they sat around and talked. Jethro had many interesting tales to tell of this people’s migration to this wilderness. They had passed through many experiences both good and bad as they developed this oasis to the standard that it now was. On the whole they led peaceful and happy lives, not only in this oasis but also in several scattered throughout the peninsular. As Jethro spoke Moses felt at peace for the first time in many months. He felt that he could now stop running. He would not only be safe but be content as well. As Jethro continued to speak Moses wondered just how he could go about getting Jethro to allow him to settle here, if not with his family then somewhere in the oasis and contribute to its economy somehow. Even if nothing else he was an expert scribe and they were always in demand almost anywhere. He really could not offer much else for he had never been trained in any art but that of kingship.

Jethro saw before him a man of high intelligence, well educated, obviously. No longer young but still in good fettle. Certainly not a labourer so must be able to read and write, probably much better than anyone on that oasis. Most likely no trade skills but hopefully willing to learn. Not able to command high wages for one of any number of reasons as he most likely had nowhere else to go. This was the end of the world anyway so there was nowhere to go from here. But, never rush into anything, sleep on it. Years of hard experience were talking here.

After the bread and cheese of the morning meal Jethro proposed to Moses that he stay with them permanently. A man was needed on the property. He would not be expected to spend all of his time watching sheep and goats. He possibly had not much experience in that line of work. There was plenty of administrative work to keep a man busy. Jethro himself could not keep up with it all and his public duties as well. If Moses liked to go out with the girls for the day he was welcome to do so, as it would give him an oversight of the whole operation.

What choice did Moses have? He was at the end of the line and he knew it. He had spent the night thinking about how he could get to

Page 242

stay in this place of shelter. He was glad that he did not have to ask.

He only had to agree to accept.

Jethro said to him. “There is no hurry about a decision to accept my offer. Take a few days to think about it. In the meantime you are welcome to stay as my guest till you accept or otherwise.�

To this Moses expressed his appreciation of the offer and promised to give him his decision within two days. He could have given it right there and then but as Jethro has specified a waiting time he thought it better to conform to this schedule.

The two eldest daughters of Jethro were Deborah and her young sibling Zipporah. They were the two with whom Moses had most contact in the outside work with the flocks and herds and also in the management work of the estate. As the weeks and months rolled by Moses and Zipporah worked ever closer together and eventually their relationship led to marriage. As the husband of Zipporah Moses became the son-in-law of Jethro and became to him the son that he had never had.

Over the years of Moses’ sojourn in Midian Jethro taught him all that he knew of his priesthood and the art of magical illusion. This was part of the stock in trade of the priests of those days to impress the people that they were in direct contact with the celestial world.

Apparently supernatural manifestations convinced the people that the Gods were communicating with the people through their priests.

Thus each priest was credited with being in close contact with heaven and endowed with whatever occult power that this involved.

Attitudes of the people have not changed much in the intervening millennia.

Jethro taught Moses to use the power of a God he had not heard of before. Neither had anyone else. It was the God that Jethro served and he instructed Moses fully in that lore. His was a name to conjure with. Properly pronounced it would so gain the attention of the people hearing it that they could be convinced of anything that was suggested to them. This knowledge was to be of great use to Moses when he later returned to Egypt. Of this he was not aware, at this time, for he had no intention of ever returning to that country.

Of the children born to Moses and Zipporah only the two boys are recorded in the chronicles. The first born of these was named Gershom and the later Absolam. Their only claim to fame is that they were the uncircumcised children of Moses.

Page 243

Thus did Moses become a part of the family of Jethro the Priest and Magician of Midian. These years spent in the wilderness were vital to the education of Moses for his part in the Exodus of Israel from Egypt. As a common man of the people he learned many of the realities of life of which he was largely ignorant when he was king.

People bleed when they are hurt. They will follow the Will of the Whisp if it is presented to them aright. What they see in front of them they believe, especially if it is graphic enough to grip and hold their attention momentarily.

In the ten years that he spent in Midian Moses had time to think on his past and what the future may hold. During this time he wrote letters to his sister Miriam reflecting his thoughts from time to time.

Thus did she and Heo come to know of his location. Too late to do anything about it as far as bringing him back home was concerned.

But, Heo filed the information away for future use, as any good Security Director will do. He also made other investigations through the Egyptian agents in the region and eventually knew of Moses’ life as a student of and possible successor to Jethro.

Often, in moments of reflection, Moses contemplated his change of circumstances and his own part in it. One day he was ruler of part of the World’s greatest empire and the next a fugitive from justice. From living in the highest standard in the world to this semi-primitive condition here on the edge of the desert. From a position of power to a nameless vagabond dependent on the charity of others for his very existence. All this was the result of one indiscreet intrigue that he could well have done without. If he had led his people out of Egypt there would have been no need to take with him the rites of Egypt. They could develop their own even if they were a modification of what they had learned in Egypt. Modified they must be to be suitable for a developing society. He had been in total error in trying to obtain the secrets to which he had no right. It would have been far better to have directed his energy toward developing new rites when the time came for their need.

In his musing in this peaceful and unhurried existence Moses relived in imagination his life in Egypt. He remembered the times he had spent with Amenhotept when he was having his tomb built in the cliffs to the west of Thebes in the Valley of the Kings. He lived

Page 244

again the experience of redeveloping that little village between the river and the escarpment at the edge of the Western Desert. How it had been changed into a busy city of artisans devoted to building tombs for the afterlife enjoyment of deceased Pharaohs, as the kings of Egypt had recently taken to calling themselves.

Amenhotept’s tomb was a marvel of engineering even for the renowned expertise of the Egyptians.

Perhaps it had been an exaggeration to cover the deficiencies of his lineage. If he had been older and more assertive, it pleased Moses to muse, he might have been there rather than Uncle Meno. Still it was now all history and unchangeable.

The tomb for Nefertari, started by Amenhotept surpassed the splendour of his own. After his death this was finished by the best engineers, sculptors and artists in Egypt, at Thutmose’s command, as an expression of the great love that they both bore towards her.

Her manipulations and connivings did not enter his thoughts for these were unnoticed by either of them. To one standing in the City of Tomb Builders and looking westward ones vision would take in the vast colonnade of papyrus bundles in stone topped by the lotus blooms spreading to support the vast lintels over them. These lintels supported a roof of massive stone slabs huge by any standard. All were erected by teams of workmen using ropes and levers. The portico in the centre of the colonnade was topped by a vast pediment carved with the scenes from the life of its intended occupant. Inside the magnificent frescos, painted to last forever, depicted the daily life of the royal family at work and at play. When rediscovered 3500 years later these frescos were as brilliant and fresh as the day they were first painted.

Her sarcophagus was carved from one solid block of marble. The whole work as an expression of his love for his foster mother and long time lover. Other relationships were, for them, marriages of convenience to meet the exigencies of Royal Life and protocol.

First to establish Amenhotept on the throne and legitimize the Royal succession. The second to establish Moses as the rightful successor to Amenhotept and legitimize the lineage of his progeny.

Moses relived in his imagination the funeral of Nefertari. Such magnificence! This was much more pleasant to remember than the manner of her death. It was a slow and painful process, more for those who witnessed it than for Nefertari herself. From a still

Page 245

beautiful and vigorous woman of eighty-seven summers she rapidly wasted away to frail and senile one hundred and ten in three short years. Only in the last few months did her mind deteriorate to the level where she recognised no one. At last came blessed relief and at the chronological age of ninety she departed this transient life to enter the realms of eternity.

The marble sarcophagus had been shaped in the tomb and left there to receive the body when the time came for its interment.

Nefertari’s body was embalmed and placed in its coffin. This was then placed in a larger coffin in which it was transported to Thebes by river on a Royal ship. The whole of the Royal Way in Memphis, from the Palace to the Royal Wharves, was lined by a triple row of her subjects giving her their last farewell. The loud wailing of the mourners could be heard miles away.

At Thebes this pageant was repeated. From the riverbank to the portico of the tomb the way was lined by mourners. The double coffin was placed in the sarcophagus long prepared for its reception.

The tomb was then sealed, to be not opened again, for over three millennia.

How much Moses missed her now! He would always miss her for as long as he lived. She had filled a very special place in his life. In many ways she was his life for without her he would have remained the humble member of a despised race.

Hatshepsut! What of her? She was a very strong-minded person just as her mother had been. She would have taken charge when he left. There was no doubt about that. He thought of her as his stepsister. Never did he suspect her true origin as his own natural daughter. What about the son that he had left behind? As heir he must by this time have been installed on the throne, even if only as joint ruler with his mother. There was no doubt in Moses’ mind as to what he would do. Always was rebellious and hard to handle so it could be expected that he would have undone all the concessions that his father had made to the Heqa Kasut. Life would now be much harder for his people from the day that Mosesa ascended the throne and Hatshepsut would not oppose him.

If only he had not panicked and run when he did. Too late now, the damage has already been done and is now part of history.

“O GOD.” Cried Moses in his moment of greatest anguish over what might have been. “What have I done? I have let you down. I

Page 246

have let my people down. Poor weak mortal that I am. Forgive me, if You can�

The days rolled into weeks and the weeks into months and the months into years. Moses was making a new life for himself in this land. The passage of time softened his remorse and regrets as it does for all of us. The opulence of his life in Egypt became a dim memory. Life in Midian was easier. There were no importuning citizens all looking for the main chance. No politicians were there to say one thing and mean something entirely different. (For politicians here read courtiers) No longer was there need to constantly look over the shoulder to see who was holding a knife to one’s back.

Here in the wilderness was a peace that Moses had never known in Egypt. Perhaps his last days could be spent happily with his small family and close friends about him. He had become content with his life as priest and guide to this small community that really needed him. Someone more worthy and capable could carry on with the grand task that he had left behind. He wrote to Miriam another letter telling her of his contentment and that he wanted nothing more than to spend the rest of his life in this peace and contentment.

While Moses was contenting himself with his peaceful existence the very opposite was happening with his people in Egypt. Thutmose II turned the screws of oppression ever tighter. This had the usual result. The resentment of the Israelis grew in geometric proportion to the increase in oppression. Miriam and others of her race who still enjoyed privileges denied to the rest of their people were looked to to ease the burdens on them. But, there was little that they could do. They were tolerated by the regime because of their social positions and connections but only tolerated. The edict of Ahmose to terminate the first born sons of all Heqa Kasut had died with him and never been revived. This was not done by Thutmose II. But he followed a policy of Imperial expansion that required a greater strain on the home economy. The brunt of this strain was pushed onto the backs of the labourers who were forcefully recruited from the Israelis. The greatly increased trading activities of the expanding empire caused a greatly increased building programme that in its turn required a greatly increased labour force. The Egyptian artisans

Page 247

were fully occupied in producing war materials so the Israelis were forced to do the menial work of brick making and building.

The Return to Caanan Movement gained momentum as a result of this renewed oppression. Secret meetings were organised in the homes of Amram and his brothers who were all privileged to have homes that could be adapted to this kind of activity. Miriam also made her home available to these Israeli activists. Heo was sympathetic to the cause and was able to turn a blind eye to the use that was being made of his home. Her comparative freedom from surveillance made her home a popular meeting place. Even so, precautions were taken to preserve its effectiveness. Meetings were held at odd times. People moved into and out of her home in very small numbers, two or three at a time. She organised meetings in many other places than in her own home. To do this she obtained from Heo the times and places of security forces inspections and was thus able to organise meetings safe from surveillance. The records of activities were kept in her home as the place least likely to be suspected of subversion.

Heotept was a leader in the Egyptian delegations that implored the king to soften his treatment of the Heqa Kasut. The reasons they gave were sound. It was counter productive to oppress the workers as he was doing. In their resentment they did not work so efficiently as they would if they were content. Better results would be assured if the people forced to work were able to work in better conditions.

This advice was not heeded by Thutmose II. Nine years had passed since the disappearance of Thutmose I and the oppression by his son was not lessening. The greater his conquests and expansion of the empire the greater became his demands on the people. Heo could do no more than he was doing without jeopardising his position in the hierarchy of Government.

The Heqa Kasut needed him where he was. Without him they would be like a horse without blinkers. They would have doubts about their direction of travel. He could talk to the king on his own level. After all he was his uncle as Amenhotept had been uncle to him. The leaders of the Exodus Movement, as it came to be known, realised the value of Heo where he was and accepted him as an essential ingredient for their success.

As time went by another lack in the recipe for success became evident to Miriam and other executives of the Movement. They had

Page 248

no one with ‘people skills’. No one of their number was skilled in managing a large group of people. No one was there who could impress the king with the power of Israel’s God. Only the concept of a greater power than his own would convince the king to allow the Israelis to leave the country with his permission. Since they would be moving from one part of the empire to another it was essential that the king agree to this movement. In the prevailing conditions this would never be obtained.

In this context Miriam thought of Moses. Would he? Could he?

He had mellowed during his years of incarceration in the wilds of Midian. He must be more stable now. She knew, from information gained by Heo that he was now skilled in certain arts that would impress the king. With all his sophistication and power he was still in awe of the supposed magical powers of the priests of Egypt.

There were qualities of this of which the priests of Egypt were fully aware, even more so when compared with lesser-civilised cultures.

There was no need for Moses to fear for his life. A letter of request was too easily refused. If only she could speak to him personally?

How? Of course. Invite him to come home for a visit. He must be assured of his safety on such a visit. He had been away now for nine years and must have some yearnings toward his family that he had left behind.

Miriam was conscious of the chance that Moses may be frightened away by mention of her underlying reason for getting him back home. Yet she felt that his presence by her side would be an advantage to the Movement. It was not entirely satisfactory to rely on reports even as reliable as those that Heo produced. He must come home. She had serious talks with Heo on this and he advised her that there could be no harm done in getting Moses to return on a private visit. After all he was her brother and as such he would be allowed into the country without incident. If it were arranged for him to meet Aaron on the way the invitation might be accepted.

Once the decision was made to invite him home a letter was soon on its way to Moses.

To My Dear Brother,

Page 249

It has been so good to know where you are living and to be able to communicate with you. Five years was a long time to keep us in suspension in the dark of ignorance as to your whereabouts and well being. That you have married and sired two children is welcome news although late in coming. We have since become used to again knowing you though only by letter.

We would all love to see you again in person. As you are aware from my previous letters you will be in no danger whatever in Egypt as a private person. As the brother of Aaron you will be a private person and admissible to the country. We will give no hint of your status before you left us so suddenly. In fact any mention of your previous residence here need not be mentioned. The only danger to you would be if you gave any sign of wanting to aspire to your old status. Thutmose would take measures to ensure that you were not able to do so. I need not go into details on this.

I know from your letters that you have no such aspirations. Please think seriously of coming home even if only for a short visit.

The general belief here is that you were killed at the same time as the two assistant priests and the High Priest of On. Probably in conjunction with that crime believed by many to be perpetrated by saboteurs from Libya or Nubia. This was the reason given for the attacks on those two countries. The crime was discovered the day that you left us. The culprits were never found. The novice priest who admitted the criminals to the temple was severely and viciously punished by the priests themselves. They keep their affairs as strictly private as they can so that the whole episode made hardly any ripples to the society of Egypt. The bodies of the two assistant priests were found in the river and that of the High Priest was found rather untidily buried unembalmed in a shallow grave on the edge of the desert. It was disinterred and suitably embalmed and reburied in State. So you see that is all past history and will not affect your return as a private citizen. A body was found buried hurriedly and this was considered to be yours. It was buried in State as the body of Thutmose I. Died by unknown and unseen hands.

Mother and Father would both love to have you and your children visit with them. They have never met them or your wife and feel this as a lack in their lives. Mother just dotes on her grandchildren although Father sometimes finds them a bit of a bore. You should see how she carries on about the children that we have here. She

Page 250

spoils them rotten. She lived for the days when Nun could visit with his children and now looks forward to their children coming to visit.

They are now both over the century in age but still in good health and vigour. They send their love to you and add their pleas to mine to urge you to visit even if only for a short time. Every year brings their end nearer but we do not think about that.

Please send us a letter to let us know when you plan to leave there so that I can arrange for Aaron to meet you and guide you in. I suggest that it would be convenient for you both to meet at Succouth. There Nun has his headquarters and there are other relatives also to help to make you welcome. There have been some changes since you were here nine years ago so you will need some guidance.

Please accept this invitation.

May God be with you and guide you in whatever decision you make.

Your own loving sister, Miriam.

Page 251

CHAPTER XVI THE RETURN TO EGYPT Moses kept the letter from Miriam close to his chest for a few days after he received it. He was afraid of the unknown he might meet back in Egypt, in spite of Miriam’s assurances that the past was forgotten. Eventually, as it always is between husband and wife, he could keep it a secret no longer. He had always been careful not to reveal who he had been in Egypt. He had a suspicion that Jethro may have an inkling of the truth but he hoped not. To Jethro Moses’ sudden appearance out of the blue at the same time as the disappearance of King Thut was too fortuitous to be a coincidence but he kept his thoughts strictly to himself. He found Moses to be an asset in his business and a worthy substitute for the son that he never had. He was not about to do anything to threaten this situation.

The letters from Miriam had never given any indication of Moses’ status before leaving Egypt. They were obviously written by a person of some standing in the country but only as from a sister who had found a long lost brother. For some time Zipporah had had thoughts of this family that she never knew but would like to know.

The prospect of actually visiting them thrilled her and she was all for making the journey to Egypt. She wondered why Moses was so reluctant to visit his long lost sister and family.

Eventually she persuaded him to accept the invitation and negotiate with Jethro a leave of absence from their duties to enable them to make the journey. They would need a year at least to get there, to visit adequately and return. Jethro was not at all enthusiastic about losing two workers for a whole year. He would have to pay someone to take their places. “Where is the money coming from?”

He complained. “As well as that it will cost plenty to make the journey and to come home again.”

“Father.” Countered Zipporah. “You now have other sons-in-law to take our places. I know that Deborah’s marriage did not get you another worker for she went off with the son of the Chief of our neighbouring oasis, but Netta’s new husband will be a help while we are away.”

Page 252

“He eats more than he produces.” Growled Jethro.

“You know that that is an unfair thing to say and it is not true. You are only trying to put obstacles in our way. The truth is that you would like to go yourself to check out Moses’ family. Wouldn’t you? You sly old devil.”

“I don’t need to. I have my own ideas about that.”

Here Moses came in with. “Pardon my interruption here, but what do you actually mean by that, Jethro?” Being much the same age as his father-in-law Moses and he had been to each other more like business associates than father and son. He was not unaware of Jethro’s suspicions about his past but neither had he seen fit to bring it up. Moses was here attempting to get Jethro to come out with something of his thoughts but he was disappointed in this. Jethro kept his thoughts to himself for he replied to this sally by saying.

“Just something to say. That’s all.”

Moses then entered the discussion in support of his wife by adding his pleas to hers that they have a year off their duties to visit Egypt.

He pointed out that he had given Jethro almost nine years of faithful service and a year off was not too much to ask. He also pointed out that they had some personal funds accumulated over that nine years and they could afford to make this journey without any cost to Jethro. The food that their small family would not be eating while away would more than compensate for a worker, or even two workers, to replace them.

Put that way Jethro could hardly refuse to let them go. He did more than just agree to their journey. He thrust enough funds onto them to pay for the whole journey both to and from. In response to Moses objections he said. “Keep what you have for spending money. You have no idea how much you will need for that. I will not have my name brought into disrepute by your sponging off your relatives.

You both well deserve this break and I am happy to be able to help you towards it. Take enough food with you for the outward journey.

You’ll need two camels to carry the two of you and the boys and two asses for your luggage. Give us about four days to get it all ready. How will that be?”

The flicker of surprise that crossed the faces of Moses and Zipporah was quickly turned into a smile of pleasure as they accepted this arrangement for their departure. Four days later they set off for Egypt. Their third night on the road they spent in an Inn on the

Page 253

outskirts of Serabet-el-Khadem. It was a welcome comfort after two nights on the hard ground of their roadside encampments.

A letter had been dispatched to Miriam on the day of the decision to accept her invitation. In this her suggestion that Aaron meet them at Nun’s home in Succouth was accepted. This was their destination as they journeyed on from day to day.

At the inn their animals were watered and settled down for the night.

Moses and his family ate their evening meal of goat cheese, dates and dried venison under the shelter of the overhang of the terrace that ran round the courtyard of the inn. After resting from the rigours of the journey so far they retired for the night to sleep in the comfort and safety that the inn provided.

When Zipporah first woke the next morning she did not get up to prepare the morning meal, as she was wont to do. She sat upright in bed and exclaimed. “Neither of our boys has been circumcised.”

Shocked into full wakefulness Moses responded. “So!” “You know they ought to be. Don’t you?”

“I don’t know any such thing. What brought this on, anyway.”

“I had a dream last night.”

“What has that to do with it?”

“Everything. The dream was so real. It convinced me that we are heading into something terribly serious and that we will need the help of God. With our children uncircumcised we are showing no faith in HIM. We can not expect his protection for them when it will be most needed.”

“What’s circumcision to do with that? Besides, the boys are far past the age when that can be done.”

“Everything.” Replied Zipporah. “It is an act of faith indicating to God that we accept HIS leadership and protection.”

“We are merely going to visit family that I have not seen for nine years. What on earth can be so serious about that? You are raving, woman.”

“I am not raving. The dream was so real that I believe it was a message sent to guide us.”

“Enough of this nonsense. You get the meal ready and I will attend to the animals. When we have eaten we will get away.”

“I am not going till you do what is right by our boys. Now is the time to do it. Here we have reasonable accommodation and it is no bother to anyone but ourselves until the healing period is over.”

Page 254

“That will take a week. A whole week and Aaron will think that we are never coming. He has been told when to expect us in Succouth.

Or have you forgotten that? If you are so anxious to have this operation done why not arrange for it to be done in Succouth?”

“No. That is not good enough. It must be done now, before we leave this country.” Zipporah insisted and punched her clenched right fist into the open palm of her left had to emphasize how important she believed immediate action was called for.

“Nonsense.” Shouted Moses. His nine years of calming in Midian sent down the drain in one gulp. “Nothing will be done till we get to Succouth. That is our first priority.”

“It is not MY first priority.” Retorted Zipporah. “It is of first importance to me that our children be protected.”

“Protected from what?” Shouted Moses even louder. “Get going and get the meal while I get the animals.”

“I’m not going anywhere till this is done.”

“Then stay here and do it yourself. I’ll go on and you can catch up with me later. By that time I will be in Succouth. You will not have any trouble in finding Nun’s house.” Moses felt that this would bring Zipporah to her senses, but he was wrong again.

“You are a bloody minded pig-headed old man.” She screamed at him. “This should have been done years ago. When they were first born you kept putting it off. You never make any decisions. Just sit back and let things happen, hoping that someone else will make all the hard decisions.”

“You know that is not true.” Was all that Moses could think of in his own defence.

“Do I? Who ran away from Egypt when things got too tough for him there? Who has made all the real decisions since you came to live with us? Who has not been game to reveal why he absconded from the high life of Egypt to bury himself in obscurity in this lousy land? It was only pressure from me that got you to make this trip.

You were afraid to move. What terror awaits you in Egypt?

Answer me that lot.”

“Enough, Woman. More than enough.” Shouted Moses even louder. It was only the memory of what had happened in Egypt that kept him from striking her. He was afraid that if he did he would not know when to stop. At least he had learned that much. “You

Page 255

know not what you are talking about.” Was all that he allowed himself to say.

“Don’t I. Get it done anyway.”

“No way.” Was his reply to this challenge. “I am going on. You can stay if you must. You can follow when you are ready.”

To Moses’ surprise and chagrin Zipporah took him at his word and declared that she would do just that. She had her own resources and could do so. She would need transport to come later.

He was reluctant to proceed on his own but even more reluctant to admit it. However, he could not back away now from his ultimatum to her. He must be at Succouth when Aaron arrived, or soon after and there was no margin for delay. Zipporah gave him no chance to change his mind. She made his gear ready for him and suggested that he take one camel and leave the rest of the animals for her. He was getting about in a daze so she organised his departure.

As he was leaving he made one last attempt at reconciliation.

“Please.” He begged. “What was it you dreamed last night? If I knew what it is that you saw I could be prepared for what might be coming.”

“You just now declared that it was all nonsense. What is the point of you knowing nonsense? Besides, I know no details. I have forgotten them, if I ever knew. I have left only the strong impression that the dream has left me with. I will say that I also got the message that whatever happens you will be guided in what to say and do when the time is ripe.”

“Let’s call the whole thing off then and return home to peace and quiet.”

“NO. No. There you go again. What is it that you have been afraid of? When you first came to our place you were running from something. It is time that you faced up to whatever it is. Perhaps it is yourself. From that you can never escape.” Here she had hit the nail right on the head. “You must do it alone. Perhaps our quarrel was needed to send you on your way without me. Anyway, what will be will be. Off you go now. It is probably better for us all that we go our separate ways at this stage. I will be quite all right. I have sufficient funds to sustain us here and also to return home if that is what I decide to do when the operation is completed. God go with you. I’ll pray for you all the way.”

Page 256

“Thank you. I appreciate that. I’m sorry I blew my top with you earlier. I too feel that there is something more to Miriam’s request than is written in it. The uncertainty of what it is has been preying on my mind. You could well be right in all that you have said.

We’ll meet again on my return. Unless I send for you. Can you spare a camel?”

“Yes, of course. I can get another here if I need one. Off you go.

Don’t be afraid of anything. God will be with you.”

Thus they parted amicably. He to return to his destiny in Egypt and she to await his return to Midian.

Both objectives were accomplished in the fullness of time.

Moses continued his way toward Egypt. He had plenty of time to think on that four day long journey. What was in store for him?

Miriam must have something more for him than just a visit home.

He must be being made to face what he had run from. Another serious thought. What had he really run from? HIMSELF? His destiny? What could that be? Was he to be involved in a movement to get his people out of Egypt? At that thought he almost turned the camel round right then to flee back to Midian. If he could not do that as a king how on earth could he do it now? He prayed constantly for guidance and protection. He would surely need that.

After all that, what courage he had was buoyed by the thought if he was to fulfil a destiny then he would be protected till it was fulfilled.

So he had nothing to worry about. Or did he?

Early in the morning of his fourth day on the road from Serabet Moses was looking forward to resting up at the home of Nun in Succouth. The road was busy with traffic. There were traders leading strings of donkeys laden with all manner of goods. Camel trains from across the desert wastes were moving along, their loads swaying from side to side as they moved. In amongst these were pedestrians hurrying about their daily business.

A camel rider approached from the direction of the city. He had a familiar look about him so that Moses felt that he should recognise him. He could see this traveller scrutinising the faces of the crowds going toward the city as though looking for someone he was not sure that he would know easily. He came abreast of Moses, paused as though about to speak to him, then started to proceed on his way.

He stopped and looked across the road. He stopped his camel, still

Page 257

facing away from the city, and called out to Moses. “Moses. It is you, isn’t it? That is if it is you behind that beard and if you still answer to that name. You were clean shaven when I saw you last and you answered to the name of Thutmose.”

Moses was startled out of his reverie. The name Thutmose got to him.

“What! What’s that? Oh. Aaron, it’s you. It must be for only you could say those things.”

“Who else?” At this Aaron moved across the road to be beside Moses but with his camel still facing away from the city.

Moses pulled the nose rope of his camel so that it came to a stop beside that of Aaron.

He said. “You took me by surprise. I did not expect to see you so far out of town. I was day dreaming about being here and why.

How come you to be here?”

“It was really Miriam’s doing. She insisted that someone come to meet you. To make you welcome to the country and ensure your safety as you progress toward Succouth.”

“Just like Miriam to think of that. Also to make sure that I do not turn back at the last minute. Why is she so anxious for me to be in Egypt at this time?”

“Were you thinking of turning back?” ”Yes. I must admit that I have been of more than half a mind several times. My wife returned home from Serabet and I have been wondering if the journey will be worthwhile without her.”

“What was her reason for turning back?”

“She said that she had a dream about what was ahead of us and she believed that I would be better facing it on my own. Also I must admit that we had somewhat of a row and I am not sure whether it was the row or a calm decision that led to her return.”

“She could be right.” Said Aaron without further qualification of his statement. This puzzled Moses and he said so. Aaron replied that all would be revealed when the time was ripe.

“There’s that phrase again.” Exclaimed Moses. Either forgetting or ignoring that he had used it himself time and again to fob off Miriam from pressuring him to move their people out when such opportunities arose. “Zipporah used it about the immediate future when insisting that I continue on alone.”

Page 258

“You will know soon enough without going into the details now.”

He was told.

Moses pulled on the nose rope of his camel as though to turn it round and flee and said to Aaron. “I’m sorry Aaron, but that is not good enough. I am not a child and I have learned several bitter lessons the last few years. I feel that I have cheated myself by my previous hastiness and impulsive outbursts. Whatever is in store I would rather face now, indeed, must face it if I am to restore my self respect, for what that is worth.”

“Well, then. I shall prepare you for what we have in mind.” At this point Moses relaxed his hold on the nose rope and sat listening to Aaron. “For the last three years there has been a growing yearning amongst our people for a return to the PROMISED LAND. Why so after such lethargy for these past centuries it is hard to understand.

A certain restlessness is driving the present generation. Everyone under fifty years of age has known an existence little better than slavery. It had been somewhat benevolent for some of us and not particularly irksome for most of us till you disappeared.”

He paused here and Moses broke in with. “I’m guilty I suppose?”

“No. Don’t think that. It was probably for the best. Even, perhaps, ordained of God for it to be so. Before you left there was not much real dissatisfaction with our lot; you well know how few took up the opportunities given to them to move out. It was as good as saying that they did not want to go. Since then life has become a tremendous burden to us all. Particularly in the area of worship.

Although much of our theology is ‘borrowed’ from the Egyptians we are very proud of our own versions and are developing them under considerable stress.”

“Oh. Has Thut legislated against us?”

“No. Nothing so straightforward as that. It is much more subtle.

There is no overt suppression of religious rites and ceremonies but his other imposts make it increasingly difficult to carry on our own traditions. Production quotas are so demanding that there is never any time to rest. There is little time to attend to our own flocks and herds in our heartland. Thus our own animals and fields are being neglected and becoming run down. Yet we are expected to produce as much from them as before the clamp down. Our resources are being eroded by all this, no doubt not by accident but design. With our resources depleted we will be an easy and inexpensive take over

Page 259

when Thut pleases. He will thus have done what Kamose never did.

You are well aware of how your efforts to lead to a One True God concept was frustrated at every turn by inaction and covert contra action. Thut has made an art form of this so that all that you did in that regard is totally negated. Ahmose thought to keep our numbers down by murdering our sons, all of them. This fellow keeps our numbers down by making sure that our men are too tired to be capable of reproducing. We of the ‘Brotherhood’ are both Hebrew and Egyptian and are bound by our principles that we will obey the law of the land, no matter how irksome that might be. As a group we can only go along with what is. That does not preclude any of our members from taking any political action that he thinks fit. We make no political stipulations. That does give individual brothers a certain amount of latitude for we do protect each other as far as can be done without going ‘outside’ the law.”

“Do you feel that the desire by the people to move is really taking hold of them? Much more than in the past, I mean. For all of my life it seemed to be more of a talking point than any real desire.

Response to appeals for migrants was always very poor.”

Before replying to this query Aaron suggested that he turn his camel round toward the city and they ride back to it together. “We are wasting time standing here talking when we could be shortening our time on the road. I will turn this cranky animal around and we will ride into Succouth together. We can talk on the way just as well as we can standing here.”

“Of course. Also we will avoid the stares of passers by wondering what we are doing going nowhere. Look at that fellow over there.”

As he nodded his head toward a traveller passing by and obviously trying to hear what was being said. “In some ways there seems to be not much gain in removing to Caanan. It is still part of the empire and we would still be under Egyptian sovereignty. The people would possibly be no better off there than they are in Egypt itself.”

“There are many of our people who subscribe to that view. It does have some merit and it is true that a vassal State, as we would be, pays tribute. But, within its borders it operates freely and its people are free within those borders to work as and when they see fit. All that has to be found is the levy to the Empire. Now we are subject to every personal whim of the emperor and everything that we do is

Page 260

proscribed so that we are squeezed for every drop of blood that we have, and then some.”

“I see your point. That is quite valid about vassalage. As long as the levy is paid it is of no consequence to the empire how it is sourced.

My treasurer’s concern was just that. How it is raised is not within his jurisdiction.”

“Thut is expansionist in outlook.”

“He is very expansive, always was an agitator for Egyptian hegemony. No wonder there is increased pressure for more of everything. It takes an awful lot of revenue to keep thousands of soldiers in constant readiness. Even more so to actually put them into battle.”

“I am aware that an army on foreign soil lives off the land they pass through but this does not seem to be of any benefit to their nation.

The taxman is more insistent during wartime than at any other.”

“Oh. Yes. If soldiers did not live off the land they pass through the cost of maintaining an army in the field would be beyond the resources of almost any State. That is why my policy was a holding one. Disciplinary actions to keep the vassal States in order is costly enough without attempting to spread the empire further. Vassal States are always restless. They hate paying their dues. I can’t say that I blame them. It is not pleasant to know that you have worked damned hard for what little bit that you have then have some character come along and demands a portion. This resentment is aggravated by the knowledge that the wealth goes out to people that live so much better than you do or ever can hope to.”

“You never seemed to have any concern about that when you were on the throne.”

“I’ve seen the other side during the last nine years. Believe me. It is not pleasant nor is it easy on that other side. Whatever the demands are by the Ruling State these are multiplied by the tax collectors. I was in the position of knowing what was expected and what was actually collected. The margin is horrendous. I have some thoughts on how to counter this but I daresay will never get the opportunity to implement them now. It is no wonder that people hide all that they can from these parasites. Somehow they get to know when a tax collector is about to pounce, don’t ask me how. I was never into that. Jethro handled that part of the business. He was not that interested in that part of life anyway. His interest was in the

Page 261

apparent supernatural. I say apparent for that is what it is. All this magic that makes the people believe that the priest has some direct communication with the Gods or God is a matter of perception. The superstitions of the people can be played in so easily.”

“You may get a chance at that sooner than you think.”

“What do you mean by that?”

“Perhaps I have said too much already. Let’s just push on to Succouth.”

“You’ve said so much now you had better come out with the rest of it. Perhaps I should turn round now and get back to Midian.”

“No. Don’t do that. Miriam will have my hide if I do not return with you. How can I face her if I let you slip back to Midian?”

“Well. You had better tell me what this is all about then.”

“Here goes. The Return to Caanan Movement is very strong and growing but lacks an image, something that will shock the king into taking notice of us.”

“Don’t look at me.” Said Moses as he held up his hands in mock horror.

“I’m afraid that has already been done.”

“Somebody could have thought of asking me first.”

“Then you might not have gotten even this far. I’ll take a long while to tell it if you keep interrupting.”

“Sorry. I’ll keep quiet till you have finished it all, then.”

“Thank you. Well. To put it briefly. Miriam has been a tower of strength; you might say the guiding light to the whole movement.

She organizes meetings and venues. She seems to know what is happening and when it is safe to meet. But we lack someone who can give us credibility in the spiritual sense. To show that we have a vision. Not only that really. There are so many different voices among our own people. Different groups want different things done in a different way. There is little cohesion in the whole movement.

When leaders are called for most people show expertise in stepping backwards. They also need to perceive a lead from higher up.

Miriam has stated that she can find such a person. She has known for some time where you have been and what you can do. I don’t know how she knows so much, but she does. She has not made any public statement as to whom she has in mind but has promised that she will provide a person to do just this. She knows about your wife and children and your present status in the district and what you

Page 262

have learned from Jethro. Anyhow, to come to the point. You are her choice to pull the whole movement together. To make an impression where it will count. You are IT.” “Me!!! You have to be joking. Surely you and she and you both know my record. I’d blow the whole deal the first time something annoyed me.”

“Not a bit. We are deadly serious.”

“So am I. I am not the man for the job. It is so long since I have spoken to a large group of people that I would be hopeless. You’ve picked the wrong guy. Or rather, Miriam has.” At this point he pulled his camel to a stop to consider all this and was sorely tempted to turn it round right there and then and race back to the peace and quiet if Midian. “Phew, how does she know so much about me?

Heo of course, the best security man that Egypt could possibly have.

I wish I had had more faith in him. He has agents everywhere. All the more reason that she should not consider me for the job.

Especially if she thinks back to the scene with her when I left. I have never forgotten that. No matter how I look at it I was the world’s worst heel to do what I did. No one could have put on a more gutless performance. I certainly don’t deserve the help she gave me then or her confidence in me now.”

“I know nothing about what you are referring to. Miriam has never said a word about what happened that day. Never even admitted that she had helped you on your way.”

“I’m not surprised about that. We all owe a great deal of debt to our sister Miriam for many, many things. For starters. I would not be alive today if it were not for Miriam. Do you remember anything about that?”

“Do I. I was only three. All I remember, apart from what we have all been told, is that there was a great deal of excitement and running about that was over my little head. All it meant to me was that out of all that I gained a young brother. Before we had time to grow up together you were taken away from us.”

“Yes. Of course.”

At this point in their conversation they had stopped all forward motion. Aaron broke in here to suggest that if they did not keep moving they would not get to Succouth that night. Moses paused to consider this and then said. “Running away fixes nothing. This I have learned only too well. We will proceed on to Succouth and

Page 263

onward from there to whatever lies in store for us. By facing up to this I may, in some measure, atone for my past disastrous mistakes.

One thing, though. I really am concerned about my ability to address a crowd now. Could I count on your help in this?”

“You can be sure of that.”

“Many thanks. Let’s go.”

Together the two brothers entered Succouth that evening and took residence in the home of their eldest brother, Nun. This had become the administrative headquarters of the Exodus Movement. It was close to the people it was there to serve and distant enough from Memphis to be less subject to scrutiny from Official Security. The lobbyists, yes they had them in those days, were of course in Memphis where they could be better heard by the powers that be.

Communication with Succouth was, largely, through the trading networks that Nun owned and managed.

After a few days rest in Succouth Moses was shipped to Memphis on one of Nun’s boats to visit his parents and family there. In time he came to face and confer with Miriam. Her task was made easier by the groundwork that Aaron had done on the way in to the country. Since then Moses had had plenty of time to think about it all and he was quite receptive to what Miriam had to say. He was still diffident about his value but was prepared to do all that was required of him to assist the cause. He felt that he could be of worthwhile assistance to Joshua, Nun’s son, in working out the logistics of moving such a vast number of people, along with their goods and chattels, over a thousand miles of country and in a takeover of an existing and viable economy.

Joshua had already done most of the groundwork on this. He was still a logistics officer in the Egyptian standing army. His expertise in organizing army movements in both peace and war were invaluable to this exercise for the successful exodus of his people. .

Joshua was well aware that the moving a vast array of civilians required vastly different logistics than a regular army and had organized a communication system, with this in mind, that would relay messages as quickly as was possible given the technology available at that time. Getting them activated to move was another problem that he felt would be solved only by time and circumstance.

Each family had been required to appoint one member to serve on a village committee. Each of ten villages was urged to appoint one

Page 264

delegate to a regional committee consisting of one hundred villages.

Each one of these groups was to appoint one delegate to a Nome committee. There were four Nomes involved plus the Memphis environs. Thus the National Committee consisted of five persons to collect and collate all information coming to it from the people.

Any decisions made by the National Committee could be relayed to the people by reversing the process. This National Committee was empowered to and expected to make decisions that would further the cause to its ultimate and successful conclusion.

Using this organisation as a communication network it was possible to get a message from the National committee to the furthest reaches of the Israeli occupation within two days. At each point there was always someone in readiness to run with a message to the next level of communication. Thus a request could come up from the ranks to the top as well as orders go far down to the lowest echelons of the whole community.

It is one thing to have a system in place. It is quite another to have it actually work. Especially when there is very little for it to work with or when the organisation as a whole is not very certain as to where it is going. This was the situation when Miriam called Moses in to help.

She realised that the most effective and least traumatic way to move was to do so with the permission of the king. The people were unarmed and could not fight their way out of the country. Such a course could be disastrous and result in a much smaller number of people actually moving than would be desirable, and probably many deaths. Only a peaceful movement would make it possible to take their goods and chattels with them as without their movable assets they would be handicapped in resettling in Caanan.

After his interview with Miriam Moses was fully committed to working with the movement to achieve success. He considered calling Zipporah to join him with their children but thought better of it as he felt that he would be too busy to give them proper attention.

Many days were spent in consultation with Joshua fine tuning the many routes and times involved in the communication network that he had set up. It was not possible to organise a practice run for their exodus. They had one chance and one chance only of getting it right. That would be the day that the call came to move. At that

Page 265

time every person would have to know exactly what was expected of him/her and move without question or hesitation.

Moses was introduced to the National committee as Miriam’s brother returned from long sojourn in the Peninsular and able to give sound advice on routes to take and supply points on their journey.

Also to point out to them the shortest and best route to follow. At no time was there any intimation that he was the ex-king Thutmose, the father of the present nemesis of the Israeli people. This knowledge would have given him no credibility right from the start.

Even as it was there were many problems in this regard before they got to move out.

Various routes were considered but it was finally decided that the most efficient way to go would be to organise gathering points in each Nome. Bubastis in Nome 18. Tanis in Nome 19. Phakussa in Nome 20. Nome 8 people were to gather in Pithom. When the word came to assemble, each group was to collect at designated points in these towns and then to move under its leader to Succouth.

That meant that most of the people would be north of the river branch that ran into the head of the gulf of Sweis. The only people who would have to cross water would be the people from Memphis who would be coming from the southwest to meet at Succouth.

Some of them would have to cross the Nile itself at Memphis and also cross the eastern arm of the river at Succouth. From Succouth they would proceed en masse into the Sinai Peninsular and would be so far away by the time the king began any pursuit that it would, hopefully, be not worth his while to continue it.

Moses stressed that a moving mass of people is very hard to stop even with an army so there could be no stragglers. All would have to move simultaneously. Stragglers could be taken by pursuing forces if that happened. All of the people thus would have to be familiar with every aspect of the logistics of the movement.

With the logistics of movement in place the next move was to obtain the king’s permission to make the move. Moses advised that there was no way that they would actually get permission to make a permanent move. The country could not afford to have such a large slice of its workforce taken out suddenly. Without revealing his part in it he explained the reason for the plan of gradual resettlement that Thutmose I had put in place. He also conceded that this did not work. No blame was attached to any person or persons, just that it

Page 266

did not work. Since they could not get permission to move altogether and there was no likely hood of Thutmose II letting the people go in small lots they would have to attack the situation in another way.

It was finally Moses who came up with the concept of asking for permission to go out into the wilderness to pray and meditate with their God Jahwhey. This was a new one to the people. Elohim was their God. What had they to do with this Jahwhey? This meant that Moses had to teach them about this new God. He then told them about an experience he had in the desert under Mt Sinai. He told how he had found this God in a burning bush and he had directed him to return to Egypt to reveal HIM to the people. He would lead them out of Egypt to the Promised Land. Just how apocryphal this tale is no one will ever know. Elohim had not got them very far so they were ready to accept this new concept and follow where Moses indicated this God was leading. Aaron would be the leader, Moses the guide.

Thus it was agreed that the people would support an appeal to Thutmose to let them go into the desert a day’s journey to worship this God they had found in the wilderness. After worshiping HIM they would return to Egypt to resume their labours. This was to be the story to the king. They all realised that they had no intentions of returning. Once out there they could keep moving and by the time that the king woke up to their non-return it would be too late to bring them back.

Page 267

EGYPT IN THE FIFTEENTH CENTURY BC. THE ERA IN WHICH MOSES LIVED. .

Page 268

CHAPTER XVII THE EXODUS IN MOTION Heotept was chief of security in the government of Thutmose II. He could not be seen to be sympathetic to the Exodus Movement although has wife was the chairwoman of the Management Committee. Visits made to the home of her parents were above suspicion especially when made at random. Consequently most meetings were held in Memphis in the courtyard or outbuildings of Amram’s household complex. Early in the day they appeared as gatherings of workers for instructions for the day. In the evening they could be passed off as staff debriefing sessions. Also this was the venue for many of the Brotherhood meetings so that a few more meetings had the appearance of being further activity of this August Body.

Although not a stone-cutter by trade Heotept was inducted into the brotherhood while Thutmose I was still on his throne. When he disappeared this membership continued, as did the Brotherhood itself unabated. Any suspicions about the activities of the Heqa Kasut that reached the National office of Security were either ignored or cursorily examined and left to die a natural death. Too many of the prominent and important people of Thutmose II’s regime were members of the Brother-hood for him to take any action against it or its members.

To ensure Moses’ freedom of movement in the city it was decided to induct him into the ‘Brotherhood’. Because of the strict adherence to the principles of equality of persons in the brotherhood, reigning kings were barred from membership. If a prince of the realm were ever inducted he remained a member on his accession to the throne but was not eligible to take an active part in its ceremonies. Thus Moses had never become a member. He had known of the existence of the Order all his life but in his youth had resisted invitations to join and later when on the throne was no longer eligible. He was now just a humble citizen of Egypt and was as eligible as any other to join this August body of men. He was not suspected of having any hand in the crime that caused the death of the High Priest of On nine years before. If he had his reception into the Brotherhood would have been impossible. They prided themselves on being

Page 269

‘squeaky-clean’ so that even a suspicion of activity not strictly upright barred men from joining and had members expelled.

Moses’ qualification to be initiated into the Brotherhood was that he was the brother of a member and the son of a Past Grand master.

His connection with the throne of Egypt was thus totally submerged.

Yet he was not totally committed to his Israeli family for the Brotherhood was more a universal Order rather than a national one.

Moses was thus free to take whatever role he had to play to support his sister Miriam in her campaign to get her people to the Promised Land.

At the appointed time Moses attended at the meeting room in Amram’s home compound. While the meeting was opened and its regular business attended to Moses waited in the anteroom. The mysterious knocking and muttering that penetrated the closed door meant nothing to him but reminded him of his childhood experiences of listening outside this building and hearing those same strange noises so many years ago. While thus waiting he mused on the thought that as a king he was barred from this place yet as a common man he was welcome. What price kingship? When the door was at last opened and he was asked to enter he was surprised to see that the room was in darkness. Not total darkness but totally unlit. He said nothing. He just followed his leader.

The first question asked of him was. “In times of distress and difficulty in whom do you put your trust?” Following the hints that had been given him in preparation for this ceremony and as a result of his own firm belief he answered. “In the Great Creator.”

From the throne set before the eastern wall of this room came a voice through the darkness saying. “Right glad am I to hear you profess such faith. No better support can there be for any man.

With such protection no harm can befall you. You will now be conducted before the brethren to show that you have been properly prepared to be made a Brother Among Men. With the blessing of the Great Architect of the Universe you will proceed on your way.”

The voice seemed familiar and as his eyes became attuned to the darkness he saw on either side of him shadowy forms of men seated on long seats on either side of the room. Looking ahead he believed that the shadow on the throne was that of his own father. Before the throne was an altar in the form of a double cube upright. On it were strange yet not strange objects. Strange, as it was a surprise to him to see them there. Not strange in that he was familiar with them all from his experiences with Jethro. They were mystical symbols in

Page 270

use from time immemorial. In the centre of the altar surface were two equilateral triangles intertwined to make a six-pointed star.

Around the star was a circle touching each point of the star. This he knew as an extremely ancient symbol of eternity. Moses was familiar with the significance of these symbols as separate units.

The triangle with its apex pointed upward represented the power, majesty and justice of the Great Creator. The triangle with its apex downward represented the mercy, goodness and bounty of the Great Creator. He realised then that the intertwined triangles must represent the Great Creator in all of his attributes and the circle to demonstrate the eternity of His Existence.

Moses was then caused to kneel before the altar while Amram, a Past Grand Master of all Egypt and acting Master of the lodge on this occasion, descended from the throne to administer to him the oath of allegiance. In this he vowed that he would never in life reveal any of the secrets about to be imparted to him under threat of the most dire punishments, the least of which was to have his life terminated. He promised to be always loyal to its members and its principles, laws and regulations. As he kissed the emblems before him as a pledge of his fidelity the room was flooded with light. To his right were several men holding swords pointed at his left breast as a symbol of the punishments he had been informed of. To his left were men holding out their arms to him as symbols of brotherly love and assistance. He was then informed that the light was a symbol of his having passed from the darkness of ignorance in the world at large to the light of Brotherly Love.

From this point he was led to face a brother seated at a small desk on the southern side of the room. Here he was instructed in the secrets by which a brother recognised a brother without revealing to the world at large that they recognised each other. This completed he was led to face another brother seated at another desk at the western side of the room. Here he was lectured on the history of the Order and made to realise its extreme antiquity. Finally he was led to stand in the centre of the room where he was instructed in the aims and objects of the Order. He was given a hint of the vast areas of study and research that would open to him as a member of this illustrious Brotherhood.

While standing here he was adorned with a workman’s apron as symbol of the honourable nature of useful work. It was also to symbolise that no matter to what high station any man should rise,

Page 271

he should never be too proud to engage in menial labourer if the need should arise.

The ceremony was concluded by the Priest of the lodge calling all members present to pray with him for the blessing of the Great Architect of the Universe to be on them and their enterprise as they left that hallowed room. He closed his prayer with the phrase “Till death shall it be.� This was repeated by all the brethren in unison as a benediction. This phrase roused in Moses a vague recollection of something important that he had learned from Jethro. But not enough arousal to identify what it was about the phrase that was important.

After the ceremony the brethren retired to the house of Amram where a repast had been prepared by his household servants. There the members who had been present at that meeting cemented their bonds of friendship in feasting and drinking.

The edict of Ahmose condemning all Heqa Kasut boy children to be terminated had long been a part of history. The slavery edict of Kamose before him had fallen so far in to disuse that it also was a dead letter. However, Heqa Kasut were still expected as always to do the most menial tasks that Egyptians themselves were too proud to engage in. These tasks were only one step above the level of the work done by regular slaves taken from the vassal States such as Libya and Nubia. Thutmose II set about reducing their status further but had not greatly succeeded. City dwellers had become subject to his oppression but those who still inhabited the great plains of the delta were largely beyond his control and they continued in their pastoral pursuits much as they had done for the past three centuries.

Mose pointed out to meeting of the executive of the movement that he preferred that someone other than himself did any speaking that was to be done in royal circles. The reason for this was that he had been in the wilderness for so long that he had lost the power of public speaking. His real reason was that he was afraid that Thutmose II would recognise his voice if he spoke too much to him.

The full beard that he now wore could be expected to disguise his face but even muffled by the beard his voice may be recognisable.

With Miriam as the guiding star and Aaron as its mouth piece thousands had already rallied to the movement. The renewed oppression by Thutmose II had driven many to believe that they could be better off somewhere else. So many meetings of the disgruntled were convened in the heartland of the Israelis between

Page 272

the delta and the Red Sea arm of the Gulf of Sweis that the movement had the credit of being a ‘grass roots’ development. The discontent among the people and the resolutions made by them filtered upward to Miriam and her nephew Joshua in such quantities that Joshua used the effective communication system that he had developed to keep him and Miriam informed of what was happening and the people with what they were trying to do for them. Each Nome was classified as a region of the Movement. Israelis over the three centuries of their occupation had filtered into this region and now made up the vast majority of its population.

Moses was introduced to the groups as having brought with him much knowledge from Midian and being qualified to approach the king of Egypt for a peaceful agreement for them to leave Egypt and settle elsewhere. Moses was said to have brought with him special powers from this mystical East that would persuade the king that God was on the side of the Israelis. This display of power would convince him that he must negotiate a settlement.

Back in Egypt Moses discovered that when he, as Thutmose, fled from his imagined terror, his wife, Hatshepsut who was his natural daughter to Nefertari reigned as queen in her own right until a body, accepted as t hat of the missing king was found and his death established as a fact in law. His son Mosesa was declared his rightful successor. As Thutmose was considered to be illegitimate Thutmose II married Hatshepsut, his God Mother and natural mother to establish his right to the throne and the right of his children. He had two sons. The older one was the issue of his legal wife whom he had married as a young man while his younger was to his favourite concubine. Both of these children had a significant part to play in the story as it unfolded. Moses had a daughter to Hatshepsut. She was named Nefere but was never destined to mount the throne in Memphis.

When it was appropriate to do so Heo arranged an audience for Aaron and Moses with the king. To project the image of a benevolent despot Thut was happy to interview these representatives of the oppressed people. On the appointed day Moses and Aaron were ushered into the audience chamber. The king was seated on his high throne. On either side of the petitioners was a continuous line of Palace guards. On either side and behind the king were numerous courtiers consisting of ministers and advisers. Among these were many court magicians without which no self-respecting king would conduct an audience.

Page 273

Aaron addressed the king. “Oh. Mighty king. Lord of all the Earth.

We humbly beseech thee to alleviate the hard lot of our people. We have laboured hard these many years. Great storehouses have been built and cities erected to the glory of Egypt. For all this we have received no reward and have never yet laid any complaint regarding the severity of our labours. We now crave your mercy and kindness to enable us to retire into the wilderness for a short time. This is for no frivolous reason. We wish only to worship our God, Jahwhey, in the peace and seclusion that can be obtained nowhere else but in the vastness of the desert country. Our labours are heavy and leave us no time to worship HIM as we ought. The God that we worship is the Great Creator of Heaven and Earth. We ask very little. Only a few weeks in the wilderness and we will then return to our labours for you. That is indeed so little to ask of you.”

The king replied. “Thoth is the Great Creator of Heaven and Earth.

There is none greater. Who is this Jahwhey that you call upon?”

“Oh. Great King. Jahwhey is the creator of all other gods. He has led us for many generations.”

“He hasn’t led you very well. You even have to ask me for permission to worship him. Your people have the nights, when you are not working to do this worship thing.”

“Oh. Mighty Thutmose. I have beside me a messenger from our God, Jahwhey. He will demonstrate to you the power of our GOD. After that you may wish to negotiate with us for HIS people to retire for a short time to worship as we ought.”

“You have a sign?”

“We have.” Declared Aaron as he cast his staff onto the floor. As he did so Moses gestured toward the people lining the walls of the chamber and finished with a flourish over the staff lying on the floor. The staff immediately appeared to turn into a deadly asp, which crawled toward the people. They instinctively cringed away from this danger as it approached them with its forked tongue flashing in and out of its opened jaws. Its fangs could be seen hanging from its upper mandible in a head raised to attack revealing its red and angry underbelly. Before it could reach the people Moses raced after it, grasped it by the tail and restored it into Aaron’s staff.

The king roared with laughter to the consternation of Aaron and the chagrin of Moses. The audience smiled uncomfortably not knowing whether to laugh with the king or to be in awe of the two performers.

Page 274

Thutmose beckoned to the leader of the magicians, adorned in the splendour of his official robes. An electric blue cape draped from his shoulders covered the whole of his body. On his head was a high pointed cap coloured in royal purple and studded with the many signs of the Zodiac done in silver. These were the heavenly bodies reputed to rule the affairs of mortal men. In his hand was a long wand. He handed this to his assistant who was dressed in a scarlet robe similarly adorned as his own. In his head was a cylindrical cap adorned with the signs of the Zodiac in gold.

This assistant magician threw that wand and his own onto the floor while his chief gestured as Moses had done. There, before the eyes of that great number of witnesses, two much larger asps crawled where Moses’ had only moments before.

The king cried out. “An old parlour trick. I remember it well.

Played time and time again at parties I have attended since childhood. Get out of here you old fraud and don’t waste my time again.” He laughed heartily at what he considered to be the total discredit of these Heqa Kasut petitioners.

Not to be outdone Moses threw his staff onto the floor. At his hasty gesture it became a sleek giant python that raced across the floor and swallowed its rivals in two might gulps. Moses followed its path and appeared to grasp it by the tail and whip it back into a staff. He grasped this firmly in his hand as he turned sharply to Aaron and said. “Let’s get out of here while these bastards are still in shock over that little effort.”

For shock it was that was registered on every face in that chamber, even that of the king. The laugh that he gave as they rushed from the chamber was as much in admiration of this latest trick as it was in derision for the first debacle.

As they strode down the centre of the chamber Aaron said to Moses.

“What’s the hurry? We are safe while in the palace. Heo negotiated safe passage for us while here.”

“I know that.” Replied Moses. “But don’t count on it. You know as well as I do that kings can not be relied on to keep their word.

Especially this one.”

“God help us then.”

“Oh. HE has. Thut is still helpless with laughter over the beating of his magicians. He has no more respect for them than he has for the temple and the priesthood. Listen.”

As they approached the open door they could hear the voice of Thut upbraiding his chief magician. “You think you are the best. Beat

Page 275

that one if you can. He has taken your wands and staff with him, incase you haven’t noticed.”

“Keep walking.” Instructed Moses. “While he continues to chuckle and laugh at them we are safe.” In his right hand were the two magician’s wands and his own staff. While the audience had been in the state of hypnotic trance he had taken them all up together and calmly walked off with them.

After leaving the palace grounds they wended their way back to the home of Amram. No one followed them. It was well known who they were and where they came from. This debacle made them appear to the king as harmless pretenders and he had dismissed them from his mind before they had left the palace.

On the way home Aaron could not resist giving vent to his disappointment over the outcome of this audience. “You certainly blew that one, brother. Fancy trying to get away with an old parlour trick known to the king since childhood. I expected better of you than that.”

“Don’t take it too hard, my brother. The king had no intention of meeting our request, no matter how we had put it. Far better that he thinks of us as of no account. He is less likely then to take action against us. You must admit, though, that making my staff to appear to eat up theirs caused a minor sensation and earned his Magi some scorn. He will attempt to counter every sign that I give. That is why his magicians were in attendance. He will continue that way.

At least I gave him some reason to laugh at them. This reduces their impact.”

“I hope that you know what you are doing. Seems to me that we went backwards today, rather than forward.”

“Give it time. He is my son, remember. He doesn’t know that yet and may never know it. He will be a hard nut to crack but he will break when the going gets tough enough. We have an advantage in that I know who he is but he does not know who I am or anything about what I am now. He has no idea what I can do. The uncertainty will put him off balance.”

“We’ll have to better than we did today, though.”

“Never fear. We will.”

“I hope you are right. That is all.” Was Aaron’s final word as they traversed the streets of the city on their way home.

The repercussions from this encounter were not long in hitting the Israeli work force. The very next day workers in the brickyards of

Page 276

the city of Memphis came to the time for their midday meal break.

They paused and were about to gather at their eating places when the overseers called out to them. “Hey. Wh’re d’ ya think you’re goin’?”

“We have achieved our morning quota and it is time to eat.”

“You have not. Keep at it till you do.”

“We have. Check the stacks and verify.”

“Have already. The numbers are the same as yesterday. It is not enough.”

“What do you mean, not enough?” Even while the question was being asked the spokesman for the workers knew what the answer would be.

“Quota’s been increased. Orders came in this morning. See. Here is the written order. Came direct from the big boss, the Works Minister himself.”

“Why were we not told earlier? We could have worked little harder to finish before lunch. We already working to full capacity but we could have made an attempt to increase numbers.”

“Orders is orders.”

“What’s on?”

“How should I know. I only work ‘ere too, ya know.”

“What about eating? We’ll need strength for the harder work this afternoon.”

“No orders about that.”

“What about if one of us goes off to collect our meals and we eat them while working this afternoon?”

“No orders about that either. Do what you like about your meal but get the numbers up by next knock off time. That’s all.”

“We’ll do that.”

“You’d better. If you know what’s good for ya.”

So the first day after Moses assault on Thutmose passed in many cities and towns of Lower Egypt. The new quotas were filled and the workers soon got into their stride to produce as required. Some resentment was felt at the increased workload but it was not sufficient to cause an outcry against it.

Some weeks passed by and there had been no disturbance. No further request came from Aaron for another audience. Thutmose planned a royal visit to Thebes. Kamose was long dead but a successor had been installed in his place so that the two kingdoms were not yet made one. All routine communication between the two rulers was by diplomatic exchange.

This visit was more of a

Page 277

personal family matter so Thutmose needed to be there in person. A festival to Thoth was due to be performed there and Thut timed his visit to coincide with that as he wished to participate in the festival.

A large party was to accompany him. Five Royal ships were required to transport the entire retinue to Thebes.

The ships were lined up at the Royal wharves within sight of the house that Amram and his family still occupied. In the two leading ships were the officials attending the ceremonies in Thebes. On the two rear ships was the guard that accompanied the king on all such expeditions. The centre one awaited the king’s pleasure to board.

Loyal citizens were lined several deep on either side of the Royal Way to farewell their king as he set off to represent them all to the Great Thoth.

Aaron and Moses were among the crowd. Not in disguise but mingled with the people inconspicuously. The king and his escort approached the waiting ships. The king mounted the gangplank and turned to wave a farewell to his people. As he did so Moses and Aaron stepped out from the crowd and confronted him.

“You two again!” Cried the king.

“Yes.” Cried out Aaron boldly. “We have come to again petition you to ‘Let our people go’. A few days only, is all that we ask. A day’s journey into the wilderness is surely not too much to ask?”

“The lesson I administered after your last bumbling effort was not enough. Eh! What does it take for you to realise that the answer is NO. NO. NO WAY. Your people will have to work a lot harder than they do to get three days away. One to go, one to do whatever you will do and one to come back. That is not a promise, only a suggestion.”

“Not enough. We need to go two days journey into the wilderness and spend several days there.”

“Never.”

“You leave us no alternative then.” Said Aaron as Moses stepped forth. He gestured toward the heavens and with his rod described a circle in the air above his head. He paused a moment then brought it down smartly to point at the water in the river.

The king laughed and called out. “What is all that nonsense about?”

“You’ll see. You may now complete the boarding of your vessel.”

That said both Moses and Aaron mingled with the crowd again and the king turned his back on them, strode up the rest of the gangplank and across the deck of the ship to his quarters. As he did so he gestured to the captain to cast off and begin the journey. As he

Page 278

entered his cabin his cupbearer handed him a refreshing drink, so he thought. The king took one sip and spat it out so violently that it spattered into the face of his servant who started back in horror.

“What is this poison you have given me?” Declared the king in anger.

“No. Sire. Wine freshly drawn from this cask right beside you.”

“You lie. Look in this cup.” He had glanced into it as he spat out the unpleasant mouthful into the face of his servant. He now held it out for him to inspect. “What do you see?”

“A thick red liquid. Looks like blood.” Taking the cup from the king he examined it carefully. He put his finger into it and cautiously tasted what clung to its tip. His verdict. Real Blood.

Thick and dark as though coming from an opened vein. Not coloured water as he at first suspected.

His cupbearer emptied the dregs into the river and drew another cup from the cask with the same result. He handed the cup to the king for his inspection. As he did so he glanced over the side of the ship and kept watching in horror as the stain of the dregs he had thrown there spread in ever widening circles out toward the main stream of the river. His quick intake of breath alerted the king to something else wrong. He too looked over the side of the ship and saw to his horror the surface of the river appeared to be blood. Real blood, not just the early morning sun glinting from it.

Thut then shouted to the captain to abort the cast off. He glared into the crowd but the objects of his gaze had disappeared into the multitude. Two soldiers were sent to check the vessel’s main water supply. It too had turned to blood. Other soldiers were detailed to dig into the ground beside the quay. The water that seeped into the holes also appeared as blood.

The chief court magician was in the leading ship. No self-respecting king would travel without one. He was called for and ordered immediately to the king’s ship.

“You are aware of what has happened?” Questioned the king.

“Yes. Sire. It has happened on our ship also.”

“Then do something about it, and no foul up this time. We don’t want another magician’s wand swallowed up by this bloody water.”

“I’ll need some time to work out the strength and nature of the spell.”

“You have two minutes. I am anxious to be off.”

“But. Sire. This spell may….”

“But me no buts. Get on with it.”

Page 279

“Yes. Sire.” From the magician who had thus been given no alternative than to concentrate on what he had seen and heard over the last few minutes. He was still smarting from the humiliation he had been subjected to in the palace not very long ago. He had recognised Moses and Aaron as they had stepped out from the crowd and had carefully noted ever movement that Moses had made. Now he stood on the deck of the king’s ship. He held his wand in his left hand as Moses had held his in his right. He described circle in the air above his head but in an anticlockwise direction as he had seen Moses make his circle clockwise. Then as Moses had thrust his rod forward this magician drew his toward himself. At last, with his hands outstretched he brought his arms together and downward.

Turning to the king he said, not without some trepidation. “Draw again from the cask.”

The cupbearer did so and cool, fresh, pleasant tasting wine came forth. He tasted it diffidently and handed the cup to the king.

The king drank deeply to prove that the drink was all that it appeared to be. He then turned to his chief magician and said.

“Now turn it back into blood.”

A look of utter amazement covered the face of this personage. His mouth opened voluntarily and stayed open.

“Stop gaping.” Demanded the king. “And get on with it. Or is that simple task too much for you?”

“As you will, sire.” He responded resignedly and repeated the actions of Moses as he had seen him when he first cast the spell. Lo and behold, he succeeded and all the water in the water casks, the wine in its cask and the water of the river were all again as blood.

The king grunted. Then demanded that the blood be removed so that he could get on with his journey to Thebes. The soldiers of the Palace Guard were witnesses to all this activity and their commander paused to ask the king. “Sire, What about the two miscreants that caused all this bother. Shall we apprehend them on our way back to the palace?”

“Did you see which way they went?”

“No. Sire.”

“Then leave them for now. We have dallied long enough on our departure. It is me that they are after. They will be no bother to anyone now till I return from Thebes. We will not need to look for those two fools. They will find us. But, this episode can not go unmarked. Get a message to the Inspector General Heotept to look

Page 280

out for them and take a message to the Comptroller of Works to increase the workload on the Heqa Kasut labourers. Let me see.

Ah, that’s it. No more straw will be supplied. The brick makers will find their own straw and the builders their own mortar without any reduction in production quotas. That should keep their noses a little closer to the grindstone. Give them less time to think about the long holiday that they do not deserve.”

The five Royal ships then slipped their moorings and pushed out into the stream with the wind in their sails driving them toward Thebes. It would be more than two months later that they would return to Memphis.

The first that the brick makers knew about the new rules was when one of them called for more straw. He was roughly told. “Get your own. Heqa Kasut dog.”

“Since when?”

“Since now. Order came in this morning.”

“Will quotas be reduced to compensate?”

“Of course not. Why should they be? You lot h’ve had ‘t too easy for too long. Orders is orders. Heqa Kasut dogs are to get their own straw without any loss of production. Not one tiny little brick less or you are for it.”

“But, how can we? We are flat out now to make the quota. How can we do it when we must get our own straw as well?”

“That’s your worry. Dog of a Heqa Kasut. Orders are the same number of bricks and the same construction results. No more questions, just get to it.”

All teams had to work late into the nights for the first few days of this new imposition. But, with the help of their families they did manage to both keep up their quota and provide the straw needed..

Their family members who were not actually engaged in the brick making and building took time off from their own activities to gather the straw that was needed. Thus the impossible was achieved but at great cost to the whole Hebrew community.

Ever since the time of the Hebrew settlement in Egypt their heartland of Goshen had rendered them self-supporting. Ever since the conquest by Kamose they had continued to enjoy a certain, though limited autonomy. This latest impost caused them to suffer a form of double taxation. They were paying in kind working the brickyards and were paying again in the loss of income on their

Page 281

properties. The restrictions were beginning to bite hard and many of the people were very unhappy about it.

At a meeting of the Exodus Movement in Memphis subsequent to the episode at the riverside there was a greater attendance than usual. These were not Memphis people. They had come in from the heartland of Goshen. At first Moses was glad to see these new faces. It appeared that there must be a growing interest in people participation with the city dwellers in the Movement. On closer inspection he revised his estimate. There was something not quite right in their appearance. Not the clothes they were wearing but in their apparent attitude as they stood at the rear of the room. He sensed ill will in their lowering looks. They had a challenging stance about them. They were bunched together and gazing furtively from side to side at the rest of the gathering.

Moses leaned over and whispered to Miriam. “Who are these newcomers?” Do you know any of them or anything about them? I have not seen any of them before.”

“I’m sorry but I recognize very few of them. Some seem to be familiar but only vaguely. That is all. They look like trouble to me.”

“To me too. That is why I asked if you knew any of them.”

“It is their furtiveness that worries me. We must play it by ear and face any trouble that comes as best we can. Let‘s hope that we can handle it and that Elohim may guide us in what we do.” Miriam was worried.

Moses replied to this. “Jahwhey it is. That is the new name revealed to me by Jethro. I certainly hope that He is ready to help us. I don’t like the atmosphere at all.”

“Neither do I. However, here goes.” With that Miriam, needing no introduction by the chairman of the meeting, addressed the assembly.

“I shall not waste words.” She began. “You are all well aware of the new oppression imposed on us by Thutmose. He is a stubborn man.

Self willed and refusing to see reason. I realize that these new imposts must be making things even harder for you all. I can assure you that our God Jahwhey is with us and that we will win out in the end. The hardships we are now enduring will make the reward more valuable to us. We will return to the Land of our Father Abraham.

The land promised to him by Elohim who now comes to you under his new name of Jahwhey, The Almighty. We have been remiss while in this land. We have strayed from the Promise. Our

Page 282

predecessors in this land have forgotten the promises. They have been content to enjoy the pleasures of Egypt rather than make the effort to move. For ten generations we have made no move to avail ourselves of the promises given to our fathers Abraham and Jacob.

These tribulations have been sent to us to arouse us from our lethargy. To make us realize where we are and where we should be and what we should be doing about it. This king is not as kindly disposed to us as his father was. He made it possible for us to move out of this land. But, did we take this opportunity? NO. Now it will be many times more difficult. We must grasp the nettle and defy the king in order that Jahwhey can act on our behalf. We must trust in HIM to give us the strength to endure till we can leave here with honour and go to occupy the Land of The Promise.”

There was appropriate applause to this speech as Miriam paused to gather her thoughts to go on. It could not be loud as such a noise would attract unwelcome attention. Underlying the applause was a sinister murmuring that indicated some dissent to the thoughts presented to them. It came from the group of newcomers gathered at the rear of the room. Above the general murmuring that was the background to the Miriam’s pause for breath came voices. It was hard to distinguish what the words were but they sounded to Moses like. “We’ll all die of over work before we can get away.” Another voice seemed respond to that with. “Then what good will any Promised Land be?”

He leaned across to Miriam and said quietly. “The natives are getting restless.”

“I know.” She whispered back. “But we must carry on for now.

The business we have brought here tonight for them to consider may take some of the heat out off.”

Moses merely nodded and his sister continued to speak. “Tonight we must consider what we shall do if we do not get the desired permission from Thutmose to go two days’ journey away to worship Jahwhey. If we can get his permission we could go with a workable treaty that would give us legal access to Caanan. Almost thirty kings reign in that land now so it is not unoccupied. It never was in the time of Father Abraham. If we do not get permission there will be considerable fighting. This we want to avoid. It would be a long hard campaign of conquest if we have to fight our way into that land. A legal occupation with the ‘blessing’ of Thutmose would make our resettlement in that land much quicker and more rewarding.

Page 283

“Tonight we have with us Joshua who devised a system by which we can be alerted when the time comes to Move Out. He will fill you in on what to expect and how we will go about it if we have to fight our way out. Because of his expertise in the field he will be our Military advisor and commander in the field. Also he has devised a system of codes that will be sent to your representatives so that messages can get from us to you and from you to us secure from the Egyptian spies that will multiply in the land as Thutmose gets more stubborn. I would like you to take careful note of what you learn tonight and take it back with you to your communities. Any suggestions as to improvement will be carefully considered and adopted if appropriate. As the time of final departure draws closer you will receive the final plans as they are formulated. Joshua will now address you further.”

Joshua then rose and addressed the meeting. “Comrades.” He began. “As Miriam has already told you, no details of movement will be given to you tonight. These will be sent out in code at the appropriate time. However, I can tell you that the movement will be in accordance with the communications system that we are now using to get messages from us to you and from you to us. Our management committee is made up of delegates from your own towns and cities. The governing five will make the final decisions and these will be transmitted to you through the network as it is now. For reasons of security written messages will be avoided wherever possible. Anything written will not be kept any longer than is necessary to commit it to memory. The papyrus will then be destroyed. You will be kept informed as often as is possible of what is happening from time to time. Any questions?”

A shout came from the back of the room. It was from that very group that was the nucleus of the small disturbances of the evening.

“I move that we call the whole thing off. All that has been achieved so far is trouble and more trouble. Send this cheap import from Midian back to where he came from. We all know how he has been upsetting the king with his cheap tricks. He is a laughing stock and is making a joke of us all. He is the cause of our daily increase in toil. It was bad before he came but it is much worse since. What is the good of planning to leave the country when there will soon be none of us alive to leave it. Besides that, soldiers are now thicker than flies around the country. The closer we get to going the worse they will get. Let’s get rid of him and the trouble he has brought us.”

Page 284

“I’ll second that motion.” Came from thirty voices in the same crowd. Then another voice arose above the din. “Let’s get back to real life. Dreams will not get us peace at home or time with our families.”

Moses turned to Miriam before any more could be said and offered to ‘Zap’ the trouble makers into quiet submission. “It will not do them any real harm but will put an end to this disturbance and we can then get on with the job.”

“No.” Retorted Miriam emphatically. “Keep your nasty temper under control. That is not the way to treat them. It will only build resentment and we have enough of that about already. I will talk to them.” She rose to address them but before she could open her mouth a loud voice from the rear of the room called out. “So. Her high and mightiness, the Lady Miriam, will pull us into line. You are safe from toil in your great mansion and high station. No one has forced you to break your back for the king and get whipped for it into the bargain. You’re safe from it all. It’s us who’ve to bear the burden for the likes of you.”

“If it were not for my husband you would all be much worse off than you are. You can be sure of that.”

“Don’t expect us to believe that nonsense.” Shouted another.

Miriam stood wordlessly until the noise died down. Then she spoke again. “If you keep up that noise you’ll have the troops in on us now. I can not tell you in what ways my husband has assisted you.

If that were known his ability to further help would be severely curtailed. I can only assure you on my honour as a Hebrew that if it were not for him your burdens would be twice what they are.”

“God help us. They are too heavy now.” Was the shouted reply still regardless of the danger of noise.

“No more of this dodging.” Came another demanding voice. “You have a motion before the meeting. Put it now.”

“Very well. I shall call for a vote. Friends, you have all heard the motion that was put earlier and seconded. Just to be sure I will spell it out again. ‘The motion is that we suspend all action toward an attempt to leave this land of oppression and journey to and occupy the Land promised to our Father Abraham and continue to live here in abject humility under the heel of our conquerors.’”

A shout from the back of the room again. “That is not what I said.”

“But that is what you meant and that is how I am putting it to the people.” Replied Miriam to this challenge. “Those in favour of this motion as I have put it please raise your right hands. High.”

Page 285

All of the agitators put up their hands, some both of them. A few others hesitantly raised their hands in a half-hearted manner. Even so it was obvious that the motion was lost. Most of the people there had their hands down by their sides. Without comment Miriam asked for those against and the forest of hands that responded indicated without any doubt the mood of the meeting.

“Count. We demand a count.” Cried the rebels. They were nothing if not persistent.

“Come now, People.” Said Miriam in a placatory tone. “A count will only confirm what is obvious from here.”

“Not from here it isn’t. We demand a head count.”

“To prove the decision to you we will have a head count.” She could see that nothing else would satisfy these rebels and to keep them quiet she had made that decision. Joshua was detailed to organize four scrutineers to monitor the count. Two to each side of the room. All the ayes were stood on Miriam’s right and the nays to her left. The nays were obviously in the majority for there was not room for them all on her left. They filled most of the room.

Nevertheless a count was proceeded with and the nays proved to be five times the ayes. The motion was lost. The agitators stormed out of the room. If they were not quieter on their way home they would be taken by a patrol for disorderly conduct.

As they were leaving Moses said to Miriam. “Let me zap them now as they go out. That will let them know that they can not get away with that sort of thing.”

“NO. NO. Never.” As she stamped her foot for emphasis. “We will never get them on side if we treat them like that. We must have their cooperation voluntarily. All must be in accord or we will not succeed. We must expect that there will sure to be some who will prefer to stay behind. No force can be used. We can and must succeed without it.”

“I guess you are right.” Responded Moses. “You always have been. Big sister. If I had listened to you we could have been in the Promised Land by now.”

“Possibly. Anyhow, where did you learn this zapping you are so anxious to use?”

“In Midian of course. My father-in-law, bless his devious old heart, is the Priest of Midian. A practiced and capable magician. He could run rings round most of these sycophants that fawn on that ill willed and headstrong son of mine who has had the effrontery to take my reigning name. Couldn’t find one of his own. Jethro

Page 286

trained me well. I should be more successful than I have been so far. There is something missing from my technique. It is quite simple but it eludes me. Probably because of the tensions here. It will come back to me. Not too late I hope.”

“I hope so too or we are done for. You can see how the people are reacting. Those who were here tonight could stir up a great deal of trouble and bring all of our efforts to naught.”

“Of that I am well aware, My sister. It has me worried. I pray that God will restore to my memory what it is lacking.”

“So shall I.” At this they parted each to retire to his/her own domicile for the night.

Aaron, Moses and Joshua were very busy during the weeks that Thutmose spent in Thebes. A secretariat had to be set up to handle the vetting and monitoring of their message relay system which was the culmination of some years of experimentation. The Movement had its roots in the fourth year of the reign of Thutmose II. It was now in his tenth year and the urgency was growing amongst the people for real action. Joshua was in charge of the logistics of the Exodus but he was still active in the armed forces of Egypt. The only way to carry out the designs of the executive was to recruit hundreds of assistants from the Israeli people. This process was put in place at this time. Hundreds were already employed in this work but with the urgency mounting many more were required.

All messages had now to be in code. Many of these new recruits would be engaged in coding and decoding so all of these had to be vetted for ability to do this work. The risk of leakage was small but it had to be nil. If slightest hint of any covert activity got to the king the whole exercise would have to be aborted.

The activities of Moses and Aaron were doubly important. They were to keep pressure on the king so that eventually, willingly or otherwise, he would give his permission for all of the people to leave the country. He must be made to understand that it would be in his own best interest to let the people go. In the meantime he must also be kept occupied in a direction that took his attention away from the conspirators covert activities. This was made less difficult by the partial blindness of Heo to their actions.

As the Royal Fleet floated down on the sluggish current of the mighty Nile from Thebes on its return to Memphis messengers were

Page 287

sent ahead to alert the Capital so that an appropriate welcome could be organized for the returning monarch. The city was then in a turmoil of preparations.

Officials sent messages to all the appropriate segments of society to ensure that the monarch would be suitably welcomed. On the morning of the expected arrival the Royal Way was early lined with eager citizens assembled on either side of it. A contingent of the Royal Palace Guard was detailed to keep the crowd in check by deploying on either side of the roadway.

Another contingent was paraded on the wharf to guard the Royal party as it alighted from the ships.

Gliding along on the bosom of Mother Nile the five ships of the royal Fleet approached the wharves with their sails furled. This was to minimize the effect of the prevailing North Wind from slowing their progress. The oars were shipped and the crew of each boat lined the gunwales ready to warp the vessel to its berth. Each steersman held firmly to his mighty steering oar he and his partner wielded so that the first part of the ship to contact the wharf was its stern. A crewman on that side of the ship threw a line to a landsman on the wharf. He quickly warped it round a bollard to stop any further forward movement of the stern. This caused the rest of the hull to gently swing into the edge of the wharf. Other lines were then cast off to be tied to other bollards to secure the ship safely.

Gangplanks were then run out for the occupants of the vessels to disembark. The first to alight were the king’s attendants. They ran down the gangplank and lined themselves up to receive him and lead him to his chariot awaiting his pleasure. This was the Royal chariot emblazoned in gold that glinted in the fierce Egyptian morning sun. The precious stones that adorned it sparkled in the intense light. The rising sun was at his back lighting up the faces of his subjects waiting to receive him. As he stepped to the head of the gangplank the crowd roared its welcome. In response he stretched to his full height, feeling ten feet tall. The rising sun behind him gave him the appearance of a God come down to Earth.

He held up his hands in that universal and time honoured gesture calling for silence. The crowd’s roar subsided to a murmur. He began to address them. He wanted to thank them for such a tumultuous welcome.

His mouth was opened to speak but no words came. Out of the midst of the crowd rose a commanding voice. The voice of Aaron in full flight.

Page 288

“LET OUR PEOPLE GO.” He cried and there was Moses right beside him to show the power of his god Jahwhey.

The king stiffened at his stand. He muttered to himself. ‘Not these two again, already. How were they allowed to get into the act?

Someone will pay for this little lot.’

Aloud he called out in reply. ‘NO. NEVER.” Every ear in the vast multitude heard every word.

With hardly a pause for breath Thutmose said to the commander of the guard. “Arrest those two. NOW.” They were so stunned by this turn of events that they were slow to act. “Get on with it.”

Demanded the king. “Are your feet stuck to the ground? They’ll get away at the rate you are moving.”

Even as the command was given Moses had gestured toward the ship making the form of an equilateral triangle in the air. He then spread his arms wide above his head at the same time calling on Jahwhey to strike. Before anyone could move the air was riven with the sounds of ‘RIBBET, RIBBET, CRARK, CRARK.’ Millions of frogs were everywhere. The soldiers attempting to obey the king’s orders tripped over them and slid on their slimy backs.

Many fell off the ships into the river as they tried to move about.

Soldiers on the wharf attempted to obey the king’s orders but they too were frustrated by the croaking and leaping frogs. Frogs of all sizes and colours imaginable. Big ones. Small ones. Middle sized ones. Green, puce, tan and striped. They leapt on the people standing by the Royal Way. They leapt all over the five ships of the fleet and the people standing on their decks. “Get these things off me.” Bellowed the king in deep distress. He hated frogs just as many people hate spiders. He looked round at his escort to see why they were not protecting him from this scourge. It was not that they would not help him. They could not. Every move that they made was frustrated by falling over or slipping on the bodies of these accursed frogs. Many had toppled into the water as they slipped and fell. There they fell onto frogs swimming in the muddy water.

Thutmose looked along the Royal Way to see what his tormenters were doing. They were nowhere to be seen. They had slipped away again. The crowds were too engrossed in getting away from this plague to worry about where Moses and Aaron had gotten to. By the time that the soldiers had gathered themselves together the miscreants had disappeared from their sight.

The horses harnessed to the chariot were standing quite still as though nothing was happening. They could see nothing untoward.

Page 289

Their driver, standing on the platform of the chariot with the reins in his hand, was not disturbed by the frogs cavorting on the ground.

Two soldiers were detailed to make a path for the king. They swept their swords in low arcs shifting frogs left and right to make a way for the king to board his chariot. With the king aboard it moved toward the palace. The triumphal procession was no more. The people were all getting away as fast as they could so that before the king had arrived at the palace gates the crowds had completely melted away. The frogs had taken over the whole scene. He looked back from the gate as he entered it and saw a sea of frogs where his triumphal reception had been. The noise of their croaking was deafening. His anger was at fever pitch and he determined to put an end to this persecution. He would refuse any demands and make the people suffer. He heaved a mighty sigh of relief when he had entered the palace grounds and the great gates had been shut behind him.

The he noticed a strange and eerie silence. It reminded him of the deathly silence that follows a wild storm. These are rare enough in Egypt for each be really memorable. He held his head to one side to listen to the silence. He stepped down from his chariot. He strode to the gates and demanded that they be opened again. He looked out along the way he had just come.

NOTHING. Not a thing met his gaze. No frogs. No people. The whole area was as quiet as a tomb.

He stood there. He scratched his head. He shook it. He then nodded his head. He looked up at the western sky where the sun had not yet arrived. He had a full half-day before the sun set over the western desert. He put his hand to his head and strode purposefully across the courtyard to his private apartment in the palace.

Taking time to clean up after his experience with the frogs and his journey from Thebes Thutmose carefully considered what had just happened to him. He called his ‘Chief Minister’ and had a long conference with him. He then issued him some instructions.

Heralds were sent throughout the city to call the people to assemble in the square before the palace at noon the following day. They were promised a spectacle that they would never forget. The chief magician was summoned to appear before his king. He had orders to appear early in the evening after the king had finished his evening meal.

Thut’s first words to this august personage were. “Were both your arms broken this afternoon?”

Page 290

“Sire!?” Was the reply.

That plague of frogs that attacked us as we came ashore this afternoon. Why did you not do some thing about it?”

“What plague of frogs, sir?” ”You mean to say that you heard and saw nothing strange this afternoon when we disembarked from the ships on our return from Thebes?”

“NO, Sire. I was very busy in my cabin and I was paying no attention to what was happening on the wharves. I heard and saw nothing untoward. However, when I did look out I was surprised to see nothing at all. I had expected to see yourself and entourage departing in splendour toward the palace. No even any stragglers were to be seen. The whole landscape was empty”.

“You heard and saw nothing?”

He was not about to admit that he had gone to sleep as they approached home and slept right through the berthing and the debarking. The king appeared to be angry enough about something to be dangerous if antagonized any further. Better to let sleeping dogs lie, if you get my drift. He just shook his head. “Not a thing, Sire. Should I have?”

“Possibly not. Anyway, that confirms my suspicions.”

The chief magician made no comment. His face carried no expression.

“Do you remember those two characters who accosted us as we were leaving for Thebes on this tour?”

“Oh. Those two. Who could forget them? A couple of amateurs if ever there were. Elementary stuff.”

“Not so elementary this afternoon. As we were about to disembark and progress to the palace these two obstructed the way and attacked us with frogs. Frogs of all sizes and colours came from everywhere and were everywhere. They frightened off the people and tripped up the soldiers of the Guard as they went to arrest them. One odd thing I noticed was that the horses drawing my chariot saw nothing. You would expect them to panic in a real situation like that. They would be screaming in terror. It was as though the frogs were not there.

The driver too was unimpressed. It was the same with the escort chariot. When I entered the palace gates and closed them the whole lot disappeared completely as though they had never been. The two characters who perpetrated this crime melted into the crowd. A patrol has been out all the rest of the day looking for them but they can not be found.”

Page 291

Still the chief magician said nothing. His expression did not change.

“Is this a manifestation of what I think it is?” Asked the king.

“What do you think that it is, Sire.” Was the only response to this request.

“Mass hypnotism. There is nothing there. We are made to think that there is.”

Not being willing to give away his trade secrets especially to this king the chief magician demurred at this simplistic explanation.

“Sire. It is not as simple as that. What made you come to that conclusion?”

“Well. The horses, for one thing. And another. The moment I entered the palace grounds the noise stopped and the horrid things were there no longer. Just as though it was all a dream.”

“Hmm. That could very well be. The whole thing was, possibly, under control from a distance. It didn’t last. You say.”

“No. NO. It didn’t last. As I said to you, the moment I entered the palace gates the whole thing was gone as though I was waking from a dream.”

“Yes. These manifestations can be set for a limited time or can be revoked from a distance after the setter of the spell has left the scene. Or, again the perpetrator could have been watching from hiding and terminated the spell the moment that you entered the gates. Any thing at all could have been done. All spells are subject to these controls. Only a specially skilled operator can make them last permanently or render them not repeatable by others.”

“Don’t throw sand in my eyes. Can you. Or can’t you duplicate this effect? As you did the other two?”

“Oh, yes. That is no great difficulty but it will take some time to work it all out. The situation has to be assessed. The time it was cast. The duration of the spell. Just how much power will be needed to cover the area required.”

“Don’t bullshit me. Can you do it?”

“Yes. Certainly.”

“When?”

“Several days to get it right. You wouldn’t want it to go wrong. We must get it right the first time. There will be no second chance. It makes us look so bad if we have to do it twice.”

“You have till noon tomorrow.”

“Noon tomorrow!”

Exclaimed the magician with total horror written all over his face. “You know not what you ask.”

Page 292

“I do know what I ask. Noon tomorrow. Right outside the Palace gates for maximum effect. There will be a huge crowd there. These charlatans have to be stopped. We can not afford to have thousands of workers taken out for even a few days worshipping this God they have suddenly discovered. I suspect that they have no intention of returning after they have finished this worshipping stunt. They are a stiff-necked lot. We paid and paid when they ruled in this delta.

Now that we have them under control it is high time that they paid us back. I intend to see that they do.

“Enough of that explanation. Noon tomorrow.”

“You make it extremely difficult, Sire. I am afraid that I can not guarantee success at such short notice with so little information.”

“You have not been asked to guarantee, yet, but, Thoth himself won’t help you if you fail. His name is on the line also. Remember that.”

“I fully realise that. But, noon tomorrow gives us almost no room for error. Might I have free reign in whom I call to assist?”

“Certainly. But there must be no error. You will be suitably rewarded if you succeed. I can say that with certainty.”

Through the mind of the chief magician went the thought, ‘and suitably rewarded if we fail.’ It got no further than his inner mind.

He replied to the final remark with. “Serving you is reward enough, Sire.”

The king’s thoughts on that assertion would not bear repeating. He well knew that if this person, the chief magician, and his staff were not ‘adequately’ rewarded according to their estimate that would be the last peep he would get out of them for a long time to come and there was nothing he would be able to do about it.

That night as Heo and Miriam sat together after their evening meal he said to her. “I don’t know what the king has in mind for tomorrow. He has called a meeting of the citizens at noon in the Great Square fronting the Palace main gates.”

“You no doubt know what Moses and Aaron did to him as the fleet berthed this morning.”

“Who doesn’t? It was all over the city before the afternoon was an hour old. The homecoming spectacle that had been specially organized for him was a complete fiasco. Soldiers were sliding about all over the decks, off the wharves and into the water. They were tripping over each other trying to get at your two brothers standing innocently in the middle of the road. But not for long, I

Page 293

hear. As the soldiers approached they seemed to vanish. The people are now convinced that they are expert magicians. The word from the streets is that the king should heed them if he wants any peace. He has something in mind, though. He hasn’t confided in me any details but has given us the job of getting the people to the Square tomorrow at noon. We have also been ordered to find and apprehend Moses and Aaron. An extremely difficult task that will take a considerable amount of time. I can assure you of that” “Heo. You are a wonder. It would be so much more difficult for us without you. We owe you so much. As for the disappearance of the two ‘pranksters’, it was not very difficult. They were standing just on the river side of the intersection between the Royal Way and the road that runs behind my father’s house.”

“Were they? I was not informed as to where they actually stood to make their demonstration. You know how variable eyewitness testimonies are. I have been able to ascertain that they were within sight and sound of Thut as he began to alight from his ship. They could not have been far from the boats, then. Yes, it would be just about at that intersection.” As he said this, a slow smile began to spread across his face. In his mind’s eye he could see what had happened before Miriam began to explain it to him.

Seeing the expression on his face Miriam said. “You realize what happened, then.”

“I think so, but fill me in on the details. I not only can’t, but won’t do any thing against them. They have not actually broken any laws.

Bent a few, perhaps, but not broken them. They are annoying the king no end but nothing actually to arrest them for in spite of Thut’s call to do so. It is the frustration that is getting under his skin.”

“They had an ox cart loaded with straw parked in the side street. It was under the shelter of the wall that bounds the park there. In the confusion of the first shock of the manifestation while the people were engrossed in watching the antics of the soldiers falling all over the place, they simply walked to the hay cart and hid under the straw. The driver moved off slowly as though he had seen enough for the day and had more important things to do. Where they are now no one is to know. Off in the country somewhere. They will stay in hiding for few days. Simple, wasn’t it?”

“Certainly was. You’re a genius.”

“Not me. It was Aaron’s idea. He is becoming quite good at planning these little surprises.”

Page 294

“My guess is that Thut plans to get his maggi to stage a duplication of the manifestation of frogs as he did for the last two. He called for his chief magician to attend on him early this afternoon. He may be still there for all I know. Although I feel that he must have had his orders before nightfall.” ”He has succeeded in that twice already so it is to be expected that he will try again. There is nothing that our two ‘heroes’ can do about that. It will be so disappointing to them if he does manage to duplicate the display. Every duplication makes them look that much more foolish and reduces their credibility even among our own people. It fuels Thut’s contempt and makes it that much harder to convince our people that they are really on their side.”

“You must be disappointed too, My Dear. You counted so much on Moses to impress Thut. My information about Jethro is accurate.

He is well known for his spells and has a large following in that region. It was fortunate that Moses fell in with that family and you went to a lot of trouble to get him here. It will be too bad if he lets you down again. I have heard that there is a special formula for fixing spells. A very closely guarded secret. Not everyone in the Brotherhood is privy to it. I am not, that is for sure. Surely, Jethro would have taught that to his star pupil.”

“Most likely did and Moses, in his excitement has forgotten what it is. If he does not soon remember it we are all lost. Perhaps these few days in seclusion may bring it back to him.”

“So do I, for your sake if for no other. He will lose credibility with your own people and they will soon lose interest and not want to have anything more to do with you either. You will get the blame for bringing him and disturbing them for nothing.”

“Many of them are restless already. They chafe severely under Thut’s increased demands. They are blaming Moses for the trouble that they are now in. Some want to run him out of the country. I’ll get a message to him early in the morning as to what we think that Thut is about to do.”

“Why not send a message now. They might be able to make frogs that will eat up Thut’s frogs as they did the rods of the maggi at that first attempt.”

“You’re joking.”

“Well, just a little, but, just imagine the scene with their frogs eating up all of Thut’s frogs. He would really go purple with rage.”

Page 295

They both smiled at the picture that Heo had conjured up. Miriam called her maid. “Abigail, call Caleb for me please. I would like him to take a message for me.”

While waiting for Caleb to appear she explained to Heo that this faithful old family retainer was the only person who knew where the two tricksters were hiding. He would give his life rather than betray them. He would get there without being discovered on the way.

She wrote a note to her brothers outlining their thoughts on the action of Thutmose in calling for the gathering of the people. She left it up to their discretion as to whether they did anything about it or not.

As noon approached the next day great crowds of people could be seen converging on the Palace Square. Every street leading into it was a crawling mass of people. Little knots of people could be seen here and there crowded round the stalls that vendors of sweetmeats had set up on the fringes of the square. Every crowd needs to eat both when gathering together and leaving the venue when the show is over. There is always someone ready to satisfy this need at a price.

As the sun clawed its way to its fiery zenith every window in the buildings surrounding the square was filled with anticipating faces.

The dull roar of the crowd filled the square.

At the very height of noon the king appeared at the palace gates on a dais that he had had erected that morning especially for this exercise. He mounted the steps leading up to it from within the palace grounds and stood in the centre front. On either side was a soldier of the Palace guard. Behind him were ranged the five magicians that were to perform on this day. The chief was in the centre with two aides on either side of him. The king took a step forward and addressed his people.

“My people, we are the Greatest Nation on Earth. Since my father, the old king, has disappeared from our midst we have been returning faithfully to the old and tried and true Gods of our Fathers who have made us Great. They have now made us even greater. Hundreds of kings now bow to our majesty. Those who ruled us illegally have been made slaves to us. Their labour in our homeland has made it possible for us to put more powerful armies in the field to subdue our enemies.

“We have been too kind and good to these people. Instead of driving them out from the land we have allowed them to stay among

Page 296

us and enjoy the benefits of our society. How do they repay us?

They want to leave us in the ditch. They want to go away in droves into the wilderness to worship in peace this new god they have discovered. They claim that he is the Great Creator. We know that this is blasphemy for Thoth is the Great Creator, none other. These Heqa Kasut claim that they will return here after spending several days worshiping in the desert. I do not believe them. I believe that they will not return but will continue to travel to a far country to deprive us of their labour. They have not been serving us long enough to have repaid their debt for the centuries of oppression and excessive taxation that they imposed upon us.

“A charlatan has been imported from that notorious place, Midian.

He has attempted to cast spells on us to convince us that he has a stronger God. This is not so. The priests who serve our Great Creator have agreed to demonstrate to you here, today that their God has no more power than ours.

“In the name of Thoth, the Great Creator, and his partner Amon, these priests here will demonstrate to you that they can produce the same spell that you were all subjected to yesterday.”

He stepped back and the maggi came forward to the front of the dais.

The five maggi lifted their arms in unison and their chief cried out.

“Watch my wand as it whirls through the air. Watch it carefully.”

He whirled it about his head and vertically on each side of his body, as he looked upward to the heavens. He cried out in a loud voice.

Amon. Oh, Amon, God of all the Earth. Greatest maker of miracles.

Come among us this day in the form of frogs. Thousands of frogs.

Frogs of all shapes and sizes. Of all colours with their cousins the toads, to leap and dance among us that we may see the manifestations of thy mighty power.”

The words had not dies on his lips when a vast army of frogs and toads leapt and frolicked amongst the people. Large ones were jumping on their backs. Little ones were crawling in their hair and their ears. The noise of their croaking was deafening. The women and children screamed with fright as the frogs croaked in their ears.

The volume of the combined noises of screaming and croaking had to be heard to be believed.

The crowd began to panic. The strongest of them were trampling the weaker ones underfoot in their attempts to get away from the horror that surrounded them. The king tried to address them but the sound of his voice died on his lips, overwhelmed by the tempest of

Page 297

sound that reverberated from the walls of the buildings on all sides.

There was a sudden quiet surrounding this vast throng. A hush that could be felt by everyone in that square on that day. Not a frog or toad was to be seen. The whole square was completely free of jumping croaking creatures. The cries of the people had fallen to a whisper of wonder at the sudden change and at the marvelous magic of their priests.

The king looked at the chief magician in gratitude for the sudden relief. He shrugged his shoulders in the time-honoured gesture that means. ‘It is beyond me.’ The king was quick to take the opportunity offered by the sudden quiet. He stepped immediately to the front of the dais and addressed the assembled throng still in a state of shock.

“The peace and quiet of our city and countryside has been seriously disturbed by these two charlatans imported from the Sinai. They have stolen knowledge from our own priests and have been trying to pass it off as manifestations of the power of their God. Let today’s demonstration show you that this power comes from Our God. I trust that you will remain wise enough to accept these people as they are. Cheats and robbers, taking what belongs to another and passing it off as their own. They have no powerful God. They are trying to cheat us of our right to their labour to compensate us for the oppression they imposed on us for centuries. The real power resides in our own priests “The flower of this priesthood you see before you today, here on this dais with me. Somewhere in this crowd these charlatans could be hiding. I challenge them now. YOU TWO OUT THERE. I WILL NOT LET YOUR PEOPLE GO. NEVER. DO YOU HEAR? NEVER. “If any of my people should find you and throw you to the alligators you will justly deserve your fate. No move will be made to rescue you. We will soon see how powerful your God is when these creatures make a meal of you. Never enter my palace again. Do not even come near it for my guards have orders to slay you on sight if you approach the walls.

“Now, My People you may return peacefully to your homes secure in the knowledge that we have seen the last of these criminals. The shame of their defeat today will lead them to never show their faces in this kingdom again. As the people wandered off the chief priest turned to his companions and said to them. “Do you realize what

Page 298

just happened then?” The reply came. “Yes. You terminated the spell before it got out of hand. That was cool.”

“It wasn’t cool. I did not stop it. Either it stopped of itself or…..”

He had no need to finish his sentence. They had all seen the implications of the alternative. None dare approach the king on this point. Let it ride till something happens, as it surely would.

As the aftershock of the events around them wore off the people were seen to look about them as if they expected to see the two accused roaming in their midst. At this point two bearded men appeared at the back of the crowd and were spotted by the people there. Just two non-Egyptians, not even Heqa Kasut, wending their innocent way home.

“There they are.” Was the cry that rose in the air.

“Where?” Responded another.

“Look. Behind you.”

Turing quickly this fellow saw these two pedestrians. Such beards were worn by Heqa Kasut, so they must be of that race. It was immediately assumed that this pair was Moses and Aaron. The crowd converged on them to attack them. They had no chance to get away so sudden was the attack. “Please, we have done nothing.”

They pleaded. But they cried out in vain. The crowd was wild and it wanted the vengeance that Thutmose had given them a vision of.

The innocent travellers were picked up by many willing hands and thrown violently into the air to come back down on to the stone pavements with a sickening thud. They were picked up and thrown again into the air to fall again, even harder this time. As these two unfortunates landed the second time some of the crowd jumped on their prone bodies. Others took their legs or arms to pull them about and pulled them right out of their sockets. In a few short minutes the life force had fled from the bodies of these two innocents. The crowd, its rage partly assuaged by this slaying, moved onward to return to the various homes from which it had earlier emerged there to ponder on the wonders that they had witnessed that day.

Page 299

Page 300

SITE OF MEMPHIS IN THE TIME OF MIRIAM SHOWING THE SITE OF AMRAM’S HOUSE IN RELATION TO THE PALACE AND TO THE SITE OF PRESENT DAY CAIRO.

Page 301

CHAPTER XVIII MOSES FINDS HIS FEET. Moses and Aaron had been observers on the edge of the crowd when Thutmose had his maggi displayed their powers by conjuring up hordes of frogs. They were well hidden for they had taken their places on the second floor of a building in the southeast corner of the Main Square. From here they had a sweeping view of all that transpired that noontime but not toward the palace. They could thus see but not be seen. They could not take the risk that the maggi would observe their presence. The glass in the aperture reflected light sufficiently to prevent any observer from the ground below seeing the human forms behind it. They were appalled by what they saw. The implications were too disappointing to contemplate.

This was the end as far as Moses was concerned. He was all for giving up right then and returning to Midian. He would rather be tending the flocks of his father-in-law with all the hardships to be endured there than face this power that he saw manifested on that square. This thought led to another. He had had success with these spells in Midian. What was wrong now? What actions had brought him success then that he was neglecting now? Were the maggi of Egypt too powerful for a rural practitioner from Midian? He was sure that this was not so. It must be something he was neglecting to do.

As his musing wore on so the programme before him unfolded. It came to its climax with the roaring and screaming of the crowd and the croaking of the frogs. When the king attempted to speak Moses had an inspiration. He would break the spell. He would gesture through the glass, not sure whether this newfangled substance would insulate his power. He did not gesture but cast his mind power toward the crowd and the frogs disappeared. He was not really sure whether he had done it or the maggi had beaten him to it by a fraction of time. He contented himself with the thought that he had not seen any movement by them so felt assured that his motion had been effective.

He cast his thoughts back to his initiation into the Brotherhood.

That plea at the end of the prayer. It rang a bell for him but he could not quite catch the tune. “So may it be.� Was what was said. It was close but not close enough. He could not write to Jethro for such

Page 302

things were never written down. He must exercise his mind on this for it would fix the spells so that they could not be terminated by another nor duplicated even by the powerful magicians that Thutmose employed. He would not face the king again till he was certain of what he should do. It was too humiliating to have them play with his power like they were. It also gave the king the wrong impression.

Aaron and Moses retired to their hideout for a few more days to rest and meditate.

During this period away from the glitter of the court Moses was due to be made a Master in the Craft. Normally such an elevation could not take place till a craftsman had served for several years, first as an apprentice and then as a journeyman. Because of his advanced age and his experience and the prevailing circumstances Moses was raised to this high position in a few months after his initiation.

For this ceremony he was not blindfolded but he was ushered into a darkened room. He was led around the room three times passing the Master and his assistants giving the signs he had been taught previously as he passed each one. He was then placed at the rear of the room near the door by which he had entered. While here he was interrogated on what he had been taught previously. This was a test of his proficiency in craft lore and an indication of the learning he would be expected to do as a member of the Brotherhood. Again he recognised the voice of his father.

At last he was led forward to stand before the altar in the form of a double cube upright. Inlaid on the top of that altar was a circle of fine gold. Within the circle was an equilateral triangle so placed that its apexes just touched the circumference of the circle. On both the circular symbol and the triangle were the mysterious letters of a secret code words that generated the power that was available to the members of the Brotherhood.

On them he made his vow to be a faithful servant of the Brotherhood while ever he had life. He vowed to never reveal these secrets to the uninitiated on the pain of dire punishments or even death. He would rather suffer death than reveal these secrets to the profane.

There was something definitely familiar about the words on the top of the altar. Their circular and triangular formation was causing him some confusion. Perhaps it would be clarified later in the ceremony.

While he was thus being addressed at the altar he heard quiet activity behind him. Finally as Amram finished has address to him he gave Moses a blow on the forehead with a padded club and he

Page 303

was laid out on the floor be the assistants. By this time his eyes had become accustomed to the darkness and in his peripheral vision he noticed that he had been laid in a shallow coffin. His conductors then marched around him several times pausing here and there to answer questions of the Master.

The next move was to approach him and taking his wrist in his hand one of the assistants raised him out of the coffin to a new life in the Brotherhood. Moses realized that this death and resurrection ceremony was a parallel to the ceremony that had been denied him at his coronation. Not so elaborate but a parallel just the same. He had been reborn into life in the Brotherhood. Then all was revealed.

The Master whispered into his ear the name of the All Powerful signifying that in this new life he would be open to receiving all knowledge. The name of the All Powerful revealed to him was JE HA HWEY. Now he was on familiar ground. He had learned this from Jethro. No wonder he had been taken from initiate to master in such a short time. Jethro must also have had some close connection with the Brotherhood to know the name of the All Powerful as he did.

He now remembered where he had erred in his casting of the spells before the king. He was elated. Why had Jethro taught him these things yet had not made him a member of the Brotherhood? He must have had his reasons, and good ones too. On second thoughts, there was a slight difference in what he had just heard and what Jethro had taught him. Probably not significant. He had no time to think further in that direction.

The ceremony swept Moses along to its conclusion in several addresses that gave him no time to muse on the light that had dawned on him. These addresses outlined to him his duties to the Brotherhood, its members, the society of men, to JE HA WHEY and to himself. He was finally declared to be a FULL member of the Brotherhood and accepted into its ranks.

At the banquet to follow he was feted and congratulated on being accepted into such an august body of men and was assured of help and assistance by the brethren where and when needed.

While Moses was being enlightened the Israeli people were restless.

The conditions under which they were living and working were getting worse by the week. As a result of the last effort with the frogs Thutmose had declared that besides providing their own straw and clay they were to provide and maintain their own brick moulds.

Page 304

The people grumbled and complained. The activists among them loudly proclaimed that it was a sorry day that they had been persuaded that they should leave this land and go to Caanan. What was the good of planning to migrate to another country when they were likely to die of hard work soon in this one? There seemed to be no future.

A delegation was appointed and given the task of confronting the king and requesting him to call the whole thing off. The petition was that they be returned to the conditions applying before this agitator had come from Midian. If they could return to those conditions they would make no moves to leave the country and they would send this stirrer back to where he came from.

The delegation did get an audience with Thutmose but were bitterly disappointed by the result. He laughed at them. He accused them of lying to him with no intention of carrying out what they promised.

Their whole race was a pack of liars and opportunists. They had all been hot to leave the country till the work got too hard. Now they came crying to him to help them out. He would have none of it.

His last words to them were. “I shall be kind to you this time by not increasing your burdens any further, today. Your promises have been worthless ever since your race came to this country and usurped the throne from my ancestors. It is action that I need. Total devotion to your tasks and to me may, only may, mind you, be rewarded by a reduction in quotas. Go and prove your worth. If I see no improvement in your attitudes before the next waning of the moon I shall double your quotas. Now get out of my sight before I puke.�

This delegation left the palace determined to get rid of this agitator, Jo-shu-wha, by which name he was known to them, before the time limit set by the king.

However, they were too late with their resolution. The executive committee of the Exodus Movement had met at the very time that the malcontents had been petitioning the king. Moses had revealed to them that he had recalled the missing invocation that he had not used in his efforts to overawe the king. He could not reveal it to them but he guaranteed that he had it right and would use it next time he confronted Thutmose. This invocation would fix any spell that he conjured up and prevent it from being duplicated or terminated by anyone but himself. Some, even of this enthusiastic body were for sending Moses back to Midian as what he had done was putting their cause backwards. They had expected something

Page 305

more positive than they were getting. But, Miriam’s faith was firm.

Her persuasion carried the committee and all agreed to give Jo-shuWha one more chance at his own choice of time and place. He did not tell them that he had tried the invocation ‘till death may it be’ at the plague of frogs but it had not been quite right and so had failed.

He was now certain that he would be correct. Next time it would work. He must be careful to pick the right time and place and the right irritant to apply. This would require some very serious thought.

As the two brothers were returning to Aaron’s home after this crucial meeting they discussed the whole situation. In the course of conversation Aaron asked. “What has come to your mind that is so different from what you have been doing so far? Why could you not reveal it at the meeting?”

Jo-Shu-Wha ben Amram replied. “To you I can reveal it but could not to some of those there so could not to any of them.”

“So. I take it that it has to do with the Brotherhood.”

“Right. Brother. It is. Jethro either is a craftsman or privy to the same or greater knowledge. He taught me that a spell conjoured under the name of JE HA HWEY can be fixed by using the invocation ‘So must it be till death’. I had not pronounced the name correctly nor had I used the phrase correctly. I correctly pronounced both the other night when I was made a Master Craftsman. There will be no problems now.”

“Jethro have had greater knowledge than we have. Although familiar with both those phrases I doubt if any craftsmen knows that they can be combined as you are about to do.”

“It is not just the words and the phrase it is in the pronunciation.

Very few ever get it just right and they must be exactly right to work. Jethro taught me that. If I had not been so centred on myself I may have recalled the knowledge sooner and we would be that much closer to getting out of this accursed land. ” “Don’t take yourself too hard to task over that. It may be meant to be this way. The king is so cocky now that he has won three times that when he does fall it will be that much harder.”

“You could be right there. We can not go into his presence for he will carry out his threat to have us thrown to the alligators in the Mother Nile. We will be given no opportunity to do or say anything to his face.”

“Then, what is to be done?”

Page 306

“There will be no need to front up to him. His maggi will not be able to stop or duplicate the next visitation. Let me meditate during the night and I will have something concrete in the morning.”

“That makes sense to me.”

So the two brothers, both craftsmen of the Brotherhood, finally arrived at their destination and settled down for the night. Both looked forward to action on the morrow. Aaron still had his niggling doubts but Moses was full of confidence.

The next day, after morning ablutions and partaking of the first meal of the day, preparations were made to cast a most unpleasant spell on the king and his ministers. Messages were sent out to Miriam and others to gather at the home of Aaron the next day to add strength to the efforts of Moses and Aaron to plague the king. A message also was sent to the king to inform him that he would be the subject of a visitation from Jah-Hwey to prove his power. The king laughed when he received the message and warned his maggi to be prepared to act again.

At mid-morning of the next day, just ten days after the fiasco of the frogs, thirteen faithful supporters of the Exodus Movement gathered in the courtyard of Aaron’s house. Moses called for silence and they all prayed together to The Almighty to grant power to His priest. This was the capacity in which Moses was operating. He stooped to the ground and took a handful of sand and threw it into the air so that it spread about and around the people standing there.

At the same time he called on JE-HA-HWEY to visit the king and all of his household with lice.

“Just as these grains of sand float through the air around us so may lice come from the air about the king and his whole household and pester them without ceasing. So must it be till death.”

Exhausted he let his arm fall to his side and retreated into the house where he reclined on a couch to refresh his body and soul.

“What do we do now?” Asked Aaron.

“We wait, of course. For Thutmose to call us.” Moses replied.

“You are sure that he will?”

“Of course.”

So Aaron and his brother waited for the summons while the others returned to their homes to await whatever was in store.

All was quiet. No word came from the king all day and they retired that night still no further ahead in their campaign. Aaron was afflicted with doubts, as the day had been a very long one of unrequited anticipation. However, Moses, in his newly found

Page 307

confidence, cheered his brother and chided him for having so little faith. Such a long time member of the Brotherhood should not have such doubts. Shame on him.

The next day while the shadows were still long upon the ground, a messenger in the king’s livery accompanied by two Palace Guardsmen demanded admission to the household. “I have an urgent message for Aaron ben Amram.” He said to the servant who met him at the gate. “It is from the king himself.”

“I can see that.” Said the servant. “I shall notify my master that you are here.”

“Don’t waste my time with that nonsense. Take me to him. NOW.” “Oh. If that is how you feel, come right through. I believe he is expecting you.”

“What do you mean? Expecting us.”

“Well. He did say this morning that we could expect a messenger from the king sometime today. Also that I was to bring you straight to him when you arrived.”

“Well. Don’t stand there talking. Get on with it.”

“Certainly, Sir. Come this way.” He then started toward where he knew Aaron and his brother to be reclining in the shade of a clump of date palms, in a cool corner of the courtyard.

“Sorry.” Said the servant as he saw that the guards were about to accompany the messenger into the compound. “Your guards must stay at the gate. I do not think that my master will be very happy to have the king’s soldiers in his courtyard.”

“Where I go, they go.” Replied the king’s messenger.

“Not here they don’t.” Said the servant without equivocation as he stepped in the way of the guards to prevent them from entering the gate.

The king’s messenger paused in thought. Through his mind was running the admonition from the king when he sent him on this assignment. “Do not annoy the fellow. Whatever crazy notions he has humour him. But, whatever you do, get him to front up here today.”

He then commanded his guard to stay at the gate till his return and followed the servant to where Aaron and Moses were awaiting him.

They both stood to receive the messenger with courtesy due to his rank and title.

“Am I speaking to Aaron ben Amram.” Asked the messenger before delivering his message.

Page 308

“You certainly are.” Replied Aaron. “No need to ask whence you come. You are wearing the king’s livery. What can we do for his gracious Majesty that he sends you to us so urgently.”

“He demands your presence at the Palace at noon this day. Your priest with you. If you do not appear at noon precisely you will be arrested and taken to the Palace as captives.”

“Threats are not necessary. Neither would they be effective if we chose not to be there personally. But, you can tell your king that we will be there as requested. There is no need for you to wait for us.

We will get ourselves there, and on time.”

The messenger turned on his heel and made his way to the gate where he joined with his guard. Together they boarded the chariot that had brought them there and returned to the palace.

At the appointed time both Aaron and Moses appeared in the audience chamber of the palace. Standing just inside the massive bronze doors they waited for the king’s sign that they were permitted to approach him. When this was received they advanced along the open space between the rows of attendants lining the walls of that vast chamber. The king was glowering in their direction.

Beside him on the throne dais were four of his maggi, ranged two on either side. Not one person in that vast chamber was still. All were vigorously scratching themselves and fidgeting about.

The stamping of their feet and the rustling of their clothes as they brushed their bare arms continually filled the hall with sound. The king was no exception. He found it extremely difficult to sit still and remain dignified when he was continually scratching himself and rubbing his arms and legs.

“Do you two charlatans accept the responsibility for the extreme discomfort that has afflicted our person and our people, since early yesterday?”

“What discomfort, your Majesty. We have not noticed anything amiss.” Was Aaron’s reply with every appearance of innocence.

“You are well aware of what discomfort I am referring to. But, to make it quite clear to you I shall give it to you in small easy words.

Since early morning yesterday Our Person, and all my people here in the palace have been suffering from a terrible itching. On careful investigation it proved to be caused by myriads of lice. Dirty, filthy, disgusting LICE. LICE, I tell you. Like sand, over and in everything. Only dirty people have lice about them and we are the cleanest people on Earth. We have tried all the regular methods that we know to remove them, but of no avail. It can only be another

Page 309

one of your despicable tricks. So I have called in my maggi to remove the effect in your presence. When they do so you will be arrested and thrown into the river where you will receive your just reward in the jaws of the alligators that infest it. That will be the end of this nonsense of taking the Heqa Kasut out into the desert to pray, or whatever. Get that? You will be at an end and so will your torment of us and of your own people. I know all about unhappy they are. They have asked me to get rid of you and I intend to do just that.”

Neither of the two brothers said anything. They did not challenge the king. They merely stood there saying nothing and looking quite disinterested.

“Do you hear me?” Shouted Thutmose in a rage of anger and frustration as his ‘victims’ stood their ground unmoved.

“We heard, sire.” Replied Aaron calmly and composedly. Moses, true to his vow of silence that he was under never said a word either.

He had learned a lot about control of his emotions since he had sat where his son was then sitting. It was all he could do to not burst out with abuse to him, but he held it back.

The king signed to his maggi to commence to remove the spell. The four men stepped from the dais and took their places on the floor in a row before the throne. They deliberately stood with their backs to Moses and Aaron to maximize their power. They called on Thoth and Amon to heed their request to rid these worthy people of this plague of lice. Nothing happened. They tried again. Still nothing happened. They shifted position to the rear of the vast hall and repeated their incantations. After all that the myriad of lice continued to torment all of the people there except Moses and Aaron.

“What is wrong with you?” Demanded the king of his maggi. “I’ll have you all thrown to the alligators and get someone else to rid me of these pests.”

“You are welcome to try, Your Majesty.” Replied the chief magician to this. “You are well aware that there are none in this kingdom so adept as we four. If we can not remove this spell then there is no one who can.”

The king was certainly aware that he had his best here and now. He had especially hand picked these four. There was none better in his whole realm. If he disposed of them he had no one to fill their places. He had made an idle threat in the heat of the moment. He knew this but was not about to admit it. He shouted at his maggi.

Page 310

“Do you mean to stand there so calmly and tell me that this spell can not be broken by you, or anyone else?”

“Exactly that, Sire. What is here is too powerful for us. What source of power these two are privy to we know not, at this stage.

Yet it is not the power itself so much as that the spell has been fixed in such a way that we can not penetrate it nor terminate it. We have an idea what it is but can not get through to it. I am afraid that only these two here before us today can break this spell. There is no way they can be made to do so. If they are thrown to the alligators then the plague will never go away.”

“It was you two then.” Declared the king.

“You have said so.” Replied Aaron. “Are you prepared to ‘let our people go’? As we said before it will be for only a short time to pray and worship our God in the peace and quiet of the Eastern Desert.”

“NO. NO. Never!” Shouted the king. “Get out of my sight before I do have you thrown to the alligators. We will get rid of this thing ourselves. Somehow. GO!” “Please yourself.” Muttered Aaron as he and his brother turned about and quietly retreated from the palace and returned to Aaron’s home.

That very afternoon Thutmose increased the workload on the Israelis again. Besides gathering their own straw and supplying their own clay and to make their own brick moulds, as well as maintain them, the daily quotas were increased. This on top of the already impossible demands was to the Israeli workers the ‘last straw.’ A delegation was dispatched to Miriam. The purpose was to convince her to stop this madness. The king would never relent.

All that had come of this aspiring to have a land of their own was an impossible dream. The interests of their families in Goshen were being sadly eroded to satisfy the increasing demands of the king.

Their women folk were all that was left to tend their flocks and other pastoral interests. The position had become impossible. They could not go on as they were. The only solution was to leave off this present campaign and start again when conditions became more favourable.

Miriam was adamant that they must push on regardless. An appeal was made to the masses and the feedback was that most were prepared to go on a little longer. So, go on it had to be. “We are not defeated yet.” She declared. “There is still some leeway yet for us to make use of.”

Page 311

Ten days after the onset of the plague of lice they all disappeared.

Miriam had persuaded Moses that to keep the spell on was achieving nothing. It was better to give it all a rest and try something else later on. This they did.

It was decided that the discomfort had to be extended beyond the king. If the people were subjected to the problems that the king faced there could be a popular rebellion against him and thus force his hand. Consequently Moses called on JE-HA-HWEY to call down a plague of flies. As a lead up to the actual action messages were sent throughout Egypt saying that this was what was about to happen. The warning was that people should take measures to protect themselves from hordes of stinging flies. On the appointed day the people as well as the king and all administrators in the palace were afflicted with flies. Huge green stinging ones were everywhere. Little black flies crawled into people’s ears and into their eyes and up their noses. Several days of this and messengers came from On, Tanis and many villages of the delta petitioning the king to ‘let these people go’. This was just too much to suffer.

While ever it was only the palace population suffering the people were not greatly concerned. This was a different situation.

Delegates to the king declared that the country could do without these people for a few days. That was better than what they were suffering. The economy would soon get into shape when they returned.

Thutmose did not believe that Aaron intended to bring the people back to Egypt. He was right, of course, but Aaron was not about to admit that. Yet he could not ignore the pleas of his people. Twelve days after the onset of the flies Aaron was summoned to the palace.

“What is it that you want?” Demanded Thutmose. As if he did not know. He had been told many times.

“You know what we have requested.” Replied Aaron. “Will you grant that request?”

“Yes. Yes.” Cried the king. “You may take your people out for three days into the wilderness. Be back in three days or I will send the army out to fetch you. I should send them out with you to make sure that you do return.”

“If you do we will not go.” Asserted Aaron boldly. “Three days for the whole operation is not enough. It will take us four days just

Page 312

to gather the people together. There is a great multitude of us.

Many thousands.”

“I know how many of you there are. You do not need to tell me.

Four days is too long. Do it is two.”

“With due respect, that is not possible. We will need all of four and another to travel out. That is five. We will need two days to conduct our worship and another one to travel back. Also at least a day to disperse when we return. That is eleven altogether.” ”Two days to gather together.” Dealt the king.

“We will move as quickly as we can and if less than four days will go then.”

“That is your last word?”

“Yes.” Replied Aaron. “That is our last word. If we stay the flies stay also.”

“So be it. When will the flies go away?” Asked Thutmose.

“The day that we start to move off.” Assured Aaron.

The revolutionaries then returned to their headquaters and sent out messages to all the people that an exodus had been arranged. They were advised to move immediately when the message was received and to gather at the arranged meeting points. While this gathering took place the executive gave thanks to their JE-HA-HWEY for this deliverance.

What a sight it was when the people began to move. Vast throngs moving enmasse from the delta towns to gather round Succouth.

From here they would push off north east into the semi-desert between there and the Sinai. They did not stop for rest as they gathered but worked through the night and into the next day. With them they had their flocks and herds for the king was quite right in his estimate of them. They had no intention of returning.

Everything that they possessed went with them. A whole new nation on the move. A whole ocean of people was moving across the land, many thousands of them. The secret instructions had been well absorbed by all. One day out without persuit was all that they needed. Actually three days for they would worship more or less on the run. An early morning session of worship when the sun rose to light their way and then march onward toward it. By the time it was

Page 313

discovered that they were not returning they would be too far away to be worth the effort of forcing them back.

There was great rejoicing throughout the whole land occupied by the Israelis., but it was short lived.

Late in the morning of the third day after the bargain had been struck with Thutmose the Israelis of Memphis were on their way, following their leaders to Succouth, there to join the rest of their people and flee the land. The dwellers in the Delta had gathered round Sucocuth ready to move off the moment the Memphis people arrived. As they moved down the river Moses removed the spell.

As the Memphis people drew closer to the region of Succouth they were met by the king’s army in full array. The people gathered round Succouth were surrounded by the king’s cavalry. Both actions were coordinated so that all the people were driven back to where they had come from.

It was obvious to all that the king had never had any intention of honouring his deal with Aaron, any more than they had. Such an army could not have been deployed, as it was, without notice. It must have been in place from day one. The king had planned to pounce the moment that the spell was removed. The people who had gathered to the east of Succouth ready to join the vast throng as it moved out of the land waited in vain.

They were all forced back to work under even harsher conditions than before.

This time Moses, or Joshuwha ben Amram, as he was known to the people, did not opt to run off in despair. His anger had been aroused against the king and Miriam had a hard time preventing him from pronouncing a curse against the king who was the cause of all this trouble. He had no right to renege on the deal as he had. It was the treachery that upset Moses the most. Several weeks passed in this way and the Israelis were getting restless and resentful at the increased oppression. Delegations to Miriam demanded that something be done to relieve their distress.

Meeting at the home of Aaron again the group prayed to the ALMIGHTY for strength and power to hurt the king again. Notices were again sent out to the people warning them of what to expect.

The next day Moses took in his hand a quantity of dust and spread it

Page 314

to the four winds and called on JE-HA-HWEY to inflict on the stock of Egypt a debilitating desease not known to the veterinarians of the nation. He again sealed it with the incantatin ‘So must it be till death’.

The next morning when the stock owners went to attend to the labours of the day they found that their beasts were droopy and weak. Oxen were unable to pull a wagon or a plough. Horses harnessed to chariots just stood where they were placed with seemingly no energy to move forward. When whipped the animals would take a step forward to get away from the whip then stop where they had stepped. Sheep lay down in the fields reluctant even to eat and goats stood in small groups bleating their distress. Cattle gave no milk and camels were even more reluctant than usual to do any work. No more died than would have from natural causes but no animal did any work or was of any use to anybody.

Veterinarians were called in but could make no diagnosis.

Therefore could offer no cure. They tried many known and still experimental remedies but all were of no avail. This malaise affected stock all over the land ruled from Memphis except in the heartland of the Israeli settlements. Here, all was at peace and all stock were healthy and well founded. The king’s own flocks were not immune, of course. He very soon took notice of what was happening, especially that the stock in Goshen was healthy and in good condition.

This time Thutmose made no effort to interview Aaron and Moses.

He immediately upped the brick quota. He well knew the strategic advantage of ‘divide and conquer.’ If he could get the workers riled enough they would rebel against their leaders and insist on staying in Egypt.

He was right about this reaction. Miriam and her committee were inundated by calls from their people to call the whole thing off. It was getting them nowhere, fast. What was the good of slaving so hard. They knew that Caanan was not an empty land. To settle there would require an invasion of the land. The work in Egypt would so wear them that they would never be able to maintain an attack on a defended country. Would not even be able to get that far. The call came from many groups of workers demanding that JoshuWha be run out of the country. He had brought nothing but trouble with him. Life might not have been ideal before he started to interfere

Page 315

but he had made it infinitely harder. They were tired of being pushed into something that most people did not want anyway.

Moses was all for bringing down the wrath of the Almighty to punsih them for this insurrection. Miriam overruled him for she maintained that the cooperation of the people must be voluntary.

There would be no forcing of them to go.

To ease the situation although not expecting any favourable response from Thutmose as a result the spell on the stock was removed. Their expectations were not disproved. Thutmose continued to demand increased production from the brickyards and wherever else he had the Israelis forceably empoyed. He felt that he had good reason to keep the pressure on. It was the fault of these people that the national herds had been so troubled. He would see that they paid for the devastation. He had further reason this time for his own stock had also suffered. In reality nothing had suffered except in the minds of the people and even the King himsslef.

Through their memberships of the Brotherhood the members of the executive of the Exodus Movement were able to monitor the activities of the king. Many of these brethren were sympathetic to the Israeli cause but because of their vows they must observe the laws of the land. There was, however, nothing to stop them from covertly rendering humanitarian aid to the peole. They passed on information that would be of assistance. They financed where and whenever they were able to do so personally. Shelter was provided when needed.

The Libyans were a turbulent people and at this point in time they chose to rise in rebellion against their overlord, Egypt. A military campaign was planned to bring them back into line. Preparations for such an acitivity are impossible to keep secret and so this became known to the Israeli rebels. The Exodus executive committee took this opportunity to cause as much disruption as possible. Moses was called on to act. He did so by sending a message throughout the land that he would cause personal discomfort again to the people. When the time was right he took a handful of ashes fresh from a fire, threw them into the air and called on JE-HA-HWEY to inflict the people with boils. All over the bodies of the soldiers preparing for war, all the officials in the palace, all the workers in the fields these painful and unpleasant eruptions broke out. Even the maggi were not immune this time.

This was too much.

Page 316

Thutmose did not hesitate. He called Aaron to attend an audience at the palace. He was prepared to let the people go on a three day journey out into the wilderness to pray or whatever but they must leave their children and stock behind. This condition was unacceptable to Aaron and he made this very clearly known to the king. Aaron’s insistence that the stock and children would not be left behind made the king extremely angry. The argument was long and bitter and ended with the king withdrawing his offer. With the safeguards he demanded they would not go. Without them they would not be permitted to go. It was an impasse, if ever there was one.

Since this plague of boils was having no effect it was removed and another hit was made elsewhere. This time on the economy of the nation. The barley harvest was due and the flax plants were ready to have their leaves stripped to make linen. With a military campaign being planned these two crops were essential to the economy of the preparations. Export income and taxes from home use were vital to the war effort. The field workers went out to harvest the barley and found that instead of full heads the stalks held withered husks. The flax crop was similarly effected. All the leaves were withered and useless. They would never make the fabric needed to clothe the army.

Thutmose could stand the lice and the flies, the diseased cattle and decimated stock but to have a military campaign laid dead in its tracks by this irresponsible action was too much. He demanded that Aaron attend an audience to negotiate a peace deal. Aaron refused to attend. He no longer trusted the king. He had broken his word too often and Aaron did not hesitate to tell him so.

Thutmose had gone back on his word too many times for his guarantee of safe conduct to and from the palace to be acceptable.

He considered it to be beneath his royal dignity to attend on Aaron.

A compromise was reached and the Grand Vizier, Amenemhet by name, was sent to Aaron as an envoy of the king. This was a particularly fortuitous choice for he was a member of the Brotherhood and well known to Aaron personally. They could talk to each other on the same level and both were prepared to compromise.

After several days of discussion and negotiations an agreement was reached that was satisfactory to both although not fully reaching all

Page 317

aspirations; such is the nature of compromise. Aaron would lead his people out for three days into the wilderness where they would spend three days in meditation and prayer. They would leave their stock behind as a guarantee of their return. Thutmose was prepared to accept this guarantee and agreed to the progamme.

In less than a day after the king’s assent to move all the Israelis in Memphis were assembled in that city and began to move toward Succouth to meet the rest of the people. On the third day this vast array of people had assembled in and around Succouth and began to move off as agreed. Joushua, the son of Nun, the elder brother of Moses and Aaron, was at their head. His experience in the Egyptian army was the essential ingredient that made it possible to move this vast horde with any semblance of order. They did not get out of Succouth.

As they began their move toward the east they were met by solid phalanx of Egyptian chariots and bowmen. This brought them to a dead stop. They could not just roll over this solid wall of resistance, no matter how great their numbers, especially without arms as they were. The king had changed his mind again. The wheat harvest was yet to come and there would not be sufficient labour to bring it in with the Israeli workers out of the country. The country had already missed one harvest. They could not afford to miss another.

The fleeing people were turned back to their homes to the sound of much grumbling and complaining to whoever would listen. There were very few interested int heir plight.

Moses was angry. Very, very angry. Such double dealing from the king, his son. He impetuously took the matter into his own hands.

Without telling anyone where he was going he rushed off to the palace where he demanded an audience with the king, at once. The two guards naturally refused him entry for he could show neither authority, nor credentials. This made him angrier still and he stormed at the guards. He had temporarily forgotten that he was no longer king. “How dare you refuse my entry here. I have every right to enter without interference from the likes of you. Get out of my way.”

Move is what the guards refused to do. they met Moses’ storming at them with spears at the ready. They called for assistance and an officer came out to see what the great commotion was about. Moses still refused to say why he thought that he had a right to enter the

Page 318

palace without a permit of some sort. The officer appealed to his superior and he appealed further up the line till the dispute reached the ears of the king.

He demanded that this trouble maker be brought to him. Since he was making so much noise and no one seemd to be able to get him to go away he would use his own and greater authority to settle this disturbance down.

Moses was so steamed up that the was totally unafraid of any consequences of his rash action. Being stopped at the gate had riled him even further. As soon as he confronted the king he railed at him for his inconsistency and his cupidity in reneging on a mutually negotiated agreement. He had done this three times. Once was bad enough, and perhaps, excusable but three times was beyond any redemption, beyond the utmost bounds of decency and morality. It was beneath royal dignity. A worthy king should be as good as his word. That word should be his bond. Without that he is not fit to rule. He ended his tirade with. “As king your word must be your bond. You were taught this as a child and as a growing man. Your whole upbringing emphasised that your position as ruler is one of trust and honour. Without that you can not expect your subjects to return trust and honesty to you. You were not brought up to go back on your word as you have done these last months. How can you possibly expect the Heqa Kasut to agree to return here if they can not trust you? If they cannot take your word at its face value. You have double crossed them continually. You do not deserve to be king. You have corrupted ………………”

As he raved his voice had risen in pitch and volume and Thutmose recognised a timbre that he was familiar with. At first he did not fully comprehend what he was hearing and Moses took his silence and concentration to mean that he was listening to what was being shouted at him in anger. However, this was not what was happening. What was being shouted at him was registering but only partly for his memory was taking him back half a lifetime to his childhood and youngmanhood. He became conscious of another time and place. He no longer saw the full flowing beard on the face before him. The face became, to his mind’s eye, clean shaven and surrounded by the blue and white striped Royal Head Dress. Before him he saw an angry father calling him out for some misdeed, some lack of honour in his behaviour. Recognition began to dawn on him.

He sat silently till he felt sure that what he saw before him was real.

Page 319

He thought. ‘Of course, How else would this supposed stranger know what I was taught as a child and young man. Or os it a ghost come back to haunt me?’

Moses had given himself away with a vengeance.

Thutmose called out in a loud voice as Moses was in full flight.

“Evil Spirit. Stop. Right now.”

Moses stopped his tirade in midstream and stared at his son, his mouth not quite closed from the words that had been about to be uttered.

“I should have recognised you before.” Declared the king.

Then as a seocnd thought he said. “Are you really a ghost come back from the dead? Your body was found and buried nine years ago with full Royal honours. You can not be a ghost. You are too substantial for that. Who is buried, intered in your tomb? The beard hides your face from me and you have been careful to say nothing in my presence. You were smart but not smart enough. Finally your evil tmeper got the better of you, again. So. You old dog. You did not die in the desert, or wherever. You did disappear though.

Why? What did you have to run away from?”

“What’s that? What are you talking ab…..?”

“Don’t play the innocent with me I know who you are. No need to wonder now how ‘your people’ got to know so much. You are my father. You were first known as Moses and took the name of Thutmose when you became the first of this dynasty. What a fix you have put me into. I married your supposed widow and now you come back to life and make me an adulterer. Not only an adulterer but an incestous adulterer. You old piece of ALLIGATOR SHIT. I took your reigning name in honour of your death and now you come back to haunt me. Why did you come back? Better still. Why did you leave? Indeed, why did you go on living? What a mess you have created now! I should call the guards and have you executed as a traitor, at least have you thrown into prison. I should have done it when you first arrived and all this trouble that you have brought on us would not have happened. I should take action right now and put you where you can do no more harm. Is it your idea to ruin me by taking the Heqa Kasut workers out of the country? With a third of our work force removed suddenly the whole economy will

Page 320

collapse. You know that. Why are you doing it? I wouldn’t put anything past you, you old SNAKE. That High Priest who was murdered about the same time as you disappeared …..Oh. That’s another thing. Do you know anything about that?”

For a few moments Moses was speechless, but not overawed as he would have been nine yeaars before when he fled from the possibility only of what he had just been confronted with. He replied to his son’s outburst with the calmness that had been shocked into him. “There is no call for you to get abusive. I did not intend that you should ever recognise me. I did not come back to claim the throne. It is all yours and will stay that way. I admit that in my haste I did blow my cover away but I mean no harm to you personally. I would rather you think of me as no longer in existance, as indeed, I am in a way. I am not the same person who left here in a panic nine years ago. I am now known as JoShuHa the brother of Aaron ben Amram. This is quite true. His mother is my natural mother. I have reverted to my natural level and have cast my lot in with them.” He made no mention of the High Priestly murder hoping that the conversaton would stay away from that episode.

“You mean to say that you are ALL Heqa Kasut and always have been? Not a half breed bastard of my grandmother as the palace gossip would have it. Oh. What was the panic that drove you away? Is my suspicion correct.?”

“Yes. My son. Aaron’s parents are my natural parents. I was saved from the consequences of that unworkable decree of your grandmother’s brother, Ahmose. My eldest sister engineered a plea to his sister, Nefertari, who then raised me as her natural son as she always claimed me to be. Of that you are well aware. She had no other son. I married her daughter by her command and am certainly your natural father. I have learned much during my sojourn in the Sinai. I have now repudiated my Egyptian heritage and thrown my lot in with my natural people. I failed them as king, I now hope to rectify that mistake by assiting in the leading of them back to what they have always claimed to be the ‘Promised Land’, promised to their father Abraham by El Elohim the God they have always worshipped till now. I declare this to be true on my honour as a man and as a Craftsman of the Brotherhood..”

“You too. One of the Brotherhood. They are everywhere. More power in their hands than is good for them or for us. Even priests

Page 321

are among them. That makes them untouchable. You too, I guess.

They will not have me because I am king, so they claim.”

“That is right. You were never interested as a young man and now that you are king it is too late. The established and avowed equality among the members precludes the admission of kings to their circles.”

“How is it that you are one of them? Have you been in it all along?”

“No. I too rejected the chance when a young man. It is only that I have rejected my royalty that I have been eligible to be admitted.

While in Midian I was trained in many arts that are known to the Brotherhood but only since returning to this country, its headquarters, so to speak, that I have been inducted.”

“How many of my maggi are members?”

“That I know not, or even if any of them are. All that I know is that its members are loyal citizens of yours and the Brotherhood itself would never take action against you.”

“I have no reason to complain on that score as yet. Why are you against me?”

“No. I am not against you. Just determined to have my people move out to the land promised to us.”

“This does not make a lot of sense. This land is still part of the Egyptian Empire. You must be well aware of that. What is the point in moving out to where you will still be under our suzreignity?”

“I once thought that way too. It has been put to me this way. It is better to be a vassal State than direct servants of a State, especially in the lowly condition that you have reduced them to since coming to power. They were largely content before and there was no universal desire to move out. There was very little response to schemes devised for the emigration. Your oppression has caused their discontent.”

“They deserve every bit of it and I will not let them go.”

“You can not stop us.”

“Hugh?”

Page 322

“No. You can not. A new God is leading us. I discovered Him in the Sinai. He is known only to those who have been granted knowledge, but his name can not be spoken at will. IT can be used only on special occasions for very special reasons. You can not win against HIM. Let my people go and save yourself much heartache and your people much distress.”

“NO. NO. Never.”

“You have no choice.”

“Tell me the name of this new God.” “NO.” “Can’t or won’t?”

“Both.”

“Your Brotherhood vows I suppose.”

“That is part of it.”

“I’ll have the guards take you on your way out and throw you into the river.”

“That is an empty threat and you know it. They can do nothing unless THE ALMIGHTY allows them to.”

“Then get out and do not ever come back. I will not let your people go. No matter what you do. You obviously will not move without my permission and you will never get that. Did you kill the High Priest ten years ago?

“NO. Certainly not. Remember, as I have already told you, you have no choice. You will give your permision and sooner than you think.”

“But, you did have something to do with it.”

“LET MY PEOPLE GO.” “NEVER. NOW GET OUT.” The king could stand no more and had lost interest in persuing the theme about the murdered High Priest. He had other things on his mind.

“You will never speak with me again but you have not heard the last of me and you can not win.” Were the last words that Moses was

Page 323

ever to say to his son in this life. He turned and left the palace unmolested and unchallenged.

He returned to Aaron’s home where he was asked where he had been. He was noncommittal about that but did admit that he had spoken to the king face to face. He also admitted that the king now knew his identity and that the contest could now be a personal one between him and his son. His report on this conversation was that the king could be expected to take a lot of breaking. Only extreme measures would succeed. He flatly refused to give any further details and with that they had to be content.

Page 324

ANCIENT BIBLICAL DATA AT EXODUS, NUMBERS of Israelites on quitting Egypt by tribes.

Rueben 46 500 Leader Elizur ben Shedeur.

Simeon 59 300 Shelumiel ben Zuri-Shaddai Judah 74 600 Nahshon ben Amminadab.

Isaachar 54 400 Nethaneel ben Zuar.

Zebulun 57 400 Eliab ben Helon.

Joseph Ephraim………40 500 Elishama ben Ammihud.

Mannaseh …….32 200 Gamaliel ben Pedahzur.

Benjamin…… 35 400 Abidan ben Gideoni.

Dan……………62 700 Ahiezer ben Ammishaddai.

Asher …………41500 Pagiel ben Ocran.

Gad………… 45 650 Aliasaph ben Devel.

Naphtali………53 400 Ahira ben Ehan.

TOTAL……….603 550 These were men of twenty years and upwards fit for war.

Counting took place within the first year after leaving Egypt. Their reliability can not be verified, could well be one tenth of what shows.

Because of the death of all of the first born of the Egyptians Jehovah claimed all the first born of Israel as his.

This claim was waived in lieu of the children of Levi who were thus dedicated to the service of the tabernacle and eventually the temple when it was finally erected in Jerusalem by Solomon several centuries later. Total number of males a month and more old at this numbering was 22 270. This exceeded the number of Levities by 273. This number had to be redeemed at a charge of 5 shekels of gold each. This constituted the basis of the temple economy.

Miriam died in Kadesh in Zin, supposedly, about 25 years after leaving Egypt. More likely 2.5 years.

Division Of Labour For The Building Of The Sanctuary.

Bezaleel ben Uri in charge of all metal work, jewel settings and wood carving, Aholiab ben Ahisamach ben Dan in charge of fine decorative work and was the teacher of other tradesmen.

Both of these men assisted Moses in the institution of the first Lodge of Stone Workers to be formed after the Exodus from Egypt.

Page 325

CHAPTER XIX THE KING REFUSES TO ACT The next move against the people of Egypt and its king in the campaign to force him to release the Israelis from their obligations to his country would have to be something to upset or destroy the coming wheat harvest. A severe thunderstorm would be just the thing. They happened so seldom that they were considered to be a sign of the anger of the Gods. Moses had intelligence from his sources that the mother and father of all storms was building up over the Great Sea to the northwest. It would come in over the western desert. He sent a message to the king that if he did not release the Israelis immediately the coming wheat harvest would be devastated.

He laughed at the effrontery of this challenge and dared Moses to do anything about it. The crop was ripe and ready to harvest and he did not believe that any magic could stop that.

Before the day was over dense black clouds gathered over the western desert. Night came early that day as this storm head moved toward the Nile. As it encroached upon the land the menacing rolls of thunder filled the whole earth with sounds that struck terror into the hearts of a people unused to such anger from the heavens.

Lightning could be seen flashing from cloud layer to cloud layer both vertically and horizontally. As if that were not bad enough flashes of heavenly power sizzled their way to the ground where they split trees asunder and killed any living creature in their path.

This was truly a grand display of anger from the Gods. Boats cruising on the river were struck and burst into flame or disintegrated under the force of the bolts that hit them. Their passengers sent immediately to their fathers. Added to all this were sheets of rain lashing the already tortured earth. Wheat standing ready to harvest was flattened and driven into the melting earth to mix with the mud that it formed. Houses had their mud brick walls liquefy and join the viscous earth around them. The storm seemed to pass over then return and lash the earth again as though it were not satisfied with the damage it had done on the first pass over.

The king remained in his palace but sent messengers to the conspirators to say that they could go with their families but must leave their stock behind. This message was treated with the ignore

Page 326

that it deserved for he had been already told that such a deal was not acceptable. Without a better response than that there would be no let up on him or his nation.

Desperate to put a stop to these saboteurs Thutmose ordered the arrest of Moses, Aaron and their associates. But this was never carried out. The whole of his public service was sympathetic to the cause of Israel. As public servants throughout history have been notoriously slow to act in any case that they found disagreeable to them so this arrest order of Thutmose was so delayed and frustrated that it never was put into effect. Moses and Aaron remained free to wreak more havoc on the king and his authority.

The natural result of such a watering on thirsty land was the hatching of the many millions of locust eggs laid by these creatures during the many years of no rain. These eggs lie dormant through the years of drought to miraculously hatch immediately after rain.

In that warm climate they were ready to go within days of their birth. Within ten days of the devastating rain and hail of the mighty storm activity the locusts struck. Any ear of corn left by the storm’s wind and rain was consumed by the locust plague. Every fresh and juicy blade of new grass that had come up in the preceding ten days was a luscious feast for these pests. They made very short work of the land of Egypt. The usually lush green of the valley was, within a few days, as bare as the desert hills on either side.

The day that the locusts struck Aaron sent a message to the king claiming the credit for bringing this plague upon the people. The official maggi could not negate a natural phenomenon. Neither could Moses create one yet this was an opportunity that he could not miss to impress the king. He was not impressed. He did not even deign to answer the demands of Aaron to, “Let my people go.”

To show his displeasure the king had to do something. He took the course of again ordering the arrest of Aaron, Moses and all of their following. This was not a success. In this case so many of the Egyptian people were opposed to the king’s stubbornness that the officers in State Security took little real notice of the order. They were too hard to find. They had possibly left the country. It would be best to leave action till another day. Thus for any of a variety of reasons Aaron and Moses and all of their followers remained free to continue to pester the king.

Page 327

A branch of science in the ascendancy in the Brotherhood in those days was a study of astronomy; this was a scientific advance on astrology. In his talks with the brethren Moses was informed that a spectacular eclipse of the sun was expected in the near future. It was too far away to pin point its exact timing but it would certainly come shortly. He and Aaron waited till a more accurate time could be ascertained.

When it was calculated to be only nine days away there was a further wait; for this was considered to be too long a time for a strong impact to be made on the king. Two days from the expected eclipse Aaron sent a message to Thutmose.

This message was in the form of a demand that his people be released for several days journey into the wilderness to pray. If not the sun would be made to not shed his light on the land until such time as permission was given as demanded.

The king made no challenge to his enemies this time either. He just ignored them after he had had a good laugh about such a threat. No body, not even his own maggi could stop the sun from shining.

Perhaps if he had asked them they would have been able to give him some idea of what was in store. He wished that these people would stop bothering him. He was frustrated by the inaction of his State Security and could get no real satisfaction from their excuses. These pests were here again because his officers were so slack in performing their duties. His maggi either could not or would not help him out. He could not afford to sack them all for where would he get another lot?

On the evening of the second day after the demand made by Aaron all was as it should be. The sun set in the western desert with its usual glorious display of colours that rivaled any rainbow if there had been rain enough to make one. What was left of the stock went to their rest and birds went to roost as usual. Those people who still had a roof to sleep under or who had re-erected one since the great storm went to their well earned rests expecting to wake up to a new day on the morrow. The king and all the inhabitants of the palace looked at a clear, star-studded sky as they retired to their beds inside the mighty stone walls of the palace. They had been protected from the devastation of the storm by the stone walls of the palace and could go peacefully to rest. The sun had shone with its usual glory

Page 328

all day and the stars were winking at them as they had always done.

Why should they not be both still there tomorrow?

Thutmose had not been able to keep these momentous events from his queen. She had many times tried to persuade him to make a deal with Aaron. He had nothing to lose by a compromise. Surely the kingdom could stand being without its cheap labour source for a few days. They could be watched by a patrol of troops following them to ensure their return. If the people were more content they would work better when they returned to their duties. This was all very sound and reasonable but the king was convinced that the Israelis had no intention of returning. With several days advance on any pursuers their very numbers would make it extremely difficult to turn them back.

When she was told of the identity of the magician that the Israelis were employing she was alarmed. Her first thought was like that of her husband. Her first husband was dead and buried. If this was a Sprit from the Gods there was no way it could be negated. He must be placated.

Thutmose convinced her that he was indeed Moses in the flesh.

Another body was buried as his. She knew him to be her exhusband and half-brother. Never did she ever suspect that he was in reality her natural father. She knew him to be always unpredictable and liable to uncontrolled fits of temper. If he became really angry this power that he appeared to have would be a terrible weapon. She was even more insistent after that on making a deal with Aaron.

Compromise would be better than destruction. But Thutmose was adamant. He flatly refused to even consider such a move. “Like father, like son.” She chided him. “You are just as pig-headed as he ever was. Keeping up this argument will get neither of us anywhere.”

“No way.” He replied. “He will not beat me. My maggi are working on bettering his conjuring.”

She countered with. “At their present rate of progress whatever they devise will be too late. You mark my words. He has latched on to something that they do not know about or have forgotten about.”

“I’ll send a troop of soldiers to Midian to force the secrets out of that old devil that he learned from. Then we sill see how far he will get.”

Page 329

“What makes you think that he would reveal anything to soldiers?

If they kill him in the process you still will learn nothing. I’ve often suspected that something like that must have happened to that High Priest who died so mysteriously almost ten years ago.. He died rather than yield up the sacred secrets to ‘whoever’….. Hmm, I wonder.” She too had now noticed the timing of Moses’ disappearance. No culprit had ever been found for that ten year old crime. The traitor priest who had betrayed his master had paid dearly for his crime. Hatshepsut could not believe that Moses had actually perpetrated the major crime but he must have had some connection with it to take off as he did. It was now history and any raking over of that event would produce nothing.

“Wonder what?” Challenged Thutmose II. “Never mind. Whatever it was it is too late to do anything about it now.”

“I’ll send the chief magician with the troop to Midian. He may be able to negotiate for information. You know, one professional to another.”

“I don’t see much value in that move. You know how these various groups of maggi are jealous of each other. They guard their own particular secrets from each other to the death. They are so fanatical about these things that they prefer death to giving anything away.

Besides you do not know how deeply the Midian priests are involved in this whole thing.”

“This JohShuWha, as he is now known, is a member of the Brotherhood. He is very hard to get at.”

“What have I just been telling you? You can not win. Give up and let them go.”

“NO. Never.”

“Then be it on your own head. But, we who are innocent will have to suffer with you. That is not fair. It is unjust.”

“There will be no suffering if I win.”

“But, you can NOT win. How often do I have to tell you that?”

“We’ll see about that.” Were the last words of Thutmose as he stormed away from this interview with his God Mother, natural mother, his queen and his wife.

Page 330

Hatshepsut was disturbed by this threat to darken the sun. She could not sleep but wandered about the palace every few hours. In what were the small hours of the morning measured by the timepieces of the palace, the water clocks and banded candles, she looked out at the star spangled sky above her. What she saw startled her. As she looked she saw the stars on the horizon fade away. Then the fading climbed to the heights. There was no thin gray line at the horizon to herald the dawn, as there should have been according to the timepieces on the table beside her. She looked more intently at the blackness that marked the heavens. There was no dawn coming.

There was only the blackness continuing. She would not panic. She would wait a little longer before raising an alarm. She strained her eyes to find that line gray line of the approaching dawn but in vain.

It was not there. There would be no sun to shine on Egypt this day.

Her ex-husband and brother had done it again. At that moment she hated her then husband and son for bringing this upon the people, largely to satisfy his own ego. They were as stubborn as each other.

Each foolish in his own way and totally inconsiderate of the consequences that they were bringing onto the people whose welfare they both professed to be concerned about.

Her frustration was boundless for there was nothing that she could do about this magic power that was all about her. It was all very well to have the power to determine the succession to the throne of Egypt, but what was the good of authority flouted by all of those involved?

That day never dawned in Memphis, nor in most of the delta. The record has come down to us that the Israelis were exempt from this darkness but in her diary Miriam records it as darkness that could be felt in the city. Perhaps on the fringes of the eclipse in the outer regions of the delta the sun would have shone that day, but not within the city and its environment. The darkness was as a burden to be borne by every person in the city. It seemed to never end.

The people were terrified. Delegations were hurriedly organized to wait upon the king to urge him to let these people go. The whole country was reduced to penury and the people wanted no more of this dispute. It was costing them too much. Both the barley and wheat harvest had failed. Their flocks and herds were decimated.

Their homes were not fit to live in. Now the sun no longer shone.

They could endure no more. They were losing more by keeping these people here than by letting them go.

Page 331

Thutmose yielded to the voice of the people. He sent messengers to Aaron saying that he could take his people out on the terms previously granted. “Take your women and children but leave your animals behind.�

Aaron had accepted these terms on the previous occasion when they had been turned back at Succouth by the Egyptian army, and was still inclined to do so. But this time there was another factor. The dispute had become a personal one between Moses and his stubborn son. Neither was prepared to give one inch. Moses insisted on everything going. Considering the attitude of Thutmose there was no way that they could return to the country. The king insisted on retaining the stock as an assurance of their return. It was an impasse that could not be resolved.

The eclipse ran its course and, of course, Moses claimed the credit for calling it off. As the sun went to his rest over the western desert that evening he showed his face for a fleeting moment just before the earth was plunged into the darkness of night again. The king was relieved that he was free again, but for how long? That he did not know and the uncertainty of the future from day to day did not give him any rest. His own people gave him no rest. The end of the day of darkness did not settle their minds about the troubled conditions under which they were living daily. The people who had been active in generating a petition to the king during the darkness continued their efforts to have him make a deal with Aaron. They could no longer tolerate this staggering from one crisis to another.

Every day a new petition was presented to the king urging him to let the Israelis go as they were asking. At the same time as petitions were being presented to the king other groups of Egyptians were encouraging the Israelis in their efforts. Many joined forces with them. They had seen how the Israelis had often been free from the pestilences that seemed to dog the Egyptians and they hoped to enjoy the same exemptions. Many were related to the Israelis by blood ties that had developed over the almost three centuries of their dominance in the country.

Some short time after the dark day a rally was held in Memphis in defiance of the king who had prohibited such gatherings. In the very field where Miriam had watched over the infant Moses in the basket floating among the bulrushes, a great host had assembled.

Moses was somewhat apprehensive when he saw the size of the crowd. He suspected that a riot was planned by agents of the king

Page 332

infiltrated among the people. However, the mood of the crowd did not seem to be hostile. The sound that came up from it was that of general conversation rather than of anger. The people did not mill about but seemed to be waiting for whatever might happen.

Aaron rose to address the assembly and was roundly cheered.

“Friends and neighbours.” He began. “We are assembled here today to discuss what next we can do to persuade Thutmose to release those of us who are of Israeli lineage to return to the land from whence we came. We are fully aware that for all of us to move out at once could cause an unpleasant economic shock. It is not a pleasant thought that we could cause some discomfort to you who are our friends and neighbours, and have been for so many generations. When our forefathers came to this country, almost three centuries ago, there was no intention of staying. The plan was to recover from the extremely unpleasant conditions in Palestine and then return when we had recovered our strength. This was not to be.

Your king urged our father Joseph to stay and organise the economy of the country to our mutual advantage. You all know the result, but let us not dwell on the past. It is pointless to do so and will not help to solve the problems of today. Surfice it to say that the time has come for us to depart. Our departure may cause some short term pain but, I believe, and I suggest that most of you do also, that we will all gain long term comfort and advantage if we Heqa Kasut, as you call us, remove ourselves from here and occupy the land of Caanan. The fruits of our labour will not be entirely lost to this, the greatest empire in the world. We will be in a vassal State in that country. You will be deprived of our labours in direct service to you but the dues we will pay as a vassal State will be a large compensation for this. We will have more time to spend with our families and develop our own industries and culture. We will determine our own destiny. We will worship as we see fit. If there is any pride left in the breasts of the sons of Jacob we must leave here and make a new life for ourselves elsewhere.

“Can I see the hands of all those who are prepared to continue to pressure Thutmose to let us leave this land with dignity and go with pride in achievement to our Promised Home.”

A forest of hands was raised to this appeal and the applause was deafening. This groundswell of support continued to grow daily, stronger and stronger as the weeks flew by. Moses’ revelation of

Page 333

himself to Thutmose did not penetrate the thick stone walls of the palace. Neither Thutmose nor any of his courtiers would have had any interest in letting such knowledge become public property.

Thutmose had no desire or intention to vacate his position in favour of his long lost father. None of his staff would gain any advantage from such a change. They may have had doubts about the wisdom of the refusal of Thutmose to deal with it but there was no evidence ever given of those.

Aaron and Moses had become folk heroes. Wherever they went in Memphis and in the countryside they were lionized by both Israeli and Egyptian alike. Many Egyptians applied to join the Movement and were welcomed with open arms. The news of this defection of his people eventually reached the ears of the king. Heo was not betraying either his wife or her people by passing this information on to the king. It was his duty to keep him informed of events in the kingdom, of the opinions of the people. The king had a right to know the moods and aspirations of his people.

When they felt that the time was ripe Aaron again petitioned the king for an audience but he was adamant that he would never speak to Aaron or his family again. Under no circumstances would he have anything to do with them. In spite of, or perhaps because of, the popularity of the Exodus Movement Thutmose grew even more stubborn at every attempt to negotiate. Moses declared that anything unpleasant that now happened was the king’s responsibility. He had had his chance to be reasonable but there was no hope for him now.

During this time of impasse Moses fine-tuned his plans for the regulating of the new nation. Their God would be THE ALMIGHTY. The name of Jah Ho Hwey was to be revered above all other names. It was to be considered so scared that it could not be even mentioned except in very special circumstances. It was a name that only the most initiated could conjure with. At such times this name would be a source of special powers needed to preserve or prosper His People. It became the special preserve of the Priesthood that was later set up and never put into writing in any Hebrew literature.

He devised a worship system based on what he had learned in Egypt. The temple was to be the centre of this worship and it was a copy of the temples that had been the centre of Egyptian worship for

Page 334

many centuries. The Most Holy Place was in the form of a perfect cube unlit from outside. The glory of Amon, the creator, lit this chamber so it did not even need artificial light. Moses replaced Amon with Jah Ho Hwey. The Holy Place was in the form of a double cube lying on its side. In this chamber was conducted the principal business of the temple. This chamber was not opened to the public in general. Here sins were forgiven and people were blessed for special occasions. The numerous cleansing ceremonies of the Egyptians were adapted to use in a travelling situation, to be adapted again when the tribes settled in their new land. These public ceremonies were carried out in the temple courtyard. This custom was carried over into the system devised by Moses.

The Egyptians were not a pastoral people so their sacrifices were of small animals and produce of the field. Moses upgraded this to suit the pastoral lifestyle of the Hebrews. Large animals such as sheep, goats and cattle became the sacrificial objects. He instituted a priesthood to administer these religious activities and a tithing system to maintain the whole temple economy.

From the Egyptians he took the seven-day week as a small unit of extended time. This was one quarter of the Moon phase. He also took with him the twelve-month year of the Egyptians. This new calendar was to start from the day of the release from Egypt. That was to be the first day of the first year of Israel as a nation. From then on for all time the passage of the seasons has been calculated by them from that date. It has become a celebration of deliverance from a bondage that was more perceived than real.

A departure date was set. It was to be on the thirteenth day of the month of Nisam. All were to be ready on the tenth day of the month, ready to move at a moment’s notice to the assembly point in their core city of Succouth. From there they were to move as one mighty stream out of the delta country and into the northern Sinai as the first leg of their journey to Palestine. Each family was to equip itself with all that it would need to travel for many months through hostile territory. Mutton was to be prepared and bundled for carrying. All bread was to be unleavened to prevent it from souring on the long journey under the desert sun. All stock were to be readied for travelling. All moveable objects were to be obtained as payments or gifts from Egyptian friends and secured against loss during the long trek.

Page 335

When word came back to the executive committee that all of the people were ready to move at short notice they made their final and most effective move against the stubborn king.

Aaron sent a message to Thutmose. In it he stated that he would not negotiate, as the king had no desire to do so. If no permission to move was received by him by the time that the sun set on the Twelfth Day of the month his first born son would die that night at midnight. Also the first born son of every significant family in Egypt would die with him. The king defied them. He did not believe that they could carry out this threat. Besides, he was determined that he would not be intimidated by any threats that came from them. After all, they were coming only from his crazy old father. What could he do? He was about to find out.

Even so, he did consult his maggi to see if they could prevent such a spell. They assured him that they were working on it but could not give him any guarantee. Undeterred by this situation Thutmose sent a challenge to Aaron. “If you carry out this threat you will not live to see the next morning. If you do manage to get away you will be pursued to the farthest reaches of the empire and destroyed.�

Aaron ignored this threat. A message was sent to the whole Israeli people to prepare for departure before the sun would rise on the morning of the thirteenth of the month Nisam. Messages were sent all over Egypt to inform the people of what they could expect. Each family took unto itself a lamb to be kept for slaying for fresh meat on the night of the twelfth. The blood of that lamb was to be sprinkled on the doorposts and lintels of each main doorway as a symbol of their belief in the ultimate permission to move. Egyptian friends were urged to follow this example of they wished to be considered a part of the Movement.

No one in any Israeli home slept that night. They were all either too anxious or too excited to sleep. Fathers paced the floor and constantly checked to see that they had made the correct sign on their doorposts. They had no guarantee that they would be exempt from the visitation on the Egyptians.

Unbeknown to the people of Israel the vast army of domestic servants serving Egyptian nobility had been organized for this very purpose. Under the tutorage of Jethro Moses had learned the formula for the potion that was administered to a king at his coronation. In every Noble household one servant was entrusted

Page 336

with the task of administering this potion to the first born son of the house at a time to be determined. That day the word went out that at the appropriate time the potion was to be given so that it would take effect on the stroke of midnight.

Neither did the first families of Egypt sleep. Not from excitement but from fear of the unknown. Thutmose II was no exception. He gathered his family around him in the palace. The son born to his first wife when he was a young man with a bright and untrammeled future before him was summoned to be there. Also with him was the son born to his favourite concubine, Isise, only ten years previously. The first son, Moseena, was in the first bloom of manhood having had fifteen summers pass over his head. His mother was there with him. She had insisted on being there.

Thutmose had requested that she stay in her own quarters but her female intuition told her that the summons to the palace was for some event of prime importance, in spite of Thutmose’s attempt to play down any such notion. Hatshepsut had also insisted on being present in this family gathering. She was fully aware of the threat but she had no sons apart from Thutmose himself and she did not believe that the threat would include him for he had to stay alive to be punished. Her only other child was the girl Neferere sired by Moses. She also was interested in testing the validity of the threat made by this nemesis from Midian that had turned out to be her lost husband. What would such a primitive place have that Egypt had not? The maggi were also there by royal summons to do what they could to protect the king and his family. They assured him that they still could give no guarantee.

Thutmose was unaware that the personal servant to his son was a niece of Miriam, totally committed to ‘The Cause’. He had seen to it that Moseena had had a dose of the potion as his ‘nightcap’ drink before retiring for the night. Having administered the drug this servant quietly left the Palace as did all of the other servants, throughout Memphis, entrusted with this mission.

As the candles on the bureaus burned through their timing rings one by one the hour of midnight approached inexorably. The king’s fear and anxiety gnawed at his heart. He could not sit still. He paced the ceramic tiles of the floor of this family chamber in fear and trembling. His sons had not been told of the nature of the impending threat. Although they sensed that there was something unusual and important afoot. Moseena noticed the agitation of this

Page 337

father and questioned him about it. “Father.” He said. “What is with all this pacing to and fro? Something is definitely worrying you. Surely you can tell me what it is? At fifteen summers I am almost a man and I can see that something is terribly wrong. If I know what it is I can perhaps help to solve the problem. If it is something I have done to displease you then I have a right to know so that I can make amends.”

“My son. It is nothing that you have done. Nothing at all. I am afraid that it is something that I have done, or not done, rather. I may have been very foolish, to say the least. I don’t know yet.

Events which may occur this night will, before it is over, show whether or not I have done rightly.”

“What is it, Father. Surely you can tell me what it is that you have done, especially as it seems to concern me.”

“That I can not. You will know soon enough, perhaps. If I have been terribly wrong in my decision you will know soon enough. If I have not I would rather you did not know what could have happened. At least at this present time. Perhaps at some time in the future it may be right for you to know what had or had not happened this night. If the Gods spare us both.”

“What have the Gods to do with this?”

“Wait and see.” Was the last word that the prince was able to get out of his father.

In the palace the flames of the time marking candles approached the midnight hour. The king became agitated. He pacing took on a frenzy that seemed inappropriate to the total calm that otherwise seemed to prevail in that chamber. His eyes kept focusing on the lowering rim of unmelted wax of each candle. He gazed intently and longingly at his eldest son. The boy had accepted the inevitable and had relaxed on a convenient couch to take a dispassionate view of the event, whatever it might be. He reclined alive and well on the gold trimmed divan that he had chosen to relax on. His mother sat nearby on another couch, not sure whether she should join the agitated father or the calm and unruffled son. The flame burned lower. The melted wax under the wick dripped over the edge of the still solid wax and spilled across the midnight mark. The mark filled with wax and almost disappeared under the melted wax sliding over it. Moseena was still reclining calmly on his divan and his

Page 338

mother had visibly begun to relax with him. The king heaved a mighty sigh of relief. But it was short lived.

The sigh had hardly left his lips when he saw his son’s head drop onto his breast and his body slump to the seat of the divan then slowly slide off its edge and onto the floor. A heart-piercing scream filled the vast chamber, ricocheted from wall to wall and down from its high ceiling as the boy’s mother realized instantly what had happened. The king called curses down from the highest heaven and up from the lowest hell on to the head of his Heqa Kasut father and all his past and future generations for centuries to come. The boy’s mother, in her turn, called down all the curses she could name from all the Egyptian Gods on top the head of this man. Her husband had in his stubbornness caused the death of her son and also destroyed her right to be the mother of the next king. She could never forgive him this outrage.

Hatshepsut herself continued to recline on her divan a little puzzled.

She was the first born of her mother. Why was she still alive? It must have been only sons who were cursed for her eldest child was a daughter. Her eldest son was the man who had just witnessed the sudden death of his first born son. Perhaps the visitation had been meant only for the present generation. Perhaps it was only the first born son of the king that was doomed. Neferere was the daughter of Moses so she was probably exempt as all the rest of his people had been throughout his dreadful campaign of his. She had never known that she was the first born of Moses and therefore exempt in any case. Whatever the reason she was not prepared to worry about it.

She was still alive and that was all that mattered.

When the first paroxysm of his grief had passed but while still in a high state of agitation Thutmose called for a horse and chariot and personally rushed to the house of Aaron where he called out to anyone who would listen.

“Get out. Get out the lot of you. Get out of this country and do not ever come back. If you do you will be slaughtered on the border.”

He then returned to his palace to nurse his grief and attend to the proper burial arrangements for his precious son. A full three days passed before he had any control over his emotions.

The message was relayed immediately to all units under the control of the Exodus Movement. A vast army of sixty thousand people gathered in Memphis and poured out of the city gates like a great

Page 339

flood on the road to Succouth. They were led by Aaron and Moses.

Miriam and Heo had gone to Tanis and Avaris a few days before and they led forty thousand people out from those cities toward the meeting place. The Hebrews in Succouth, forty one thousand strong had gathered, under the command of Joshua the son of Nun, on the left bank of the delta branch that flowed into the Red Sea. Their task was to prepare the way of the crossings for the hordes expected from Memphis. The existing crossings had to be improved and new ones constructed to handle the great throngs of people who would be crossing in haste. It was essential that no time should be wasted for the king’s word was not trusted. He had changed his mind too many times for the people to have any confidence that he would not change it this time.

Several miles down river from the crossing at Succouth, soon after passing the tiny village of Etham, the river narrowed and ran between slightly higher banks. Here Nun constructed two floating bridges. These were made by tying together enough boats side by side with their bows facing upstream to span its breadth. One of these bridges was made by using his own boats, and the other from boats of his colleagues who were in this affair with him.

Each bridge consisted of ten boats anchored abreast across the stream. Their anchor ropes kept them steadily facing upstream against the slowly flowing current. Ropes were fastened from the outer boats to the shore to keep them in line. Ropes were strung from boat to boat to keep them each steadily in place. Great planks were suspended from each bank to the boat nearest to it. Other planks were lashed from boat to boat so that a plank roadway was constructed from bank to bank. Each boat was one hundred feet long so the bridge width was sixty feet (35 Cubits). Wide enough for at least twenty people to cross abreast with the few animals the city people could be expected to have with them. The length of each bridge was a little over one hundred feet from ‘end to end’, with a ramp upward to meet the ramp cut into the bank to lessen the incline of approach and exit.. That meant that at any one time there would be 800 people supported by those ten boats. This was not excessive as each boat alone was capable of holding up to 150 hundred people.

They were unsteady bridges as bridges go but they were not meant to last any longer than it would take for the sixty thousand people from Memphis to cross over. This was calculated to be about twenty-five hours, allowing for a minor hitch every so often. Since

Page 340

many were expected to cross on the bridge at Succouth itself it was expected that the whole crossing would certainly take no longer than one day. All the people coming from the Delta proper would assemble on the northern bank of the river and join together to move off into the distance.

After the successful crossing of the river it was planned for all to move off together, a mighty flood of people leaving forever what had been their home for three centuries.

The first hint of the arrival of the crowds from Memphis was a dust cloud on the western horizon. This urged the workmen putting the finishing touches to the bridges to hasten to finish in time. As the last ropes were being secured in place much of the great crowd was seen to break off to the left to cross the river at the Succouth where there was only one bridge but two fords. The people with cattle and other animals were directed to the fords to eliminate the delay that would be caused by getting cattle to cross rickety bridges.

As the cloud of dust approached the city the murmur of the crowds of people stirring it could be heard. Then, as it came closer the forms of people could be seen, some were leading pack animals and others were pulling or pushing carts laden with their goods and chattels that they felt were too precious to be left behind. As the last ropes were tightened on the bridges of boats and the last checking of the anchor ropes completed the ushers could be seen directing those people with animals toward the crossings at Succouth. The rest came on toward Etham. As the crowds approached these makeshift bridges guides were sent to show them how to negotiate them.

As the first fugitives placed their feet on the planks leading to the boats a rousing cheer swelled from the thousands of throats of the spectators as they waited their turn to cross. All the wild life of the river for a mile either way was startled by this noise. The water birds whirled into the air. The water rats and voles ducked into their little burrows to avoid what appeared to them to be eminent danger.

The noise did not subside greatly for there was much excitement as the people negotiated this unfamiliar and unsteady platform that bobbed up and down to every step. When people are excited they make lots of noise.

Not everyone crossed by the bridges. Those too impatient to wait their turn on the planks and being unencumbered by loads of goods plunged into the stream and crossed between the bridges. More than

Page 341

half the journey had to by swimming for it was only near the banks that the water was shallow enough to wade through. Even then the people thus crossing were most of the time in water level with their chests.

The first to cross put their feet on the planks, as the sun was half way to its zenith. By the time that the sun was about to set less than a third of the throng had crossed the river. Torches were lit to show the way and the twinkling of these little lights were as little stars come down from heaven to guide the people across. The action did not stop all night. Those who had crossed during the day found a place to rest while the rest of the hordes completed their crossing.

Many of those waiting to cross took short naps and milled about till they too were able to cross.

The people who had come from Tanis and Avaris had been camping along the banks of the stream. These now busied themselves at striking their tents and packing away their goods ready for the long trek that they knew would be before them when all those from Memphis were safely on the left, or north, bank. Pack animals were loaded and tethered to their lead reins. Families gathered in groups and fitted themselves into ranks. They were arranged twenty people abreast in lines thousands long.

As the sun approached its zenith on the second day of the crossing all were ready to advance toward the northeast and away from Egypt. At last the time had come for the command to “MOVE OUT.�

Page 342

CHAPTER XX MASS MOVEMENT The command to move out had hardly left the lips of a thousand section commanders following the orders of Joshua, the commander in chief, when an outrider pointed toward Memphis and called out in alarm. “Look. Over there.� With his hand outstretched to indicate where the alarm came from. Even as he finished calling out the thunder of approaching cavalry could be heard.

Closely gazing at the approaching army the lookouts could see the galloping horses leading the dust cloud that their hooves raised from the hard earth.

Beneath the thunder of the hooves could be heard the rumble of the chariot wheels of the support armour closely following the galloping horses. This was the cavalry coming to head off the people before they could get too far away. The infantry could be expected to be following. Fortunately the pursuing cavalry was on the south side of the river and their prey on the north. Their commander, Thutmos himself, had not followed the curve of the river but had cut straight across the country from Memphis, through the cultivated fields of the thirteenth Nome and across the dry sandy desert that bordered it.

They had travelled long and hard. The horses would be fatigued after such a long, hard and forced gallop. Even though they most likely rested over night at Gihon, a small fortified village on the edge of the desert and would thus have travelled only from there that morning.

Thutmose had changed his mind again. His word meant nothing to him. He no doubt believed that he had grounds for such action for he could with some credibility claim that he had been coerced into allowing the departure of the Heqa Kasut by the use of threats and intimidation. He had left his move a little late for the people were now assembled on the north bank of the river while his four hundred horsemen and two hundred chariots, the vanguard of the army following was on the south bank and chariots are notorious for their lack of buoyancy. The king was so anxious to get these people back that he led the chariot charge personally. He was so anxious to pursue these escapees that he left the Palace before his son recovered from the drug. He was never to know that his son had not really died but been drugged temporarily as he was when he, himself, was crowned as king of all Egypt

Page 343

Soon after the first sighting and the alarm being given the cavalry was seen to be approaching the regular crossing at Succouth. As they approached the spot where this bridge had spanned this river for many years they were seen to slow their rate of advance. It must have been obvious to their leaders that there were no people on this southern bank. It would be folly to try to take two hundred chariots across the narrow commercial bridge even if it had been still there.

Joshua had foreseen such a possibility although he had kept it to himself and the few officers he had under his direct command.

These he had ordered to destroy that bridge the moment that the last Israeli had crossed it. This stage of the crossing had ended some time before the far greater multitude had finished crossing by the bridge of boats. The bridge was well down and the people moved from there by the time that Thutmose and his cavalry arrived at where the bridge had been. Signaled to halt the whole cavalcade paused while Thutmose assessed the situation.

Ranged along the far bank he saw lines of hundreds of bowmen ready to repulse any attempt by the cavalry to wade their horses across the fords. He realised that the empty landscape indicated that the people that he was after had left the scene and must be downstream for that was the direction they must take to get out of the country.

Very few moments were taken in assessing the situation and devising a strategy. At the order of Thutmose the chariots wheeled toward the East and the cavalry followed.

As the cavalry came close enough to the fleeing Israelis, now on the riverbank where the temporary bridges spanned the stream, they were able pick out the individual chariots. The king could be plainly seen to be at the head of the regiment. His chariot was decorated with his own personal flag and bunting. He had two outriders on either side and following behind was the main body galloping twenty abreast. Each chariot had its bowman ready to fire his missiles when close enough for them to be effective.

The agitators and complainers who seemed to be always with the Israelis again raised howls. At the sight of the cavalry on the other side of the river they cried loudly to whoever would listen to them.

“Look at what you’ve done to us now. We’ll all be killed. This madman knows no limits. We should never have left Egypt. We were safe there. Take us back now before these chariots get in amongst us and cut us all to pieces”.

Page 344

Joshua took not one bit notice of these howlers. He had provided for such an emergency, if such an expected event can be called so.

He had no faith in Thutmose’s promise to not pursue them. He silently ordered the men who had been assigned to that duty to sneak quietly into the water from either bank of the stream. They had already been told what they should do so they needed no further orders. No shouted command was needed for these men had been waiting for the hand signal that would alert them to act.

They acted. All eighteen of them, nine to each bridge of boats, moved so swiftly and silently that no one knew that they had done anything.

Thutmose observed that the bridges of boats were still intact making a crossing over the gently flowing waters. He approached them with his cavalry. Where forty people could cross abreast he saw a highway for ten chariots abreast. All that he could see on the other side of the river was a great mass of unarmed civilians moving along the bank and a viable bridge across the river, for his army. He had ordered an army of two thousand men to follow him at a forced march. However, this force would be another day getting to him.

He would turn this rabble back himself and meet his reserve army in triumph on the road to back Memphis. He would make sure that his captives all returned to where they came from. They would be no match for his cavalry. But, first he had to cross on that temporary structure. He saw no great difficulty there. Horses are flighty creatures but their drivers could manage them. It appeared to him that the Israelis had not had time to dismantle these bridges of boats so he would take advantage of them to cross the stream. All this raced through his mind as he paused his phalanx of chariots and horsemen at the shore. He sent orders back to the commanders to reduce each line abreast to ten. Each line was to be then parted into fives and each five allotted a commander. Behind each line of chariots was to be a line of horsemen. This manouvre took some time and when it was completed he noticed that the fugitives across the river where still were they had been when he first arrived. He wondered about that but did not dwell on it or think it very significant. He now had the five abreast that he calculated would cross easily on each bridge.

Thutmose advanced toward the planks that led to a boat against the southern bank. He had some trouble getting his horse to put his feet on the unsteady platform that it made. The driver alighted from the chariot and led it onto the planks. The two outriders on each side

Page 345

followed the king. After him came the first line of cavalry followed by another line of chariots, each with its driver and two archers.

Each driver had to lead his horse on to the bridge. However, they did make progress and before long there were eight rows of chariots and six rows of cavalry on the two bridges and others coming on behind. Thus each bridge bore the weight of many chariots, the horses pulling them and men on them, together with excited horses and their riders. All were more intent on maintaining some balance on the unstable surfaces than attacking what was ahead of them.

As he approached the northern bank the king noticed the tips of bows projecting above the heads of the people assembled on the bank. They were still not moving off and were turned to watch his movements. He wondered why those bowmen behind the people had not fired at him as he crossed the bridge. He believed that they were afraid to shoot. That would make it that much easier for him although it did raise in his mind the query as to where they obtained such weaponry. He had forgotten that it was these very people who had introduced bows and arrows to the Egyptians when they first came into the country three centuries before. On the platform of each chariot stood two archers, the best that Egypt could produce.

They would soon make short work of these amateurs hiding behind the ranks of wandering people. He envisaged his troops advancing toward them and the others from the other bridge making a pincer movement against the main body of people before him. The rest would scatter and the chariots left on the south bank would follow him and gather all the people together for the return to Egypt As a preliminary move he ordered the archers on the bridge to shoot at the Israelis. However the range was greater than he saw at first glance and the arrows wafted to the ground at the feet of the assembled crowd. The people calmly picked them up and passed them back to their own archers at their rear. The king moved forward expecting that the next few steps that his horse would take would get him to the North bank and achieve his object. Now was the time to let off another shower of arrows. But no! There was some strange thing happening?

First there was a shower of arrows fired above the heads of the Israeli people by the archers behind them. These were well aimed for many a horse shied with an arrow in its chest. Several soldiers fell when arrows pierced chinks in their armour. Thutmose looked upstream to see how his flank was progressing and saw to his horror that that particular bridge was not where it should have been. It was

Page 346

close to his one and about to impact on it. At that moment of impact the planks leading to the edge of the north bank ramp, from his own bridge, were seen to be no longer at right angles to it but were moving at an ever increasing angle and were slipping from the top.

He looked behind and the planks leading from the south bank were behaving in the same fashion. The shower of arrows was the signal for the last anchor rope to be cut and the last guy rope to be loosed on the most upstream bridge. Before the bridge under the feet of Thutmose could move away on the current the upstream bridge had collided with it. As it did so the last rope holding the one on which he was stranded came adrift and both bridges coursed downstream toward the open sea many miles away.

The king now had almost a hundred chariots and many panicky horses on the bridges. These were of no use now that the bridges were floating free. The hundreds odd left behind on the south bank were uselessly hovering within call.

The men who had been detailed by Joshua had done their work well.

The anchor ropes of the boats had all been cut and the fastening of the planks attached to the banks had all been undone to the timing calculated by Joshua. As the upstream bridge was about to collide with the next one down its last ropes were severed and the whole lot went floating off down the river. There was now no hope of loosing off of any Egyptian arrows for the stability of their platforms was now non-existent. Besides that the drivers and soldiers were too busy trying to calm the panic that now motivated the horses.

In the moments that he was able to glance at the bank of the river that had been his aim and still hopefully was, Thutmose saw that the people were moving downstream also, at the same speed as the current was carrying the freed boats. This was a strategic move by Joshua to keep the archers hidden from the Egyptians as they floated down the river as he knew that they must the moment that the last anchor rope was cut and the last mooring rope untied.

As a last resort Thutmose ordered all the archers on the bridges to fire all that they could, volley after volley into the ranks of the moving people. Some few in the ranks close to the bank were killed or wounded but most arrows went wild because of the rocking of the platform from which they were firing. Greatly increased showers of arrows, that the Israeli archers retaliated with, soon put a stop to the activities of the Egyptian archers.

By this time the horses were screaming in their ever-increasing panic as the rocking of their support was increased by their own

Page 347

stamping and rearing.

Drivers and soldiers were trampled underfoot. The voice of the king could be heard by the people on the bank as he shouted for order. He was wasting his breath for there was no one able to take any notice of him. The cavalry on the south bank was powerless to give any aid. All that they could do was to follow the progress of the whole sorry mess as it floated with the current rapidly increasing in speed as it followed the outgoing tide towards its mouth.

At the next left bend in the river the corner of the huge raft of boats struck the right bank. This caused the whole mess to skew severely and slowly cartwheel along the river further damaging itself as it rolled along the unyielding earth and rocks.

This further destablised the structure. Another mile downstream the rickety raft, with its panicking horses and struggling men aboard, struck the left bank and reversed it wheeling motion; bring the time of total disintegration nearer.

The leading Israeli groups moved forward and others slowed down so that a break occurred in their ranks. This was rapidly filled by their archers moving forward toward the riverbank. The soldiers on the floating mass were now clear and captive targets for these archers who had no mercy in their souls for the men at whom they were shooting. Horses and men were both prime targets. It was not only the archers that exacted a terrible toll on these stranded soldiers. The panic of the horses and the efforts of their drivers to subdue them led to many of them falling into the water and dragging the men in with them. Some of the archers of the cavalry on the south bank attempted to shoot at the Israelis but even in the narrow part where the whole thing began the arrows fell short of their objects. As the river widened down stream any arrows from the south bank would fall among their own troops so from that point on they could only watch and follow in the hope of a chance to do something later.

The king had been in the vanguard of the attack and was one of the first of the army to meet his doom on this floating mass of confusion.

From this point on the stream flowed toward the south east but as the object of the Israeli advance was north and east this vast phalanx of people began to move away from the riverbank. Their soldiers did not follow them. They continued to move along the bank shooting at anything that moved on the heap of debris that the boats had now become. This pile slowly reduced in size and content as

Page 348

men and horses, both dead and alive toppled from its unstable and sloping surfaces into the river to sink or to drown. Long before this conglomeration reached the mouth of the river it had broken up completely and all that was left of it were scattered pieces of flotsam polluting the once clear stream.

An attempt was made to find the body of the king for appropriate burial with full royal honours. Corpses washed up on the southern bank of the stream were carefully examined under watchful eyes of Joshua’s troops on the northern bank. The Egyptians, without boats, were unable to cross the water, but were reluctant to return home without the body of their king. Joshua realised what the Egyptians were attempting and directed some of his men to scour the banks for the royal body.

They were more successful than the Egyptians. Toward evening they found the royal body floating in the shallow water under the northern bank.

Joshua took this opportunity to extract a treaty from the pursuers.

From the multitude he commandeered a small boat. In this he sent a small delegation to the southern bank. Waving a white flag of truce the called out to the Egyptians. “If you want the body of your king, we can give it to you,” Back came the response. “Did you kill him?”

“NO We did not. We found the body floating under our bank. It is of no use to us. We do not seek revenge. All that we desire is to be allowed to depart in peace. Call your commander.”

“Wait while I do so.”

This officer sent a messenger to the battalion commander toward the rear of what was left of the attacking force. He came trotting up on his white steed.

He demanded. :”What is this? Have these rebels the affronter to demand something of us? All that we require of them is surrender and return to Egypt.”

“Sir! With all due respect, we have no way of forcing them to do anything. They have the body of the king. They are prepared to do a deal for it return to us for ceremonial entombment at home.”

“We do not deal with rebels. We will take the body in our own good time.”

“How, Sir|? There are thousands of them, all fully armed still and on the other side of a mighty river. We have no means of crossing and if we did what could the few hundred left do to force the recovery of the royal body?”

Page 349

“The river is shallow here and not so fast flowing as further upstream so that we have a chance of riding our horses across. Their archers would be no match for men on horses,” “Sir. Just look at the ranks lined along the bank. What hope would our troops have of getting safely across the shallows? The few chariots that are left would bog down in the soft sand of the shoals and be standing targets for the archers. Do you know who the commander is?”

“Some untrained Heqa Kasut, no doubt.”

“Not so, Sir. He was a commander in the Palace guard, under the king himself.”

“A trusted soldier of the realm?”

“I am afraid so, Sir.” “He would not lack strategic expertise. Looks as though we have no alternative but to make a deal.”

“Just so, Sir. What shall I tell these messengers from our back up?”

“Where are these ‘envoys’?”

“Under the bank, Sir. Awaiting your decision.”

“What do they want?”

“Guaranteed safe passage from the country.”

“Hmm. We can not stop them now and by the time that reinforcements arrive they will be gone further away. Besides, your assessment is correct. How would a thousand men manage any better than us in wading a river against determined defending archers? Without the king to lead there would be little enthusiasm to obey orders against those odds. A guarantee against some thing that we can not do will not impugn our honour. I will talk. How do I get to them?”

“They have a boat under the bank with space to accommodate you and two witnesses. They will take you across the river to negotiate with the commander of their army.”

“OK. I’ll take you and another of your choosing.”

“Yes, Sir.” A guard of four men escorted this mission to the waiting boat. As they were about to board the boat the scouts for the reinforcements came to the bank and hailed the commander. “Colonel. Sir. The reinforcements detailed by his Majesty are but two hours behind us.

What are your orders for our deployment?”

“Sargeant. Take this message back to your general. The King is dead, defeated in battle. There is nothing that you can do to retrieve the situation. Tell your general, also that my orders are to make

Page 350

camp and await my return. I am about to negotiate with the Israelis and I will send him a message regarding further action on my return.”

With that the trio stepped carefully down the rough edges of the river bank and into the boat on to the northern bank where Joshua and his escort were awaiting them, at place where the bank sloped gently into the water.

The Egyptian colonel looked up as he approached the meeting place and his eyes popped open in amazement.

He exclaimed involuntarily, in wonderment. “I know that man well.”

The prow of the boat was beached on the sloping bank and Joshua strode down to meet it. He held out his hand to greet his guest, with a smile of recognition on his face.

“I do not believe this.” Exclaimed Colonel Necco.

“You had better.” Gesturing to his right Joshua replied “You know General Heotept. He is one of us and has been for some years.

Surprised?”

“Surprised is an understatement. I am flabbergasted. I served with you on several campaigns in defense of our country. I remember General Heo as commander of the kings Palace guard and director of the Nation’s security services. No wonder that your strategies have been so secret and successful. You were trained by the best of the best. So; that is how far this conspiracy has penetrated Egypt.

Right to the very top. You are both traitors to the realm and I do not negotiate with traitors. I must return to my men. Reinforcements are arriving and will be here within the hour. We will cross the river with these fresh troops and take the body of our king at our pleasure.”

“Brave words, Colonel Necco. But you must be aware that that is just not possible. Your men will be at the end of their forced march of several days so will not have the energy to even transport themselves across the river , let alone attack us afterwards. We will fade away and take the body of Thutmose with us. He is our Great Leader’s son, after all, so he has as much right to the body as you.

More so actually.”

“Do you mean to say………..”

“What? Do I mean to say.”

“Thutmose father was Thutmose the first and he died at an assassin’s hand, ten years ago Ah! So we have been led to believe.”

Page 351

“I see you now have doubts, many did at the time but it was convenient for all to believe that rather than that he had fled the country. We found, him, or rather; Heo here did, and brought him back, as a symbol, to inspire the people to move out. That we have done and we are determined to finish the job. If you want the body for a royal burial you will have to negotiate our freedom.”

“You do not give me much choice.”

“Did this Thut ever give us any? He twisted and turned. Negotiated a treaty and then abrogated it even before the ink was dry on the parchment. He virtually dug his own grave by his dishonesty and chicanery. He deserved to die. His father has actually disowned him because of his treachery and is quite happy for you to have the body.

He has no use for it. Are you now prepared to negotiate our freedom from pursuit?”

“I have no real authority to negotiate on behalf of my country.”

“You know better than that. All above you on the echelon of command are dead so, you now are in authority.”

“You want this in writing?”

“Of course. I trust you as a man of your word for more than I do your late monarch. The papers have already been prepared. They are ready for your perusal and signing.”

“You were confident of the outcome of this little conference.”

“Wouldn’t you be in my position?”

“You have me there I am afraid.”

“Right. Sign, and you will be free to go with the body of the late unlamented Thut II.” “Where are the papers and the brush?”

“Up in m command tent. If you do not mind accompanying me there to complete our conversation.”

“Lead on.”

In another hour Colonel Necco was back on the surface of the river being ferried back to his own lines, with the body of his king to be returned to Memphis, embalmed and entombed with royal honours. .There would be no further pursuit of the fugitives until the chain of command was re-established. It would be up to Hatshepsut, Thut’s mother, and now ruler in her own right in Egypt, to decide whether to pursue the escapees or leave them be. Thut’s son, his successor, was only ten years of age. Too young to rule his mother, Hatshepsut, did not have him proclaimed king with herself as regent.

She reigned in her own right as Pharaoh. This she did until he came

Page 352

of age. He still did not rule. While she lived he was never more than co-ruler with his mother as Pharaoh. Only for the last few years of his life did he rule as Pharaoh Thutmose III over a vast empire that stretched from Syria to Nubia and as far east as the borders of Persia.

Page 353

Chapter XXI ON THE HOME STRETCH Once the vast host of escapees was assured that the Egyptians would no longer pursue them they camped for several days to consolidate their enterprise. During this time Miriam led the celebrations and led the joyful dancing that was part of the festivities.

From there the Israeli people wandered throughout the area of the Sinai Peninsular for several years until they came to the border of Canaan. During this time Jethro joined the multitude and brought with him Ziphora and her two sons to join with them. While with the people Jethro gave advice on administering such a vast throng, based on the original tribal sources of the population.

Joshua was fully occupied defending the vast throng from predators, bandits who infested most of those remote regions and the local tribal areas that they would be moving through. Miriam was feeling her age after the tremendous tresses she had endured over the preceding ten year. Moses did have administrative experience from his time as ruler of a great nation. He was elected by the Exodus committee to be the president of this embryonic nation.

The names of the original twelve sons of Jacob were still revered by the people who well knew from which son they had descended.

From this point in history Israelis have carefully traced their individual descent on a tribal basis.

Ten of these tribes have disappeared from the scene over the passing millennia and all now in existence are descended from the two tribes of Judah and Levi. The word Judah has, over the years been shortened so that Israelis are referred to as Jews.

Before going in to ‘claim’ the ‘Promised Land’ they encamped, outside of the border, just south of the city of Lachish and Moses sent in a team of men to ‘spy out the land’.

This team returned several weeks later to report that the land was extremely fertile and worth having, but, all except Joshua declared that the inhabitants would be very difficult to overcome and doubted the wisdom of moving in. They lived in and near heavily walled cities that would be beyond Israeli’s resources to take. Joshua was

Page 354

all for taking the country as they had enough men to take one city at a time. Each conquest making the next more possible until over a few years they would occupy the whole of the country.

He was very keen to take in a team and establish a bridgehead as the first step toward further penetration.

“Besides.” He said. “Since God is with us none can withstand us!”

There was a great roar from the people assembled to great the returning heroes. “Let us go. The land is ours.”

However, Moses over ruled them all, saying. “The risk of losing many people in such continual waging of battle after battle is too great to take at this time. We will wait till a more opportune time to go and make our claims and from there spread throughout the land.”

Thus did Moses fail his people again for the last time. An opportunity to ‘go in’ never availed itself in his lifetime and it was left to Joshua, Moses’ nephew, to lead the Israeli People into Canaan across the lower Jordan River and occupy the country piece by piece over quite a number of years.

By the time that they did get to invading the land most of the older generation had died. In spite of a life time of dedication to getting her people out of Egypt Miriam, due to making the mistake of letting Moses finally have a say in the leadership, Never achieved the greatest dream of her life. She perished in the wildernesses of the Sinai as did her parents.

According to the record, Moses also perished on the threshold of the invasion so that it was Joshua the son of Moses older brother Nun who actually led the people as they advanced into Canann conquering one city after another till they occupied the whole land.

"THE WARRIOR PHARAOHS" P.H. Newbury LONDON 1180 FAYOUM OASIS now known as the Quatro depression was a significant population centre away from the Nile.

AVARIS was a port city on the right branch of the delta commenced in the later years of Heqa Kasut rule.

Page 355

ON

was ancient temple city dating from the old kingdom and was situated on the right bank just below the apex of the delta.

THEBES became the Great City of the New Kingdom.

AMON, the God of wind and air as well as being the Creator himself was housed in a. cubical room with no windows lit only by oil lamps. (the ante-room was a double cube on its side.)

He was the supreme official at all coronations, PRISONERS were taken from NUBIA, LIBYA, CAANAN, HURRIAN, MTTARNI and AMON. Pirates were captured from the Mediterranean.

BEARINGS were taken looking upstream. Thus the right bank was to the West and the left bank to the East.

JOURNEY TIMES. Three weeks from the Delta to the first cataracts Two weeks from the 1st to the 2nd cataract.

TRADE ROUTES. By sea from Delta to Byblos, Very ancient.

Overland through Sinai to Canaan and all points beyond.

HEQA KASUT Means 'foreign' Princes.' Infiltrated into Egypt from early 1700s.

They were allied with the KUSH, suppliers of gold, ivory, ostrich feathers, Negro slaves and dwarfs to Egypt, against

KAMOSE, the son of SEQENENNE. Kamose found this situation impossible and threatened to 'slit open the belly of the Asians.' and deliver Egypt from their domination. TETIAN was king of KUSH at that time.

Page 356

AVARIS was the provincial capital city of the Heqa Kasut. Was built at the mouth of the Pelusiae. The right branch of the Delta.

FIRST CANAANITE TEMPPLE was erected about 1720 by the Heqa Kasut who often destroyed Egyptian statues.

Heqa Kasut introduced horses and chariots to pull them. The Egyptians had used donkeys for pack work and riding.

They were bearded while the Egyptians were smooth skinned. Also, they introduced stronger bows made of wood and bone.

APOPHIS, the last H.K. king demanded that SEQUENENNE close his hippopotamus pool in Thebes as it was disturbing his sleep in Memphis, MEMPHIS had become the biggest city in Egypt.

KAMOSE employed Nubians and Medjayans as archers. They stood on the roofs of the boats to get a better view of the banks as they were attacking the H.K. The H.K. cities had a ramp built up inside their crenellated walls.

AHMOSE means 'The Moon is Born.'

QOSIER, or Tjav was the Red Sea port-opposite Thebes.

Incense was imported from PUNT, Lapis Lazuli from Afghanistan, Copper from Cyprus, Purple dye and woven cloth from Crete.

Egypt was the 'granary of the world' and had 'more gold than all the rest.'

AMENHOTEPT, or Amenophis, was a full time soldier who maintained a large standing army. He was C in C to AHMOSE, who willed to him the throne and a vizier controlled State Affairs.

Conscription to the army was centred in Thebes. Amenhotept set the STANDARD of AMON on the Euphrates and made an alliance with Babylon. The population of Egypt is estimated to have been about four million at that time.

Page 357

His Grand Vizier was named AMENAMHAT. PROPERTY RIGHTS usually descended from mother to daughter and the Queen also transmitted her divinity and could confer kingship.

NEFERTARI was sister to Ahmose and married Amenhotept.

He willed the throne to THUTMOSE I who was not his true son and of extremely doubtful royal heritage.

Some historians list him as ‘illegitimate’.

THUTMOSE I married a daughter of Nefertari and came to the throne at forty years of age. Her daughter, HATSHEPSUT, married to THUTMOSE II his son, after THUT I, her husband, disappeared THUTMOSE I was a general under Amenhotept. He destroyed the power of KUSH. He erected an obelisk at THEBES, Karnak, and his 'daughter and wife', Hatshepsut, another. He ruled from ALEPPO to SUDAN and used stone extensively in his building programme. His chief architect was highly skilled.

INENE. He consolidated the Empire.

THUTMOSE II had no son to Hatshepsut who had a daughter NEFERERRE. He had a son to his favourite concubine, ISIS. This son was only ten years of age when Thut died unexpectedly. (This son became Thutmose III) and he extended the Empire northward and southward.

THUTMOSE III, Son of Thutmose II, extended the Empire even further and under him it reached its greatest extent, He was free to travel far and wide as Hatshepsut was co-ruling Queen for the whole of her life after he came of age.

FATHER JOSEPH appears to have married the daughter of the High Priest of ON. Here was the most ancient and

Page 358

revered temple in Egypt and many generations of kings were crowned there.

HATSHEPSUT had herself crowned in ON as ruling queen after the death of Thut II. It was the centre of the Sun God, RE. He was considered by the Priests of ON as the SUPREME GOD, THE GREAT CREATOR GOD. WHY THE NUMBERS GIVEN IN THE RECORD ARE UNRELIABLE. It has been estimated by competent and relevant engineers that number of 3 million in the records would need 1500 tonnes of food each day. This would require two freight trains, each at least a mile long, to transport it to the people.

They would need 4000 tonnes of wood for cooking fires, Several more freight trains for the transport of this, each day.

Supply of the 11,000,000 gallons (44,000,000 litres) of water needed would require several tanker trains, each several miles long.

Each night of camping would require a 750 square mile of ground.

The possible 200,000 persons indicated in this story may have been able to live off the land, as it was much more productive then than it is today.

Certainly not the almost 3 million suggested in Genesis.

Page 359

Page 360